JP6513071B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to gaming machines such as ball and ball gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachinko machines") and rotating drum type gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachislot machines").

  Among gaming machines represented by pachinko machines and the like, there is known one equipped with a vibration motor that vibrates an effect button operable by a player (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2010-279530, A

However, in the effect operation unit described in Patent Document 1, the effect operation unit and the vibration source are separately provided, and how efficiently the vibration transmitted from the vibration source is transmitted to the player In terms of points, there was room for improvement.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently transmitting a vibration generated by a vibration source to a player.

The gaming machine according to [means 1] is
In a gaming machine provided with a main body frame, a door frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body frame, and a rendering operation unit provided in the door frame.
As the staging operation unit includes a first staging operation unit, and a second staging operation unit,
The second effect operation unit is
It is possible to turn by operation by the player, and in the initial state, a part thereof is positioned closer to the player than the first effect operation unit,
It is possible to vibrate the second effect operating unit, and includes a vibration source that moves according to an operation by the player to the second effect operating unit,
After rotating with the vibration source from the initial state, rotating with the vibration source to return to the initial state
It is a game machine characterized by.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of vibration source is transmitted efficiently vibration generating respect Yu technique's.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of a pachinko machine when the press operation part of a production operation unit is a raise position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine when the press operation part of a production operation unit is a raise position from the right front. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which made the door frame open from the main body frame, and made the main body frame open from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and was seen from the front upper, and (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the front lower. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and seen from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case of the ball feeding unit and the tamperproof member and seen from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (b) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled a handle unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the saucer unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the saucer base unit in a saucer unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit into every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit into every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit into every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in a saucer unit from the direction of movement of a production operation part button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit of a rendering operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation button unit and was seen from the front lower. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of a production operation ring and a rotational drive unit in the left view of a production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board | substrate in the top view which looked at the production operation unit from the press direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation section is at the raised position, (c) is a central pressing operation section of the pressing operation section It is a front view of a plate unit when pressing. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from front top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front lower. It is a front view of a door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery base unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery base unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit in the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit into every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit into every main structure, and was seen from back. It is the back sectional view which cut the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the front-back direction center of a delivery blade. (A) is a back sectional view which cut a dispensing device in the front-back direction center of a dispensing blade, when a ball extraction movable piece is an open state, (b) is a sectional view cut by the AA line in (a) . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full-tan ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit by main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit by main structure, and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of a pachinko machine which was cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from back. It is a block diagram which roughly shows the control structure of a pachinko machine. FIG. 102 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 102. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board which relays the electrical connection of the delivery control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 102 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 102. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram of a sound source built-in VDP periphery in a liquid crystal and sound control part. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 109 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 108. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control substrate and the peripheral control substrate. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit etc. of a payment control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 115 is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 114. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit. FIG. 6 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the output terminal of an external terminal board. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws a display area of the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a delivery control board from a main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a periphery control board from a main control board. FIG. 123 is a table illustrating continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. 122. FIG. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the delivery control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of main control side power activation. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of main control side power-on of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control part power-on. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of the payout control part power-on of FIG. 129 is a flowchart illustrating the payout control unit main processing and the processing when the power is turned on, following FIG. 129. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payment control part timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of rotation angle switch history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball look determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for a rental ball. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stock surveillance processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of payout ball look-up operation judgment setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ball ball operation setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of retry operation monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of inconsistency counter reset judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of error cancellation operation judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows signal processing (A) at the time of payout operation by ball lending, and input signal confirmation processing (A) from CR unit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of peripheral control part power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a periphery control part command reception interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power failure notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection abnormality determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of connection recovery processing. It is a timing chart explaining the timing which outputs a connection check signal to the INIT terminal of transmitter IC for upper dish side liquid crystal. It is a block diagram of 2nd Embodiment which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a circuit diagram showing an example of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in a game machine. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in a game machine of an embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in a game machine of an embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in a game machine of an embodiment. It is a figure showing the operation state of a magnetic sensor and each transistor in a tabular form. It is a figure showing the circuit composition when a plurality of sensor signal input parts respectively connected to each of a plurality of magnetic detection sensors were connected in parallel with a plurality of base terminals of a transistor of a detection circuit part. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 4) which arranged a detection circuit part of a magnetic sensor input circuit on a main control board. FIG. 18 is a circuit diagram showing another example (fifth embodiment) in which the detection circuit unit of the magnetic sensor input circuit is disposed on the main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing the example (example 6) which arranged the avoidance part of a magnetic sensor input circuit, and a detection circuit part in the main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 7) which arranged a voltage output part of a magnetic sensor input circuit, an avoidance part, and a detection circuit part in a main control board. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the basic composition of an electrical connection with a detection sensor part, a panel relay board, and a main control board. It is a front view which shows typically each example of the arrangement position in the game machine of a panel relay substrate and a main control substrate. It is a figure which shows the example of arrangement | positioning of the avoidance part unit with respect to a panel relay substrate or a main control substrate. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the vibration generation source in a game machine, and the example of arrangement | positioning of a panel relay board | substrate and a main control board. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the fundamental structure of an electrical connection about the peripheral control board, a drive board, a drive means, and the origin position detection sensor for detecting the origin position of a movable performance object. It is the front view which showed notionally the grouping of the several movable character for effects provided in the game machine, and the several movable character. It is a timing chart which shows an example in the case of performing recovery operation to the initial position of a plurality of movable roles belonging to the role group 01. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the fixed channel system as comparison object with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving the sound control by a fixed channel system. The relationship between the game state, the reproduction sound and the reproduction channel is shown. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving the sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure showing relation with a game state, reproduction sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area | region for AUTO group channel control provided in peripheral control RAM. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a search process of the free channel at the time of performing sound control at the time of defining only one AUTO group in an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern of sound control by each channel system or those combination. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table of the reproduction | regeneration channel in sound source control in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a free channel search process in, when performing control which outputs the sound of this embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a condition for selecting a channel for switching the output of the sound (stopping the reproduction of the sound) when the channel is not available at the time of the output of the new sound in the present embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the example of an effect for explaining sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows the timing to which a sound effect is reproduced, and (B) shows the channel where each sound effect is outputted. It is a figure which shows an example of the priority of the sound effect in the presentation example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of volume change of a sound effect in the first half change of this embodiment, (A) shows an output timing of a rendering effect, (B) shows a volume change of each rendering effect. It is a figure showing an example of screen composition of an effect in a modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table of the reproduction | regeneration channel in sound source control in the modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of volume change of a sound effect in the second half of a change of a modification of this embodiment, (A) shows an output timing of a rendering effect, (B) shows a volume change of each rendering effect. It is a block diagram showing an earth system of a game machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the delivery base unit provided with the earth circuit board from diagonally back. It is the perspective view which looked at the storage case part which stored the earth circuit board from the upper part. It is a circuit diagram of a grounding circuit board. It is a figure for demonstrating the fixed aspect of a ball | bowl tank. It is the perspective view which cut and opened a part of rotation operation part in the modification of this embodiment, and showed the inside. It is the top view which cut out a part of rotation operation part in the modification of this embodiment, and showed the inside.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, an entire configuration of a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the rendering operation unit is at the rising position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the rendering operation unit is at the rising position from the right front is there. Moreover, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in a state in which the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, A main unit frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable, and removably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, is made visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which the game ball B (see FIG. 90) is inserted.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame in which the shape in a front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated left and right and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 Attached to the upper surface left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of the outer frame upper member 30, the lower end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20; An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper end of the upper surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 and the main body The frame lower hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported coaxially, and the main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be able to open and close in a forward direction centering on the left side in a front view.

  In the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to partially cover the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound outputted to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-reversed and radiated forward to allow the player to hear a more deep bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 in which the gaming ball B is struck so as to be visible from the front side, stores the gaming ball B for hitting into the gaming area 5a, and stores the gaming It has a handle 182 operated by the player in order to drive the ball B into the game area 5a.
Moreover, the door frame 3 decorates the whole front of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with the effect operation unit 301 which can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. Thus, the player can participate in the effect, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can be entertained also by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-like main body frame base unit 500 which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2. The main frame upper hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner, the main frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforcing the main frame base unit 500, and the game The ball launch device 540 for hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, the payout base unit 550 which receives the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the game received by the payout base unit 550 A game unit attached to a main unit frame base 501, a payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 having a power supply substrate 630 and a payout control substrate 633, and A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of, and includes an outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main unit frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is performed by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape whose front is open, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated in the inside from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall so as to be openable and closable at the top and bottom of the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so as to close the opened front side. Is mounted so that it can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is played by the operation of the player, a front component 1000 which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and whose outer shape is substantially square in a front view, It is attached to the plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 A control unit 1500, an effect display device 1600 disposed at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game A table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes a back effect unit 3100 capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect according to the game state.

  In the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails which are in contact with the gaming ball B and are installed in a predetermined gauge array, and a predetermined benefit for the player by receiving or passing the gaming ball B ( For example, a general winning opening 2001 for giving a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B, a first starting opening 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 are provided. The obstacle nail is implanted on the front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  The player can drive the game ball B into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is received or passed to the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy the operation of hitting the handle 182.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state which changes by hitting the game ball B in the game area 5a, or the movable effect or the like by the back effect unit 3100 The player can be entertained by making the light emission effect.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of an outer frame of a pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front.
The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame in which the shape in a front view extends vertically.

  The outer frame 2 is, as shown in the figure, separated from the left and right and extending vertically, the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, and the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20. Outer frame upper member 30 connecting upper ends, outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of outer frame left assembly 10 and outer frame right assembly 20, and upper surface of outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper surface left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the lower outer frame assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 The sound outputted to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-reversed and emitted forward.

  The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 of the outer frame 2. The outer frame 2 coaxially rotatably supports the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be mounted so as to be openable and closable to the front centering on the left side in a front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend in the vertical direction, and are disposed apart from each other in the left and right direction. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 coaxially rotatably support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 has an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper right end of the outer frame left member 11. And the lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded material. The outer frame left member 11 is a portion from the side opposite to the concave portion 11a which is recessed to the right in a flat shape in the rear side portion of the left side in the front-rear direction divided into three, and the right side from the side opposite to the concave portion 11a The bulging part 11b bulging toward the direction and the hollow part 11c which penetrates the bulging part 11b up and down are provided. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and reduced in weight by the hollow portion 11c.

  Moreover, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically in the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed to be symmetrical with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion A flat plate-like pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b at the left side of 12a is provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 And in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, the screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the notch 30a of the left side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 is a flat horizontal fixing portion 13a extending horizontally and a flat upper horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion at the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat contact portion 13d which extends short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 13d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and brings the left side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b into contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, the screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 on the left end side, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c into the notch 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hooking member 25 attached to a lower portion of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded material. The outer frame right member 21 is provided with a recess 21a recessed leftwardly in a flat shape at the rear side of the right and left sides of the right and left sides from the front and back, and a left side from the side opposite to the recess 21a in the left side A bulging portion 21 b bulging in the direction, and a hollow portion 21 c penetrating the bulging portion 21 b up and down are provided. The outer frame right member 21 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the recessed portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and reduced in weight by the hollow portion 21c.

  Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically in the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side is formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side is formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion A flat plate-like pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of the right side 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 22a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and further front side And in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 brings the horizontal fixing portion 22a into contact with the lower surface of the right end of the outer frame upper member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout 30a of the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 is a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a extending horizontally, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion at the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b And a flat contact portion 23d extending short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 23d to abut on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b to the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state in which the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a is in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut the upper surface of the right end of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout 41a of the right side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

  The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are members to which an outer frame collar 653 of a locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later is hooked. The upper hooking member 24 extends vertically from the front side of the mounting portion 24a to a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21 And a flat plate-like locking piece portion 24b on which the outer frame collar 653 at the upper side is locked.

  The lower hooking member 25 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left from a flat mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 The flat-plate shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame collar 653 is locked and the insertion through which the lower outer frame collar 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the longitudinal direction substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 and has a constant thickness in the vertical direction and extends in the lateral direction. It is formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a which is recessed to the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the notches 30a at the left and right ends, respectively.

  Moreover, the outer frame upper member 30 is provided with the attachment step part 30b in which the upper surface and front surface were recessed rather than the general surface in the left side edge part. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front. The lower outer frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 spaced apart to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated left and right, and extends in the left and right direction; A box-shaped front curtain member 42 which is disposed forward of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain member 42 And a box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extending forwardly open, and a ball biting prevention formed on the left end of the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43 And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the longitudinal direction substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 and has a constant thickness in the vertical direction and extends in the lateral direction. It is formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with a notch 41a which is recessed to the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the notches 41a at the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and is provided with a recess 41 b into which the lower portion of the rear curtain plate member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41 b extends in the left and right direction, and extends from the rear position of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The recessed portion 41 b widens the volume of the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate formed by the front plate member 42 and the rear plate member 43 as much as possible.

  The front curtain plate member 42 is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height The entire rear side is open. The front curtain member 42 closes the open rear side with the rear curtain plate member 43 so as to cooperate with the rear curtain plate member 43 to be part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 The space 40a is formed. The front curtain member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front and back direction and extending in the left and right direction on the front surface near the right end.

  The rear curtain plate member 43 has a length in the left-right direction extending slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape whose front is open. The rear curtain plate member 43 cooperates with the front curtain plate member 42 to form the inner curtain plate space 40 a which becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 by attaching the front curtain plate member 42 to the front. The rear curtain plate member 43 has a cylindrical connection cylindrical portion 43a which extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward and communicates with the inner curtain plate space 40a at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylindrical portion 43 a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the rear curtain plate 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylindrical portion 43a has a length in the left-right direction which is about 1/3 the length of the entire rear curtain plate member 43, and a depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire rear curtain plate member 43. Is also formed slightly short. In the connection cylindrical portion 43a, a plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. In communication with the internal space of 620 a, an enclosure 624 is formed.

  In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the gaming ball B is retained at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the gaming ball B is held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is for preventing that it is pinched.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and is provided with a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the outer frame lower hinge member 60 to be described later may be involved; A first discharge port 44b opened upward at the left end of the left end 44a, and a second discharge port 44c opened upward on the right side of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a; An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the resting portion 44a, and an upper end projection projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and inclined to be positioned upward as the upper surface goes rearward And a unit 44e.

  The first discharge port 44 b is formed at a position that matches the discharge hole 60 d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open at the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the gaming ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the rear curtain plate member 43.

  In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, when the ball biting preventing mechanism 44 is inserted into a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later, an incorrect tool such as a piano wire is inserted. The rising wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized tool entry. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool abuts against the upright wall portion 44d, even if it is bent upward, it abuts on the forwardly projecting upper end projecting portion 44e provided on the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent action from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the gaming ball B dropped onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is blocked by 44d, the gaming ball B is easily retained on the placement portion 44a. Then, when the game ball B is staying on the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 can not be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is firstly discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the rear curtain plate member 43 (the rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The lower outer frame assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the front and rear curtain plate members 42 and 43 at a distance to the left and right and the opening 42a of the front curtain plate member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-like grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending in the front and rear direction and attached to the inside of the front curtain plate member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46; And a frame-like seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43 a of the rear curtain plate member 43.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower end of the door frame 3 abuts on the pair of guide members 45. The guide member 45 is formed of a low friction material having low friction resistance, and the lower end of the main body frame 4 is made slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain inner space 40 a (the enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 through the grill member 46 by two cylinders. In the port member 47, two cylinders are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonate and amplify the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (in the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (player's side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear a deep bass.

  The seal member 48 is compressed between the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Thus, it is possible to prevent the sound in the enclosure of the speaker from leaking between the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame and upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. Fig.21 (a) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2, and was seen from the front upper side, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the front lower side. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11 a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30 b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the outer frame upper hinge member 51 And an attachment screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 extends from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a to the upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends horizontally from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat front extension 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending to the left and right center of the front extension 51b from the middle of the right side of the front extension 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion The plate-like horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from the end edge to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is open from the left side to the front side of the front extension 51b And a flat plate-like end edge wall 51e which is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 has a strip-shaped lock main body 52a extending in the front and rear direction, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a left side extending from the rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending diagonally forward to the left and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the rear end of the lock main body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extension 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

With the lock member 52 attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock main body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so as to be able to abut on a portion of the edge wall 51e which extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51.
The lock member 52 is biased in a direction such that the front end pivots to the left around the attachment hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface in the vicinity of the front end of the lock main body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion on the front side of the lock main body 52a in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock main body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in plan view by rotating the lock body 52a in the direction in which the front end moves leftward by the operation of the operation piece 52b, and the bearing groove 51c Can be completely through. Thereby, the main frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the main frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion behind the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. And an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a; and a discharge hole 60d which has a size that allows the game ball B to pass through vertically through the horizontal portion 60a. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed at the upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached at a left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with a central portion of the upright portion 60b in the front-rear direction, and extends in a reverse U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The lower portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the rear curtain plate member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the state assembled to the outer frame 2, and a screw not shown Is fixed to the rear curtain member 43 by the Further, the rising portion 60 b is attached to a portion on the front side of the bulging portion 11 b in the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60 d matches the first discharge port 44 b of the anti-ball bite mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when closing the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between 4 and 4 gradually narrows, it rolls to the rear side where the distance is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game balls B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be more easily prevented from rolling backward than the main frame 4 by discharging the game balls B from the discharge holes 60 d. It is possible to make it difficult for the gaming ball B to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 22 to FIG. 22 is a surface view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 has a substantially the same size as the inside of the frame of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and the inside of the frame of the outer frame 2 can be attached openably from the front side It is done. The door frame 3 closes the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 in which the gaming ball B is struck so as to be visible from the front side, stores the gaming ball B for hitting into the gaming area 5a, and stores the gaming It has a handle 182 operated by the player in order to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Moreover, the door frame 3 decorates the whole front of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in the front view extends vertically, and the game board 5 which is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4 A glass unit 160 closing the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a crime prevention cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner, a pan unit 200 mounted to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and a front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the pan unit 200. Door frame left side unit 400 and the door attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit A right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101 a which is formed in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) in which the outer shape of the front view extends vertically, and the front right of the door frame base 101 Handle attachment member 102 attached below, speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and attached near the rear end right end in the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101 The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 on the left side A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the rear handlebar relay board 106, the door frame main relay board 104, and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the handlebar relay board 106 from the rear side A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and a door A frame lower hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 mounted on the right of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to open and close. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the gaming balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (fall ball) that has been fired by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580 The game ball B is to be guided to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The crime prevention cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 182 which can be operated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 can be inserted into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing the game which is thrown into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33. 31 (a) is a perspective view of a door frame base unit of a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the left side in a front view in a hinge rotatable manner with respect to the main body frame 4 and closes the front of the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular, flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a handle attachment member 102 attached to the front lower right of the door frame base 101 for attaching the handle unit 180. And a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in a rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 is a door frame main relay board 104 mounted near the right end in the rear view in the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay in the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 A door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the substrate 104 and a handle back relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, the door frame base 101 The back handle handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the back of the handlebar and covers the handle back handle relay board 106 from the back side, and is attached to the back side of the door frame base 101 to cover the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-like door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 mounted on the right of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view.

  In the door frame base unit 100, the handle unit 180 is in the front lower corner, the dish unit 200 is in the lower front of the door window 101a, the door frame left side unit 400 is in the front left outside of the door window 101a, and A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front of the door window 101a.

  Further, the glass frame 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and the transparent crime prevention cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is penetrated back and forth, and is provided with the door window 101a formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose inner peripheral shape in a front view extends vertically. The upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the door window 101a approach the outer periphery of the door frame base 101 respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is from the lower end of the door frame base 101 up and down It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101 a penetrating in the front and back direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed at the front right lower corner of the front view and is inclined such that the left end side protrudes slightly more forward than the right end side, the handle mounting surface 101b, and the door window 101a. Between the front end and the insertion recess 101c in which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted and the insertion recess 101c penetrates back and forth in the cylinder lock 130 The cylinder insertion hole 101d into which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting surface 101b are penetrated back and forth in front view left side, and the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 And a ball feed opening 101e for facing the

  The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates the ball outlet 150d of the far cover unit 150 forward for the lower bowl ball A passing hole 101f, a ball passing hole 101g for the upper tray which penetrates forward and backward through the ball passage 150a of the far cover unit 150 so as to penetrate forward and backward adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view And a glass unit attachment portion 101h into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted, which is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i which are formed at the lower left corner (below the ball passage opening 101g for the upper plate) in a front view and penetrate through the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the plurality of slits 101i has the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit base 211 of the plate unit 200 located forward and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 rearward. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

  Furthermore, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101 j which passes through in the front and rear direction below the door window 101 a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101 b. A wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the plate unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101 j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 to be described later penetrates It is formed to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1 b. Handle mounting member]
The handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching a handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 102a, and a tubular A plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c which project into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and are arranged at irregular intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a The outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a are provided.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102 b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101.

  The cylindrical portion 102 a is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. The three ridges 102 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181 c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle attachment member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only in a state in which the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 coincide with each other. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 102b. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similar inclined state.

[3-1 c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. When the speaker duct 103 is in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 The player can be favorably guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1 through the speaker opening 211 b of the dish unit base 211.

  Moreover, the speaker duct 103 is equipped with the cable holder 103a which hold | maintains the connection cable 503 in the back surface of the downward direction of a cylindrical site | part. The cable holder 103 a is disposed to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in a front view, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is the same as that of the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1 d. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle back relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle back relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay substrate 104 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape extends in the vertical direction, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle back relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. And FIG. 84) are connected.

The outer shape of the door frame sub relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending right and left on the front view right side of the upper part of the quadrangle extending vertically is combined and extends vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left of the frame main relay board 104 in a rear view.
The door frame sub relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the in-window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 and the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc. and the interface substrate 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay substrate 104 and the door frame sub relay substrate 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 such that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending above and below the door frame sub relay board 105 with the door frame base unit 100 assembled are The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub relay board 105 is covered by the rear cover unit 150.

  The handle back relay board 106 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting surface 101 b below the ball feeding opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle back relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. To relay the When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the handle back relay board 106 is in a state in which the rear side is covered by the handle back relay board cover 108.

[3-1 e. Door frame relay board cover · handle back relay board cover · cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the back handle handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG.
By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the back of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (a part extending in the reverse L shape up and down) It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape whose front and left in front view are open. In the state assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 covering the rear side and the door frame sub relay board 105 are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

  The handle back relay board cover 108 is attached to the back side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the back side of the handle back relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 is used. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and an opening for passing the wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center in the left and right direction of the lower surface.

[3-1 f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is connected to the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 extending up and down, which are disposed apart from each other on the left and right, and the left and the right connecting the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. An upper reinforcement frame 113 which has been extended, an intermediate reinforcement frame 114 which is attached at the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcement frame 111 to the left and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcement frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112, and a plurality of vertically spaced apart mountings on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 are hooked And the hooking member 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes which are vertically separated and penetrated in the front-rear direction. In these insertion holes, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame wedge 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the width of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends in the left-right direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 in the vertical direction. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a which is notched in a square shape from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end. The notch portion 114 a is formed at a position where the upper plate ball passage opening 101 g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114 b coincide with the through hole 101 j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is disposed to be separated left and right, and in a front view, has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending in the vertical direction, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending flatly forward from the side and a flat plate-like front piece portion connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extending portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in plan view is projected forward. In the cylinder mounting frame 115, the left rear piece is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at the site of the insertion hole penetrating in the front and rear direction. A door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked to the hooking member 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are stamped and formed of a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is , And assembled so as to be located below the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the ball passing opening 101g for the upper tray of the door frame base 101 and the through hole 101j. The cylinder attachment frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101 c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Door frame and hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 mounted movably in the vertical direction on the hinge bracket 121, and a hook attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 urging the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a having a square shape in a front view, and a flat protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the attachment piece 121a is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The wedge member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of projecting pieces 121 b of the door frame upper hinge pin 122. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the wedge member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124 via the wedge member 123.

  The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece By coming into contact with the lower surface of 121 b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount than the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121 b.

  When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the entire door frame upper hinge pin 122 is entirely moved. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main frame upper hinge member 510 from below or pull it out downward. it can. Thus, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in a front view is rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

  In the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, a portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 extending in the vertical direction is coaxial with the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1 h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The lower door frame hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a square-shaped flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The mounting piece 125 a and the protruding piece 125 b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. The lower door frame hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the vertically extending portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125 b when assembled to the door frame base unit 100. It is attached.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be hinged rotatably with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the body frame lower hinge member. Can.

[3-1 i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking with The cylinder lock 130 is attached to a cylindrical cylinder main body 131 extending in the front and rear direction, a key hole 132 formed on the front end face of the cylinder main body 131, and a rear side of the cylinder main body 131 and inserted into the key hole 132 And a rotation transmitting member 133 which rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear and has its rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter becomes larger toward the rear) opened at the rear, and is directed from the rear end to the front at a position opposite to sandwich the central axis. It has a pair of notched parts. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed such that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 is inserted into the pair of cutouts to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 for rotation.

  The cylinder lock 130 is in a state where the front end of the cylinder main body 131 substantially matches the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252 h of the pan unit main body 252 in the pan unit 200 when assembled in the door frame 3 (see FIG. 22 etc.).

[3-1 j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to the ball emitting device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one, and the game stored in the upper plate 201 The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by the operation of the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a which is supplied with gaming balls B from the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. And the rear end of the front cover 141 are closed and the front is opened in a box shape, and the game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front and rear direction A front cover pivotally supported on a rear cover 142 having a striking ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and an axis extending between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 in the front-rear direction. The ball extraction member 143 having a partition 143a that divides the entrance 141a from the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game ball B on the partition 143a of the ball extraction 143 one back cover 14 The ball feeding member 144 and the ball feeding member 144 are rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142. And a ball feed solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has the ball feeding member 144 disposed on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144 A ball feed solenoid 145 is disposed on the right side of the feed member 144, respectively.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball outlet 141b in a front view. From 141c, an operating rod 143c of a ball pullout member 143 described later extends forward. Also, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feed and guide passage 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper ball. And it is formed so that the site | part currently open | released to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from a back side.

  The ball extraction member 143 divides the space between the inlet 141a and the ball outlet 141b below the inlet 141a, and has a partition 143a whose upper surface is lowered in the direction of the ball feeding member 144; Around an axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and being bent in a V shape toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b from near the middle in the vertical direction and the lower end extends in the front and rear direction , A rod-like operating rod 143c projecting forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b, and a lower part of the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c And a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 is formed to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The actuating rod 143c moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball extraction button 222 of the disc unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 (the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper disc ball extracting slider 242 Contact with the upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 is directed to the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143, and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-like plan view centering on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, and the back of the blocking portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b which is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped collar portion 144c which extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one gaming ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis by moving the collar portion 144c disposed at a position eccentric to the rotation axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the left-right direction.

  The ball feed member 144 has a supply position in which the ball holding portion 144b is in communication with the ball hitting supply port 142a at the same time as the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a, and the ball holding portion 144b has a partition portion 143a. It is pivoted between the directionally oriented holding position. When the ball feed member 144 is at the supply position, the gaming ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the ball hitting supply port 142a to the ball firing device 540 and enters the partition 143a from the entrance 141a. The movement of the game ball B to the ball holding portion 144b (ball hitting supply port 142a) side is blocked by the blocking portion 144a, and the game ball B remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 is turned to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b is directed to the partition portion 143a, and the ball holding portion 144b is closed at the ball feeding port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding movement rod 146 which is swung in the vertical direction. And a ball feeding crank 147 for pivoting the ball feeding member 144 around the vertically extending axis.

  The ball feed operating rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146 a at a position below the ball feed solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable about an axially extending axis. It is done. When the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed operation rod 146 pulls the iron plate 146a toward the ball feed solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feed around the right end The left end side closer to the crank 147 is pivoted to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side near the ball feed crank 147 moves downward around the right end. As it is pivoted back to its initial state. As a result, the ball feed operating rod 146 causes the left end portion (tip) near the ball feed crank 147 to swing in the vertical direction by the ball feed solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a which is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and extends in the left and right direction, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b disposed on the side opposite to the side and pivotally supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extending upward from the shaft portion 147b And a transmission portion 147c engaged with a rod-like collar portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, whereby the ball feeding crank 147 is moved through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be pivoted about an axis extending back and forth.

  When the ball feed solenoid 140 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed unit 140 is in a state where the ball feed operation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed operation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 144 is held Turn to That is, when the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 144 receives one game ball B, and the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 102) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is configured to apply a moment so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by the ball extracting member 143 pivotally supported pivotally or by the weight portion 143 d. However, the actuating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball extracting member 143 abuts on the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper disc ball extracting slider 242 operated by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball extracting button 222 of the disc unit 200. In the normal state, since the rotation is restricted, the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removal hole 141b, and is separated. The game ball B does not intrude.

  Then, when the player presses the upper disc ball extraction button of the dish unit downward, the upper disc ball extraction slider slides downward with the operation transmission unit, and the movement lever 143c is moved with the movement of the operation transmission section downward. Will move relatively downward. When the actuating rod 143c moves downward together with the actuating transmission portion, the ball extracting member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a front view, and the partitioning portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition Is released. As a result, the gaming ball B entering from the entrance 141a drops toward the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball withdrawal guiding path 241c of the unit 240 after pulling out the upper ball in the tray unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper disc ball removal slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242 b with which the operation rod 143 c of the ball removal member 143 abuts is biased upward by the spring 243, the game ball B on the partition part 143 a Can be absorbed by the spring 243 through the actuating rod 143c, so that breakage of the ball pullout member 143 etc. can be prevented, and the gaming ball B is a partition It is possible to prevent bouncing back at 143a.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) etc.) that is recessed forward on the upper right in the back view of the hitting supply port 142a of the rear cover 142. A tamperproof member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142 b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends left and right, and is separated into upper and lower portions 148a at a substantially central position in the vertical direction. A lower piece portion 148b, and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered manner on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other . The upper piece portion 148 a of the tamperproof member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamperproof member 148 so that the right end in the front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148 b extends in the same plane as the general surface of the tamperproof member 148. Thus, in the plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove extending toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b is in communication with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to this fraud prevention member 148, the illegal gaming ball B attached with a string is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540 and attached to the illegal gaming ball B The momentum of the illegal game ball B fired (hit ball) by the ball launcher 540 when an illegal act is performed such that the illegal game ball B is moved into and out of the first starting opening by operating the strap The V-shape formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b after the string attached to the illegal gaming ball B is inserted between the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b by It is possible to cut off by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act using an illegal gaming ball B attached with a string.

[3-1 k. Foul cover unit]
The fowl cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 36 and FIG. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of a front cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the rear cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid removed. The false cover unit 150 is attached to the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the right side in a rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (fall ball) that has been fired by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580 The game ball B is to be guided to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the fool cover unit 150 is a shallow box-like unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat cover member attached to the front of the unit main body 151 And 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view, and a through ball passage 150a which brings the normal guiding path of the lower full ball passage unit of the main body frame 4 into communication with the upper countersink supply port of the dish unit; The full ball receiving opening 150b is open toward the rear on the lower right side in the front view of the through ball passage 150a and can communicate with the full tank guiding path of the lower full ball passage unit of the main body frame 4 .

  In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is opened upward at the right side in front view of the full tank receptacle 150b and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launching device of the main frame 4 The ball ball socket 150c for receiving the game ball B (far ball) and the game ball B which is opened forward in the vicinity of the lower right corner of the front view and received by the full tank ball socket 150b and the ball ball socket 150c. And a ball outlet 150d for discharging forward and communicating with the lower ball inlet of the tray unit.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receptacle 150b and the far ball receptacle 150c and the ball outlet 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of gaming balls B. A reservoir passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The through ball passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receptacle 150 b and the far ball receptacle 150 c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball outlet 150 d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150 e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  In addition, the flat cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the flat movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152; And a spring 155 for biasing the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e. The full tank detection sensor 154 detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e.

In the far cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the gaming balls B and the gaming balls B are not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of gaming balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the gaming balls B moves the upper end of the movable piece 153 away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. As the movable piece 153 rotates, the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154.
As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full of gaming balls B, so if fullness is detected by the full detection sensor 154, the payout of more gaming balls B is stopped At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall of that effect, and to urge the player to eliminate the filling of the lower tray 202.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 150 a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the dispensing passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball passage unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 described later of the body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f is provided to which the actuating projection 613a of 613 can abut (see FIG. 91). The door opening and closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the operation projection 613a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing abutment portion 150f, the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to lower end of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full delivery passage 610b The front opening can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 29, FIG. 30, and the like. The glass unit 160 is removably inserted from the rear into the glass unit attachment portion 101 h so as to close the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 enables the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be visible from the player side (forward) It closes the front of the area 5a.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-like glass frame 161 attachable to the glass unit attachment portion 101h larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the inside of the glass frame 161 closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending flatly outward from a position lower than the front left and right upper corners, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side And a plate-like locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be in contact with the projection 163 b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161 b is insertable into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated in the front and back direction so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 97).

  The glass unit attachment member 163 has a disk-like base 163a rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a bar-like projection from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment members 163 are rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

  In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is positioned above the base 163a. Do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit attachment portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit attachment member 163 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, the protrusion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 by the protrusion 163b when the protrusion 163b of the glass unit attachment member 163 is located below the base 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit attachment member 163, the protrusion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction of the backward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 29, FIG. 30, and the like. The crime prevention cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Security cover 170 is disposed with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear projection 172 projecting short rearwardly along the outer peripheral edge of main body portion 171, and left and right And a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward beyond the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed along a portion of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, the out guiding portion 1003, a portion of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5 a in a state where it is assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed in the shape of a shallow box opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projection 172, and the strength and the rigidity are high. Further, the rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear projection 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1 ing.

  The rear projection 172 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B fired by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not abut the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area It does not prevent the game ball B from being driven into 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 is resiliently locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the crime prevention cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  In the state where the crime prevention cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts on the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part projecting backward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projection 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state where the rear projection 172 projecting backward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward than the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Thus, the space between the crime prevention cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 172 of the crime prevention cover 170 and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the player. It is a thing.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182 A cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration substrate 184 mounted on the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration substrate 184 And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

  Further, the handle unit 180 is rotatably attached by an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 at the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 It has a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a integrally rotating with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 held between the base 186 and the base.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 to return the handle 182 to the initial rotational position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in a front view through the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in a direction.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186 and a tip end projecting outward from the left side in a front view outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 A single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 and a single-shot button 193 rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth to the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186 and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front and rear direction, a disk-like front end 181b radially projecting from the front end of the base 181a, and a cylindrical base 181a. And three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102. Further, the three grooves 181 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102 c of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c can be inserted in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 can not be rotated relative to the handle attachment member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d, which protrude outward in a circumferential direction away from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting backward from a position inside with respect to the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked And a locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a is such that the side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of the portion of the handle 182 that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface bulges outward, and the opposite side is the opposite side The side in the direction of is concaved (curved) to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 182b that most protrudes from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. Is slightly lower. The second protrusion 182 b is configured such that the side surface in the clockwise direction in the front view clockwise bulges outward and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The third protrusion 182c has a portion most projecting from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 away from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half height. The side surfaces of both sides of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding part from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding part of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees from the first protrusion 182a It also protrudes slightly high. The side surfaces of both sides of the fourth protrusion 182 d are inclined in a substantially linear shape, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183 a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183 a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 by penetrating the slit 182 e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the attachment boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the attachment boss 183a abuts on the circumferential end of the slit 182e, and the rotation angle of the handle 182 is restricted. In the present example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of approximately 120 degrees of rotation.

  The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward and has a light transmitting property. The handle cover 185 is internally provided with a three-dimensionally formed lens member of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is made to emit light by appropriately emitting the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end is positioned more rearward than the left end in plan view and faces the outside (the open side). The handle unit 180 to be attached via is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily hold the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can make the user perform the turning operation without a sense of discomfort.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the emission solenoid 542 in the ball emission device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player contacts the handle 182 or the like, the static electricity acting from the player is detected, and the handle 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's touch, when the handle 182 is turned, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is applied with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Thus, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B can not be hit. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a method different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Also, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the one-shot button manipulation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, and the firing control portion 633b of the payout control board 633 The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thus, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193, the operation before the one-shot button 193 is performed. The game ball B can be re-injected into the game area 5a by the driving strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes, in the handle 182, four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d, and the handle 182 is rotated most in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front. Of the first protrusion 182 a when the fourth protrusion 182 d does not rotate the handle 182 when the game ball B is most strongly hit into the game area 5 a (so-called “right hit”). The position is substantially the same as the position, so that the player can maintain the handle 182 at the position of “right-handed” in a comfortable state by changing the fourth protrusion 182 d as the first protrusion 182 a and holding the handle 182. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the plate unit from the back. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the tray unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 at a position lower than the door window 101 a. The dish unit 200 is arranged on the lower side of the upper dish 201 and the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls B for hitting into the game area 5a, and the game balls supplied from the upper dish 201 and the far cover unit 150 And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The pan unit 200 has a pan 201 and is mounted on the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The pan unit 210 is mounted on the front of the pan base unit 210. And a rendering operation unit 300 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-like plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate body 212 attached to the front upper portion of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base 213 attached to the front and projecting forward, a plate unit relay board 214 mounted on the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the top surface of the mounting base 213; An upper counterball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and an upper counterball removal unit 240 mounted at the rear of the upper counterball removal unit 230 are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front of the dish unit base 211 and attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. Tray unit main body 252, a lower plate ball pulling out unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and a plate upper left decorative unit 270 separately attached to the upper front of the plate unit main body 252 A dish upper right decoration unit 275, and a dish lower left decoration unit 280 and a dish lower right decoration unit 285 mounted below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 operable by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 capable of rotating operation by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 operable by pressing operation by the player. The rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the top surface of the rendering operation portion cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation portion base 320 housed inside the rendering operation portion cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation portion base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302 A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 rotatably attaching the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to a rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 for emitting and decorating the rendering operation ring 330, a decoration substrate cover 353 covering the upper side of the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320 Vibration speaker 354, effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 to face in the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 And have.

  The whole is bulging forward as a whole, and the rendering operation unit 300 is disposed so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 is obliquely upward forward at the center in the lateral direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 at the upper surface While the upper plate 201 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, the ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed, and the lower plate 202 is disposed on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and to the left of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed of the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in the shape of a container which is largely expanded forward on the left side than the center in the left and right in a front view. In the upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212), a portion about 1/3 of the width from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 bulges forward most. The upper plate 201 has a front end receding to the rear as it goes to the right in a front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). See). In the upper tray 201, the entire bottom surface including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end is lower, and the right end side in a front view of the guiding passage portion 201a is below the ball lending operation unit 220.

  The upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is placed on the lower end of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper ball supply port 211a. It inclines so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. Thus, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 through the upper ball feeding port 211e.

  The induction passage portion 201a is provided with a metal earth metal fitting 201b electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B contacts (rolls) to make the game ball Static electricity charged to B can be removed.

[3-5 b. Lower plate]
The lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction in a front view. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the gaming balls B, and is provided at the bottom wall with a lower countersink extraction hole 202a which penetrates up and down and can discharge the gaming balls B. The lower bowl ball extraction hole 202 a of the lower tray 202 is closed so as to be opened and closed by a lower bowl ball extraction unit 260.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose shape in plan view extends leftward and rightward, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower tray 202, lower countersink holes 202a penetrating vertically are disposed near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface is lower toward the lower ball open hole 202a. The lower bowl ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is located in front of the lower bowl ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the tray unit 200.

  The lower tray 202 can store the game balls B discharged forward from the lower flat ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and open the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a. The game balls B stored in the above can be discharged to the lower side (e.g., dollar box) of the dish unit 200. Further, in the state where the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is opened, the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower flat ball supply port 211c, so It is possible to quickly discharge the released game ball B downward from the lower ball extraction hole 202a by the movement of the shortest distance.

[3-5 c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a front perspective view of the pan base unit in the pan unit, and FIG. 44 is a rear perspective view of the pan base unit in the pan unit. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear is there. The dish base unit 210 is attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are attached to the front.

  The plate base unit 210 is a flat plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper front of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The mounting base 213 is attached to the right of the main body 212 and the upper pan body 212 at the upper front of the pan unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213 at the front of the pan unit base 211 And the tray unit relay board 214.

  Further, the bowl base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper bowling ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , And an after-the-counter ball removal unit 240 mounted on the rear side of the plate unit base 211 at the rear of the table ball removal front unit 230.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends flat across the entire width of the door frame base 101 (shallow open rear) Box-shaped).

  The pan unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates back and forth under the upper pan ball supply port 211a and the upper pan and ball supply port 211a extending cylindrically rearward. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower circular bulb supply port 211c which penetrates back and forth in the lower part on the left side with respect to the left and right center in front view and cylindrically extends backward; A notch 211d is notched in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c and has a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and front and rear in the front right upper side of the lower flat ball supply port 211c And an upper flat ball feed port 211e which extends upward and downward and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper flat body 212.

  Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper flat ball feed port 211e, and is raised on the left side of the upper flat ball feed port 211e, on which the mounting base is placed. A slider insertion port 211g which penetrates back and forth in the lower part of the pan body and into which the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper disc ball removal slider 242 of the upper disc ball removal unit 240 is inserted and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in front view Handle insertion opening 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates back and forth near the right corner in front view And a mouth 211i.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 211 a of the bowl unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end is opened to the rear wall of the upper bowl 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper bowl ball for the door frame base 101. The mouth 101 g is penetrated from the front side to be connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150 a of the far cover unit 150. As a result, the gaming ball B dispensed from the dispensing device 580 of the dispensing unit 560 is supplied (dispensed) into the upper tray 201 through the upper ball dispensing port 211 a.

  The lower disc ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end is opened to the rear wall of the lower plate 202, and the cylindrical rear end is the lower disc ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected with the front end of ball emission mouth 150d of far cover unit 150. As a result, the gaming ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower countersink supply port 211c. In addition, the downstream end of the ball extraction guiding path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after the removal of the upper ball is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower ball supply port 211c. ing. Thus, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is operated by the upper plate ball extraction button 222, the upper ball supply port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b of the ball supply unit 140, and the upper The lower ball and ball supply port 211c is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the ball feeding and introducing passage 241b and the ball removal and introducing passage 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper flat ball feeding port 211 e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241 a of the rear base 241 in the upper flat ball dropping unit 240 in a state assembled to the flat base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball socket 241a of the unit 240 after ball removal to the ball feeding and introducing passage 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper dish main body 212 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the upper dish 201. The upper dish main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) in which the upper side and the rear side are opened. The upper plate main body 212 extends in the left and right direction, and the left side of the upper plate main body 212 bulges forward largely from the center in the left and right in a front view. The upper plate main body 212 is formed such that the front end recedes backward as going from the most bulging part to the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B ing. The bottom surface of the upper tray main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper tray main body 212 is closed at the top near the right end.

  The upper tray main body 212 is attached to the lower end of the bowl unit 200 so that the portion closed at the upper side in the vicinity of the right end sinks below the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled in the tray unit 200. Further, in the upper tray main body 212, a rendering operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction in the upper portion, and a part of the rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the rendering operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the pan base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the pan unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211 f of the pan unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape whose upper side is open. The mounting base 213 is provided with an insertion port 213a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the left end, and a penetration port 213b penetrating vertically in the rear right corner.

  The insertion hole 213a of the mounting base 213 is a hole through which the front slider 232 of the unit 230 is removed. Moreover, the wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213 b.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The plate unit relay substrate 214 of the plate base unit 210 includes the door frame sub relay substrate 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, the plate lower left decorative substrate 283, and the plate lower right decorative substrate 288 , And relay the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The tray unit relay substrate 214 is attached to the right of the mounting protrusion 211 f on the front surface of the tray unit base 211. When the plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the plate unit base 211, the rear surface faces the back side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball lending operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the gaming balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 Or, after inserting a prepaid card, lend a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, display the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball rental machine, or use the ball rental machine It is for deducting and returning the part of the game ball B from which the cash and prepaid card thrown in to were loaned out, or returning.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 has a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper flat ball extraction button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper flat ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221 A light transmitting disc-like ball lending operation base 223 disposed to the right of the extraction button 222, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper ball ball extraction button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by the player performing a pressing operation. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is configured of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be viewed through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the gaming balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball extraction button 222. Further, after inserting a prepaid card with cash or balance into the ball lending machine and pressing the ball lending button 224, a predetermined number of gaming balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Further, an error code is displayed on the ball rental display unit when the ball rental machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Upper flat ball removal unit and upper flat ball removal unit]
The unit 230 for removing the upper ball and the unit for removing the upper ball 240 in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper flat ball extraction unit 230 and the upper flat ball extraction unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper flat ball extraction button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed to operate the upper tray 201. The game balls B stored inside are discharged to the lower tray 202.

  The upper bowl ball extraction front unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the placement projection 211 f on the front surface of the bowl unit base 211. The upper bowl ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear surface of the bowl unit base 211 at a position behind the upper bowl ball removal unit 230.

  The upper ball and ball removal front unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the disk unit base 211 and extends in the up and down direction, and is movably inserted in the cylinder of the front base 231. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the pan unit base 211 near the front of the upper pan and ball feed port 211 e and the slider insertion port 211 g. The front slider 232 extends vertically and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper flat ball extraction button 222 and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242 a of the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 of the unit 240 after the upper flat ball extraction. It is in contact with the upper surface.

  The upper countersink ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear surface of the disk unit base 211 so as to close the upper ball and ball supply port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and the front surface of the rear base 241 in the vertical direction An upper ball ball slide slider 242 slidably mounted, a spring 243 urging the upper ball ball slide slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 mounted on the rear side of the rear base 241; Is equipped.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion to which the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is slidably attached, and is opened forward and a ball socket 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball socket 241a. The ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received gaming ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and the game on the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position lower than the ball feeding guide path 241b And a ball extraction guide path 241c for guiding the ball B downward and guiding it to the right in a rear view.

  The ball socket 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and is directed forward through the upper plate feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an opening position. The ball feed guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feed unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part in the state assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the gaming ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 is made to enter the entrance 141 a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241 a and the ball feeding guide path 241 b.

  The portions of the ball extraction guide path 241c that extend to the left and right are projected to the right in the rear view and inclined so that the right end in the rear view is lower than the part to which the upper disc ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached. And open on the right side in a rear view. The rear side of the ball extension guiding path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The upper part of the part extending vertically up and down below the ball feeding and guiding passage 241b is located in front of the ball pulling out port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when the ball pulling and guiding passage 241c is assembled in the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end in the rear view of the portion extending leftward and rightward is formed so as to be connected to the notch portion 211 d of the lower circular bulb supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the gaming ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower flat ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guiding path 241c and the notch portion 211d.

  The upper flat ball slide slider 242 is formed in a square shape in a front view, and protrudes rearward from the rear surface which is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242 a that protrudes forward from the upper left corner and the operation receiving portion 242 a And an operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a is formed flat. In addition, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper ball ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving portion 242a The lower end of the front slider 232 of the unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the front flat ball. Further, the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation transmission portion 242b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241 and operates the ball extraction member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. A weir 143c is in contact.

  The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241, and the lower end is attached to the upper countersink slider 242, and the upper countersink slider 242 is biased upward. Therefore, the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243.

The upper counter ball removal unit 230 and the upper counter ball removal unit 240 have the upper counter ball removal slider 242 positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper counter ball removal slider 242 The upper flat screen extraction button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper flat ball slide slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the actuating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the actuating transmission portion 242b is blocked. The partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal hole 141b to separate the two.

  Therefore, in a state in which the upper flat ball extraction button 222 is not pressed, the space between the inlet 141a and the ball outlet 141b is partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and is sent from the upper tray 201 to the ball socket 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting supply port 142a to the ball emitting device 540 via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper flat ball extraction button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the operation of the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 The actuating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removal member 143 rotates the ball removal member 143 to divide the partition 143a. Is retracted from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the gaming ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receptacle 241a and the ball feed guiding path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. It will be done. The gaming ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower flat ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower flat ball supply port 211c. The game balls B in the upper plate 201 are discharged into the lower plate 202 after being discharged into the plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper flat ball extraction button 222 is released, the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper pan via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball removal button 222 is lifted, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the actuating rod 143c in contact with the actuating transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  As described above, the gaming ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launcher 540 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 for removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 for removing the upper bowl. It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5 d. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and FIG. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has the lower dish 202 and is attached to the front of the dish base unit 210, and the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 is decorating almost the whole of the dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish main body 251 and the dish unit base to cover the outer circumference of the lower dish main body 251. A bowl unit main body 252 attached to the front of the bowl 211, a lower bowl ball pulling out unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower bowl main body 251, and a bowl separately mounted on the upper front of the bowl unit main body 252 A lower left decoration unit 280 and a lower right decoration unit mounted below the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 on the entire surface of the main unit 252 And 285.

[3-5 d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower tray body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower tray main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) which extends in the left and right direction and is open at the upper and the rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the front lower portion of the tray unit base 211 from the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear is closed.

  The lower tray main body 251 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose shape in plan view extends in the left and right direction, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower tray main body 251, in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view, a lower countersink hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed. The lower tray main body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof is lowered toward the lower spherical ball opening 202a. The lower ball ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower ball ball extraction lid 265 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower tray body 251 is in a state in which the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the tray unit main body 252 in a state where the lower tray main body 251 is assembled in the tray decoration unit 250. Further, the lower tray main body is in a state assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface is positioned lower than the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is a lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5 d-2. Dish unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210, and decorates the front of the dish unit 200. The pan unit body 252 bulges so that the center in the left and right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left and right direction bulges forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the plate unit main body 252 is curved such that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in the shape of a box opened rearward.

  The pan unit main body 252 bulges forward toward the center in the left and right direction from the left and right ends in the upper part and extends upward and separately from the upper side bulged part 252a spaced apart in the left and right And a bottom plate portion 252c extending in the form of a flat plate from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b to the rear in such a manner as to cover the outer periphery of the lower tray main body 251. .

  The left and right upper side bulging parts 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and the front left plate top left decoration unit 270, the plate bottom left decoration unit 280, the plate top right decoration unit 275 and the plate bottom right decoration unit 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The pan unit main body 252 is formed with a lower pan opening 252d which penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size such that the player's finger can be inserted, and the lower plate opening 252d is formed to be wider upward and downward as it goes to the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

  Further, the plate unit main body 252 is a front notch portion 252e which is notched upward from the front lower end of a portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom notch 252f which is notched at a lower part of The lower countersunk ball extraction unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

  Furthermore, the pan unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the handle insertion port 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 is inserted; It is formed between the cylinder insertion port 252h which penetrates the decoration part 252b back and forth and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging parts 252a which becomes the center in the horizontal direction. And a rendering operation unit attachment portion 252i to which the 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The plate unit main body 252 is formed to entirely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker opening 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. . Further, in a state where it is assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower disc ball extraction button 263 of the lower disc ball extraction unit 260 faces forward from the front notch portion 252e, and the lower disc ball extraction base 261 of the lower disc ball extraction unit 260. The bottom notch 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are in the same plane.

[3-5 d-3. Lower bowl ball removal unit]
The lower ball ball extraction unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and stores the game balls B in the lower plate 202 or discharges the game balls B from the lower plate 202 by opening and closing the lower plate ball extraction holes 202a. It is intended to

  The lower disc ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower disc body 251 and has a flat lower disc ball extraction base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically in the front right corner in plan view; A slider 262 slidably mounted to the front and back on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower countersunk ball release button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 biasing the slider 262 forward; The lower disc ball lid 265 opens and closes the through hole by the movement of the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and the holding mechanism 266 holds the lower disc ball lid 265 in the open state via the slider 262.

  The lower ball ball extraction base 261 is formed to close the bottom notch 252f of the disk unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position corresponding to the lower ball ball extraction hole 202a of the lower disk 202 (lower disk main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower ball ball extraction base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower ball ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the front and rear direction, and is slidably mounted on the lower disc ball removal base 261 in the front and rear direction at a position from the center in the left-right direction to the left. The slider 262 is provided with a projecting pin projecting cylindrically upward.

  The lower disc ball ejection lid 265 is attached to the lower disc ball ejection base 261 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending up and down at a position on the left side of the slider 262 at the left end side. The right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower flat ball lid 265 is formed with a slit extending in the left and right direction in which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  In the lower tray ball removal unit 260, the lower tray ball removal base 261 closes the bottom surface cutout portion 252f of the plate unit main body 252 in a state assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate 252c. In addition, the lower countersunk ball extraction button 263 is facing forward from the front cutout 252e of the main dish unit main body 252. Under normal conditions, the slider 262 is positioned at the front moving end by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower microcontroller ball lid 265 is positioned directly above the through hole in the normal state. And the through hole (the lower countersink hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower ball removal cover 265, and the gaming ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in the normal state, the front surface of the lower ball ball extraction button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front cutout portion 252e in the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  Under normal conditions, when the lower ball extraction button 263 is pushed backward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower ball extraction button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves backward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 presses the lower flat ball lid 265 backward through the slit, and the lower flat ball lid 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end is backward It will turn in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower countersunk ball lid 265 located immediately above the through hole moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower countersink hole 202a is opened, The gaming ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

  In addition, when the slider 262 is moved backward by the pressing of the lower ball lifting button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower ball lifting button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 is not moved forward by the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower ball removal cover 265 is kept turned to the rear, and the lower ball removal hole 202a is maintained in the open state, and the gaming balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously used. It can be discharged downward.

  In order to close the lower ball extraction hole 202a from this state, when the lower ball extraction button 263 which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pushed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. Ru. Then, when the pressing of the lower ball releasing button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower ball releasing button 263 returns to the state where it matches the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower ball removal cover 265 is pivoted so that the right end side is located immediately above the through hole, and the lower ball removal hole 202 a is closed by the lower ball removal cover 265. Thus, the gaming balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5 d-4. Upper left decoration unit and upper right decoration unit]
The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper front of the upper side bulging portion 252 a of the main unit 252. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 are for decorating the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semicylindrical shape extending in the left and right direction and has a light transmitting property. The dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271 A dish upper left decorative substrate 273 mounted on the back side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends curvilinearly so as to move forward and move downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper left decorative body 271 has a shape in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end, and a central axis extending to the left and right at the right end, and the half cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted from the back into the dish upper left decoration 271, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decoration substrate 273. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper left decoration substrate 273 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the upper left decoration 271 can be made to emit light.

  The left upper part of the upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is continuous with the lower end of the left left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the upper central decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the presentation operation unit 300. And continuous. Since the upper left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the upper left decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left decoration substrate 273 emit light, the entire front of the upper left decoration 271 is The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semicylindrical shape extending laterally and has a light transmitting property, the dish upper right decoration 276 and the dish upper right reflector 277 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right decoration 276, A dish upper right decoration substrate 278 is mounted on the back side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  The dish upper right decoration 276 extends curvilinearly so as to move forward and move downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper right decoration 276 has a shape in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely rightward at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the half cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The dish upper right decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted from behind into the dish upper right decoration 276, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper right decoration 276 can be decorated to emit light.

  The right upper part of the upper right decoration unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the upper part decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the presentation operation unit 300. And continuous. Since the dish upper right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the dish upper right decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are illuminated, the entire front face of the dish upper right decoration 276 The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5 d-5. Lower left decoration unit and lower right decoration unit]
The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower portion of the front of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the main unit 252 so as to extend along the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 respectively. Be The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 300 .

  The lower left decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending in the left and right direction and has a light transmitting property. The lower left decoration 281 has a lower left reflector 282 mounted on the rear side of the lower left decoration 281. A dish lower left decorative substrate 283 mounted on the back side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  The lower left decorative body 281 extends curvilinearly to move forward and move downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in a circular arc having a center at the rear in plan view, Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc bulging forward at a smaller radius than the upper left decorative body 271 and the upper right decorative body 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is shaped so that the semi-cylinder is bent. The left lower end of the lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower left decorative body 281 becomes thinner toward the left end. This dish lower left decoration 281 is formed milky white.

  The lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left decorative substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decoration board 283 is a full color LED, and by emitting light, the lower left decoration 281 can be made to emit light.

  With the lower left decoration unit 280 assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is the lower center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the lower left decoration unit 280, since the left end of the lower left decoration 281 is formed in a spherical shape, it looks as if the left end is sunk into the door frame 3. The lower left decorative unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative board 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical, horizontally extending, light transmitting dish lower right decoration 286 and a dish lower right decoration attached to the back of the dish lower right decoration 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decoration substrate 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

  The dish lower right decoration 286 extends curvilinearly to move forward and move downward from the right end to the left end, and extends in a circular arc having a center at the rear in plan view, It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a of the right side. The lower right decoration 286 is a semicircular arc bulging forward at a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the half cylinder is formed to be bent. The right lower end of the lower right decoration 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower right decoration 286 becomes thinner toward the right end. This dish lower right decoration 286 is formed milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted from the back into the inside of the dish lower right decoration 286, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower right decoration substrate 288. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decoration substrate 288 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish lower right decoration 286 can be decorated with light emission.

  The right lower end of the lower right decoration unit 285 is located below the right end of the upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the lower center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. In the lower right decoration unit 285, the right end of the lower right decoration 286 of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower right decoration unit 285 has no rib in the middle of the dish lower right decoration 286 in the longitudinal direction, when the plural LEDs of the dish lower right decoration substrate 288 emit light, the dish lower right decoration 286 The entire front surface of the light emitting device can be substantially uniformly emitted and decorated, and it can appear as if a fluorescent light is embedded.

[3-5 e. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The entire configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the pan unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the direction of movement of the effect operation button. FIG. 52 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The rendering operation unit 300 is provided at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, and while decorating the plate unit 200, the player operates and participates in the rendering when the player participation type rendering is performed. It can be done. The rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring . The pressing operation unit 303 is disposed at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a center pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than a half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is comprised with the annular | circular shaped outer periphery press operation part 303b arrange | positioned between inner periphery.

  The rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the top surface of the rendering operation portion cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation portion base 320 housed inside the rendering operation portion cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation portion base 320. The ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having the rotation operation portion 302, the rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330 A transmission gear 350 for operation ring that transmits rotation between the unit 302 and the gear 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the transmission gear 350 for operation ring to the operation portion base 320.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the rendering operation ring 330, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and the rendering operation ring decorative substrate 352 The decorative substrate cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the above, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face inside the ring of the effect operation ring 330 The rendering operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Effect operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in the shape of a container whose upper and rear portions are open.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 recessed downward, a semicircular annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and expanded forward, and a unit front The dish center upper reflector 313 is mounted from the rear in the dish center upper decoration body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The plate center upper decoration substrate 314, the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted from the rear in the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the plate center lower reflector 315 And a lower center decoration substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the light are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the center rear side in the front-rear direction and the front side from the center rear side. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state such that an axis perpendicular to a virtual plane formed on the front semicircular arc extending upper end edge is positioned forward as it goes upward.
In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drainage holes 311 a formed at the lowest position when assembled into the pan unit 200.

  In the effect operation unit 300, there is a gap between the center pressing operation portion 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b and a gap between the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b and the rotation operation portion 302. As foreign substances, liquid such as coffee and juice, powdery objects such as cigarette ash and dust may enter. In this case, various sensors and motors provided in the rendering operation unit 300 cause problems, a gap between the central pressing portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b, and a gap between the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and the rotational operating portion 302. If the foreign matter is caught in the space, there is a possibility that the center pressing operation unit 303a, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, the rotation operation unit 302, and the like may not move smoothly. Therefore, a drain hole 311 a is formed in the unit lower cover 311 as a mechanism for discharging the foreign matter from the pachinko machine 1 to the outside.

  Although a plurality of drainage holes 311a are provided, immediately below some of the drainage holes 311a, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 such as the lower tray 202 are not provided, and foreign matter is drained from these drainage holes 311a. When it is done, the pachinko machine 1 falls directly onto the mounting surface of the island facility on which the pachinko machine 1 is mounted. With such a configuration, it is possible to keep the foreign matter discharged from the drainage hole 311a away from the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being soiled by the discharged foreign matter. Become.

  In the present embodiment, a member such as the lower tray 202 and the like that constitutes the pachinko machine 1 is not provided immediately below some of the drainage holes 311a, but the lower tray 202 is positioned just below the drainage holes 311a. It is also good. With such a configuration, since the liquid stagnates in the lower tray 202, it is possible to prevent the mounting surface of the island facility on which the pachinko machine 1 is mounted from being soiled.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed of an opaque polycarbonate resin having a thickness of about 2 mm. With such a configuration, even if foreign substances that can not be drained by the drainage holes 311a remain around the drainage holes 311a inside the unit lower cover 311, their presence can not be confirmed from the appearance, so the appearance is aesthetically pleasing. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  On the other hand, the unit lower cover 311 may be formed of a transparent resin so that the inside can be viewed. With such a configuration, when the foreign matter enters the rendering operation unit 300 from above and the foreign matter flows down to the unit lower cover 311, the door frame 3 is opened and the pan unit 200 is removed from the door frame 3. Furthermore, without taking the effort of removing the rendering operation unit 300 from the pan unit 200 and checking the internal condition of the rendering operation unit 300, foreign matter has entered the rendering operation unit 300 by observation from the outside, or It is possible to check the discharge status of foreign objects by drainage holes 311a and the stagnation status of foreign objects in unit lower cover 311, and stop sales using pachinko machine 1, pachinko machines according to the entry status of foreign objects into rendering operation unit 300. It becomes possible to appropriately take measures such as cleaning of 1 and replacement of parts.

  Although the embodiment in which the drain hole 311 a is provided in the unit lower cover 311 has been shown, the drain hole 311 a may not be provided. Even in the case of such a configuration, the above-described effects can be obtained both when the unit lower cover 311 is formed of an opaque resin or when it is formed of a transparent resin. In addition, by not providing the drainage hole 311a, it is possible to prevent the player from performing mischief or harassment by inserting a metal thin wire such as a wire or a piano wire from below into the drainage hole 311a. Is possible.

  The drainage hole 311 a is formed in a shape in which the unit lower cover 311 is hollowed out in a cylindrical shape. With such a configuration, when the liquid as foreign matter enters the rendering operation unit 300 from above and flows down to the unit lower cover 311, the resistance of the liquid passing through the drainage hole 311a is reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 It will be possible to carry out discharge to the outside promptly. In addition, it is prevented that the solid passing through the drainage hole 311a stays in the drainage hole 311a when solid such as cigarette ash as foreign matter enters the rendering operation unit 300 as foreign matter and flows down to the unit lower cover 311 It is possible to quickly discharge the pachinko machine 1 to the outside.

  Although the embodiment in which the drainage hole 311a is linearly formed in a shape in which the unit lower cover 311 is hollowed out in a cylindrical shape has been shown, the drainage hole 311a may have a non-linear shape. For example, the shape of the drainage hole may be curved in an arc or S shape. With such a configuration, it is a member provided in the rendering operation unit 300 from mischief and harassment by the player, such as inserting a metal thin wire such as a wire or a piano wire from below into the drainage hole 311a. It becomes possible to protect the vibration speaker 354, the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the operation unit relay board unit 390 and the like.

  The drainage hole 311a is formed as if the unit lower cover 311 is hollowed out in a cylindrical shape, but its diameter is about 2 mm. The drainage hole 311a is provided to discharge foreign matter that has entered the rendering operation unit 300, but it is necessary to keep in mind that mischief and harassment by the player, such as inserting foreign matter into the drainage hole 311a, is performed. There is. As foreign objects to be inserted, the player's own finger (about 15-20 mm in diameter), gaming balls (about 11 mm in diameter), cigarettes (about 8 mm in diameter), metal thin lines (diameter 0.2-such as wire and piano wire) 2 mm) is assumed. In order to prevent the insertion of the foreign matter, it is desirable to make the diameter of the drainage hole 311a smaller than the diameter of the foreign matter. On the other hand, when the diameter of the drainage hole 311a is reduced, the influence of the surface tension of the liquid flowing down into the unit lower cover 311 can not be ignored, and the drainage efficiency of the liquid from the drainage hole 311a may be reduced. is there. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the drainage hole 311a is about 2 mm.

  Among the foreign objects assumed to be inserted, the player's finger, the game ball, and the cigarette can be inserted into the drainage hole 311a impulsively without requiring preparation in advance. On the other hand, metal thin wires such as wires and piano wires are not usually carried by the player, and can not be inserted into the drainage holes 311a unless they are possessed in the hall intentionally. As compared with the possibility of occurrence of such a situation, it is considered that the possibility of occurrence of a situation in which the player's finger, game ball or cigarette is inserted is relatively higher. Therefore, the diameter of the drainage hole 311a may be set to less than 8 mm as a measure against the situation where the player's finger, the game ball, and the cigarette are inserted in an attacking manner. With such a configuration, the vibration speaker 354 which is a member provided in the effect operation unit 300 from mischief and harassing act such as inserting the player's finger, gaming ball and cigarette from below into the drainage hole 311a. It becomes possible to protect the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the operation unit relay board unit 390, and the like.

  Although the shape of the drainage hole 311a showed the example of a column shape, the shape of the drainage hole 311a is not limited to a column shape, but has a slit shape, a taper shape, a square shape such as a square or a rectangle, etc. It is also good. Also in the case of these shapes, by setting the width of the narrowest portion of the drainage hole 311a to less than 8 mm, it is possible to insert a player's finger, gaming ball or cigarette into the drainage hole 311a. It becomes possible to protect the vibration speaker 354 which is a member provided in the rendering operation unit 300, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the operation unit relay board unit 390, and the like.

  The drainage hole 311a is formed in a shape like a hollow of the unit lower cover 311, but when the effect operation unit 300 including the unit lower cover 311 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the drainage hole 311a is formed. It is in a state of being inclined so as to be positioned backward as it goes downward. In this embodiment, it inclines only backward at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the liquid is discharged as a foreign substance from the drain hole 311a, the liquid is discharged in a state where momentum is given to the rear. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from scattering in the clothes or the like of the player sitting on a chair and playing a game. In addition, when the player is not playing a game, it is possible to prevent the liquid from scattering on the seating portion of the chair. In addition, when a large amount of liquid enters the rendering operation unit 300 and a large amount of liquid is accumulated inside the unit lower cover 311, the water pressure applied to the drainage hole 311a becomes strong, and the liquid vigorously toward the rear side As a result, it is possible to further enhance the effect of preventing the liquid from scattering in the player's clothes or the like.

  Although the embodiment in which the drainage hole 311a is inclined downward so as to be located rearward is illustrated, the drainage hole 311a may be formed so as not to provide the inclination. With such a configuration, the falling position of the liquid discharged from the drainage hole 311a is limited to just below the drainage hole 311a, so the placement surface of the island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is placed It is possible to easily predict the drop position of the liquid in the above, and to make it easy to take measures against the drop of the liquid.

  Although the embodiment has been described in which the drainage holes 311a are inclined downward so as to be positioned rearward, the drainage holes 311a may be inclined downward so as to be positioned forward. In this case, when the liquid is discharged as a foreign substance from the drainage hole 311a, the liquid is discharged in a state where momentum is given to the front. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from falling into the ball tray in the dollar box or each machine counting system placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1.

  Although the embodiment in which the drainage hole 311a is inclined downward to the rear is shown, the drainage hole 311a may be inclined to the left as the drainage downward. In this case, when the liquid is discharged as a foreign substance from the drainage hole 311a, the liquid is discharged in a state where momentum is given to the left. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from falling to the player's hands operating the dollar box placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball receiving tray in each machine counting system, and the handle 182. It is possible to

  Although the embodiment in which the drainage hole 311a is inclined downward to the rear is shown, the drainage hole 311a may be inclined rightward as it goes downward. In this case, when the liquid is discharged as a foreign substance from the drainage hole 311a, the liquid is discharged in a state where momentum is given to the right. With such a configuration, the dollar box placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball receiving tray in each machine counting system, the interbed machine generally installed on the left side of the pachinko machine 1, the each machine counting system It is possible to prevent the liquid from falling to the flow path connecting the ball receiving tray and the inter-table machine.

  The embodiment in which the drainage hole 311a is inclined downward to the rear, and the drainage hole 311a is inclined downward to the front, left, and right. However, the drainage hole 311a may be inclined in a direction in which the front and rear direction and the left and right direction are combined. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from falling to the player, the game arcade or the like. For example, in the case where the drainage hole 311a is inclined downward to the left, the player's right hand operating the handle 182, the dollar box, the ball tray in each machine counting system, and the plane machine It becomes possible to prevent the liquid from falling to the flow path connecting the ball receiving tray and the table machine in each stand counting system.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of (specifically, eight) drainage holes 311 a are provided below the unit lower cover 311. With such a configuration, even if foreign matter that has flowed down is clogged in part of the drainage hole 311a or the player blocks the outside with a gum, the drainage function of the drainage hole 311a can be reduced. It becomes possible to secure.

  Although a plurality of (specifically, eight) drainage holes 311a are provided below the unit lower cover 311, only one drainage hole 311a may be provided. With such a configuration, the drop position of the liquid is limited, as compared with the case where a plurality of drainage holes 311a are provided, so it is possible to reduce the area of the game arcade facility that becomes soiled by the drop of the liquid.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of (specifically, eight) drainage holes 311 a are provided below the spherical unit lower cover 311 that is convex downward, but four in the lowest end, an intermediate height It is provided with two different heights, two further upwards, and so on. With such a configuration, when the amount of liquid flowing into the unit lower cover 311 is small, the liquid is discharged only from the lowermost four drainage holes 311 a. The four drainage holes 311a at the lowermost end are close to each other, and the drop position of the liquid is limited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game arcade facility from being soiled by the drop of the liquid. On the other hand, when there is a large amount of liquid that has flowed in, and a large amount of liquid has accumulated inside the unit lower cover 311, the two drainage holes 311a provided at an intermediate height, and the two provided above are also provided. The liquid is also discharged from the two drainage holes 311a. In this case, the amount of liquid discharged per unit time can be increased as compared with the case where the liquid is discharged using the four drain holes 311 a at the lowermost end.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape in which the shape of the unit front cover 312 bulges forward so that the shape in plan view follows the front end of the unit lower cover 311. It is attached. The unit front cover 312 is a plate central upper decoration 312a in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a front below the dish central upper decoration 312a. And a dish center lower decoration body 312 b extending in a semicircular arc shape so that the bulging semicircular arc follows the front end of the unit lower cover 311. The unit front cover 312 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 at the lower end of the dish center lower decoration 312 b.

  The plate center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are formed by dividing a cylinder of substantially the same thickness (radius) into halves and extending in a semicircular arc shape with the dividing surface facing the center side It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends with a large curvature in a semicircular arc shape with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It has a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish upper center decoration 312a protrudes forward than the front end of the dish center lower decoration 312b. Further, when assembled in the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish upper center decoration body 312a are respectively continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decoration unit 275 The left and right ends of 312 b are respectively continuous with the right end of the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the left end of the dish lower right decoration unit 285. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed milky white.

  The front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled to the door frame 3. The distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame The distance is about half the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish upper central reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape which bulges forward, and is inserted from the rear into the dish central upper decoration body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 and attached. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper center decoration body 312a can be illuminated and decorated.

  The lower center dish reflector 315 is formed in the shape of a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and is inserted from the rear into the lower stage center decoration 312 b of the unit front cover 312 and attached. The lower center dish reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the lower center dish decoration substrate 316 from leaking backward (inward). The lower dish center lower decoration substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the lower dish center lower decoration body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the lower center dish decoration substrate 316 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower dish center lower decoration body 312b can be lighted and decorated.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of extending in a semicircular arc shape in the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, so When the LEDs of the upper center decoration substrate 314 and the LEDs of the lower center lower decoration substrate 316 are made to emit light, the whole can be emitted and decorated substantially uniformly, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a front end projecting forward more than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the dish upper center decoration body 312a is continuous with the dish upper left decoration body 271 and the dish upper right decoration body 276, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b is the dish lower left decoration body 281 and the dish right It is continuous with the lower decoration 286. Thus, the rendering operation unit 300 is made to stand out and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Controller base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation unit base 320 is inserted from above into the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper tray main body 212 in the dish base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container whose upper side is opened.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in a box shape having a substantially cubic outer shape and extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 whose upper portion is open, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape The upper attachment which is formed on the flange base 322, the plurality of (here four) legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom of the main body 321, and the rear end of the flange 322 and attached to the disc base unit 210 A portion 324, and a gear bearing portion 325 which is opened upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outside of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the transmission gear 350 for operation ring.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The main body portion 321 has a bottom surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached from the lower side, and a portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body portion 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354 and can amplify the vibration.

  The leg 361 b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321 at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. In the main body portion 321, the rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outer side of the left side wall, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outer side of the rear wall.

  The main body portion 321 is attached such that the upper portion thereof is inclined forward, so that the liquid flowing into the bottom wall 321 a flows downward on the bottom wall 321 a and moves forward. A plurality of (specifically, three) through holes 321b are provided at the front end of the bottom wall 321a, and the liquid moved forward is discharged from the through holes 321b and the unit lower cover 311 Fall towards With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the liquid enters the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321 a and the vibration speaker 354 breaks down.

  In the embodiment, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a, but instead of the vibration speaker 354, a motor for driving and generating vibration, a decoration substrate on which an LED is mounted, a plate unit relay substrate 214 A board box 391 or the like in which an operation unit relay board 392 for relaying a signal sent to the rendering operation unit 300 may be attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which liquid intrudes into these articles and these articles break down.

  In the present embodiment, the vibration speaker 354 is attached substantially at the center of the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a, but the position at which the vibration speaker 354 is attached may be a rear region of the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a. With such a configuration, the mounting position of the vibration speaker 354 is increased, and a large amount of liquid enters the rendering operation unit 300, and even if a large amount of liquid is retained inside the unit lower cover 311, the bottom wall 321a It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the liquid enters the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the case and the vibration speaker 354 breaks down.

  In the present embodiment, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a, but on the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a, an upright wall vertically erecting with respect to the bottom wall 321a is provided. May be covered. With such a configuration, the liquid flows down the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a, and the liquid enters the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a, causing a failure of the vibration speaker 354. It becomes possible to suppress that.

  Although an example in which the standing wall is provided to cover the entire circumference of the vibration speaker 354 is shown, a part of the periphery of the vibration speaker 354 may be covered by the standing wall. For example, at least the rear side of the vibration speaker 354 may be covered by a standing wall. In addition, the standing wall may cover at least the vicinity of the position where the outer periphery of the vibration speaker 354 and the peripheral edge of the bottom wall 321 a are closest to each other. In addition, with regard to the portion where the wiring of vibration speaker 354 is provided, the standing wall may not be provided in the corresponding portion. With such a configuration, the liquid flows down the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a, and the liquid enters the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a, causing a failure of the vibration speaker 354. It becomes possible to suppress that. Furthermore, the heat dissipation of the vibration speaker 354 can be enhanced as compared to the case where a standing wall is provided to cover the entire circumference of the vibration speaker 354.

  On the upper surface of the bottom wall 321a, a plurality of ribs for enhancing the strength of the bottom wall 321a are provided respectively in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. Further, the height (about 0.5 mm) of the rib in the left-right direction is lower than the height (about 2 mm) of the rib in the front-rear direction. With such a configuration, it is possible to guide the liquid flowing into the operation portion base 320 to the through hole 321b without stagnation while maintaining the strength of the bottom wall 321a.

  The flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter such that the outer periphery thereof substantially matches the inner periphery of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312. A rendering operation ring decorative substrate 352 and a decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring attachment base 331 of the rendering operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for operation ring around an axis extending in the left and right direction in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the transmission gear 350 for operation ring is attached to the gear bearing 325, the upper portion of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring protrudes upward, and the drive gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring is a flange portion. It is exposed to the outside below 322.

  The upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly lower than the upper surface of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in a state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled in the rendering operation unit 300. Moreover, in the state assembled to the rendering operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in a state of being in contact with it.

[3-5e-3. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 55, FIG. 56 and the like. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from the top front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the top front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 which can be rotationally operated by the player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation portion 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) about twice as large as the dimension in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is approximately 13 cm.

  The rendering operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and rotatably mounted around a vertically extending shaft on the ring mounting base 331 and are attached to the ring mounting base 331 to move the rotating base 332 upward And a ring retaining member 334 which regulates the movement.

  Also, the rendering operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 that constitutes a part of the rotational operation portion 302 and the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 constituting a part of the rotation operation portion 302 and an inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 to constitute a part of the rotation operation portion 302 And an in-ring cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a light transmitting annular shape.

The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and an inner diameter formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the placement portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably disposed in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge and the placement portion 331a on the upper surface And a boss 331 b for projecting cylindrically upward from a plurality (four in this case) of parts and for mounting the bush 333 rotatably and spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting part 331 a on the upper surface And a through-hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of sites.
The plurality of through holes 331 c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

The outer diameter of the rotation base 332 is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring attachment base 331, and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331.
The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332 a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332 a is formed in a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes to the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332 a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331, and in a state of being assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332 a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring attachment base 331. The ring gear 332 a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350 a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which circular arcs forming the outer and upper portions in a circular shape are arranged three-dimensionally And an outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extending in the circumferential direction after extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335 a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which a circular arc in the range of 1⁄4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335 b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335 c extends slightly lower than the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335 a, and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The outer ring lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc forming an outer lower portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward from the inner side of the outer lower surface portion 336a in the circumferential direction And a plurality of outer lower cover attachment portions 336b arranged in plural. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336 b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The inner ring cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc constituting an inner upper portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a parallel to the central axis And an inner cover attachment portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylinder surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc of 1⁄8 of a circle extends in an annular shape.
The cylindrical surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337 c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion in the range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole is in a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 is capable of emitting light by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotary drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the rear. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the left front. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating and driving the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft protrudes leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the transmission gear 350 for operation ring A gear cover rotatably mounting the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base and covering the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side 346, and.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346, and detects a rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347 And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left.

  The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape which is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and opened leftward. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is constituted by a spur gear-like first gear 344a meshing with the drive gear, and a spur gear-like second gear 344b integrally rotating with the first gear 344a and having a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a having a diameter (a size twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) larger than the transmission gear 344 and extends in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and meshes with the drive gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345 b have a length in the circumferential direction equal to the interval at which they are separated in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345 b are arranged circumferentially at intervals of a rotational angle of 45 degrees. The detection pieces 345 b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345 b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction at an interval different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345 b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated at a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thereby, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It is supposed to be. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected through the transmission detection gear member 345.

  In the assembled state, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring. Engage with Further, the whole of the rotary drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 can freely set the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the transmission gear for operation ring by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 may cause the rotary operation unit 302 to oscillate in a reciprocating manner by oscillating the drive gear 343 by means of the operation ring drive motor 342 by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

  In the rotary drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated. The detection piece 345 b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation direction of the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be given to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by combining these as appropriate, it is possible to provide the rotation operation unit 302 with an operation feeling or click feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The transmission gear 350 for operation ring of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 53, FIG. 54 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is for transmitting rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the gear of the operation portion base 320 It is rotatably attached to the bearing 325.

  The transmission gear 350 for operation ring rotates integrally with the ring gear portion 350a in the bevel gear shape, which meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the transmission detection of the rotation drive unit 340 And a spur gear-like drive-side gear portion 350b engaged with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The pitch circle of the ring gear portion 350a and the drive gear portion 350b are formed to have the same diameter. The bevel gear-like ring side gear portion 350 a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The transmission gear 350 for operation ring is inserted from above into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320, and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation portion base 320, so that it is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320. Be

  In the operation ring transmission gear 350, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled in the effect operation unit 300, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotational drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be transmitted and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Effect operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 53, FIG. 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation unit base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and can emit light and decorate the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annular ring is divided back and forth, and is configured of a front decoration substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decoration substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arrayed along the outer circumference on each of the top surfaces of the front decoration substrate 352a and the rear decoration substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is located below the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is covered with a decoration substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. Similar to the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352, the decoration substrate cover 353 is formed in a form divided into front and rear, and is a front substrate cover that covers the front decoration substrate 352a from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 A rear substrate cover 353 b and a rear substrate cover 353 b attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320 from the upper side covering the rear decorative substrate 352 b are configured.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and thereby the rotation operation unit 302 is configured through the decoration substrate cover 353 and the through hole 331 c of the ring attachment base 331. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be illuminated and decorated from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the light emission decoration that the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 53, FIG. 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 in the operation portion base 320 with the output direction directed upward.

Here, the principle of the vibration speaker 354 will be briefly described. The vibration speaker 354 is provided with a voice coil, a magnet, a yoke, a diaphragm, and the like as in a general dynamic type speaker. Further, a magnetic circuit portion provided with the magnet is elastically supported in the vibration speaker 354. When a sine wave of a predetermined frequency is input to the voice coil from the sound source IC, the voice coil is excited, and the elastically supported magnetic circuit resonates to generate a vibration, thereby causing a vibration speaker. It is a mechanism to transmit vibration to the outside of 354.
On the other hand, as a conventional method of generating vibration, there is known a method of generating vibration by rotating a motor (so-called "eccentric motor") having an eccentric weight attached to the output shaft of a cylindrical coreless motor. .
Compared with this method, the method using the vibration speaker 354 has advantages such as thinness, space saving, strong vibration compared to the method using the eccentric motor of the same size, and high directivity of vibration. There is. Further, the system using an eccentric motor has a large load on the output shaft and is fragile, whereas the vibration speaker 354 has an advantage of high durability.

The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the main body 321 via the leg 361 b of the button unit base 361, and the vertical vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 is transmitted from the bottom wall of the main body 321 to the button unit base It is configured to be transmitted to the effect operation button unit 360 via the leg 361 b of 361.
Further, the rendering operation ring 330 is attached to the main body portion 321 via the flange portion 322, and vertical vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 is produced from the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 via the flange portion 322. It is configured to travel to the ring 330.
Further, the main body 321 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 via a plurality of legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body 321, and the vertical vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 is the main body It is configured to be transmitted to the unit lower cover 311 via a plurality of legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom wall of the main body 321 from the bottom wall 321.
Furthermore, vibrations from the unit lower cover 311 and the flange portion 322 are transmitted to the unit front cover 312.

  As described above, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320, and the vibration is transmitted through the operation unit base 320, whereby the entire effect operation unit 300 can be vibrated.

  Further, the axis passing through the center of the vibration speaker 354 vertically and the axis passing perpendicularly through the surface forming the surface of the pressing operation unit 303 are the same. The vibration speaker 354 generates vibration with respect to the axial direction of an axis passing vertically through the center of the vibration speaker 354. Therefore, the axis passing perpendicularly through the center of the vibration speaker 354 and the surface forming the surface of the pressing operation unit 303 are made perpendicular. By making the passing axis the same, the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 can be suitably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 303.

  Further, an axis passing through the center of the vibration speaker 354 perpendicularly and an axis passing through the center of the surface forming the surface of the pressing operation part 303 are the same. The vibration speaker 354 generates vibration with respect to the axial direction of an axis passing perpendicularly through the center of the vibration speaker 354. Therefore, an axis passing perpendicularly through the center of the vibration speaker 354 and the center of the surface forming the surface of the pressing operation unit 303 The vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 can be suitably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 303 by making the axis passing through vertically the same.

  Further, the vibration direction of the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 and the operation direction of the pressing operation unit 303 are configured to be parallel to each other. In this case, in response to the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 by the player, the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 can be directly transmitted to the player.

  In addition, the vibration speaker 354 is not attached to a member moved by the pressing operation by the player like the pressing operation unit 303, but the bottom wall of the main body 321 does not move directly by the pressing operation by the player. Is attached to be separated from the pressing operation unit 303. Thus, even when the player strongly operates the pressing operation unit 303 and a strong impact is transmitted to the effect operating unit 301, the vibration speaker 354 is moved by the pressing operation by the player like the pressing operation unit 303. As compared with the case where the vibration speaker 354 is mounted in a member to be mounted, it is possible to suppress an impact given to a movable body such as a voice coil and a diaphragm provided inside the vibration speaker 354 and to prevent them from being damaged.

  The means for generating the vibration is not limited to the vibration speaker 354. For example, even when an eccentric motor is employed as the means for generating the vibration, the eccentric motor is also moved by the pressing operation by the player. By attaching it to a part that does not occur, it is possible to prevent damage to the output shaft of the eccentric motor and the like.

  Although the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320 by transmitting the generated vibration to the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320, in addition to this, the effect operation By transmitting vibration to the dish unit 200 to which the unit 300 is attached, the lower dish 202 of the dish decoration unit 250 constituting the dish unit 200 and the upper dish 201 of the dish base unit 210 also constituting the dish unit 200 are It may be vibrated.

  In this case, when the effect operation unit 300 is vibrated as effects in the gaming machine, vibration is generated as effect even for a player who puts his hand on the upper plate 201 without touching the effect operation unit 300. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest because it can be recognized.

  In addition, by vibrating the upper tray 201, it becomes possible to smoothly supply the game balls B staying on the upper tray 201 to the ball launcher 540.

  Further, by vibrating the lower plate 202, it becomes possible to smoothly discharge the gaming balls B stagnating in the lower plate 202 to the lower side of the plate unit 200.

Although an example in which the vibration from the vibration speaker 354 vibrates the whole of the rendering operation unit 300 and further transmits the vibration to the plate unit 200 to which the rendering operation unit 300 is attached, the vibration is not transmitted to the handle unit 180 It is desirable to do so. This is because vibration of the handle unit 180 may interfere with the operation of the handle 182 by the player.
In order to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the handle unit 180, a member that absorbs the vibration may be provided inside the handle insertion opening 252g, or the magnitude of the vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 may be adjusted.

  In addition, the effect operation unit 300 has an upper gap with respect to the effect operation unit 300 because there is a gap between the center press operation unit 303 a and the outer periphery press operation unit 303 b and a gap between the outer periphery press operation unit 303 b and the rotation operation unit 302. As a foreign matter, there is a possibility that liquid such as coffee or juice, or a powdery object such as cigarette ash or dust may enter. In this case, various sensors and motors provided in the rendering operation unit 300 cause problems, a gap between the central pressing portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b, and a gap between the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and the rotational operating portion 302. If the foreign matter is caught in, there is a possibility that the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, the rotation operation unit 302, etc. may not move smoothly, etc. It is desirable to provide a mechanism to

  Therefore, when the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration as the effect in the gaming machine and the entire effect operation unit 300 vibrates, these foreign substances fall downward in the effect operation unit 300 and the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 It gathers, and it is comprised so that it can drain to the exterior from the drainage hole 311a finally. Further, since the vibration speaker 354 is installed below the rendering operation unit 300, it is possible to efficiently transmit the vibration to the unit lower cover 311 which is also installed below the rendering operation unit 300. .

  Generation of vibration by the vibration speaker 354 is used as an effect in the gaming machine, but at this time, since the discharge of the foreign material can also be performed simultaneously, it is possible to cope with the entry of the foreign material without interrupting the game. It becomes. Further, as the effect in the gaming machine, the generation of the vibration by the vibration speaker 354 occurs with a predetermined probability, so that the foreign matter is periodically discharged, so that the effect operation unit 300 operates normally over a long period of time It becomes possible.

Although an example in which vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354 is shown as the effect by the gaming machine, a store clerk or a player who has made a foreign object invade can arbitrarily operate the effect operation unit 301 so that the vibration speaker 354 is used. Vibration may be generated.
In this case, it is preferable that vibration can be generated by the vibration speaker 354 by operating the effect operation unit 301 at the time of non-gaming where the symbol does not change or at the time of power on. Thereby, the amount of foreign matter entering the rendering operation unit 300 is large, and the foreign matter is promptly drained from the drainage hole 311a as compared with the case of waiting for the occurrence of the vibration by the vibration speaker 354 by chance as the effect in the gaming machine. It becomes possible.
Further, when the vibration of the vibration speaker 354 is optionally generated by operating the effect operation unit 301, compared with the case where the vibration by the vibration speaker 354 is used for the effect in the gaming machine, the duration and strength are different. Vibration may be generated.

On the other hand, as an effect in the gaming machine, even when the pressing operation unit 303 moves up or down or the rotation operation unit 302 rotates, discharge of the foreign matter which has entered as in the case where the vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354 It can prompt you.
Further, as in the case of generating the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, the store clerk or the player himself who has caused the foreign object to arbitrarily raise or lower the pressing operation unit 303 by operating the effect operation unit 301. Alternatively, the rotation operation unit 302 may be able to be rotated.
In this case, by operating the effect operation unit 301 at the time of non-gaming where the symbol does not change or at the time of power on, it is possible to generate rise and fall of the press operation unit 303 and rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. Good. As a result, the amount of foreign matter entering the rendering operation unit 300 is large, and it is compared with the case where waiting for the pressing operation unit 303 to ascend or descend or the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 happens as an effect in the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to promptly discharge the foreign matter from the drainage hole 311a.
In addition, when raising or lowering the pressing operation unit 303 and optionally causing rotation of the rotation operating unit 302 by operating the rendering operation unit 301, raising or lowering of the pressing operation unit 303, of the presentation operation ring 330 As compared with the case where rotation is used for rendering in a gaming machine, elevation and rotation may be generated at different durations or speeds.

  In the present embodiment, when the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration, a sound wave with a frequency of about 40 Hz ± 2 Hz is output, but this frequency is close to the lower limit of the human audible range, and the gaming machine Considering the masking effect of environmental sounds such as pachinko halls and other audible sounds output from other speakers (for example, the main frame speaker 622) such as pachinko halls in which the game machine is installed .

  On the other hand, the vibration speaker 354 is controlled to emit an audible sound like a normal speaker by giving a signal from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354 to output a sound wave having a high frequency as compared with the case of generating the vibration. It is also possible.

  As described above, the vibration speaker 354 provided in the rendering operation unit 300 can output both the vibration and the audible sound according to the signal supplied from the sound source IC.

  Further, by changing the amplitude of the signal supplied from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354, the strength of the vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 can be changed.

  Further, the signal supplied from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354 may be supplied continuously or may be supplied intermittently. For example, continuous vibration may be generated by supplying a signal continuously for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), or the supply and reception of the signal may be started and stopped every predetermined period (for example, 1 second). By doing this, intermittent vibration may be generated. This makes it possible to improve the interest.

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor and rotates the rotation operation unit 302 by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. At this time, when vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354, the operation unit base 320 is rotated. Through this, strong vibration is transmitted to the operation ring drive motor 342, which may cause the operation ring drive motor 342 to be out of step. Therefore, it is desirable that the driving of the operation ring drive motor 342 and the generation of the vibration by the vibration speaker 354 be performed exclusively. For example, after the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 and then stopped, the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration or the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration, and then the vibration is generated. It is preferable to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 after stopping the rotation operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation ring drive motor 342 from being out of step, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the rotation control of the rotation operation unit 302.

  In addition, although the pressing operation unit 303 is raised or lowered by driving the operation button elevation drive motor 367, even when a stepping motor is adopted as the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the operation ring drive motor 342 As in the case, it is desirable that the driving of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 and the generation of the vibration by the vibration speaker 354 be performed exclusively. As a result, it is possible to prevent the step-up / down drive motor 367 from being out of step, and it is possible to increase the accuracy of control for raising or lowering the pressing operation unit 303.

  Further, it is preferable that the vibration transmitted to the game area 5a can be generated by the vibration speaker 354 by operating the effect operation unit 301 at the time of non-gaming where the symbol does not change or at the time of power on. As a result, without opening the door frame 3, the ball clogs (the so-called "grape" state) in which the game ball B is clogged between the obstacle nail and the obstacle nail or between the obstacle nail and various features. It becomes possible to eliminate a state in which the ball is pinched (a so-called "ball bite" state) by the winning device.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The rendering operation button unit 360 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the lower front. FIG. 62A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lowered position, and FIG. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face in the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 which can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is configured of a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b formed to cover the outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has an outer periphery formed in a substantially circular shape, and is disposed at an object bordering on a central axis of the button unit base 361 attached within the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the button unit base 361. A disc-like member having a pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a cylindrical shape and connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and having a circular outer periphery smaller than the button unit base 361 Between the upper base 363 and the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361, the guide shaft 362 is movably attached in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. Disc-shaped lifting and lowering base 364 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively It includes a pair of lift springs 365, the a and elevating base 364 is being biased upward.

  In addition, the presentation operation button unit 360 extends cylindrically upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has a central shaft 366 whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363 and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361 Engaging with the operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 A spur gear-like driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361 and an elevation cam drive gear member rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably inserted by the central shaft 366 being inserted therein. 370, the lifting cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected and the central shaft A lift cam member 371 for vertically moving the lift base 364 by inserting and rotatably attaching and moving the lift base 364, the lift drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lift cam drive gear member 370 is covered from above. And a disk-shaped gear cover 372 mounted on the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the rendering operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape whose inner diameter is larger than the upper base and extends vertically, and is mounted movably in the vertical direction by the pair of guide shafts 362 above the lift base 364 Substantially the same as the central button main body 373 and a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button main body 373 and the elevation base 364 and biasing the central button main body 373 upward; The central button cover 375 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter and the upper end side is closed and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper side of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the center button body 373 and the center button cover 375 constitute a center pressing portion 303a.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button main body 373 on the upper surface of the elevation base 364 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted; An outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative substrate 377 and cover the outer periphery of the central button main body 373 and a portion of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 covering the outer periphery of the central button main body 373 The outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 disposed on the outer peripheral side above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 and raised and lowered so as to cover the outer peripheral surface and upper surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 having translucency with three-dimensional decoration A transparent perimeter button attached to the base 364 with the center button cover 375 facing upward at the center Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, an outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is configured by the outer periphery substrate cover 378, the outer periphery decoration lens 379, and the outer periphery button cover 380.

  Further, the rendering operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and the elevation cam driving gear member 370. An elevation detection sensor 382 for detecting elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting a rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base main body 361 a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of legs 361 b projecting downward from the base main body 361 a. The base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed in a size slightly smaller than the inner circumferential diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is attached. The lower end of the leg 361 b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached on the top surface of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361 a from the center to the front and the rear. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter that is about one half of the outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The pair of lift springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends thereof are in contact with the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361, and the upper ends are in contact with the lift base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374.

  The elevation base 364 is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The lift base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a in which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrated with a size that allows the lift cam member 371 to pass through at the center. An upright wall portion 364c cylindrically projecting upward from the periphery of the central hole 364b, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting so as to face each other into the central hole 364b near the lower end of the upright wall portion 364c There is. The pair of guide pins 364d are opposed to each other on the same axial core and rotatably mounted around the axial core.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be vertically movable in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The upper end of the upright wall 364c abuts on the upper base 363 to restrict the upward movement of the elevating base 364 and a space in which the bottom 373b of the central button main body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364c. It is formed. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The lift cam drive gear member 370 has a spur gear-like gear portion 370a engaged with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b projecting upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the lift cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. The elevating detection piece 370 c has two cylindrical portions projecting downward from the lower side and facing each other, which are notched and detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The lift cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The lift cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by the central shaft 366 being inserted at the center. The lift cam member 371 is spaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface, and includes a pair of cam portions 371a protruding outward. The pair of cam portions 371 a guides the guide pins 364 d of the elevation base 364.

  The cam portion 371a has a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial center near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end parallel to the axial center, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371 d and the third cam 371 e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364 d of the lift base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371 a.

  Further, the lift cam member 371 is provided at the lower end thereof with a connected portion 371 f connected to the connection portion 370 b of the lift cam drive gear member 370.

  The lift cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the lift cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as. The raising and lowering cam member 371 can rotate and thereby guide the guide pin 364d of the raising and lowering base 364 by the cam portion 371a to raise and lower the raising and lowering base 364.

  The central button body 373 penetrates the cylindrical portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b, and the pair of guide shafts A pair of guide holes 373c into which the guide 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the upright wall 364c of the elevation base 364 and downward from the bottom 373b It includes a pressing detection piece 373 e which is projected and detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373 f which project in a cylindrical shape rearward from the bottom portion 373 b and are inserted into the button spring 374.

  The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by the cylindrical portion 373a and the bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed such that the bottom 373 b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373 a protrudes above the upper base 363. The central opening 373 d is formed in a cylindrical shape which is extended short downward, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the lift base 364, whereby the downward movement of the central button main body 373 is restricted. Through the central opening 373 d of the central button body 373, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364 c of the elevating base 364 abuts on the upper base 363.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 into which a pair of guide bosses 373f is inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f is formed such that the lower end extends downward through the lift base 364 and a screw having a washer inserted therein is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f abuts the lower surface of the lift base 364 to restrict the upward movement of the central button body 373.

  When the bottom portion 373b (the lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 abuts against the upper surface of the elevation base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 It is formed to project downward through 364. The central button body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker biasing force than the elevation springs 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373 and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided so as to be translucent. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

  The central button decoration substrate 376 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface as full color LEDs. The center button decoration substrate 376 can cause the center button cover 375 to emit light and decorate by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full color LEDs. The outer circumference button decoration substrate 377 can cause the outer circumference decoration lens 379 and the outer circumference button cover 380 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and has an annular base portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364 and cylindrically extending upward from the inner periphery of the base portion 378a. And a cylindrical portion 378 b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

  In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as going upward are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a in the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a covering the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b extending to the center side from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a. The lower end of the cylindrical portion 380 a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  In the effect operation button unit 360, in the assembled state, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 is in a state where the elevation base 364 is biased upward by the pair of elevation springs 365, The locking portion 371 c of the cam portion 371 a of the lift cam member 371 is inserted from below. In this state, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position where it has moved downward, and the pair of lift springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button main body 373 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 It has become.

  Therefore, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rendering operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 Also project upward (see FIG. 63 etc.).

  In this state (the state of FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 The pressing detection piece 373 e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303 a is detected. In a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65C).

  Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  In this lowered position, when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the lift cam is driven through the driven gear 369 engaged with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, and the lift cam member 371 connected to the lift cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the lift cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the first position. While rolling to the left portion of the locking portion 371c in one cam 371b, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d, which rolls relative to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the biasing force of the lift spring 365 causes the guide pin 364d to move upward along the second cam 371d. At the same time, the lifting base 364 is raised to be in the raised position.

  In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in the state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. In the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b) at the lowered position is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 moves upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are projected to a position larger than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 when moved to the raised position in a state assembled in the effect operation unit 300 (see FIG. reference).

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the central button body 373 comes in contact with the lift base 364. In a state where the central button main body 373 is in contact with the elevation base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the central button main body 373 protrudes downward relative to the elevation base 364, but the elevation base 364 is a button unit base 361. Because the pressure detection piece 373 e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the elevation spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, After the center button body 373 contacts the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and along with the elevating base 364, the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b) is also in the lowered position.

  As described above, when the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the center button main body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button main body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364 However, the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressure on the center button cover 375 (center pressure operation unit 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward by a force more than the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the elevating base 364 lifts the elevating spring via the outer peripheral button cover 380 The lower end of the lifting base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevation base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) protrudes upward by the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button main body The pressing detection piece 373 e does not protrude downward from the elevation base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373 e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the center button cover 375 and the outer periphery button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising and lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button raising and lowering drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 62 (b), the third cam 371e in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the elevating base 364 is moved downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the downward movement of the lift base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d becomes the first cam Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 inserts the guide pin 364d into the locking portion 371c which is recessed upward, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

  In addition, the rendering operation button unit 360 is placed in the operating unit base 320 with its upper portion inclined forward, and is a part of the rendering operation button unit 360, a button unit base 361, a button unit base 361. The disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the above is also placed in the operation portion base 320 in a tilted state. With such a configuration, even if the liquid has entered from the gap between the center pressing operation part 303a and the outer circumference pressing operation part 303b, the entering liquid flows down the upper surface of the gear cover 372 to the front side. It will flow down into the operation unit base 320.

  In addition, an operation button lifting and lowering drive motor 367 is attached to the rear side area of the lower surface of the button unit base 361. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from flowing down to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 even if the liquid has entered from the gap between the center pressing operation portion 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b. It becomes.

  The operation button elevation drive motor 367 is provided with an operation button elevation drive motor terminal 367a for performing power supply and control on its side, but the operation button elevation drive motor terminal 367a is on the center side of the button unit base 361 It is attached to the button unit base 361 so as to face. With such a configuration, even if the liquid flows downward from the peripheral edge of the gear cover 372 toward the operation unit base 320, the liquid contacts the operation button elevation drive motor terminal 367a and an electrical failure such as a short circuit occurs. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation such as occurring.

  In the present embodiment, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 is attached to the lower surface of the button unit base 361. However, the lower surface of the button unit base 361 is provided with an upright wall which is erected vertically to the button unit base 361. The entire circumference of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 may be covered. With such a configuration, the liquid flows down the lower surface of the button unit base 361, and the liquid enters the operation button elevation drive motor 367 attached to the lower surface of the button unit base 361, and the operation button elevation drive motor 367 It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the

  Although an example in which an upright wall is provided to cover the entire circumference of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 has been described, a part of the periphery of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 may be covered by the elevation wall. For example, at least the rear side of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 may be covered by a standing wall. Further, at least the vicinity of the position where the outer periphery of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 and the peripheral edge of the button unit base 361 are closest to each other may be covered by the standing wall. In addition, for a portion where the operation button elevation drive motor terminal 367a is provided, a standing wall may be provided so as to cover at least a portion corresponding to the operation button elevation drive motor terminal 367a. On the other hand, when the button unit base 361 is attached to the button unit base 361 so that the operation button elevation drive motor terminal 367a faces the center side of the button unit base 361, a standing wall corresponding to the operation button elevation drive motor terminal 367a is provided. You may not do this. With such a configuration, the liquid flows down the lower surface of the button unit base 361, and the liquid enters the operation button elevation drive motor 367 attached to the lower surface of the button unit base 361, and the operation button elevation drive motor 367 It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the Furthermore, the heat dissipation of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 can be enhanced compared to the case where the standing wall is provided to cover the entire circumference of the operation button elevation drive motor 367.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay substrate unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay substrate 392 attached inside the substrate box 391.

  The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled in the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay substrate 392 is a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a presentation operation ring decoration board 352, a vibration speaker Relay the connection between the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the central button decoration substrate 376, the outer circumference button decoration substrate 377, the pressure detection sensor 381, the elevation detection sensor 382, and the plate unit relay substrate 214 of the plate base unit 210 There is.

  The substrate box 391 is formed in a rectangular shape in its appearance, and is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 so that its long side faces in the left-right direction. The substrate box 391 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be seen.

  In order to connect various boards, motors, sensors, etc. provided in the rendering operation unit 300 and to connect the dish unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 on the rear side surface of the operation unit relay board 392 A plurality of operation unit relay board connector portions 392a are provided. A substrate box opening 391 b is provided in the substrate box 391 at a position corresponding to the operation unit relay substrate connector 392 a in a shape in which a plane forming the rear side of the substrate box 391 is hollowed out. The shape of the substrate box opening 391 b is a shape that matches the shape of the operation unit relay substrate connector portion 392 a, and specifically, it is a square or a rectangular shape. In addition, various boards, motors, sensors, etc. provided in the rendering operation unit 300 through the board box opening 391b, and connectors provided at the end of the wiring from the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 It is connected to the operation part relay board connector part 392a.

  In the present embodiment, the substrate box opening 391 b is provided in a shape that hollows out the flat surface that forms the rear side of the substrate box 391, but it is erected upright in a standing wall shape rearward from the entire periphery of the substrate box opening 391 b A waterproof wall 391c may be provided. With such a configuration, even if the liquid flows down on the flat surface forming the rear side of the substrate box 391, the waterproof wall 391c may cause the liquid to flow down into the substrate box 391. It becomes possible to suppress.

  Although a modified example is shown in which the waterproof wall 391c is provided from the entire periphery of the substrate box opening 391b provided on the surface forming the rear side of the substrate box 391 to the rear, the part where the waterproof wall 391c is provided is the substrate box opening Instead of the entire periphery of the portion 391b, it may be only a part of the periphery. For example, at least the waterproof wall 391c may be provided on the periphery corresponding to the upper half area of the substrate box opening 391b, or it corresponds to the upper side of the substrate box opening 391b having a square or rectangular shape. At least the waterproof wall 391c may be provided on the periphery, or at least the waterproof wall 391c may not be provided on the periphery corresponding to the lower side of the square or rectangular substrate box opening 391b. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the liquid flowing into the substrate box 391. Further, the connector can be easily attached and detached at the substrate box opening 391 b.

  Although a modified example is shown in which the waterproof wall 391c is provided from the peripheral edge of the substrate box opening 391b provided on the surface forming the rear side of the substrate box 391 to the rear, the part where the waterproof wall 391c is provided is the substrate box opening It is good also as parts other than the circumference of 391b. For example, the waterproof wall 391 c may be provided at a position separated from the substrate box opening 391 b. Further, one waterproof wall 391 c may be provided to suppress the inflow of liquid to the plurality of substrate box openings 391 b. With such a configuration, even if the liquid flows down on the flat surface forming the rear side of the substrate box 391, the waterproof wall 391c may cause the liquid to flow down into the substrate box 391. It becomes possible to suppress. Further, the connector can be easily attached and detached at the substrate box opening 391 b.

  Furthermore, the waterproof wall 391c may be formed in a straight line, and the waterproof wall 391c may be formed to go downward as going rightward or leftward. With such a configuration, even if the liquid flows down on the flat surface forming the rear side of the substrate box 391, the waterproof wall 391c may cause the liquid to flow down into the substrate box 391. It becomes possible to suppress. Furthermore, by providing a slope on the waterproof wall 391c, it is possible to guide the flowing down liquid to the right or left direction, and to move away the liquid flowing down from other articles below the waterproof wall 391c. Is possible.

  The operation unit relay substrate 392 is attached at a position between various substrates, motors, sensors, etc. provided in the rendering operation unit 300 and the plate unit relay substrate 214 of the plate base unit 210 in the front-rear direction. . With such a configuration, the length of wiring connecting various boards, motors, sensors, etc. provided in the rendering operation unit 300 and the operation part relay board 392, the operation part relay board 392, and the tray unit relay It is possible to shorten the total extension with the length of the wiring connecting the substrate 214.

  The substrate box 391 is mounted so as to have a distance in the front-rear direction from the gap between the center pressing operating portion 303 a and the outer periphery pressing operating portion 303 b in the rendering operation unit 300 and the gap between the outer periphery pressing operating portion 303 b and the rotation operating portion 302. It is done. The substrate box 391 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. With such a configuration, when the liquid enters the gap between the center pressing operation unit 303 a and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b in the effect operation unit 300 or the gap between the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b and the rotation operation unit 302 However, the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 becomes a wall, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the liquid flows down to the substrate box 391.

  The substrate box 391 is mounted on the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 so that the upper portion thereof is inclined forward. With such a configuration, the area of the substrate box 391 in plan view can be reduced compared to the case where the substrate box 391 is mounted parallel to the horizontal plane, and it flows down from above It is possible to reduce the influence of the liquid.

  In the present embodiment, the substrate box 391 is attached on the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 so that the upper part is inclined forward, but the substrate box 391 is perpendicular to the horizontal plane, You may attach it. With such a configuration, the substrate box 391 in plan view can be compared to the case where the substrate box 391 is mounted parallel to a horizontal surface or the case where the upper portion of the substrate box 391 is inclined forward. The area of the fluid can be reduced, and the influence of the liquid flowing down from above can be reduced.

  Although the example in which the substrate box 391 is mounted on the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 so as to be perpendicular to the horizontal plane is shown, the substrate box 391 is attached so that the long side of the substrate box 391 is directed vertically. May be With such a configuration, the area of the substrate box 391 in plan view can be further reduced, and the influence of the liquid flowing down from above can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the substrate box opening 391 b is provided in such a shape as to hollow the flat surface forming the rear side of the substrate box 391, and various kinds provided in the rendering operation unit 300 through the substrate box opening 391 b. And the connector provided at the end of the wiring from the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 are connected to the operation part relay board connector portion 392a, but the board box 391 is covered The substrate box cover 393 may be attached from the rear of the substrate box 391 so as to cover at least a part of the substrate box 391. The substrate box cover 393 is preferably formed in a planar shape parallel to the plane that forms the rear side of the substrate box 391. Moreover, as for the substrate box cover 393, it is desirable to provide a fixed space | interval with the plane which forms the back side of the substrate box 391, and the planar part which comprises a part of board | substrate box cover 393. FIG. In addition, the substrate box cover 393 may be formed in a convex shape rearward to cover at least a part of the upper end, the left and right ends, and the lower end of the substrate box 391. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which liquid enters the operation unit relay board connector portion 392a.

  Although the modification which attached the substrate box cover 393 which covers the substrate box 391 from the back of the substrate box 391 was shown, in the crevice formed between the substrate box 391 and the substrate box cover 393, the operation part relay substrate connector part The surplus portion of the wiring connected to 392a may be stored. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which various wires in the rendering operation unit 300 are contaminated by the liquid flowing down.

  Although the modification which attached the substrate box cover 393 which covers the substrate box 391 from the back of the substrate box 391 was shown, the convex substrate box cover liquid which guides the fluid which flowed down on the back of the substrate box cover 393 to the left and right The guiding portion 393 a may be provided on the rear surface of the substrate box cover 393 so as to stand upright. Specifically, on the rear surface of the substrate box cover 393, the substrate box cover liquid guiding portion 393a may be formed in a straight line, and the substrate box cover liquid guiding portion 393a may be formed to go downward as going rightward or leftward. In addition, on the rear surface of the substrate box cover 393, two straight substrate box cover liquid guiding portions 393a are provided in a convex mountain shape on the upper side so as to distribute the liquid flowing down in the right direction and the left direction. You may Although the example in which the substrate box cover liquid guiding portion 393a is inclined in the right direction or the left direction is shown, the substrate box cover liquid guiding portion 393a may be provided in parallel in the left-right direction. With such a configuration, it is possible to keep the liquid flowing down to the substrate box cover 393 away from the portion in the gaming machine 1 where the liquid does not want to flow down.

  Although an example is shown in which the substrate box cover liquid guiding portion 393a is provided on the rear surface of the substrate box cover 393 so as to be erected, the substrate box cover liquid 393a is replaced or added with the substrate box cover liquid guiding portion 393a as described above. It is possible to have the step portion itself and to guide the liquid by the step portion.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in the plan view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation section is at the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing of the pressing section It is a front view of a saucer unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 which can be operated by the player on the top surface. The effect operation unit 301 is configured of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is a circular center pressing operation unit 303 a positioned at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and an annular outer periphery pressing operation unit disposed between the center pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operation unit 302. And 303 b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The center pressing operation unit 303 a is formed by the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b is formed by the outer periphery button cover 380 and the outer periphery substrate cover 378.

  The rendering operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operating unit 302 (the rendering operation ring 330) is lower. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward) .

  In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state where the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Figure 63 etc.)

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates clockwise in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can repeat the forward rotation and the reverse rotation in a range of a predetermined rotation angle to swing the rotation operation unit 302 back and forth to vibrate. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated clockwise in left side view through the transmission gear 350 for operation ring, and the rotation is performed. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors of a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345 b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 spaced apart in the circumferential direction is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The intervals are not integer multiples. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. Do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b.
The rotational speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted by rotationally driving the rotation operation unit 302 in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342. . Alternatively, by rotationally driving the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, it is possible to make the rotation operation heavier or to give a click feeling.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which a half or more circular arc extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. And since the rotation operation part 302 is attached in the state which the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of inner peripheral surface exposed, as shown in figure, it is formed in the shape which is easy to grasp with a player's hand .

  As a result, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, it is possible to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 in a way that the player can easily do, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 Sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can perform rotation operation even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the rotation operation part 302 is attached to the operation part base 320 on the lower surface side, it can not be grasped like a steering wheel of a car.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the rendering operation unit 300 is provided below the rendering operation ring 330 with a rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are annularly arranged. Thus, the light emitting decoration of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be performed by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. Further, in the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to emit light and decorate only a specific part of the rotating rotation operation unit 302. Thereby, the player can be illusive as if the LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302.

  In the effect operation unit 300, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 65A, the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface that is higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in the state of the descent position which projected slightly upwards. In this state, the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303 a of the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380). The sensor 381 detects a press.

  In this normal (downward position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) is not moved downward, and the pressing is detected The sensor 381 does not detect a press.

  In the normal state, when the lift cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b) The biasing force of the pair of lifting springs 365 causes the pressing base 303 along with the lifting base 364 to vigorously project upward to be in the state of the rising position (see FIG. 65B). In the state of the raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the center pressing unit 303a is pressed downward with the pressing unit 303 in the raised position, first, the center pressing unit 303a moves downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374 to move the center pressing unit 303a. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b are in substantially the same height. In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press. Furthermore, the central pressing unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing unit 303b are the rotation operating unit 302. The height is substantially the same as that of the upper surface (see FIG. 65C). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects a press.

  In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303 presses the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b downward with the pressing operation unit 303 in the raised position, the upper surface of the center pressing operation unit 303a is projected above the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b. The outer periphery pressing unit 303b and the center pressing unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing unit 303b becomes substantially flush with the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302 (see FIG. 65A). . In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press.

  As described above, regardless of the lowered position or the raised position, the pressing operation unit 303 according to the present embodiment can not be detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, attention can be drawn to the operation of the effect operating unit 301 in the player participation type effect , The player participation type can be more enjoyable.

  In addition, even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotating operation may be facilitated by the pressing operation unit 303, or the pressing operation unit 303 may be difficult to perform the rotating operation. The operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more versatile operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 66 to FIG. Fig.66 (a) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101 a in the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and to the front of the door frame left side base 401 A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402; A door frame left side decoration 404 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape which extends vertically and is opened forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a strip plate shape extending vertically, and is configured of a left side upper decorative substrate 402 a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402 b. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs.
The door frame left-side decoration substrate 402 can cause the door frame left-side decoration 404 to emit light and decorate by causing the plurality of LEDs to emit light as appropriate.

  The left side reflector 403 is formed with a through hole 403 a penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in the form which the half circular arc bulging forward extended up and down. Thus, the door frame left side decoration 404 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decoration 271 of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200 and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decoration 453 It is formed to be continuous with the lower end on the left side of.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and appears as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends from the right side of the door frame 3 in the form of a flat plate to the front substantially to the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and penetrates in the left and right direction And a light emitting side window interior decoration 410b disposed in a plurality in the side window 410a. The door frame right side unit 410 is a player who makes it difficult to see inside the gaming area of the pachinko machine disposed on the right in the gaming hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right. Thus, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 inconspicuous, and to form a player's personal space that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and extending forward cylindrically and arranged in a row vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface A plurality of LEDs are mounted on a portion corresponding to the in-window decorative portion 410b, and the in-window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and the plurality of side window in-window decorative members 412 And an internal reflector 414 which is inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration 410b.

  In addition, the door frame right side unit 410 is disposed to the front of the front end of the side window inner decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and is attached to the door frame right side base 411 and the door frame A door extending in a plate shape in the vertical and longitudinal directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and having a through hole 416a penetrating in the left and right direction to constitute a side window 410a It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical and longitudinal directions so as to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 Door frame having a through-hole 417a which extends in the shape of a circle and which penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a The side panel and 417, and a.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and covers the front side of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and the right side reflector 415 And a door frame right side decoration 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and being opened rearward. The in-side window decorative member 412 has a flat connection base 412a connecting the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) in-side window decorative portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window inner decoration portion 410b of the side window inner decoration member 412 is formed in a truncated cone-like cylinder whose front end side has a slightly smaller outer diameter than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed hemispherical ing. In the side window inner decoration member 412, the front end of the side window inner decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 from the lower side position to the upper side with respect to the vertical center. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed to have a translucent white light.

  The side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413 is attached to the front of the door frame right side base 411 at a position behind the connection base 412 a of the side window interior decoration member 412. The plurality of LEDs provided on the in-side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full color LEDs. In the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape of upper, lower, left, and right around the axis of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at the rear of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. It is done.

  The inner reflector 414 is formed in an X shape in a front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window inner decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The inner reflector 414 divides the interior of the side window inner decoration portion 410b into four in the upper, lower, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 extends up and down at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and is formed in a wave shape such that it moves forward and then moves backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. It is done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates in the front and rear direction, and a plurality of through holes 415 a are formed in which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends along the right side reflector 415 in a wavelike manner.
In the door frame right side outer panel 416, a through hole 416a penetrating in the left and right direction is formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and a door frame of the front side of the connection base 412a of the in-window decorative member 412 and the door frame The rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) can be covered. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and longitudinally, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends along the right side reflector 415 in a wavelike manner.
In the door frame right side inner panel 417, a through hole 417a penetrating in the left and right direction is formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and the door frame of the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window inner decorative member 412 The rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) can be covered. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a vertically extending strip-like plate shape, and is configured of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface as full color LEDs.
The door frame right side decoration substrate 418 can cause the door frame right side decoration 419 to emit light and decorate by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

  The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed to have a translucent white light. The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically in a wavelike manner along the right side reflector 415. Thereby, the door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened to the rear.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200 and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450 It is formed to be continuous with the right lower end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decoration 419 has a cylindrical fluorescent light Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends in a wavelike manner forward so that a quarter of the portion from the top protrudes forward, and is formed in a screen shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and can visually recognize the opposite side through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window inner decoration portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LEDs of the side window inner decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the side window interior decoration 410b can be illuminated and decorated. Then, the light emission decoration is performed on the side window inner decoration portion 410b, so that the inside of the side window 410a can be made bright and the opposite side can be made less visible through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, since the LED of the in-window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of in-window decorative portions 410b is turned off in the normal state, the side window It is possible to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window interior decorations 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if the player who is searching for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities, the pachinko machine 1 is simplified. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game in the pachinko machine 1 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of the player located in the vicinity can be blocked by the other part including the in-side window decorative part 410b. It is possible to make the whole game area 5a hard to see from the player, and by making it hard to receive the feeling as seen from other players, it is possible to cause the other players to play the game without hesitation .

  Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a glare, and the visibility through the side window 410a changes Let At this time, since the three side window inner decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, light is radiated in a band shape and in a radial manner, so the side window inner decoration portions 410b are made to be dazzling and the opposite side is made between them It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult to look into the game area 5a from another player such as the next player. As described above, since it is possible to make it difficult to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to avoid that another player pays attention to the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, the other player is distracted by being noticed. Can prevent you from feeling uncomfortable because you can not concentrate on playing games, or you can feel you are lost due to the induction of mistakes, and you can make the game more fun by letting the player concentrate on playing games It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. FIG. 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and (c) is an outside of the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in a closed state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the lower front side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the left and right sides and the front upper portion of the door frame top base 451 attached on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top base 451 And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the frame.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 attached to the left of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted A door frame top right decoration substrate 457 attached to the right of the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front Have.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 450 is disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and is attached to the front of the top upper cover 452, and the door frame top decoration Between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, the top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and attached to the front of the top upper cover 452 And a top right reflector 460 mounted on the front of the top top cover 452.

  Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached respectively to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 from below And a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from the lower side, and a door frame top Door frame top relay board mounted near upper right end of base 451 67, includes a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 is a flat plate-like main body portion 451a extending in the right and left in the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction; And a forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body 451 a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined in such a way as to move rearward as the front end moves downward, and are formed in the shape of a box opened rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side in the front view is also opened upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 in a front view. The top upper cover 452 is formed in such a shape as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451 b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect between the front end upper portions of the left and right front protrusions 451 b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 has the center in the left-right direction most projecting forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and backward as going from the center in the left-right direction to both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a which is largely cut out from the rear end to the front on the upper surface. The opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed to have a translucent white light. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a form in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a curvature which becomes smaller as going from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452 It is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451 and the center in the lateral direction bulges upward Extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape such that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is vertically separated between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a which are spaced apart in the left-right direction and connect the front end and the rear end and extend upward in a flat plate shape. A pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating vertically in the lateral direction outer side of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464 ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front as full color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can cause the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light and decorate by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can emit light and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame top right decoration substrate 457 can cause the right portion of the door frame top decoration 453 to emit light and decorate by emitting a plurality of LEDs appropriately.

  The top central reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. Through holes are formed at the positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending leftward and rightward, and is mounted such that the pair of top central speakers 462 face downward and frontward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451 b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs the high range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. The sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is emitted forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay substrate 467 includes the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, the top central speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub relay board 105.

  The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, and the front end thereof is locked to the top upper cover 452 and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and the outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are respectively continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419 to form an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As illustrated, the door frame 3 has, at the center in a front view, a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160. The door frame 3 is the dish upper left decoration 271 of the dish unit 200, the dish upper right decoration 276, the dish upper center decoration 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame The outer periphery of the door window 101 a is surrounded by the door frame 101 a by the door frame right side decoration 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  Top left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, top right decorative body 276, top center decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body Since the reference numeral 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

  In the door frame 3, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, the dish upper center decorative body 312a, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame 101 Behind the door frame top decoration 453, the dish upper left decoration board 273, dish upper right decoration board 278, dish upper center decoration board 314, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top central decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are disposed, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be made to emit light by emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate appropriately. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is coaxially disposed on the upper surface in an annular annular donut-shaped rotation operating unit 302 whose diameter is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201 and the rotation operating unit 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 below the rotation operation unit 302. Of the upper and lower two-centered upper decoration 322a and the lower center decoration 312b of a large diameter donut shape (semi-cylindrical shape or semi-tubular shape), The door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the lower center decoration of the plate 312b, the door frame right side unit 41 Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Thus, in the plate unit 200, three doughnut-shaped members are vertically aligned with the rotation operation unit 302 and the two upper and lower center decoration 3a and 312b, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the outer periphery Since the pressing operation unit 303 b and the center pressing operation unit 303 a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to stand out.

  In addition, the dish upper left decoration 271, the dish upper right decoration 276, and the dish lower left decoration 281 disposed below the dish upper center decoration 312a, the dish lower right decoration 286 and the dish lower center decoration 312b, The tube-like tube has a slightly smaller thickness, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the lower center dish decoration 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 is larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the sense of perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation portion 302 or the like operable by the player disposed on the upper side. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Furthermore, on the upper surface of the tray unit 200, the doughnut-shaped rotational operation portion 302 is rotatably mounted about an axis extending forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotational operation portion 302 has the front end side Since the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 faces the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 turns. The entire volume of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily viewed, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 performs the rotation operation, so that the player rotates immediately when the player participation type effect is performed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the diameter of the rotation operation portion 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201, and the diameters of the upper center dish decoration 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b are larger than the rotation operation portion 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate lower center decoration body 312b project more forward than the upper plate 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation section 302, the upper center dish decoration 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b are made to stand out At the same time, the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is the pachinko machine 1 different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and to appeal the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The entire configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the right front, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the left front, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  The main unit frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is performed by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in the shape of a box whose front is open as shown in the figure, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated in the inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be openable and closable to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the upper and lower ends of the front left side, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Can be mounted.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-like main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion is insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view. Body frame upper hinge member 510 to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably mounted and the body frame mounted on the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2; Body frame lower hinge set attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in a front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached And a solid 520.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view, and to the lower front of the main body frame base unit 500 A ball launcher 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped dispensing base unit 550 mounted along the front side upper side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a dispensing base unit 550. A payout unit 560 mounted on the rear side for dispensing the gaming ball B to the player, a substrate unit 620 mounted on the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 Back cover 640 which is attached to the main frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and which covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501; 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connecting cable guide member for guiding a connecting frame 503 for connecting the main body frame base 501 which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose shape in front view extends vertically and a door frame 3 side. And 502 a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

  The dispensing base unit 550 is a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a box-like ball tank attached to the dispensing base 551 and extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in the form of a groove opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a distance from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stopper 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  Payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 for guiding gaming balls B from tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, and one for gaming balls B induced by ball guidance unit 570 based on instructions from payout control board 633. Dispensing device 580 each, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the gaming ball B passed through the dispensing device 580 downward, the gaming ball B through the upper full ball path unit 600 on the door frame 3 side Or a lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the back surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the back side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main frame base 501, a plurality of door frame wedges 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and capable of locking with the door frame 3, and projecting rearward from the unit base 651. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame ridge 652 or the outer frame ridge 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame ridge 652 downward. A lock spring 655 which biases and presses the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 which moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Main unit frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the body frame, and FIG. 83 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guiding member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 is inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front to the rear, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and a lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide the connecting cable 503 And a game board lock member 505 rotatably mounted on a lower portion of the front surface of the body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth and for holding the game board 5 in an attachable and detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape with a front view shape extending vertically and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. The game board insertion slot 501b which penetrates back and forth in the height range of the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and the lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b is formed, and the game board on which the game board 5 is placed A placement board 501c, and a game board regulation part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and regulates movement of the lower end of the game board 5 in the left and right and backward.

  Further, the main frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the gaming board placement portion 501c on the front of the base main body 501a in the front view, and the launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540; It penetrates back and forth in the cylinder insertion port 501f which penetrates back and forth in the front view right side of the part 501e and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth in the front view lower left side of the game board placement part 501c. A circular speaker opening 501g for facing the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward under the speaker opening 501g and extend left and right. The cable attachment recess 501 h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached and the positive of the cable attachment recess 501 h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Furthermore, the main frame base 501 extends in a plate shape from the front right side of the gaming board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 640 is at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower end portions of the rear extension portion 501j rotatably mounted and the left end in the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a, and for mounting the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

  A game board lock member 505 is rotatably mounted on the main body frame base 501 at a position below the gaming board placement portion 501c on the front and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b, thereby making the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b removable.

  The cable attachment recess 501h of the main frame base 501 extends from the right end side of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is attached to the right of the speaker opening 501g. . The cable attachment recess 501 h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and can be rotatably mounted on the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame base unit 500 protrudes forward in the upper and lower sides of a flat guide body 502a extending in the left and right direction, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extends rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are extended, a cylindrical attachment shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the left and right ends of the guide main body 502a And a plurality of through holes 502d aligned in the direction.

  The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. It is formed. The connecting cable guiding member 502 is rotatably mounted around an axis extending up and down near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501 h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 includes a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame sub It is connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 84 etc., the connection cable guiding member 502 is an end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) to which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hinge-rotatably attached to the body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably mounted about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 by the connection cable guide member. In a state of being in contact with the front surface of the guide main body 502a so as to extend leftward from the right side of the guide main body 502a of 502, the lateral direction is the plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide main body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being clamped together with the guide main body 502a by the binding band 504 which penetrated to the pair of through-holes 502d of the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is the back of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 in a state where the assembly door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and the door frame relay board cover It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed to the left of the left end of the connection cable guiding member 502.

  In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guiding member 502 is pivoted about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the open angle α of the door frame 3 and the open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies: α / 2 ≧ β (desirably, α / 3 ≧ β) (See FIG. 84 (b)).

  The open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degree when the door frame 3 is closed (the open angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degree). The opening angle β of the connection cable guiding member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α becomes larger, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees) Transition as follows. In the present embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward relative to the main body frame base 501. The guiding of the connection cable 503 can prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 is relatively moved backward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pressed backward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guiding member 502 is pivoted about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guiding member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guiding member 502 does not obstruct the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, since the connecting cable 503 guided by the connecting cable guiding member 502 is folded 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connecting cable 503 is folded at the folded part. You can put on a bribe. Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the force for closing the connection cable 503 is acted upon by the fold when the 180-folded portion of the connection cable 503 is changed to open. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connecting cable 503 (connection cable guiding member 502) from moving in the opening direction by its fold, and the connecting cable 503 (connection cable guiding member 502) It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Furthermore, on the side of the door frame 3, the cable holder 103a is located closer to the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main frame 4, the distal end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 is the hinge pin 122 on the door frame by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guiding member 502, and the door rather than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 centering on the central axes (axial centers) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126. A tangent line contacting a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) projecting backward on the central axis (axial center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, and an angle of 45 degrees crossing the front surface of the main body frame 4. It is configured to be as follows. Thereby, when closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503 to close the tip end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 opened through the connection cable 503. Since it is possible to press in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed reliably. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 which rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 can be closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Main frame upper hinge member]
The main frame upper hinge member 510 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  An upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape downward, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511 And a main frame upper hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates vertically in the front view left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 at a horizontally extending portion, and the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a for pivotally supporting the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 Have.

  A portion of the upper hinge main body 511 which is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501 k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500. The main frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 inserted in the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. A door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 can be mounted so that the main frame 4 can be hinged rotatably relative to the outer frame 2 in cooperation with the lower main frame hinge assembly 520, and the door frame relative to the main frame 4 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2. The lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

  The lower main frame hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape upward And a lower hinge second body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate material extending horizontally is bent in an L shape upward. The lower horizontal hinge assembly 520 is provided with a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 at a distance from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower portion thereof. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below for the outer frame It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above A hinge hole 522a, and a restriction piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a at the left side of the horizontally extending portion, for restricting the pivoting range of the door frame 3; And. The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 5011 of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500. Be The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 can attach the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the main frame upper hinge member 510, and the door frame 3 to the main frame 4. The hinge can be mounted rotatably.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 81, FIG. 82 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The cross-sectional shape in plan view of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed in a U shape whose right side is opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion material.

  In the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the movement of the game board 5 inserted in the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 is restricted forward and upward to the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position control members 531 are vertically spaced apart and attached.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents the insertion of unauthorized tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower front of the main unit frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door unit 3 is attached to the main unit 4 It is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can strike the gaming ball B with a strength according to the turning angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to a flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and to the rear surface of the right side of the launch base 541 in a front view From around the tip of the hitting ball 543, a shooting solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose axis extends forward through the shooting base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the shooting solenoid 542, and The game ball B is mounted on the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward and to the left, and the game ball B is rollable.

  In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feed unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544 When the handle 182 is turned in the state where it is in motion, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength according to the turning operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hit ball 543. The game ball B hit by the hitting ball 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the impact strength of the game ball B, etc., the launch rails 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rails 1001 and the inner rails 1002) Between the two, it falls to the ball socket 150 c of the lower far cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the far cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Disbursement base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. Fig. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit as viewed from the rear. Dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of main body frame base unit 500.

  The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a is substantially the same as the top plate portion The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side in front view of the top plate portion 551a is substantially the same width as that of the top plate portion 551a and is shortened short, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a And a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b Back plate left portion 551e and inner plate portion 551f extending backward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left side plate portion 551b, and from the front of the lower side of left side plate portion 551b to the right Extend to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e It includes a bottom plate portion 551g and a connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in a front view, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and in an L shape.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the lateral direction substantially the same as the width in the left-right direction of the game board slot 501b of the main frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b is the upper and lower sides of the game board slot 501b It extends up and down approximately the same length as the direction height. The front end of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c of the dispensing base 551 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

  Further, the dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion which is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the portion is dispensed Unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward in the upper part of the right side surface of the inner side plate portion 551 f in a front view, and has a back cover attaching portion 551 i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  Dispensing base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of top plate portion 551a of dispensing base 551 and extends in the left and right box-like ball tank 552 opened upward, and the portion of dispensing base 551 extending in the left and right And a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 at the upper side and extending in the form of a groove opened upward to the left.

[Electrostatic noise countermeasure]
By the way, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a plurality of control boards including the main control board 1310 are mounted, and game control, effect control, and the like by cooperation of those control boards via commands output from the main control board 1310 Various controls such as payout control are performed. Since a large number of electronic components such as CPUs susceptible to electromagnetic noise are mounted on these control boards, in order to guarantee a stable gaming operation without malfunction, the effects of electromagnetic noise are eliminated properly It is very important.

  Although various sources of this electromagnetic wave noise can be considered, a game ball is a noise source unique to a game machine using a game ball as a game medium, such as a ball game machine, and having the largest influence. That is, the gaming balls are supplied to the ball tank 552 from above each gaming machine by the gaming island equipment, and after being provided for gaming in the gaming machine, are recovered again to the gaming island, but in the movement process Static electricity is generated by the friction between the gaming balls, the friction between the gaming balls and the passage wall, and the like. Then, an electromagnetic wave noise is generated by the discharge from the charged game ball, which adversely affects electronic components such as a CPU.

  As described above, the ball tank 552 is the place where the largest number of gaming balls serving as noise sources are supplied and concentrated. Next, a tank rail 553 for guiding the gaming ball from the ball tank 552 to the payout device 580 is provided. That is, the amount of static electricity accumulated in the ball tank 552 is considered to be the largest. Therefore, it is considered to be a good idea to discharge static electricity in the immediate vicinity of the ball tank 552. Also, in order to realize a more stable gaming operation, in addition to the measures to suppress the generation of electromagnetic wave noise itself due to such a momentary discharge of static electricity, even if electromagnetic wave noise is generated, it is to electronic parts by it Measures that can eliminate the negative effects of

  In the conventional gaming machine, for example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-120593 (paragraph [0335], FIG. 68, FIG. 69), the charge removal of the gaming ball inserted into the ball tank 552 Although the ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not illustrated in detail, it is configured to be grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply substrate 851 via the grounding bracket 782, It is communicated with the CR unit 6 as described in that the game ball can remove the charged static electricity by coming into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731. In order to easily supply the power supply AC 24 V, which is a power supply for communication, each ground is temporarily collected on the power supply substrate 630 (see FIG. 95) disposed on the side of the CR unit 6 under the main frame 4 of the gaming machine. , It has been grounded through the power supply board 630 is connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility.

  FIG. 202 (a) is a block diagram showing an earth system of a conventional gaming machine showing this aspect. As shown in FIG. 202 (a), conventionally, static electricity generated in various places such as the ball tank 552, various control boards as represented by the main control board 1310, and the interface board 635 which interfaces with the CR unit 6 is Once integrated on the power supply substrate 630, the power supply substrate 630 is connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility and grounded.

  Since the power supply substrate 630 is generally heavy, it is often disposed below in the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to concentrate on the ground power supply substrate 630, it is necessary to draw the ground wire from the ball tank 552 on the upper side of the gaming machine, the payout device 580, etc. toward the power supply substrate 630 below. By thus routing the earth wire, there is a possibility that electromagnetic wave noise may be transmitted to various control boards existing along the way and have an unexpected influence. In addition, since the ground wire is concentrated on the power supply substrate 630, if any problem occurs in the power supply substrate 630, the ground may be affected, or the current may flow to the ground wire to affect the operation of the power supply substrate 630. There was a risk of giving. Furthermore, when the ground point of the island facility is located above the gaming machine, it may be complicated because it is necessary to extend and connect the ground wires collected by the power supply substrate 630 from the lower side to the upper side again.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the ball tank 552 is supplied with the largest number of gaming balls, and the ball tank 552 generating the most static electricity is configured to be grounded without via the power supply substrate 630.
Also, in order to quickly discharge, the ball tank 552 is made of a conductive resin (for example, a resin obtained by increasing the content of mixing the conductive filler to the ABS resin), which is conventionally generated in the ball tank 552 The static electricity is connected from the ball tank 552 directly to the ground where it was connected to the ground through a tank rail or the like. Then, an earth circuit board 559 that exerts a diselectrifying action is disposed independently of the power supply board 630 and disposed close to the ball tank 552 where static electricity is most likely accumulated, and the ball tank 552 and the earth circuit board 559 are connected by an earth wire. Furthermore, the ground circuit board 559 is connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility.

  FIG. 202 (b) is a block diagram showing a ground system of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 202 (b), static electricity generated not only at the ball tank 552 but also at the interface board 635 for interfacing with the CR unit 6, the power supply board 630, etc. It was connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility through the substrate 559 and grounded. In this way, the earth circuit board 559 plays a role of temporarily collecting static electricity generated at various places. In the present embodiment, the ball tank 552, the interface board 635, the power supply board 630 and the like, and the ground circuit board 559 are directly connected. Although the tank rail 553 for guiding the game balls is made of a transparent non-conductive resin, it may be conductive so as to have conductivity integrally with the ball tank 552. In this case, it is possible to provide conductivity by providing a metal plate inside, as conventionally done. Also, although it is possible to take the ground from the ball induction unit 570, if it is configured as such, a plurality of paths of the earth path from the ball tank 552 and the ball induction unit 570 connected to the ball tank 552 Because it is possible to cause interference between the two, it is desirable to ground at a single point from an appropriate point.

  The earth metal fitting can be connected to a plurality of locations such as the side surface or the back surface of the ball tank 552. As the supply (falling) position of the game ball to the ball tank 552 varies depending on the difference of the island facilities installed on the game arcade side, it is for connecting the ground wire for electrical connection. It is possible to change the position closer to it accordingly. The mounting position of the earth metal fitting is arbitrarily selected in the ball tank 552 and attached arbitrarily. Then, the earth circuit board 559 which exerts the charge removing action is disposed in the immediate vicinity of the ball tank 552 where static electricity is most likely to be accumulated.

  FIG. 203 is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit 550 including the ground circuit board 559 for discharging electricity, as viewed obliquely from the rear of the main body frame 4. FIG. 204 is a back view of the storage case 551 j housing the ground circuit board 559 seen through from above, and FIG. 205 is a circuit diagram of the ground circuit board 559. Further, FIG. 206 is a main part enlarged view mainly showing the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 203, the dispensing base 551 is made to be permeable, and the dispensing base unit 550 is the right side of the ball tank 552 on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the dispensing base 551 and the tank rail A case portion 558a in which the circuit portion of the external terminal plate 558 formed of a transparent resin case visible from the outside is integrated is disposed above the 553 and a circuit portion of the external terminal plate 558 (for example, a terminal Both of the connection portions between the back surface of the board and the outside of the external terminal board 558 are visible from the outside. In this example, the external terminal board 558 is a horizontally long rectangular one, and the long sides thereof are arranged along the left-right direction of the main body frame 4. Further, in this example, the short side of the external terminal board 558 is disposed along the vertical direction of the main body frame 4, but the short side of the external terminal board 558 is relative to the vertical direction of the main body frame 4. It may be arranged inclined. In addition, an external terminal board 558 (connection portion) is disposed on the rear surface of the case portion 558a.

In addition, a thin box-shaped storage case 551 j made of transparent resin whose inside can be visually recognized is disposed above the inside of the case portion 558 a of the external terminal board 558, and the inside of the storage case 551 j is neutralized. A ground circuit board 559 is housed with the back surface (solder surface) facing upward. Therefore, in addition to the connection portion of the external terminal board 558, both the rear surface of the terminal board of the external terminal board 558 and the rear surface of the ground circuit board 559 and the connector portion described later are provided so as to be easily visible from the outside. In the present embodiment, although it is possible to visually recognize from the outside by a transparent resin case, the present invention is not limited to this, and a hole (for example, a slit, a groove, etc.) may be opened in the case portion which is not limited to transparency. In addition to the connection portion of the external terminal board 558 from the hole, the back surface of the terminal board of the external terminal board 558, the back surface of the ground circuit board 559, and both connector portions described later can be easily viewed from the outside. It is also good.
Further, if the payout base 551 is also formed of a transparent resin, the back surface (solder surface) of the external terminal board 558 can be visually recognized from the inside if the game board is removed. Note that the storage case portion 551 j may be formed separately or integrally with the dispensing base 551.

  Since the ground circuit board 559 is provided at such a position, when the gaming machine is viewed from the front of the main body frame 4, simply by removing the game board, the payout base unit 550 or the external included in the unit there. The terminal plate 558 and the ground circuit board 559 can be visually recognized. At this time, the external terminal board 558 and the ground circuit board 559 are located near the upper left when viewed from the front of the main body frame 4. Therefore, it is necessary to open the door widely when attempting to conduct a fraudulent act. It becomes difficult to attach an illegal electrical element to the ground circuit board 559 or the like, and even if it is performed, it becomes easy to find out that an illegal act is being performed from the outside.

[Fixing mode of ball tank 552]
The fixing mode of the ball tank 552 in the present example will be described based on FIG. The ball tank 552 is attached by screwing to the left side of the upper back surface of the delivery base 551 having permeability. In this example, laterally protruding attachment portions 552 a and 552 b are formed on the left and right sides of the upper portion of the front portion of the ball tank 552 that abuts on the attachment surface to the dispensing base 551. Then, the mounting base 552 is screwed to the mounting portions 552a and 552b from the rear of the main body frame 4 respectively.

  Further, the ball tank 552 is provided with a mounting portion 552c by a boss formed to protrude substantially at the center of the outer surface of the ball tank 552, and a boss portion protrudingly formed in line in the front-rear direction at the rear of the right side portion in back view of the ball tank 552 The mounting portion 552d of the tank rail 553 and the mounting portion 552e of the grounding metal are provided.

  The tank rail 553 is attached to the attachment portions 552 c and 552 d of the ball tank 552 by screwing from below. Further, in the present embodiment, a ground fitting connected to one end of the ground wire 5591 (see FIG. 204) is screwed from below to the mounting portion 552e of the ball tank by a metal screw (not shown).

[Attachment of earth metal fitting in ball tank 552]
In the present embodiment, the mounting portion 552e of the earth metal fitting of the ball tank 552 is provided separately and exclusively for the other mounting portion, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to being provided independently. It is also possible to share it with the attachment part of. Each example is listed below.

  For example, in the case where the supply location of the game balls from the island facility installed on the game arcade side is concentrated on the left side inside the ball tank 552 in the perspective view shown from the back side of the game machine 1 of FIG. The static electricity is most likely accumulated on the left side of the ball tank 552 near the entry point of the game ball. In such a case, the grounding member may be fastened together with the mounting base 552a to the dispensing base 551 with a metal screw.

  Also, for example, the supply location of the game balls from the island facility installed on the game arcade side is concentrated at the central portion inside the ball tank 552 in the perspective view shown from the back side of the game machine 1 of FIG. In this case, static electricity is most likely accumulated in the central portion of the ball tank 552 in the vicinity of the entry point of the game ball. In such a case, the grounding metal may be fastened together with the tank rail 553 to the mounting portion 552c from below with a metal screw.

  Furthermore, for example, in the case where the game ball supply point from the island facility installed on the game arcade side is concentrated on the right side of the ball tank 552 in the perspective view shown from the back side of the game machine 1 of FIG. The static electricity is most likely accumulated on the right side of the ball tank 552 near the entry point of the game ball. In addition, in the right side portion of the ball tank 552, a large number of game balls charged with static electricity are likely to collect static electricity, in addition to the entry point of the game balls. Furthermore, since the tank rail 553 has the ball rectifying member 556 for aligning the gaming balls in a line so as not to overlap vertically, the gaming balls are easily held. In such a case, the grounding member may be fastened together with the tank rail 553 from below with a metal screw at the mounting portion 552d.

  FIG. 204 is a perspective view of the storage case portion 551 j of the dispensing base unit 550 including the ground circuit board 559 for discharging electricity, as viewed from above. As shown in FIG. 204, the ground circuit board 559 is provided with five connectors CN11 to CN15. More specifically, the other end of the earth wire 5591 for static elimination, one end of which is connected to the ball tank 552 made of a conductive resin, is connected to the connector CN13. It should be noted that a plurality of bosses for ground connection may be provided on the outer peripheral surface of the ball tank 552 to cope with changes in the layout configuration due to the increase in the main rendering devices provided below the ball tank 552. In order to cope with the cause of static electricity, it is desirable that the ground connection bosses be provided separately from each other.

  Further, the other end of the grounding wire 5592 for static elimination, one end of which is connected to the main frame metal member provided in the main frame 4 is connected to the connector CN14. Alternatively, the induction passage 570a of the ball induction unit 570 may be connected by a grounding fitting for grounding, and a separate connector CN16 (not shown) may be provided on the grounding circuit board to provide a grounding connection terminal. In this case, as shown in the circuit diagram of FIG. 205 described later, it may be connected in parallel to CN 13 and CN 14.

  Further, one end of the ground wire 5593 of the power supply substrate 630 is connected to the connector CN15. Furthermore, the other end of the ground wire 5595 whose one end is connected to the frame ground of the interface substrate 635 is connected to the connector CN11. The frame ground of the interface substrate 635 is electrically connected to a housing (frame) in which the CR unit 6 is housed through a predetermined wiring, and noise current from the housing in which the CR unit 6 is housed Are connected to the ground circuit board 559 via the frame ground of the interface board 635 and the ground wire 5595. One end of the ground wire 5594 is connected to the connector CN12. Then, the other end of the ground wire 5594 is connected to the ground prepared for the island facility (game machine facility) in which the game machine 1 is installed, whereby the entire game machine is grounded.

  FIG. 205 is a circuit diagram of the ground circuit board 559. One end of a ground resistor ER1 is connected to one end of a connection line from the connector CN13 to which the earth wire 5591 connected to the ball tank 552 is connected. Further, one end of a ground resistor ER2 is also connected to one end of a connection line from the connector CN14 to which the ground wire 5592 connected to the main body frame metal member provided on the main body frame 4 is connected. That is, it is electrically connected to the portion where static electricity is accumulated via earth resistance ER1 (in this example, resistance value 510Ω as an example), and by gradually guiding static electricity to the ground of the gaming machine facility, it is gradually discharged It suppresses momentary discharge of static electricity.

  Further, the other end of the earth resistance ER1 and the other end of the earth resistance ER2 are connected, and the latter stage of the connection point on the earth resistance ER1 side is bifurcated, and one of the bifurcated branches is connected to the connector CN15 (power supply board) And the other branched one is connected to the connector CN12 (island equipment). The latter stage of the connection point on the earth resistance ER2 side is connected to the connector CN11 (interface substrate).

  Since the noise current flowing from the CR unit 6 to the interface substrate 635 through the housing in which the CR unit 6 is accommodated is small, the ground wire 5595 uses a thinner ground wire than the other ground wires 5591 to 5594. The connector CN11 for connecting the ground wire 5595 is also smaller than the other connectors (see FIG. 204).

  As described above, the ground circuit board 559 including the ground resistors ER1 and ER2 is provided inside the storage case 551j, and the ground connected to the ball tank 552 at one end of the ground resistor ER1 provided on the ground circuit board 559 A wire is connected to prevent an instantaneous high-voltage discharge causing electromagnetic wave noise through the earth resistance ER1. In addition, an earth wire connected to the metal frame member of the main body frame 4 is connected to one end of the earth resistance ER2, and an instantaneous discharge of high voltage causing electromagnetic noise is suppressed via the earth resistance ER2. ing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 205, the static electricity at each location is connected to the connector CN12 (island equipment) at one point at one point so as to release the static electricity in one system. For example, it is possible to take a ground wire from the ball tank 552 and simultaneously take a ground wire from the ball induction unit 570 connected to the ball tank 552, but in that case, it occurred in the ball tank 552 Since static electricity is divided into two systems, a system directly connected to connector CN12 (island equipment) and a system connected via ball induction unit 570, the static elimination by the respective paths interfere with each other, resulting in successful grounding. There is a risk of disappearing.

  In addition, since the static electricity generated at each location is once concentrated on the ground circuit board 559 disposed on the upper surface of the back surface of the main body frame 4, the static electricity is temporarily temporarily applied to the power supply substrate 630 disposed on the lower surface of the back surface of the main body frame 4 as in the prior art. Ground wiring can be easily routed compared to integrated ones.

  The ground circuit board 559 and the external terminal board 558 are brought close to each other, and both are arranged on the right side of the upper part of the body frame 4 as viewed from the back side. Therefore, the ground wire 5594 from the ground circuit board 559 It becomes easy to simultaneously perform the connection and the connection with the island equipment of the output wiring from the external terminal board 558, and the workability is improved.

  Then, the ground wire 5594 (see FIG. 204) is connected to the other end of the ground resistor ER1 and the ground resistor ER2 toward the game machine equipment, and the ground wire 5594 is further pulled out from the rear surface of the storage case 551j. The entire game machine is grounded by connecting the ground wire 5594 drawn out and connected to the ground provided in the game arcade facility. As described above, the length of the ground wire 5591 connecting the ball tank 552 where static electricity tends to be accumulated and the ground circuit board 559 that exerts the charge removing function is configured to be the shortest as compared to other ground wires.

In addition, the power supply substrate 630 is integrated by connecting each ground wire to the ground circuit substrate 559 and connecting the ground wire 5594 drawn from the connector CN12 (island equipment) of the ground circuit substrate 559 directly to the ground 6000 of the island equipment. It can be grounded without passing. Therefore, even if any problem occurs in the power supply substrate 630, the influence of the ground can be reduced.
Also, conversely, in the prior art, grounding was performed via the power supply substrate 630, so there was a risk that the operation of the power supply substrate 630 would be affected if a large current flows in the ground wire, etc. Such a fear can also be avoided by grounding without the power supply substrate 630.

  In the embodiment, between the connector CN13 (ball tank) of the ground circuit board 559 and the connector CN12 (island equipment), and between the connector CN14 (body frame metal member) and the connector CN12 (island equipment) Although ER1 and ER2 are provided, it is not necessary to provide an earth resistance. Since the earth resistance is provided to prevent current from flowing rapidly at the time of earthing, it may be provided according to the expected generated voltage, and if necessary, the connector CN11 (interface substrate), the connector CN12 (island It is also possible to provide a resistor having an appropriate resistance value also in the equipment) and the connector CN15 (power supply substrate). In addition, an earth resistance of an appropriate size may be provided in front of the connector CN12 (island equipment) to make it possible to use a common resistance when grounding static electricity generated in each part, for example, the conductivity of the ball tank It is also possible to perform grounding with an appropriate amount of current without providing a grounding resistance by adjusting.

  The ground circuit board 559 is housed inside the housing case 551 j with the back surface (solder surface) of the board facing up, and is disposed so as to be visible from the outside of the payout unit base 550. For this reason, even if an incorrect electrical element is attached to the ground circuit board 559, it can be immediately found visually. In the lower surface of the substrate, between the connector CN13 (ball tank) of the ground circuit board 559 and the connector CN12 (island equipment), the connector CN14 (body frame metal member) and the connector CN12 (island equipment) Ground resistors ER1 and ER2 are provided between the respective connections, and are also attached in such a way as to be visible from the outside. Further, in order to prepare for an unexpected situation such as a loose connector, the storage case 551 j may be removable from the dispensing unit base 550, and the ground circuit board 559 may be removable from the storage case 551 j.

  In addition, hook portions (for example, hooks) are provided at a plurality of locations on the outer surface of the case portion 558a of the external terminal plate 558, and after hooking the earth wires to these hook portions, the hooks are attached to the ground circuit board 559. The ground wire may be connected to a connector. In this way, it is possible to suppress the influence of the weight of the ground wire on the connector due to the looseness of the ground wire itself or the looseness when the ground wire contacts another member, and the connection can be stabilized.

In addition, since the ball tank 552 is formed of resin, as shown in FIGS. 77 and 80, the gaming ball is stored in the ball tank 552 or the ball collides from the top, and the bottom of the ball tank 552 If the bottom of the ball tank 552 is bent, the ball tank 552 is not in contact with the top plate 551a of the dispensing base 551. A gap is formed to an extent to avoid. Further, by providing the gap, an impact when the game ball is inserted into the ball tank 552 from the island facility is not transmitted to the members below.
Further, in the ball tank 552, when the earth is taken from the attachment portion 552a provided on the left side and connected to the ground circuit board 559, etc., the earth wire connecting the attachment portion 552a and the earth circuit board 559 It is good to make it pass using.

  Further, as shown in the perspective view of FIG. 12, in a state where the game board 5 is fitted and mounted on the main body frame 4, the peripheral control unit 1500 is positioned below the ball tank 552. The peripheral control unit 1500 is easy to generate heat because it has an electric drive source for driving the liquid crystal display device 1600 and other movable effects for presentation. Therefore, a flame retardant polycarbonate resin (transparent or black) is used for the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. By making the peripheral control board box 1520 made of resin, the weight can be reduced as compared with the peripheral control board box 1520 made of metal.

  The peripheral control board box 1520 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is made of polycarbonate (electrically conductive resin content is adjusted to be high, which is a conductive resin having a lower electrical resistance than the ABS resin constituting the ball tank 552). Can be realized, for example, by increasing the amount of carbon contained). That is, the conductivity of the peripheral control board box 1520 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is higher than that of the ball tank 552. The peripheral control board box 1520 may be made of metal. This is because the peripheral control board 1510 susceptible to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise due to static electricity is housed inside.

  Incidentally, the peripheral control board box 1520 is also connected to the ground circuit board 559 via the earth metal fitting (not shown) via the ground wire to the main frame metal member and finally to the ground circuit board 559 via the ground wire 5592. ing. For this reason, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is configured to suppress the electromagnetic wave noise generated by the discharge of the static electricity, and is configured to quickly remove the static electricity so as to be less susceptible to the electromagnetic wave noise. Further, since the polycarbonate is resistant to high heat, the self-extinguishing ability (strong to high temperature) possessed by the polycarbonate can suppress the influence of heat transfer to the main control unit 1300 disposed therebelow.

  In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, a contact pressing portion that abuts and presses the ball supply lever that operates in the direction of opening the gaming ball on the island equipment side to the ball tank 552 Is formed on the peripheral wall of the ball tank 552. In the present embodiment, an outwardly projecting projection is provided on the upper edge of the peripheral wall forming the peripheral wall of the ball tank 552 (see the side and rear of the ball tank 552 shown in FIG. 80). ). For this reason, the impact when the ball tank 552 hits the ball supply lever can be absorbed to some extent.

  Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 on the left side of the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the left and right direction, A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553 and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 And a ball stopper 557 attached near the left end in the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left and right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left and right direction, and the front and rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front and rear direction Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached on the upper surface of the top plate 551a at a position on the right side in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

  The tank rail 553 is attached near the rear end on the left side of the top surface of the top plate 551 a of the dispensing base 551 with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is approximately one minute from the depth at which the depth in the front-rear direction is diagonal to the left and back from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 and several times the outer diameter of the gaming ball B After extending so as to be depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left at a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guiding passage 570 a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B at the left end. It inclines so that the left end side becomes low at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate 551a. In addition, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball straightening member 556, and the ball stopper 557 are attached to the tank rail 553 at the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from spreading or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

  The ball rectifying member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with respect to the axis about which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction It is rotatably mounted. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). The flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B circulating in two stages in the upper and lower directions is delayed by the rectifying pieces 556a, and the flow is rectified in the downstream side to flow in the tank rail 553 Even if the height is lowered, it does not clog the ball.

  The ball stopper 557 is mounted slidably in the lateral direction in the vicinity of the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 in the front view, and by sliding left, the bottom end opening of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from circulating from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream. The ball stopper 557 is disposed inward of a recess (not shown) formed in the dispensing base 551 and does not protrude rearward as shown in FIG. Therefore, it can be prevented that the ball stopper 557 comes into contact with the ball stopper 557 unexpectedly and is caught.

  As described above, the dispensing base unit 550 further includes the external terminal plate 558 attached to the left of the ball tank 552 on the top surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the dispensing base 551 in a front view. The external terminal board 558 is for electrically connecting between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 is provided with a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of the payout unit]
The entire configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear is there. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551 e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 is a ball guiding unit 570 for guiding the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the gaming ball B disposed under the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570 A payout device 580 for paying out one at a time based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the gaming ball B having passed through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B having passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned by the tank rails 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and in a normal state The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball passage unit 600 side based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pullout passage 580b is operated from the ball pulling lever 593 to the upper full ball passage unit The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the gaming ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the gaming ball B discharged from the ball extraction passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side through the upper full tank path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550, receives the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 and guides the gaming ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is to do.

  The ball guiding unit 570 has a box-like guiding unit base 571 having a meanderingly extending guiding passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow and is opened forward, and a front side of the guiding unit base 571 closed. The game ball B in the guide passage 570a is detected by detecting the movement of the flat guide channel front lid 572 and the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B circulating in the guide passage 570a. And a ball-off detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the shape of the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding path front cover 572 in a front view is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction. The induction passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the induction unit base 571 and extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the induction unit base 571 and then bends to the right It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the width of the unit base 571 and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

  The guiding passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front and rear right and the width in the right and left direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball B in the distribution direction in which the gaming ball B is It can be guided in one row.

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the movable piece member 573 is mounted to be able to move back and forth into the guiding passage 570a near the top. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably mounted around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side in a front view of the guide passage 570a, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed to be. In this movable piece member 573, when the gaming ball B is in contact with the portion projecting into the guiding passage 570a, the projecting portion is pushed by the gaming ball B and does not protrude backward from the inside of the guiding passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guiding passage 570a, the ball breakage detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from inside the guiding passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the gaming ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non detection state when the gaming ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

  When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570 a is a dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It is in communication with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the gaming ball B extends in a serpentine manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the entire height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many gaming can be performed in the guiding passage 570a. The ball B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the gaming ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball breakage detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the gaming ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7 b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 580 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken along the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90 (a) is a back cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball extraction movable piece is in an open state, and FIG. 90 (b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in (a) It is. Dispensing device 580 is removably attached to the underside of ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of back plate left portion 551e of dispensing base 551 of dispensing base unit 550 from the rear.

  The payout device 580 has a box-like opening in the rear and has a payout passage 580a through which game balls B can be distributed and a payout device main body 581 having a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a It has a flat-plate-like dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-like dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device body 581 and opened rearward. ing.

  Further, the dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581, and the rotating shaft is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583. A spur gear-like drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-like first transmission gear 586 meshed with the drive gear 585 and rotatably mounted by the dispenser main body 581 and the dispenser front lid 583; The second transmission gear 587 in the form of a spur gear meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 and the second transmission gear 587 Between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 having a plurality of detection pieces 588 b extending outward from the spur gear-like dispensing gear 588 a and the dispensing gear 588 a A plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the discharge gear member 588 between the discharge device main body 581 and the discharge device back cover 582 and have a plurality of blade pieces 589a protruding into the discharge passage 580a are provided. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 attached to the rear side of the discharge device main body 581 and detecting a detection piece 588b of the discharge gear member 588.

  Furthermore, the payout device 580 is attached at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582, and detects the gaming ball B, and after the payout device main body 581 and the payout device The ball extraction movable piece 592 mounted so as to be able to open and close the ball extraction passage 580b at a site branched from the ejection passage 580a by the lid 582 and the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be held at the position where the ball extraction passage 580b is closed. And a ball extraction lever 593 which is attached slidably in the vertical direction by the dispenser main body 581 and the dispenser rear lid 582.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a plan view. The dispensing device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger in the front view right than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 opens upward at a position near the left from the center in the lateral direction, and the downstream end is at a position near the right end in the lateral direction. It opens downward. Dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end by about 1/3 of the total height from the upper end so as to move little by little leftward, and after bending slightly diagonally downward from the upper side, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically to the center (rotation axis) of the discharge blade 589. Then, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball B above the center of the dispensing blade 589, a gap slightly larger than the gaming ball B with the outer periphery of the dispensing blade 589 It extends downward in a circular arc concentric with the discharge blade 589 so as to be formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right of the rear view from the center of the discharge blade 589.

  In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is disposed below the dispensing blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball removal passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches off at a portion bent rightward, and extends vertically along the left side in a rear view to the lower end in the rear view of the bottom surface It opens downward near the left end.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the gaming ball B A main body side guide wall 581a which protrudes backward and forward from each other so as to form a narrower gap than the other, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side wall in back view of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removing passage 580b And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and are a back view of a portion extending to the right in a rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top It is formed at the left position. The main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed mainly to constitute the side wall of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates through the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the dispensing device body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in a rear view. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are disposed in front of the dispensing device body 581, and the front side is covered by the dispensing device front lid 583. The delivery gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-like detection pieces 588 b extending outward at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The dispensing blade 589 is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device back cover 582. The discharge blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at the portion extending in the dispensing passage 580a from the upper side to the rotational axis and then extending to the right in the rear view. And protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The discharge blade 589 is provided with a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc having a radius larger than the radius of the gaming ball B to the center side, between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b. Thus, the payout blade 589 can regulate movement of the gaming ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotates in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear. Thus, the gaming ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially integrally rotatably mounted by the dispensing device rear lid 582 and the dispensing device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is disposed on the left in the rear view of the rotation shaft of the delivery gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the discharge blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588 b of the discharge gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the discharge blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the back and forth direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces in the dispensing passage 580a. The depth of the ball removal movable piece 592 is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a Through the gap between the two, and may be projected into the ball removal passage 580b or retracted out of the ball removal passage 580b.

  The ball extracting lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear view left in the vicinity of the upper end of the ball extracting movable piece 592. A part of the ball extraction lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the lowering end, the lower portion can be in contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592, and it is possible to regulate the rotation of the ball extraction movable piece 592 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580 b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the rising end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. See 90).

  When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the gaming ball B, which is in a state like beading on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, is the ball pulling movable piece 592. Flow to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the discharge passage 580a, the gaming ball B that has flowed down from the upstream of the discharge passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is nothing like the payout wing 589 for suppressing the flow of the gaming ball B, so the gaming ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down too early.

  As described above, in the state where the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the gaming ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball extraction passage 580b, so the ball extraction movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball vigorously, but the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispenser main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispenser rear lid 582 Since the ball pullout movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball pullout passage 580b by the contact force since it can move to the outer side than the inner surface of the ball pullout passage 580b, the ball pullout movable piece 592 is The game ball B is not pinched between the wall surface of the removal passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  From such a thing, since it is possible to make the ball removal movable piece 592 hard to break, more gaming balls B can be discharged faster to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  In addition, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the ball extraction passage 580b passes between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a at intervals where the ball extraction movable piece 592 is narrower than the gaming ball B. In order to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, the game ball B is in contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b so that the ball removal movable piece 592 has a main body side guide wall 581a and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B is moved to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball extraction movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, Only the game ball B can prevent outward movement by the space between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the gaming ball B to the outside is blocked between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the gaming ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball thereafter Since the movement of the pullout movable piece 592 is due to an inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball pullout movable piece 592, and the ball pullout movable piece 592 can be made hard to break and the main body side guide The gaming ball B does not protrude to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the gaming ball B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7 c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from below to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the back plate left portion 551 e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is to be emitted downward from the payout device 580 and guide the gaming ball B to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a square shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 is a box-like upper full tank base 601 attached to the dispensing base 551 and opened at the rear side, and a box shape attached at the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the open front And a dispenser pressing member 603 rotatably mounted near the upper end of the top full-tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispenser 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and includes a back cover attachment portion 601 a for attaching a back cover.

  In addition, the upper full tank path unit 600 is an upper discharge that opens upward near the left end in the front view on the upper surface and extends downward along the left side to a position about 2/3 the height from the lower side. It is in communication with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper discharging ball receiving passage 600a and extends about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the full height An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal discharge passage 600c extending downward from the left side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the upper ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and an upper normal discharge passage 600c An upper full tank delivery passage 600d extending downward from the front right side from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and the vicinity of the right end in the front view on the upper surface And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 92).

  On the lower surface of the upper full tank passage unit 600, the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball extraction passage 600e are sequentially opened downward from the left in front view. The upper full ball passage unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, and the upstream end of the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a is opened immediately below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600e is opened immediately below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the gaming ball B released (disbursed) from the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 passes through the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and the upper normal dispensing passage 600c or the upper full dispensing passage 600d It is discharged downward from any of the The gaming ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball removal passage 600e.

[4-7 d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate 551 g of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550 and is attached to the lower part of the upper full ball channel unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full-tan ball passage unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank passage unit 610 includes a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball extraction passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. And a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and rotatably mounted around an axis extending forward and backward at the front end of the lower full tank base 611, the lower normal discharge passage 610a and A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 which can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end opening of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b And a closing spring 614 which is biased.

  In the lower full tank passage unit 610, the lower normal discharge passage 610a, the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b extend forward in a side-by-side manner, and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. The lower full tank delivery passage 610b extends forward slightly lower than the lower normal delivery passage 610a. The lower ball removal passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full discharge passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the longitudinal direction.

  The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably mounted at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end openings (downstream end) of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. Opening is closed. The dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an operating protrusion 613 a protruding forward. The actuating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 in a front view, and as the front end face approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction It is inclined to project forward. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the actuating projection 613 a is formed to abut on the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the wafer cover unit 150 in the door frame 3.

  In the lower full tank unit 610, the lower normal discharge passage 610a, the lower full discharge passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are opened upward at the rear upper end, are assembled into the upper full at the upper end of the lower unit. It is located immediately below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue passage unit 600. Thereby, the gaming ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the gaming ball B discharged downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is the lower full payout passage 610b. , And the game balls B discharged downward from the upper ball-opening passage 600e flow in the lower ball-opening passage 610c.

  Further, when the lower full-tank passage unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal delivery passage 610 a and the lower full delivery passage 610 b pass through the fal cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It is opened immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank receptacle 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610 c is opened to face the ball removal guiding portion 627 opened to the left in the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620.

  In the lower full tank path unit 610, in the normal state (the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the actuating projection 613a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing of the fal cover unit 150. By being in contact with the portion 150f, the plate is pivoted in the counterclockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. Thus, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are opened, and are communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving hole 150b of the far cover unit 150. It is in the state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the actuating projection 613 a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the fall cover unit 150. Is pivoted in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the gaming balls B in the lower normal payout path 610a and the lower full payout path 610b can not move forward from the respective front end openings.
Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7 e. Flow of gaming balls in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the gaming balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lowering end, and the ball pulling passage 580 b branched from the discharging passage 580 a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

  A predetermined number of ball tanks 552, which are open upwards, are detected from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, based on detection of ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example. A game ball B is supplied. The gaming balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 through the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 in a state of being aligned by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the gaming ball B can not move (flow downward) downstream of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of gaming balls B stagnate upstream of the payout blade 589 It becomes.

  Then, the gaming ball B in the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball breakage detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thus, it can be seen that the gaming ball B is stored in the passage from at least the movable piece member 573 to the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the dispensing blade 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the dispensing motor 584, the gaming ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, and the dispensing blade in the dispensing passage 580a It is released downstream of 589. Then, the gaming balls B discharged from the dispensing blade 589 (the ball accommodating portion 589 b) are sent to the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600 a of the upper full ball passage unit 600 after being detected by the dispensing detection sensor 591.

  The gaming ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball passing unit 600 is disposed immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal discharge passage 600c. Then, the gaming ball B which has flowed down to the upper normal payout passage 600 c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610 a of the lower full ball passage unit 610 and the through ball passage 150 a of the far cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate-ball supply port 211 a of the plate unit base 211 in the case of FIG.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 becomes full with the game balls B, the game balls B can not be released forward from the upper ball feed opening 211a, so the payout device When the game ball B paid out from 580 comes to stay in the lower normal discharge passage 610a of the lower full tank passage unit 610 and the game ball B is further discharged, the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal discharge passage 600c of the communicating upper full ball passage unit 600. Then, when the gaming ball B is further dispensed in a state where the inside of the upper normal payout passage 600c is full of the gaming balls B, the upper normal ball storage passage 600b communicated on the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is stored. The gaming ball B starts to stagnate, and the gaming ball B starts to flow to the upper full payout path 600d side adjacent to the upper regular payout path 600c.

  Then, the gaming ball B that has flowed down to the upper full discharge passage 600 d passes through the lower full discharge passage 610 b of the lower full ball passage unit 610 and fills the full ball receptacle 150 b in the far cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Received by Thereafter, the gaming balls B received in the full tank receptacle 150b are discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. As a result, when the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  In addition, when the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B and it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, when the game balls B are further paid out, the lower plate The gaming ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. Then, when a certain number of gaming balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are full with gaming balls B (( The player is informed that the container is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detected.

  When discharging the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descent end Slide it to the position of the rising end. Thereafter, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B, and is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a , And is pushed out of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

  At this time, in the region of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down contacts the main body side guide wall 581 a and the rear lid side guide wall 582 a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592. Is less likely to break.

  The gaming ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 passes through the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, the ball ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 pass through the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 Discharged to the island facilities side of

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the bottom rear. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The base unit 620 is a main unit frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a and the speaker unit 620a attached to the lower side than the game board placement portion 501c on the rear surface of the main unit frame base 501 in the main unit frame base unit 500. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear.

  The speaker unit 620a is directed forward in the vicinity of the front end of the speaker cover 621 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 below the gaming board placement portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501. And a container-like speaker box 623 mounted on the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, and has a circular speaker attachment portion 621a formed of a plurality of slits extending in the front-rear direction near the left end in front view and extending in the vertical direction, and a front surface of the speaker attachment portion 621a A space front recess 621b recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side and a space protruding downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extending in the lateral direction and directed diagonally backward And an open connection portion 621c.

  The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. The connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43 a of the rear curtain plate member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 . The main frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container opened forward, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes the most greatly, and is stepped backward in a step-like manner toward the right in front view. It is formed so that the protrusion of. As a result, a space on the rear side to the right of the center in the front view of the speaker box 623 can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620 b, the power supply unit 620 c, and the like can be disposed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621 c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses a sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has the space front concave portion 621b which bulges forward in the front view right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621. Therefore, the enclosure 624 protrudes rearward as the speaker box 623 goes to the right The space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is secured sufficiently wide even if it is formed in a step shape so as to reduce the amount.

  In the speaker unit 620 a, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylindrical portion 43 a so as to sandwich the seal member 48. And the inner space 40a of the outer plate 2 communicate with each other. Accordingly, a large space enclosure 624 can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front plate member 42 and the rear plate member 43 on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622, and the rear of the main frame speaker 622 The sound that has been output can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space (a part of the enclosure 624) behind the main body frame speaker 622 is extended to the right in front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made with the outer frame lower assembly 40 through the connection tube portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound outputted from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. The sound can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted low frequency band can be resonated and amplified by passing the two port members 47 and can be emitted forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-reversed state, and therefore, it is outputted from the front of the main frame speaker 622 to be a dish unit The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the aperture of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which heavy bass sounds.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear a deep bass. Thus, a sound emitted from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211 b of the dish unit 200 and a sound emitted from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 Allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through cylinder 623a which extends in a cylindrical shape and communicates with the through hole 621d is formed. In the assembled state of the speaker unit 620 a, the through hole 621 d and the through cylinder 623 a communicate with each other, and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620 b of the board unit 620 is attached to the front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which the 620 c is attached.

  Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full-tank passage unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 guiding rightward and a discharge ball receiving portion receiving the gaming ball B which is opened upward on the right side in a front view on the downstream side of the ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 and which is discharged downward from the game board 5 628, and a ball outlet 629 for discharging the gaming ball B which has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the discharging ball receiver 628 downward.

  The upstream end of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 is opened leftward in the upper part of the left side surface in a front view, and the downstream end is opened on the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guiding portion 627 faces the lower end of the lower full ball passage unit 610 so that the opening at the upstream end matches the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610 The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends in the left and right direction. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 at the left end in a front view, and is inclined so as to be lower toward the right side.

  The base unit 620b guides the game balls B removed from the ball tank 552 and the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by the ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628, Since the sheet is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, the space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction can be easily secured widely in front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be enlarged, and the player can hear sounds with richer bass than conventional pachinko machines.

  The power supply unit 620c of the substrate unit 620 includes a power supply substrate 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply substrate cover attached to the rear base 626 to cover the rear side of the power supply substrate 630. And 631.

The dispensing control unit 620d includes a box-like dispensing control substrate box 632 detachably mounted on the rear side of the power supply substrate cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control substrate 633 housed in the dispensing control substrate box 632 (see FIG. 97) and.
The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 according to the pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or the payout command from the main control board of the gaming board 5 or the like. Then, the game balls B of the instructed number are to be paid out to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The dispensing control board box 632 is formed to leave a trace of opening and closing. This makes it possible to detect an unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and enhances the deterrence against fraud.

  The interface unit 620 e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620 a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. And an interface substrate cover 636 attached to the substrate base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to the rearmost portion of the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 on the rear surface of the speaker box 623. The interface board 635 is connected to an end of one (the body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface substrate 635 is connected to a power supply substrate 630, a payout control substrate 633, a main control substrate, a peripheral control substrate, and the like, and is connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface substrate cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the substrate base 634 (interface substrate 635) so as to cover a part of the dispensing control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion slot 501 b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500.
The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end of the rear extension of the rear extension 501 j of the main body frame base 501 on the right side in a front view, and the left side is a payout base 551. And the back cover mounting portion 601 a of the upper full ball passage unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side in a front view right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface is the back plate upper portion 551 d of the back plate upper portion 551 d in the assembled state. It is formed to be located on substantially the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating vertically and longitudinally. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and can visually recognize the inside of the main body frame 4 from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lockable units with the door frame 3 projecting forward from the unit base 651. A door frame wedge 652, a plurality of outer frame wedges 653 projecting backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and forward projecting from the lower end of the front end of the unit base 651 And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  In addition, the locking unit 650 biases the door frame collar 652 downward and the outer frame collar 653 upward as compared to the lock spring 655 and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. And an outer frame unlocking lever 656 for moving the outer frame collar 653 downward by protruding forward from the upper position and sliding it downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) of door frame ridges 652, the transmission cylinder 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 move forward of the front surface of the main frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, whereby the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The transmission member 133 is engaged, and rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame wedges 652 are locked to the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality of (two) The frame collar 653 is locked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650, when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, inserts a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130, and when rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, a plurality of transmission cylinders 654 The door frame wedge 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame wedges 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In the state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame weirs 653 move downward, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip end sides of the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 After moving downward and upward so as to get over the lower hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the locking state is achieved by the biasing force of the lock spring 655.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The entire configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. 99 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. General winning opening 2001 for giving a predetermined benefit (for example, payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the gaming balls B in the game area 5a, first start opening 2002, gate section 2003, a second start opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided. Therefore, the game board 5 has the game ball B accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second start opening 2004, the large opening 2005 etc in the game area 5a. In order to play the game, the player is to play a game in which the hitting operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed.

  The game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape in a substantially square shape in a front view, and the back of the front component 1000 and divides the rear end of the game area 5a. And a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails in contact with the game ball B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) in a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and to the rear face of the substrate holder 1200, and the game is performed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102) for controlling the content.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays the game situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the function display unit 1400 attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player It is attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 disposed on the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front of the game panel 1100. It further comprises a front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The outer periphery of the game panel 1100 is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 is held. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (here four) general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept the game ball B inserted into the gaming area 5a and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in 5a, and a gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball B; The second start opening 2004 and the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 can receive the game ball B according to the result of the normal lottery that the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003. A special winning opening 2005 is provided in which the game ball B can be received in any of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a start opening unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and one general winning hole 2001. A side unit 2200 attached along the inner rail 1002 in the front view left of the starting opening unit 2100 and having two general winning openings 2001, and a starting which becomes the lower right corner in the front view of the game area 5a Attacker unit 2400 attached to the right in front view of the mouth unit 2100 and having one general winning hole 2001, gate part 2003, second starting hole 2004, and big winning hole 2005, the starting hole unit 2100 and A frame-shaped center attached above the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the game area 5a in a front view. Is provided with a thing 2500, the.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape open at the front and is attached to the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall and the back surface of the back box 3010 The lock mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the display device 1600, the panel relay substrate 3031 attached to the left end in rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the inside of the back box 3010 And a plurality of back effect units 3100.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape. The front component 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end on the left side to the left side in front view and extends to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the left and right direction in front view; The inner rail 1002 disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined such that the right end is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component 1000; A stop portion 1006 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and abuts against the game ball B rolled along the outer rail 1001.

  Also, the front component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and has a closed position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space with the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member (not shown) which is pivotable in the direction of rotation to be pivotable only between the open position where it and the outer rail 1001 are open and to return to the closed position side. It has 1007.

  Furthermore, the front component member 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction in the frame. The gaming ball B induced to the rear by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (the game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and an inner portion of the inner rail 1002 which extends substantially perpendicularly from the lower end, a lower portion of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. In each part, it has a crime prevention recess 1009 that is recessed backward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1009 has a rear projection 172 protruding rearward of the crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. Thus, the space between the crime prevention cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 172 of the crime prevention cover 170 and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 which is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in a front view. The notch portion 1010 matches the notch portion 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion 1122 are penetrated to lower the full ball. The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b of the path unit 610 are adapted to face forward.

5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds the outer periphery of a flat panel panel 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and the outer periphery of which is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120, and the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) which can be sufficiently retained even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is assumed. In the present embodiment, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  The panel board 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel plate 1110 so as to penetrate front and back and to attach the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and a substantially square outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 is a through hole 1121 which detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and which is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and which penetrates in the front and rear direction with an inside having a size substantially equal to the game area 5a. Is equipped.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a notch 1122 which is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in a front view. The notch portion 1122 is formed to coincide with the notch portion 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, it penetrates through the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion 1122. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the lower full-tank passage unit 610 are made to face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 which is notched rearward from the front end at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The substrate holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state to the game board 5 and A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  With the substrate holder 1200 assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge portion 1201 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thus, the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and the bottom surface It can be made to discharge from the discharge part 1201 formed in the lower to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below.

5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. Main control unit 1300 is removably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102) for controlling game contents and payout of the game ball B, and a main control board box 1320 which accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And have.

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is broken next to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the improper opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310, through the panel relay board 3031, the function display unit 1400, the gate sensor 2401, the second start port sensor 2402, the special winning port sensor 2403, the start port solenoid 2404, the attacker solenoid 2405, the general winning port The sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the magnetic sensor 3003 are connected.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (the player side) through the door window 101 a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a gaming state (playing status), an ordinary lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  The function display unit 1400 displays, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 99, a state indicator 1401 consisting of three LEDs for displaying the gaming state, and an ordinary lottery result which is drawn by passing the game ball B against the gate portion 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 consisting of two LEDs and a normal storage indicator 1403 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations for the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003.

  In addition, the function display unit 1400 has a first special symbol display 1404 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port Second special lottery number drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, the first special hold number indicator 1405 consisting of two LEDs to display the number of reservations pertaining to the reception of the game ball B to 2002 A second special symbol display 1406 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result, and a second special hold number indicator 1407 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the reception of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 And have.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is a round consisting of five LEDs that display the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like. A display 1408 is provided.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 has a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 102) for controlling effects to be presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effects, sound effects, movable effects, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling effect images. ing.

  The peripheral control substrate 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control substrate 1310, the rendering operation unit 300, various decorative substrates on the door frame 3 side, the rendering display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Effect display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 99 to FIG. The effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface substantially at the center of the rear wall of the back box. The effect display device 1600 can visually recognize from the front side (the player side) through the frame of the center character 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5. The effect display device 1600 is a 12-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or a moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. The effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010 c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b of the back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen directed forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and the locking mechanism 3020 is It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 99 to 101. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward more than the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end penetrates the opening 1112 It projects rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and has a plurality of (here four) general winning openings 2001 always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first start port 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball B The second start-up port 2004 where the game ball B can be received according to the result of the normal lottery that the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, and the first start-up port 2002 or the second start-up port 2004 A special winning opening 2005 is provided which enables the game ball B to be accepted in any of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the acceptance of the game ball B.

  A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction. The first starting port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the lateral center of the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed near the lower end in the vertical direction near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate unit 2003. The special winning opening 2005 is disposed at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 at the upper right of the general winning opening 2001 on the right of the center in the left-right direction.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1008 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has one start winning port 2001 and one first start port 2002, and a start port A side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 in the front view left of the unit 2100 and having two general winning openings 2001, and mounted on the right side in the front view of the start opening unit 2100 Attacker unit 2400 having two general winning openings 2001, gate unit 2003, second starting opening 2004, and large winning opening 2005, and a frame-shaped center character 2500 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a. And a table rendering unit 2600 attached to the center character 2500.

  The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003, a second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received by the second start port 2004, A large winning opening sensor 2403 (also referred to as a count sensor) for detecting the game ball B received by the winning opening 2005 is provided (see FIG. 102). Also, the attacker unit 2400 is provided with a starting opening solenoid 2404 for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004 in accordance with a normal lottery result selected by passage of the game ball B of the gate unit 2003, a first starting opening 2002 or a second starting opening. There is provided an attacker solenoid 2405 for opening and closing the special winning opening 2005 in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the reception of the game ball B to 2004.

  The center character 2500 of the front unit 2000 is disposed above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 in the game area 5 a and slightly above the center of the front view, and the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Mounted on the front of the The center character 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and can visually recognize from the front the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 and the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000, etc. through the frame. it can.

  In the frame-shaped center character 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward relative to the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B inserted into the game area 5a is within the frame. It can not intrude into

  The center character 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view, and a game ball B which has entered the warp entrance 2501 can be released A warp outlet 2502 opened inward and a stage 2503 which can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the gaming ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction are provided.

  The stage 2503 of the center character 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed and corresponds to a position directly above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, that is, the center character 2500 is In the state of being attached to 1110), the substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape so as to be slightly higher than the left and right sides. The stage 2503 is inclined so that the portion (apex) slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction and the lowermost portion (valleys) on both the left and right sides thereof become lower toward the front The game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from these portions.

  The center portion 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, and the high portion (top) of the center of the stage 2503 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. Thus, when the gaming ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with a very high probability.

  The center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, and the right side from the center in the left and right direction of the upper surface in the front view and the upper portion of the right side are the outer periphery (outer rail 1001 and right rail 1005) It is attached so that a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the two. And, an attacker unit 2400 is attached below the upper right side of the center character 2500. Therefore, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so that the game ball B circulates on the right side of the center character 2500 (so-called right-handed), the game ball B can pass through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. While being able to do, it is possible to make the game ball B receive to the large winning a prize opening 2005 which is open with high probability.

  Although the table effect unit 2600 is not shown in detail, according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004. A plurality of effect decoration bodies that move or emit light are provided, and it is possible to perform a movable effect or a light emission effect. The table effect unit 2600 can perform light emission effects, movable effects, etc., using a plurality of effect decoration bodies as appropriate, and can present the player with effects of various patterns by combining them as appropriate. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to entertain the player by various effects, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  In front unit 2000, gaming ball B accepted in general winning opening 2001 is sent to back unit 3000 on the rear side of gaming panel 1100 and detected by general winning opening sensor 3001, and then to lower substrate holder 1200. Exhausted. In addition, the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and detected by the first start opening sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Be done.

  In addition, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2402 and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B accepted by the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403, and then sent to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 99 to FIG. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 has a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the gaming ball B received at the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting opening sensor for detecting the gaming ball B received at the first starting opening 2002. And a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting on the vicinity of the first start port 2002 (see FIG. 102).

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape open at the front and is attached to the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall and the back surface of the back box 3010 The lock mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the display device 1600, the panel relay substrate 3031 attached to the left end in rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the inside of the back box 3010 And a back effect unit 3100.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box shape open at the front, an opening 3010 a which is squarely penetrated to the back wall, and a flat frame which protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010 a. Liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed outward from the inside of the frame in the rear view right side in the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixed piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted And a notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the left side in a rear view of the portion 3010b.

  The opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b is formed in a size in which the effect display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably mounted vertically on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout 3010d in the rear surface.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010 e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010 e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes and the like for attaching the back effect unit 3100 and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  The panel relay board 3031 includes a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second start port sensor 2402, a special winning port sensor 2403, a start port solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, a general winning port sensor 3001, a second It is for relaying the connection with the one starting opening sensor 3002 and the magnetic sensor 3003.

  Although the back effect unit 3100 is not shown in detail, according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004. A plurality of effect decoration bodies that move or emit light are provided, and it is possible to perform a movable effect or a light emission effect. The back effect unit 3100 is capable of performing a light emission effect, a movable effect, etc., using a plurality of effect decoration bodies as appropriate, and presenting a variety of pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining them. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to entertain the player by various effects, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 comprises a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 and a payout control board 633 attached to the main frame 4 as shown Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the display. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming ball B, and a firing control unit 633b for controlling the firing of the gaming ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail in FIG. 102, as shown in FIG. 154, the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2402 are directly connected to the main control board 1310. The magnetic sensor 3003, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2401, the starting opening solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405 are connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 3031. It is also good. The detailed description of the control configuration will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 to 153.

  The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310 a, which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like, and an input / output device (I / O device). A main control I / O port, a main control input circuit 1310b to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a RAM built in the main control MPU , And a power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e for completely erasing the information stored therein. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 detects the game ball B received by the first start hole 2002, and the second start detects the game ball B received by the second start hole 2004. A mouth sensor 2402, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting gaming balls B received in the general winning openings 2001, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting gaming balls B passing through the gate portion 2003, a gaming ball received in the special winning openings 2005 The detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting B and the magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a (note that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is described later), etc. Input via / O port.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit to output a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405. , From the main control I / O port status indicator 1401 of the function display unit 1400, normal symbol indicator 1402, normal hold indicator 1403, first special symbol indicator 1404, first special hold number indicator 1405, second special A drive signal is output to the symbol display 1406, the second special hold number display 1407, the round display 1408, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the special winning opening sensor 2403. On the other hand, a contact type ON / OFF mechanical switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2402 The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, as the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the gaming ball B enters frequently, so the gaming ball by the big winning opening sensor 2403 Detection of B also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch with a high durability and a long life is used for the special winning opening sensor 2403 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the gaming ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used as the general winning hole sensor 3001.

  In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (gaming information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands on the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, etc. To Furthermore, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the main control MPU will be described later in detail, when receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control substrate 1310 from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620, as described in detail later. The power supply substrate 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when power is shut off. (To describe)). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

  In addition, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The blackout monitoring circuit monitors the drops of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 630, and outputs a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice when the voltages become lower than the blackout notice voltage. The power failure notice signal is input not only to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, but also to a payout control board 633 or the like.

6-2. Disbursement control board]
The payout control board 633 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming ball B is a payout control unit 633a for performing various control relating to payout and a launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and a launch by which the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145 is performed. Control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display, and the ball tank 552, tank rail at the time of maintenance 553, a ball guiding unit 570, and a ball extraction switch for discharging the gaming balls B in the payout device 580 to the outside (the upper tray 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball extraction operation.

6-2a. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 633a for performing various controls on the payout in the payout control board 633 is a micro not shown in detail but incorporating a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout The apparatus includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (gaming information) on gaming from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner, In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control via the payout control I / O port. It is input to the MPU.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, or displays a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 in serial mode via the payout control I / O port. Or, the number of balls of the gaming ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 through the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the dispensing control board 633), and when the number “1” is displayed, it indicates “ball out” (specifically, the ball is cut off) Informing that there is no gaming ball B in the payout device 580 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, and when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates that "the ball is seen" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B gets caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589 and notifies that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, "Count "It is a switch error" (specifically, it is informed that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed "Retry error" (specifically, notification that the number of payout retries has reached a preset upper limit) is notified, and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full" (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the far cover unit 150 indicates that the game ball is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number "7" is displayed. At the same time, it informs that it is "CR not connected" (It indicates that the electrical connection is disconnected anywhere from the dispensing control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number "9" is displayed, it will That is in click "(specifically, that has reached yet the number sphere ball speed is predetermined payout non game ball B) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal of the gaming ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the gaming ball B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial method, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and sent to the payout control MPU. It is input. The CR unit also updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the lent gaming ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining degree to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is the ball lending unit It is input and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the operation unit 220.

6-2 b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633 b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not illustrated in detail, the emission control unit 633 b is provided with an emission control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to emission are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at fixed time intervals, and the clock signal. A firing timing control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for firing the gaming ball B toward the gaming area 5a based on the above, a firing solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and firing And a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B per minute are shot toward the gaming area 5a and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. And generating a ball-sending reference pulse by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputting the generated pulse to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the palm or finger touches the handle 182, and whether to forcibly stop the launch of the game ball B according to the intention of the player A detection signal from the one-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the emission control circuit after being input to the emission control input circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the emission control input circuit and input to the emission timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of striking the gaming ball B toward the gaming area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  In this firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the drive current for shooting the game ball B toward the game area 5a with the launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 182, the firing reference pulse In response to the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit is a game ball stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball sending reference pulse is finished, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current to the ball launching device 540 side send. Thus, while the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply substrate 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 102, the peripheral control board 1510 performs peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and the effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for performing drawing control of

6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although the peripheral control unit 1511 for effect control in the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality music performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects to which the sound source IC refers are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decoration board of the game board 5 is selected based on the various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to each decoration board of the game board 5 The game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for operating various effect units provided in the game board 5 or the drive motor of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for game board decoration drive board or For transmitting to the drive solenoid or outputting a drive signal to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3 and the operation button up / down drive motor 367 etc. Door-side drive light emission composed of the side drive data and the lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3, the door side light emission data for outputting the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from the frame decoration drive substrate serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side from the frame decoration drive substrate serial I / O port or displayed on the effect display device 1600 is produced from the display control unit serial I / O port In addition to transmission to the display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the front effect unit 2600 and the back effect unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU. Further, detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives, from the effect display control unit 1512, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the peripheral display MPU of the effect display control unit 1512 I am monitoring the operation.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and various effects are produced from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects flow according to The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume projecting rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the body frame 4 are acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than ever before.

  In the vibration speaker 354 as well, like the other speakers, the sound source IC is used to extract sound information that changes to vibration from the sound ROM based on control data from the peripheral control MPU and used together with the push button effect Be done. For example, the player operates the effect operation unit 301 triggered by the sound of “press a button !!” displayed on the effect display device 1600 or a sound of “press a button !!” At this time, the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 is seen as a diaphragm and sound of the vibration speaker is transmitted to the effect operation unit 301 by using sound information that changes to vibration in the vibration speaker. At this time, the player gets a feeling as if the effect operation unit 301 is shaking.

  Here, the vibration speaker 354 is intended to give sound information to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and to give sound information so that vibration can be obtained by resonance. Here, in order to resonate, it depends on the characteristics of the vibration speaker 354 attached to the game machine, the material of the member to which the vibration speaker is attached, the hardness, and the attachment method, so that sound information of only a specific frequency is input. In such a case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variations in the characteristics. In this embodiment, in order to absorb variations in these characteristics, the frequency of the sound information to be input is input as a frequency having a width, not as a single frequency. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz, 38 Hz to 42 Hz is changed (sweeped) eight times in about one second for each one cycle in 1 Hz units. Intermittently, this is intermittently input for 1 second, and input is repeated again after 1 second.

As for the inspection (operation check) of the vibration speaker at the time of shipment, a series of processes in the RAM clear process as shown in steps S16 to S36 of the flowchart of FIG. 125 are used, or the RAM clear process is triggered. As you do.
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the information stored in the main control board 1310 and the information stored in the payout control board 633 are stored and held in the same manner when the power is shut off.
Specifically, a capacitor for storing charge during energization is connected to a power supply terminal for a RAM built in the CPU, and power is supplied by the charge stored in the capacitor when the power is shut off.

Here, at the time of shipment of the gaming machine, sufficient energization may not be performed, charge may not be stored in the capacitor, and the RAM may be in an indeterminate state. Then, when power is supplied in a state where electric charge is not stored in the capacitor, the values of the check sum value and the backup flag recorded when power is off do not exist as normal values, so the RAM is abnormal. It is determined that In that case, the CPU clears the entire area of the RAM and transmits a RAM clear notification command to the sub control board as a command related to the power-on state. When receiving the RAM clear notification sound command, the sub control board repeats notification on the RAM clear for a predetermined period, for example, 90 seconds.

In the present embodiment, the operation confirmation of the vibration speaker is performed using this RAM clear notification period.
When the push button is operated when the state of the sub control board is in the RAM clear notification state, as described above, 40 Hz ± 2 Hz sine wave signals (one cycle of 38 Hz to 42 Hz in 1 Hz units) As sweeping around 8 times per second (sweep). If this is intermittently input for 1 second, it is controlled to be input to the vibration speaker for a predetermined period by repeating input after 1 second.

  In the first place, when the player is in an advantageous state, for example, during a jackpot or during probability fluctuation, information is stored in the RAM as security when a power failure occurs temporarily. On the contrary, in order to maintain the fairness among the players, when the probability change state is reached between the closing of the store or when a situation occurs in which the player is forced to stop the game in the probability change state. A RAM clear function is provided as a function to initialize the state. Then, by pressing the RAM clear button when the power is supplied, the series of processes in the above-described RAM clear is executed even when it is determined that the button is pressed. Therefore, even if the operation confirmation of the vibration speaker is performed during the RAM clear notification period, the state of the sub control board shifts to the operation confirmation state of the vibration speaker suddenly unless the RAM is intentionally cleared during normal business. There is nothing to do.

Note that the sound source IC (or built-in IC) of the gaming machine described in the present embodiment has six voice output terminals to which speakers can be connected, and the voice set in each channel is mixed by the built-in mixer Are output through the connected audio output terminal.
Here, the audio output terminal can be selectively set, and for the vibration speaker, one of a plurality of audio output terminals provided is set as an audio output terminal dedicated to the vibration speaker. ing.

Further, since both the sound signal in the normal speaker and the signal for vibration in the vibration speaker have the same form, a common sound source IC can be used for signal generation. However, since each function and purpose are different, it is preferable to separate an audio output terminal used for voice and an audio output terminal used as a vibration source in order to avoid confusion between the two. If this setting is made, for example, when it is desired to uniformly reduce the sound volume at the same time, it becomes possible to collectively control the adjustment of the sound volume using a main volume etc. described later, but even in such a case, It becomes possible to control sound and vibration separately so that control can be performed without being narrowed down together with effects by vibration speakers generated at similar timings.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU is a built-in WDT and an external In conjunction with the WDT, it diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is issued by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, 19.2 km (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is used. k) BPPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting blink command, gaming board side lighting blink command, movable body driving command, etc., which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive substrate of the game board 5, have a plurality of serial inputs different from display commands. This is done by the output port, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The effect driving board outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting blink command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or based on the received game board side lighting blink command The lighting signal or blinking signal is output to the LED of each decoration board provided on the game board 5 or the like.

  In addition, the effect drive board, the drive signal based on the received drive command, the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button lift drive motor 367 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, etc. Output to

6-3 b. Effect display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 performs drawing control of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 performs display control of the effect display device 1600 as well as a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands, and various data. (An abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied Have.

  The display control MPU incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. I have control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and the control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data defining the order of various data stored in the image ROM in time series when transferring the various data to the non-resident area of the image RAM. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined in advance in the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 as the schedule data progresses.

  The display control MPU extracts the screen data at the top of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the screen data at the top It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the top screen data one by one from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts drawing data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not receive screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. A line buffer method is adopted as VDP. With this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600 Is a method of outputting to

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and the capacity thereof is large. As the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, as the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM can not be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. Sprite data is basic data which is data before expanding a sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, to describe “sprite”, “sprite” is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as an integrated unit. For example, in the case of displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called "sprite". Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites will be used. Besides the person, a house, a mountain, a road, etc. constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. The sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the position to be arranged on the screen and the upper / lower relation (hereinafter referred to as “order of superposition of sprites”) when the sprites overlap with each other.

  The sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, a total of six sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 × 3 Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 repeats main scanning to set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front, and main scanning in the direction intersecting the one direction It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. The effect display device 1600 receives one line of drawing data output from the effect display control unit 1512, sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. Output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line As main scanning, when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, the image data is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right.

[7. Game content]
The game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 disposed at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows either the left side or the right side of the center character 2500 depending on the hit strength. In addition, the hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and can be hit more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls B in one minute continuously. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) with predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B is an obstacle nail While the flow-down speed of the game ball B is suppressed by abutting on the game ball B, various movements are given to the game ball B, and the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in the front view than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it abuts on a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) , It will flow down the area on the left side of the center character 2500. Then, when the gaming ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2503 from the warp outlet 2502.

  The game balls B supplied to the stage 2503 roll on the stage 2503 and move back and forth from the left to the right at either the top in the center in the left-right direction or the valleys on both the left and right of the top Released. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central top of the stage 2503, since the top is located immediately above the first start opening 2002, it is accepted by the first start opening 2002 with high probability . When the game ball B is received in the first start opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633. Be done.

  When the game balls B rolling on the stage 2503 are discharged from the valleys on both the left and right sides of the top into the game area 5 a, they flow downward toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game balls B released from the stage 2503 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a are the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 of the start opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2400. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the general prize winning opening 2001 etc.

  By the way, when the game ball B which has flowed down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side unit 2200 and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 or It may be accepted by the first starting opening 2002 of the opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, and the like. Then, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Be done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B inserted into the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the outermost portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right-handed) , Through the right side of the center character 2500 to the top of the attacker unit 2400. At this portion, the gate unit 2003 and the second start port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are provided, and pass through the gate unit 2003 with a certain probability.

  Then, when the game ball B, which has been hit to the right, passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and the second lottery opening is closed when the lottery result is “normal hit”. The state of 2004 is open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second start port 2004. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are placed on the upper tray 201. Be paid out.

  In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0) .01 to 60 seconds, commonly referred to as fluctuating time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 normally opens after the fluctuation time has elapsed. As the normal fluctuation time is shorter, the game ball B which has drawn the “normal hit” in the gate section 2003 is accepted by the second start port 2004.

  If the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 and the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result can not be started, The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is held until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is finished. In addition, the number of reserved normal lottery results has an upper limit of up to four, and more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, an advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit”) advantageous to the player on the main control board 1310 A lottery of special lottery results is generated to generate "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (certain variation)", and "time reduction (short time)", and the special lottery result drawn is Suggests to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time) Note that the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 In the special lottery results, there are "lost", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15 R big hit", "per probability change (probability change)", "time reduction (time reduction) per", " "Successive time short hit", "Successive time short nona" Per ", and the like.

  The special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 generate the advantageous gaming state In this case, after the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to receive the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the big winning hole 2005 when the big winning hole 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 Game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 can receive the gaming ball B, by causing the large winning opening 2005 to receive the gaming ball B, many gaming balls B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. it can.

  When the special lottery result is "small hit", the big winning opening 2005 becomes an open state where it can receive the game ball B for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern to be closed from is repeated several times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 becomes open capable of receiving the game ball B, or to the big winning opening 2005 Opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) which makes the game ball B in an unacceptable closed state when any condition of reception of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B is satisfied. Are repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R big hit" is repeated for two rounds, "5R big hit" for 5 rounds, and "15R big hit" for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the "big hit", after the end of the big hit game, change the probability that "special hit" such as "big hit" will be drawn ("perhaps"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result There is a hit that you do ("time hit").

  In the present embodiment, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 indicate the reception of the game ball B from the start of the special drawing until the special lottery result drawn is suggested. When the game ball B is accepted in the second start port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result can not be started, so the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Be put on hold. The number of pending special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 causes the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time by repeatedly turning on and off, and thereafter suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is a pattern row in which each pattern row is fluctuated and variably displayed in a state where three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Is sequentially displayed, and each pattern row is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows displayed in the stop pattern become a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and the respective symbols are stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is made. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

  In addition, the time which suggests the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (flashing time of LED (variation time)) and the time which suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the finalized image is The time until it is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 in the periphery control board 1510 according to the drawn special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, or the rotation operation can be inhibited. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, a light emission effect is provided by appropriately using each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, each decoration board provided in the game board 5, the front effect unit 2600, the back effect unit 3100, etc. It is possible to perform movable effects and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player also by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Furthermore, in the player control type player operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 on the peripheral control substrate 1510, when the operation to be operated by the player is mistaken or not performed, the correct operation is performed. Inform the player of that. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation on the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed or the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates or the like. The effect display device 1600 displays that effect.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment has the bulging portion of the present invention, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in the present embodiment have the storage plate of the present embodiment. The unit lower cover 311 and the unit front cover 312 of the unit cover unit 310 correspond to the decorative body of the present invention, and the upper central dish decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention. The lower plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the second embodiment is the second decoration portion of the present invention, and the upper plate center decoration substrate 314 and the lower plate center decoration substrate 316 in the present embodiment are the light emitting devices of the present invention. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, the center button decoration substrate 376, and the outer circumference button decoration substrate 377 in the embodiment are used as the light emitting means of the operation unit of the present invention. Corresponding to that.

[9. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming ball B is provided in a portion below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3 closing the body frame 4 openably and closably. The plate unit 200 including the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 capable of storing the air is expanded forward, and the plate unit 200 has a front end with a length of about 1/2 the entire width of the door frame base 101. The center pressing operation unit 303a concentrically disposed on the top surface of the presentation operation unit cover unit 310, and the outer circumference pressing operation are provided with the presentation operation unit cover unit 310 projecting forward from the front surface of the door frame base 101 The unit 303 b and the rotation operation unit 302 are provided. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 to which the effect operation unit 301 is attached on the upper surface below the door window 101a where the inside of the game area 5a can be viewed visually Since the plate unit 200 (rendering operation unit cover unit 310) can be made more conspicuous than the other pachinko machines 1 because it projects largely forward, it can attract the player's interest strongly and appeal to the player The power can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played. In addition, since the front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (the unit front cover 312) is largely protruded to the front below the door frame 3, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 should be moved forward from the front end of the upper tray 201. The length of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in the left-right direction can be made longer than in the prior art. Therefore, even if the player places his hand on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 or puts his hand on the upper plate 201, the portion covered by the player's hand is reduced with respect to the entire effect operation unit cover unit 310. Therefore, when the presentation operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is illuminated and decorated by the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 and the dish center lower decoration substrate 316, the light emission decoration of the unit front cover 312 for the player It is possible to make it easy for the player to notice that the player feels lost, and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is largely protruded to the front below the door window 101a, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310. Since the front end of the unit is as close as possible to the player, the unit front cover 312 can be lighted and decorated by the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 and lower dish center lower decoration substrate 316 according to the game state. When the decoration operation unit 301 is lighted and decorated by the ring decoration substrate 352, the center button decoration substrate 376, and the outer circumference button decoration substrate 377, the light illuminates the player from the lower side, and the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301. Of the player's eyes toward the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 below It is possible to, by directing the line of sight of the player downwards, can be difficult away within the game area 5a provided in the front from the player's field of vision, it is visible within the game area 5a. Therefore, in the game area 5a, for example, when the scene of the effect image by the effect display device 1600 changes, when the movable body moves, when the second start opening 2004 or the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes, etc. By making the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 emit light and decoration, the player is directed to the lower side of the game area 5a, and then when the player returns the line of sight to the inside of the game area 5a By changing the body etc., it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, and it is possible to entertain the player and to make the player think that something good may be done It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, as described above, it is possible to cause the player to be surprised by changing the effects in the game area 5a by making the unit front cover 312 pay attention by emitting light depending on the game state. The light emission decoration of the unit front cover 312 can indicate to the player the arrival of a chance (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state ("big hit game") in which the player is advantageous). As a result, since a premium feeling can be given to the light emission decoration of the unit front cover 312, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the unit front cover 312 is light emission decoration, and the player is enjoyed It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  In addition, since the unit front cover 312 is greatly projected forward, when the player tries to look at the entire unit front cover 312, he / she looks away from the pachinko machine 1, and thus the entire gaming machine including the game area Becomes easy to see. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if it were put on one tempo, and it is possible to relax the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 projecting largely forward is attached to the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, the presence of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is highlighted to attract the player's interest strongly. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made easy to select as a pachinko machine to increase the appeal of the player and play a game. Further, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 projecting forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, the player's hands can be easily extended forward, so the game ball B is thrown into the game area 5a. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the handle 182 and the handling of the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to give stress and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, the upper center dish decoration 312a and lower dish center lower decoration body 312b arranged above and below the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 have a semicircular arc-shaped cross section that bulges outward. Since it is configured to extend in a semi-circular shape, it is possible to give a player a smooth and soft impression because a half of a cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward. The player can be made to play the game in a calm mood, and the player can be devoted to the game to suppress the decrease in interest, and it is difficult for the player to get hurt even if the player makes contact at first glance It can be made to recognize that it is safe, and by lowering the player's reassurance, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  Further, by simultaneously emitting and decorating the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the effect operation unit 301 projecting from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the plate unit 200 bulged forward to the lower side of the door window 101a. The light emitting decoration of the whole can be made to make the dish unit 200 stand out to attract the player's interest strongly, and the whole light emitting decoration may not be good for the player While being able to make it seem like, it is possible to direct the player's interest to the rendering operation unit 301 and to urge the operation, and by letting the player operate the rendering operation unit 301, the player participation type effect is enjoyed and entertaining Can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, since the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b have a semi-doughlet shape, the dish center upper decoration board 314 and the dish center lower decoration board 316 make the dish center upper according to the gaming state. Luminescent decoration of the whole of the decoration body 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b makes it possible to show the player a light emitting decoration such as a circular fluorescent light, which can strongly attract the player's interest. When the light emission decoration is performed, for example, when the light emission decoration is performed so that the light flows from one side, the light emission effect can be shown to the player as the light moves and rotates inside the donut, so the player can The rotary operation unit 302 attached to the upper surface of the presentation operation unit cover unit 310 can be surprised to be thought to be something good, and the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body The player can be urged to rotate the light 312 b in the same direction as the light rotates. Alternatively, it is possible to show the player such a light emission effect that the light moves up and down by alternately emitting and decorating the dish center upper decoration 312a and the dish center lower decoration 312b arranged at the top and bottom. At the same time, the light moving up and down can urge the player to press the outer periphery pressing unit 303b or the center pressing unit 303a. Accordingly, the player is urged to rotate the rotary operation unit 302 or urged to press the pressing operation unit 303 by appropriately emitting light and decorating the dish upper center decoration 312a and the dish lower center decoration 312b. As a result, the player can be made to operate the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 exactly, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, it extends forward from the side (outside the right side) of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3. Sides in which three side window inner decoration portions 410b cylindrically extending in the front-rear direction of the side window inner decoration member 412 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction on the flat door frame right side unit 410 that is projecting Since the windows 410a are formed, and the LEDs in the in-window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of in-window decoration portions 410b are turned off in the normal state, the three side windows in the side window 410a It is possible to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a from the side of the present pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the inside decoration portion 410b. Therefore, even if the player who is searching for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities, the pachinko machine 1 is simplified. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game in the pachinko machine 1 and to suppress the decrease in interest. Thereafter, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the player can view the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 well through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. The player can play the game in the game area 5a, can enjoy the game for the player, and can know the current game state by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600.

  At this time, in the door frame 3 to which the side on the left side of the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be hinge rotatable by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, Since the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right outside far from the axis of the hinge, even if the side window 410a passes through the door frame right side unit 410, the other including the side window interior decoration 410b The part of the game can block the line of sight of the players located in the vicinity, so that the entire game area 5a can be seen and seen from other players, as viewed from other players. By making it hard to receive the feeling, it is possible to make the other player play the game without hesitation. Then, when the game progresses in the gaming area 5a and the gaming state is changed to a predetermined gaming state, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, and the light is made to the side windows. The dazzling inside of 410 a changes the visibility through the side window 410 a. At this time, since the three side window inner decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, light can be emitted in a band shape and radially, making the side window inner decoration portion 410b dazzling so that it is difficult to visually recognize the opposite side from the interval The light emission of the side window inner decoration 410b allows the player's line of sight to be directed to the side window inner decoration 410b, and the interest in the opposite side through the side window 410a is diminished and the side window It is possible to reduce the visibility through the 410a, and to make it difficult for the other player such as the next player to look in the game area 5a or the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600.

  More specifically, as the gaming state, for example, at the time of the gaming state (scene) which suggests the arrival of a chance for the player to take advantage, the three side window interior decoration 410b is made to emit light, and the side by the glare Reduce the visibility through the window 410a. This makes it difficult for another player such as the next player to recognize that a chance has arrived in the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so the other player pays attention to the pachinko machine 1 If you pay attention, you may feel uncomfortable because other players are concerned about it and you can not concentrate on the game, or you may feel lost because of the induction of mistakes. Can be prevented, and it is possible to make the game enjoyable and suppress the decline in interest. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the other player from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a at the game state such as the arrival of a chance, the player can concentrate on the game, and the game can be played. It is possible to make it more entertaining and suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, since the three in-window decorative portions 410b extending in the front-rear direction are arranged at intervals in the up-down direction in the side window 410a, the angle at which the side window 410a is viewed from the side changes. Also, since the three side window inner decoration 410b does not appear to overlap, when the side window inner decoration 410b is not emitting light, the opposite side passes through between the three side window inner decoration 410b in the side window 410a. A player looking for this pachinko machine 1 (this game board 5) as a pachinko machine that can visually recognize (within the game area 5a) and moves to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities This pachinko machine 1 can be easily found without having to.

  In addition, since the three side window inner decoration portions 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, when the side window inner decoration portion 410b emits light, a portion at the same height in the game area 5a Can be made less visible to other players through the side window 410a, so that depending on the game state, the specific side window inner decoration portion 410b of the three side window inner decoration portions 410b emits light, It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize a specific area (part) in the height direction in the game area 5a, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to know the arrival of a chance or the like. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the other player from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a at the game state such as the arrival of a chance, the player can concentrate on the game, and the game can be played. It is possible to make it more entertaining and suppress the decline in interest.

  Furthermore, since the door frame right side unit 410 extending long forward is provided with the side window 410a penetrating to the left and right, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are extinguished, and the side window 410a is In the state where the passing visibility is secured, the inside of the game area 5a can be viewed from the side of the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so even if it does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1, the island facility From the end of the game area 5a, it can be made easy to find out that an injustice has been made in the game area 5a, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, of the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 410 is extended forward from the right outer side farther from the left side attached to the main frame 4 so as to be hinge rotatable. Therefore, the door frame 3 can be opened 90 degrees or more with respect to the main body frame 4. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened and work such as maintenance or replacement of the game board 5 is performed, the door frame 3 can be made less likely to be in the way by opening the door frame 3 widely, preventing the deterioration of workability. can do.

  In addition, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are made to emit light in accordance with the gaming state, there is a possibility (the so-called, "big hit" game) that the player becomes advantageous (for example, "big hit" game) Depending on the expected value), the in-side window decorative portion 410b may be made to emit light or be turned off. In detail, for example, during the execution of the reach effect, the reach development effect, etc., when the expectation value is low, by making the side window interior decoration portion 410b emit light to make it difficult for another player to see, an advantageous gaming state occurs. When it does not do (when it is "loss"), it can be avoided that it becomes an awkward atmosphere with other players, and can suppress the fall of the interest to a player's game. Alternatively, when the expectation value is high, the advantageous game state occurs even if it is easy to be scolded by other players by not emitting light or turning off the decoration part 410b in the side window ("big hit" occurs) ), And it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest without becoming an awkward atmosphere, and to make the atmosphere that other players are cheering up, and to increase the interest of the player in the game It can make the game more entertaining.

  Furthermore, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, the possibility of occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous (so-called, Depending on the expected value), the three side window interior decoration 410b may be made to emit light in order (for example, from bottom to top, top to bottom, center to top and bottom, etc.) or three side window interior decoration 410b The specific side window interior decoration 410b may be made to emit light. In detail, for example, during the execution of the reach production, the reach development production, etc., the higher the expectation value, the more the three side window interior decoration portions 410b emit light in order from the bottom or in order from the top; Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to look out from the player, to suggest an expected value, to increase the player's expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  The light emission modes of the three side window inner decoration parts 410b as described above are, in addition to light emission (lighting) and extinguishing, differences in blinking patterns and light emitting colors, changes in light emitting color (for example, cold blue to hot Change of feeling to red, change of blue yellow red to imitate traffic signal, etc., or change of brightness (brightness), etc. may be used, and the same operation effect as the above can be exhibited. The decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be further enhanced by the three side window interior decoration portions 410b, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  From such a thing, conversely, during execution of reach production, reach development production, etc., it is advantageous game state for the player due to the presence or absence of light emission of the three side window interior decoration 410b and the light emission mode such as the light emission pattern. Since it is possible to indicate the degree of possibility (expected value) of occurrence of the character, the player is excited depending on what kind of light emission mode the three side window interior decoration portions 410b emit light during the execution of the effect. It is possible to make the player feel excited, and to make the player's sense of expectation higher, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

  Further, the three side window interior decorative portions 410b may be made to be able to emit light or turn off arbitrarily by the operation of the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3. . Thereby, for example, when the possibility (so-called, expected value) of occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous (a so-called expectation value) is low, at the time of reach effect or reach effect, etc. By operating the unit 301 to make the side window interior decoration unit 410b emit light, it is possible to prevent the other player from being overlooked by another player, so that no advantageous gaming state occurs (in the case of "losing") In addition, it is possible to avoid an awkward atmosphere due to being seen by other players, and to suppress a drop in interest for the player's game. Alternatively, when the possibility (expected value) for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state is high (or when a hot effect is being executed), the effect operation unit 301 is operated to prevent the side window interior decoration portion 410b from emitting light. (Or, by turning off the decoration in the side window 410b), even if it is scolded from another player, the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state does not become an awkward atmosphere and a drop in interest is While being able to suppress, it can be made into the atmosphere which other players are cheering up, and it is possible to make the player's interest in the game more enjoyable and make the game more enjoyable.

  In addition, the timing at which the three side window inner decorative portions 410b emit light, the light emission mode, and the like may be set by the operation of the effect operation unit 301. In this way, in the default state set in advance, the player-specific timing that the player does not want to see from other players is not set, and some players may feel uncomfortable because they are scolded by the player and the interest for the game is entertained. Although there is a risk that the game can be customized according to the player's preferences by the operation of the rendering operation unit 301, the above-described effects can be reliably achieved, and the player's interest in the game can be enjoyed. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the dispensing device 580 of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4, the ball pulling lever 593 is lowered (locked) to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 unrotatable and the ball pulling out. In the state (first state) in which the passage 580b is closed, the game ball B which has flowed down from the upstream from the discharge passage 580a is not allowed to flow to the ball extraction passage 580b by the ball extraction movable piece 592. , And then flow downstream of the dispensing passage 580a and can be sent to the dispensing blade 589 via the dispensing passage 580a. On the other hand, when the ball extraction lever 593 is raised (the lock is released) to make the ball extraction movable piece 592 rotatable (second state), the gaming ball B which has flowed down the payout passage 580a from the upstream is the payout passage It will flow to the ball extraction passage 580b beyond the ball extraction movable piece 592 without flowing to the downstream side of the 580a, and may be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 which is the island facility side via the ball extraction passage 580b. it can. Further, since the discharge blade 589 is provided on the downstream side of the discharge passage 580a, in the normal state, the ball extraction movable piece 592 is in a non-rotatable state (first state) by the ball extraction lever 593. On the upstream side of the payout blade 589, the gaming balls B are held in a continuous state as in a beaded connection.

  When the payout blade 589 is rotationally driven in this normal state, the gaming ball B on the upstream side of the payout blade 589 flows to the downstream side, and the gaming ball B is induced to the payout blade 589 by the ball extraction movable piece 592. Since the game ball B on the upstream side of the payout wing 589 is relatively slow since the game sphere B is paid out one by one in the payout wing 589 while being sent to the payout wing 589, Since the force acting on the ball removal movable piece 592 due to contact is relatively weak, and the opposite side of the part of the ball removal movable piece 592 to be in contact with the game ball B is near the center of the ball removal passage 580 b There is no possibility that the ball extraction passage 580b is pinched between the wall surface of the ball extraction passage 580b and the gaming ball B, and the ball extraction movable piece 592 is not broken. From this, it is possible to reduce the breakage of the ball extraction movable piece 592 during the game, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the breakage of the ball extraction movable piece 592 and giving the player an unpleasant feeling. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

  On the other hand, when discharging the game ball B from the payout passage 580a when replacing or maintaining the pachinko machine 1 (or the game board 5), the ball pulling lever 593 can be raised to turn the ball pulling movable piece 592 In the state (the second state), the gaming ball B, which is in a state like a string connection on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592 flows over the ball extraction movable piece 592 to the ball extraction passage 580 b side Become. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the discharge passage 580a, the gaming ball B that has flowed down from the upstream of the discharge passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is nothing like the payout wing 589 for suppressing the flow of the gaming ball B, so the gaming ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down too early. As described above, in the state where the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the gaming ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball extraction passage 580b, so the ball extraction movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball vigorously, but the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispenser main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispenser rear lid 582 Since the ball pullout movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball pullout passage 580b by the contact force since it can move to the outer side than the inner surface of the ball pullout passage 580b, the ball pullout movable piece 592 is The game ball B is not pinched between the wall surface of the removal passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed. From such a thing, since it is possible to make the ball removal movable piece 592 hard to break, more gaming balls B can be discharged faster to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  In addition, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the ball extraction passage 580b passes between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a at intervals where the ball extraction movable piece 592 is narrower than the gaming ball B. In order to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, the game ball B is in contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b so that the ball removal movable piece 592 has a main body side guide wall 581a and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B is moved to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball extraction movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, Only the game ball B can prevent outward movement by the space between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Then, the movement of the gaming ball B to the outside is blocked between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the gaming ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball thereafter Since the movement of the pullout movable piece 592 is due to an inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball pullout movable piece 592, and the ball pullout movable piece 592 can be made hard to break and the main body side guide The gaming ball B does not protrude to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the gaming ball B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed opens and closes around an axis extending vertically on the left side. The main body frame 4 that is mounted is closed so as to close the inside of the outer frame 2, and the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 (axial center The front surface of the main body frame 4 and the rear surface of the door frame 3 face each other and extend in parallel in a state in which the door frame 3 attached so as to be openable and closable (hinge rotatable) is closed. The payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 etc. on the main body frame 4 side are connected to the ball feeding unit 140 on the door frame 3 side, the handle unit 180, the rendering operation unit 300 etc. Connection case The rod 503 extends from the portion of the cable mounting recess 501h recessed backward on the front surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame 4 to the shaft core side from the shaft core, and is mounted in the cable mounting recess 501h. Of the connecting cable guiding member 502 extending in parallel to the front surface of the door frame 3 and the rear surface of the door frame 3, and further extends near the axial core, and then folded back and extended in a direction away from the axial core On the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side after being held by the cable holder 103a of the speaker duct 103 at a position closer to the axial center than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 in the frame 3. It is connected.

  Then, when the door frame 3 closing (closing) the front side of the main body frame 4 is hingedly rotated about the axis on the left side so as to open from the main body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 is the main body Since the portion of the connecting cable 503 extending from the door frame 3 moves forward so as to be away from the main body frame 4 from being separated from the front surface of the frame 4, the folded connecting cable 503 is deformed to open. The connecting cable guiding member 502 is rotated (rotated) about the mounting shaft 502 c away from the axial center so that the connecting cable guiding member 502 is inclined with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 with the deformation of the connecting cable 503. Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip end side close to the axial center of the connection cable guiding member 502 projects into the space between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. The connection cable 503 guided by the member 502 passes near the axis, and the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 are less likely to be in the way.

  In other words, since the connecting cable guiding member 502 extends the distal end portion from the rotatably mounted attachment shaft 502c to the axial center side, the proximal end portion of the guiding member is used like a conventional pachinko machine. As compared with the case of extending in a direction away from the shaft core, the folded portion of the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guiding member 502 is the hinge pin 122 and the door frame on the door frame of the door frame 3 opening and closing. The position close to the lower hinge pin 126 can be made a position where the folded portion of the connection cable 503 is less likely to be an obstacle.

  On the other hand, when closing the door frame 3 which is open to the main body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 moves so as to approach the front surface of the main body frame 4. Moves in the reverse direction to the above, and the connection cable 503 is held (guided) by the connection cable guide member 502, so that the door frame 3 is not pinched between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. It can be closed. Therefore, at the time of maintenance such as opening and closing the door frame 3, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not interfere with the maintenance, and the maintenance can be performed smoothly and interrupted for maintenance It is possible to reduce the increase in interruption time of the playing game, and to suppress the decrease in the interest for the player's playing the game.

  Further, the connection cable 503 extending from the tip of the connection cable guiding member 502 to the axial center side is folded back and extends in the direction away from the axial core at a position closer to the axial core than the tip of the connection cable guiding member 502 Since the cable holder 103a holds it on the door frame 3 side, the rotation angle of the connection cable guiding member 502 with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 (cable attachment recess 501h) is a circle passing through the cable holder 103a around the axial center. The tangent line passing through the center of the attachment shaft 502c of the connecting cable guiding member 502 is equal to or less than the angle crossing the rear surface of the door frame 3, so the extending longitudinal axis of the connecting cable guiding member 502 is the door frame 3 It is possible not to make an angle close to a right angle with respect to the rear face of. Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103 a at a position closer to the axial center than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When closing 3, the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be pulled toward the axial center side by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103 a.

  From these things, when closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated so as to return to the original state, the door frame 3 does not close, or the connection cable guide It is possible to prevent occurrence of an abnormality in which the end of the member 502 abuts on the door frame 3 and the connection cable 503 is broken. Therefore, the connection cable guiding member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not disturb the maintenance work when an abnormality occurs such that the door frame 3 must be opened and closed to perform maintenance during the game. This can be smoothly performed, and the increase in the interruption time of the game can be reduced to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, since the connecting cable 503 guided by the connecting cable guiding member 502 is folded 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connecting cable 503 is folded at the folded part. You can put on a bribe. Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the force for closing the connection cable 503 is acted upon by the fold when the 180-folded portion of the connection cable 503 is changed to open. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connecting cable 503 (connection cable guiding member 502) from moving in the opening direction by its fold, and the connecting cable 503 (connection cable guiding member 502) It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Further, in the door frame 3 opposite to the main body frame 4 to which the connecting cable guide member 502 is attached, a position closer to the axial center than the tip of the connecting cable guide member 502 when closed (axial center than the cable holder 103a (A position closer to the center of the speaker duct 103 than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103), which can press the connection cable 503 toward the main frame 4 to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached. A portion projecting backward on the side). As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503 to press the distal end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 opened via the connection cable 503 in the closing direction. Therefore, the connection cable guiding member 502 can be smoothly closed along with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. In addition, a tangent line passing through the rotation center of the connection cable guiding member 502 and touching a circle passing through the pressing portion centering on the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 The crossing angle is configured to be 45 degrees or less. Thus, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be 45 degrees or less. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member It is possible to reliably rotate 502 in the closing direction, and the same function and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the frame pieces 502b are respectively provided on the two long sides of the guide main body 502a in the connection cable guide member 502, the rigidity of the flat guide main body 502a is increased and it becomes difficult to bend. As a result, the connecting cable 503 can be guided in the longitudinal direction by the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably embodied.

  Further, as described above, since the rigidity of the connection cable guide member 502 is enhanced, the connection cable guide member 502 is bent and distorted even when the connection cable 503 is a heavy connection cable 503 made of many electric wires. Therefore, the connecting cable guiding member 502 can be reliably rotated about the mounting shaft 502c, and the connecting cable 503 can be guided in a good state, and more electric wires can be guided. Since this becomes possible, the electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be concentrated in one place, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

  Further, in a state in which the connection cable 503 is put between the pair of frame pieces 502b in the guide main body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is connected to the connection cable 503 through the binding band 504 through the through holes 502d on both sides. Since the connection cable 503 can be held on the connection cable guide member 502 by winding the cable guide member 502 together with the binding band 504, the operation for holding the connection cable 503 on the connection cable guide member 502 is easily performed. be able to. Further, by holding the connection cable 503 by the binding band 504 through the through hole 502 d of the connection cable guiding member 502, the binding band 504 can be prevented from being detached from the guiding member 502. The connection cable 503 can be reliably held, and when the connection cable 503 is released from the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is pinched between the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be avoided, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Furthermore, the space on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame 4 is a lower portion of the outer frame constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2 via the connection portion 621c and the connection cylindrical portion 43a. Since the space between the port member 47 and the connection cylinder 43a in the assembly 40 (the inner space 40a of the curtain plate) is communicated, the space in the speaker unit 620a and the space on the outer frame 2 side cause the main frame speaker Since the volume of the enclosure 624 of 622 can be secured sufficiently, a deep bass can be output from the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound of the bass can be used to entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest for the game. Can. Therefore, by providing the cable attachment recess 501 h for attaching the connection cable guide member 502 to the main body frame 4, even if the volume in the speaker unit 620 a decreases, it is possible to output the sound of deep bass from the main frame speaker 622 Since it is possible, the main body frame 4 can be provided with the cable attachment recess 501 h recessed rearward at the lower side of the main body frame speaker 622, and the connection cable guide member 502 having the above-described effects can be attached to the main body frame 4 side. In addition, since the connection cable guide member 502 holding a part of the connection cable 503 is attached to the inside of the cable attachment recess 501 h recessed backward in the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. When closed, the connection cable guide member 502 is accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h, so that the protrusion from the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be suppressed as much as possible, and the interference with the rear surface of the door frame 3 is prevented. It is possible to prevent the door frame 3 from being closed reliably.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body of the main body frame 4 through the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3 The game area 5a of the game board 5 held in the game board slot 501b of the frame base 501 can be viewed from the front (the player side), and the lower side of the outer frame 2 is configured below the door window 101a. The front end of the port member 47 is opened near the right end in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction) of the front surface of the curtain plate front member 42 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the port is The speaker port 211 b of the dish base unit 210 is opened near the left end portion opposite to the member 47 in the left-right direction. And, the speaker opening 211 b communicates with the front side of the main body frame speaker 622 attached below the gaming board insertion port 501 b of the main body frame 4 and a speaker unit 620 a covering the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 The internal space of the (speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623) communicates with the inside of the port member 47 via the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 and the connection cylindrical portion 43a of the rear curtain plate member 43. In this state, when the main body frame speaker 622 attached to the speaker unit 620 a is driven, the sound such as voice, music, and sound effect output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 is the speaker attachment portion of the speaker cover 621 The light is emitted to the player through the speaker opening 621a and the speaker opening 211b of the door frame 3. On the other hand, the sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622 passes through the connecting portion 621c and the connecting cylindrical portion 43a to the inside of the curtain inner space 40a constituted by the curtain front member 42 and the curtain rear member 43. And is emitted from the port member 47 to the front player side. At this time, since the space (enclosure 624) on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 is constituted by the inner space of the speaker unit 620a and the inner space 40a of the lower frame lower assembly 40, The volume can be made as large as possible, and a sound with an extension in the low range from the body frame speaker 622 can be output. Further, since the connection cylindrical portion 43a of the rear curtain plate member 43 in the outer frame 2 is opened toward the center side (upper side) in the frame, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the enclosure 624 (speaker unit 620a Since the width in the depth direction (longitudinal direction) at the connection portion with) can be made larger than in the prior art, the width in the front and rear direction of the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the connection portion 621c is increased, and the inside of the speaker unit 620a The attenuation of the sound from the space to the side of the inner space 40a of the outer frame 2 can be reduced as much as possible. Furthermore, on the outer frame 2 side, since the port member 47 has a cylindrical shape, Helmholtz resonance occurs in the port member 47, so that it is possible to amplify the bass range and to invert the phase. 47 can output a sound with amplified bass. Since the sound output forward from the main frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 interfere with each other in front of the pachinko machine 1 and are synthesized, the volume becomes larger. The player can hear richer bass sounds, and the player can enjoy sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, since the phase of the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 in the port member 47 is inverted and radiated forward (a so-called bass reflex type speaker is configured), the main body When the sound output forward from the frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 overlap, the phases of each other are the same, so the amplitude of the sound wave increases and the volume of the sound increases. Compared to the case of using a passive radiator, the output of sound can be enhanced with a simple configuration.

Furthermore, since the speaker unit 620a and the outer frame lower assembly 40 are disposed below the game board insertion slot 501b in which the game board 5 is held, the upper and lower dimensions thereof can be enlarged. The volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. In detail, generally, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the position (height) of the player's eyes is positioned above the center of the pachinko machine 1 in the vertical direction. Therefore, the center of the game area 5a in which the game is played is located above the center of the pachinko machine 1.
From this, since the space is relatively easy to secure in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, it is lower than the game board insertion slot 501b in the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the main body frame 4 constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2. Since the upper and lower dimensions of the side can be made relatively large, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be increased by enlarging the upper and lower dimensions of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the speaker unit 620a. As well as being able to output sounds richer in bass, it is possible to make the player enjoy the sound and to control the decline in interest for the game.

  Further, since the connecting cylindrical portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, the connecting portion 621c abuts on the connecting cylindrical portion 43a only by closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. It can be connected, and the same operation and effect as described above can be exhibited, and since the sliding resistance does not occur between the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the connection portion 621c, the opening and closing operation of the main body frame 4 becomes heavy Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in workability at the time of maintenance and the like.

  Furthermore, since the sealing member 48 seals between the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the connection portion 621c, sound leakage in the enclosure 624 can be prevented between the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the connection portion 621c. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided that reliably exerts the above-described effects.

  In addition, since a part of the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be secured in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a can be made smaller, so the game board is relatively relative. The large insertion slot 501b can be provided to provide a wider gaming board 5 of the gaming area 5a, and the wider gaming area 5a can further entertain the player, and the wide gaming area 5a can be provided through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. This pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out by making it visible, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player.

  Furthermore, in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, the port member 47 is disposed in the vicinity of the right end in the horizontal direction, and the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker unit 620a, that is, the main frame speaker 622 is disposed in the vicinity of the opposite left end. Because the main frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 are separated in the left-right direction, the sound output forward from the main frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 are outer frames. 2 (Pachinko machine 1) will interfere with each other at a position spaced forward to some extent, and the sound can be amplified in the vicinity of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, as described above You can hear the sound of rich bass.

  Further, as described above, the sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 is interfered and amplified in the vicinity of the player, and therefore, it is possible to prevent the other pachinko machine 1 from being separated. The player will receive an unamplified sound. As a result, when a sound is output that suggests the arrival of a chance, the player playing a game with this pachinko machine 1 can increase the sense of expectation for the game by hearing a sound that is loud and rich in bass. It can be done. On the other hand, since it becomes difficult for the player playing a game with another pachinko machine to hear the sound from this pachinko machine 1, it is difficult to make it possible to recognize that the arrival of a chance etc. is suggested in this pachinko machine 1 It is possible to reduce the chances of the other player from looking into the pachinko machine 1, and by peeping in, the player playing the game with the pachinko machine 1 feels uncomfortable and reduces interest. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the position of the connection cylindrical portion 43a of the outer frame 2 is at the center in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction) of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the speaker unit 620a on the main body frame 4 side connected to the connection cylindrical portion 43a Since the position of the connection portion 621c is at the center in the left-right direction, the length of the speaker unit 620a in the left-right direction can be from the vicinity of the left end where the speaker attachment portion 621a is formed to the center A space can be secured on the opposite side to the speaker unit 620a with the center at 4 in FIG. Therefore, in the body frame 4, another member is disposed in a space secured on the opposite side to the speaker unit 620 a with the center in the left-right direction, or the other members are enlarged so as to extend to the space. Therefore, the player can be differentiated from other pachinko machines by other members, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted to the player's attention.

  Further, as described above, since a space can be secured on the opposite side to the speaker unit 620a with the center in the left and right direction of the lower side of the outer frame 2 interposed, the gaming ball B is discharged to that space. A base unit 620b having a ball extraction guiding portion 627 for the ball and a discharge ball receiving portion 628, and a ball emitting device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the body frame 4. , A power supply substrate 630 for controlling the power supply in the pachinko machine 1, a payout control board 633 for controlling the payout of gaming medium balls, etc. can be disposed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with these components reliably. .

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the central pressing operation portion projecting upward from the upper surface of the plate unit 200 bulging forward in the forward and downward direction of the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 where the game is played 303a, an annular outer peripheral pressing portion 303b having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201, surrounding the outer periphery of the central pressing operating portion 303a, and an annular rotational operation surrounding the outer periphery of the outer peripheral pressing operating portion 303b Since the sections 302 are arranged in an inclined state so that the front end side of the upper surface is lower, the player whose seating surface of the rotary operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 The head (face) is directed in a certain direction, and the whole volume of the center pressing operation unit 303a, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 is arranged concentrically to make it easy to see. The player can show the player three large operation units (the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302), can give a strong impact to the player, and the operation unit provided in the conventional pachinko machine It is possible to recognize at first glance that the operation section is clearly different from that of the other, and to differentiate the pachinko machine 1 from other pachinko machines to make the player's interest strongly attracted Can. In addition, since the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotary operating unit 302 are noticeable, the game in which the central pressing operating unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotary operating unit 302 are operated for the player It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the player participation type effect, and to advance the game to the game state where the player participation type effect is executed (here, many game balls B are driven into the game area 5a Can be made easy to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, depending on the game state, the central push operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral push operation unit 303b are slightly projected from the upper surface of the rotary operation unit 302 by the elevation mechanism including the operation button elevation drive motor 367 etc. And the projecting position (upward position) projecting upward from the retracted position, and when in the retracted position, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed by the locking portion 371c of the elevation cam member 371. In the disabled state, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b are in the retracted position, so that the player can clearly recognize that the pressing operation of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b can not be received. Since the center pressing operation unit 303a can be reliably pressed and operated, the player participation type effect is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. It is possible to control.

  Furthermore, in the state of the retracted position, since the outer periphery pressing portion 303b is incapable of pressing, there is an outer periphery pressing portion 303b which does not move between the central pressing portion 303a and the rotation operating portion 302. Therefore, the erroneous operation may be such that the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed by the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302, or the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated by the rotation of the center pressing operation unit 303a. Can be made hard to occur, and player participation type effects can be surely enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Then, the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are largely projected upward on the upper surface of the pan unit 200 by moving to the projecting position, so that the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b can be made conspicuous, and a strong impact can be given to the player, and a premium feeling can be given to pressing operations of the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, which may be good It is possible to make the expectation for the game to be heightened as if it is Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to participate in the player participation type effect for pressing the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a, and it is possible to enjoy the player participation type effect and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In the state of this projecting position, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b can be newly pressed, and the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 are arranged concentrically, for example, When pressing the central pressing unit 303a, the peripheral pressing unit 303b is pressed, or both the central pressing unit 303a and the peripheral pressing unit 303b are pressed, or When pressing the peripheral pressing unit 303b, the central pressing unit 303a may be pressed, or both the central pressing unit 303a and the peripheral pressing unit 303b may be pressed, or the rotation may be performed. When the operation unit 302 is rotated or the rotation operation unit 302 must be rotated, the outer circumferential pressing operation is performed. Or accidentally pushes the section 303b, and an outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and the central pressing portion 303a can be induced to or accidentally pressed. As a result, when the player performs the pressing operation or the rotating operation, the pressing operation or the rotating operation can be performed while keeping the pressing operation unit 303 to be pressed and the rotation operation unit 302 to be rotated operated in mind. A sense of tension can be given to the press operation and the rotation operation, which can make it difficult for the player to get bored, and can enjoy the player participation type effect for performing the press operation and the rotation operation. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

  In addition, the player is provided with notification means such as the vibration speaker 354 and the effect display device 1600, and in the player participation type effect, the player performs the center pressing operation in the state of the projecting position where the pressing operation of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is possible. If only the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b is pressed by mistake when pressing the portion 303a, the notification means indicates that the central pressing portion 303a is pressed and the pressing operation is performed again to perform pressing. It is possible to reliably press the center pressing operation unit 303a which should be performed, to allow the player to enjoy the player participation type effect, and since the mistake of the pressing operation is corrected, the player loses by making a mistake It is possible to prevent the user from feeling and to enjoy the player participation type effect to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, when it is assumed that the player is performing the pressing operation on the center pressing operation unit 303a correctly, the reaction (change) of the player participation type effect despite the pressing operation on the center pressing operation unit 303a. However, if the central pressing operation unit 303a is broken, the player may feel illusion and reduce interest. On the other hand, as described above, since the notification means notifies the mistake of the pressing operation, it is possible to correct the player's guess, and the player is made to participate by correctly pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a. You can enjoy the type effect.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper tray 201 and the lower tray storing the gaming balls B for performing the forward bulging in front of and below the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 where the gaming is performed In a plate unit 200 including an outer peripheral side surface, an upper surface, and an inner peripheral side surface exposed to the outside, an annular rotary operation unit 302 rotatable around an axis extending up and down; The press operation unit 303 including the central press operation unit 303a and the outer periphery press operation unit 303b is disposed, and the rotation operation unit 302 is operated according to the gaming state changed by playing a game in the game area 5a. The player control effect of the player participation type is performed by the periphery control board 1510 to rotate the key or press the pressing unit 303. Then, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player appropriately rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in the appropriate direction or presses the pressing operation unit 303, according to the rotation operation or the pressing operation. Since the effect is changed, the player can participate in the effect, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest. When rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the player touches and operates any of the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface exposed to the outside, and the rotation center of the rotation operation unit 302 is the most Since it is possible to touch the distant position and perform the rotation operation, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small force, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily performed. In addition, when the player touches the outer peripheral side surface of the rotary operation unit 302 to perform the rotary operation, the player can easily rotate the rotary operation unit 302 at a high speed by operating the player to rub the outer peripheral side surface in one direction. it can. Therefore, even when a player participation type effect that requires high-speed rotation to the rotation operation unit 302 is executed, as described above, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a high speed. On the other hand, the effect can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest for the player's game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small (light) force, it is possible to make the player less likely to fatigue prematurely even if the rotation operation unit 302 is frequently rotated. The player participation type effect of rotating the operation unit 302 can be continued and enjoyed, and a decrease in interest for the player's game can be suppressed. Further, as described above, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated quickly or rotated with a light force, various player's rotation operations can be requested in the player participation type effect, It becomes possible to request different rotation operations in each, and more various and diverse player participation type effects can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest. Can.

  Furthermore, the outer peripheral side of the operation cover (constituted by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337), which the player touches and rotates, is rotatably attached to the tray unit 200. The disc unit 200 does not get in the way even if it rotates so as to rub the outer peripheral side surface because it protrudes in an arc shape outward (in the direction opposite to the center of rotation) than the rotating base 332 Since the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily rotated and the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 is rounded, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even from a direction other than just beside the rotation operation unit 302 (a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis). Since it becomes easy to touch the outer peripheral side, the player operates the rotary operation unit 302 without worrying about the position and direction of the outer peripheral side of the rotary operation unit 302. It can be, it is possible to enhance the operability of the rotation operating part 302. Therefore, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated so as to rub the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (operation cover), the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a faster speed in the player participation type effect The player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is increased, rotation operation at a minute rotation angle can be facilitated or rotation operation compared to a rotation operation unit with a small diameter such as a conventional pachinko machine. Since the player's action at the time of the game can be increased, it is possible to make the player feel more that the rotation operation unit 302 is being rotated, and the rotation operation unit in the player participation type effect The rotation operation of 302 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface are exposed to the outside with the rotation operation unit 302 formed in a ring shape, when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the upper surface is Since the user can touch the part according to the player's preference or situation, such as the inner circumferential side or the like, and can perform the rotation operation, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be further enhanced. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by making the player participation type presentation more enjoyable.

  Further, since the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotation operation, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is provided in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 The operation unit 303 does not inhibit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and can rotate the rotation operation unit 302 comfortably, and enjoys both the rotation operation and the pressing operation sufficiently to suppress a decrease in interest It can be done.

  Furthermore, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotation operation, and the rotation operation unit 302 can not be grasped by the player. The appearance of the portion 302 can be totally different from that of the steering wheel of an automobile, the control stick of an airplane, or the like. Thus, for example, in the case where the rotation operation unit is in the form of a steering wheel of a car, it is assumed that the player holds the rotation operation portion and operates the moment the player looks at the rotation operation portion. Because only operations such as steering wheel steering can be performed, when a player participation type presentation requiring various rotation operations is executed, a rotation operation different from steering wheel steering can not be performed, and player participation type presentation is performed. There is a risk that the game will not be entertained and the interest in the game may be reduced. However, in this embodiment, the appearance of the rotation operation unit 302 is completely different from the appearance of the steering wheel of an automobile, the control rod of an airplane, etc. The player can operate the rotation operation unit 302 according to the desire of the player, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, etc. of the rotary operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside even when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the projecting position, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, etc. Therefore, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 does not get in the way, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be comfortably rotated, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest it can.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper tray 201 or the lower tray storing the gaming balls B for performing the forward bulging in front of and below the gaming area 5a where the gaming is performed on the gaming board 5 On the upper surface of the plate unit 200 provided with 202, an annular rotation operation unit 302 whose rotation axis extends vertically, and a center pressing operation unit 303a and an outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 When the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 through the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302. The transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotational drive unit 340 rotates around the rotating axis, and the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 transmit the transmission detection gear member 34. To the sense rotation by detecting the detecting piece 345b, it is possible to detect a rotating operation of the rotary operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the detection piece for detecting rotation on the lower side over the entire circumference as in the conventional rotation operation unit. In addition, since the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is transmitted to the transmission detection gear member 345 via the ring gear 332a, the portion for transmitting the rotation from the ring gear 332a to the transmission detection gear member 345 (operation ring transmission gear 350 And the meshed portion) may be a part of the entire circumference of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, a space can be easily secured below the rotation operation unit 302, and a sufficient number of LEDs are circularly arranged in a row between the rotation operation unit 302 and the transmission detection gear member 345. An operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be arranged.
Then, according to the gaming state which is changed by playing the game in the gaming area 5a, and the rotation detection of the rotation operation unit 302 by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decoration substrate Properly (uniformly) decorate the whole of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 constituting the rotary operation unit 302 by appropriately emitting the plurality of LEDs 352. It is possible to make the rotation operation unit 302 stand out and strongly attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 via the transmission detection gear member 345, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 A plurality of LEDs arranged in a ring shape of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be sequentially emitted (turned on / off) at the same direction and the same speed. As a result, the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated in a state in which specific portions of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the in-ring cover 337 are light-emitting and decorated. It is possible to illusion that the LED is provided inside the rotation operation unit 302, and the rotation (rotation operation) of the rotation operation unit 302 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest. Alternatively, when executing the player participation type effect requiring the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 according to the gaming state, the plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are rotated By sequentially emitting light in the direction desired to be operated, the player can be urged to perform the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the rotation direction and rotation speed (rpm) of the rotation operation unit 302, and are arrayed in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 The plurality of LEDs can be lighted in order to have the same rotational speed as the rotation operation unit 302. As a result, although the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, it rotates together with the rotary operation unit 302 in a state where a part of the rotary operation unit 302 emits light. While being able to give a strong impact to the player, and being able to give a premium feeling by the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the light emission decoration, there may be something good for the player It is possible to make the player feel more expectation for the game, and to suppress the decrease in the interest for the player's game.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be made to sequentially emit light, and the light emission decoration in which the light rotates in the rotation operation unit 302 can be shown to the player On the other hand, it is possible to immediately recognize that the annular rotation operation unit 302 is for rotating operation, and to make it easy for the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the execution of the player participation type effect, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  Further, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotatably mounted around an axis orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302, and when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the rotation surface of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation The transmission detection gear member 345 is disposed at a position as close as possible to the projection range of the unit 302, and the configuration related to the rotation operation unit 302 in the plate unit 200 (rendering operation unit 300 or rotation drive unit 340) Can be made compact, so that the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 can be relatively increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be made to stand out to attract the player's interest strongly.

  Furthermore, the operation ring drive motor 342 is provided to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345 according to the game state, and as described above, the rotation operation is possible by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 Since the operation unit 302 can be rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342 in addition to the rotation operation of the player, the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 is rotated according to the game state, By making the decoration possible, it is possible to make the rotary operation unit 302 stand out in front of and below the game area 5a, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotary operation unit 302.

Further, since the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348, when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation is performed. By rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342 in the same direction as the operation unit 302, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be assisted, and the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 can be lightened. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342 in the opposite direction to the rotation operation by the player, a load can be given to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 Can be weighted. Furthermore, for the rotation operation by the player, the rotational operation unit 302 is rotated by applying rotational force to the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction in which the rotation is stopped by the operation ring drive motor 342 at every predetermined rotation angle. A click feeling can be given.
Further, by rotating the rotational operation unit 302 back and forth within a predetermined angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotational operation unit 302 can be vibrated. As described above, since various operation feeling can be given to the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342, it is possible to correspond to more diverse player participation type effects, so it is possible to play games by various effects. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

  Furthermore, since the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is provided, when giving the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342, the plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are the same as the rotation operation. By sequentially emitting light in the direction or emitting light sequentially in the opposite direction to the rotation operation, the feeling of operation can be supported by the light, so that the player can enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, since the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, the space below the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily secured, and a larger number of LEDs are mounted. Since the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be disposed, the rotation operation unit 302 can be decorated more uniformly and brightly, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  Furthermore, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a are lighted and decorated in a good state by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377, and the center button decoration substrate 376, respectively. Therefore, by making them emit light appropriately, only the rotary operation unit 302 emits light, or only the pressing operation unit 303 emits light, or only the center pressing operation unit 303a emits light, or the outer peripheral pressing operation is performed. Only the part 303 b can be illuminated and decorated, and it is easy to make the player recognize the operation part to be operated, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed.

  In addition, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape on the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377, it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that the light is circulated by sequentially emitting light, so that the rotation operation unit 302 It is possible to perform an effect in which the effect by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the effect by the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 in the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303 b are associated. Specifically, for example, when prompting the player to perform the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, both the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the LED of the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 are sequentially emitted. The light is decorated in two rows so that the light rotates. Alternatively, when the player is rotating the rotary operation unit 302, the LED (peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 rotates the light according to the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302, or On the other hand, when it is desired to urge the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 in the reverse direction, the LED of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 performs light emission decoration in which light is rotated in the reverse direction. As described above, since various effects of light emission can be shown to the player, the player can be entertained, and a decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, a presentation operation ring decoration substrate 352, an outer periphery button decoration substrate 377, and a central button decoration substrate 376 for emitting and decorating the rotary operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a arranged concentrically. Since it is provided, for example, the rotation operation unit 302 is made to emit light from the respective LEDs in the order of the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352, the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377, and the center button decoration substrate 376, or in the reverse order. It is possible to show an effect of light concentrated to the center pressing operation unit 303a, and an effect of light diffused to the rotation operation unit 302 from the center pressing operation unit 303a. As a result, it is possible to show the player more various light emission decorations, to entertain the player, and to direct the player's attention to the central pressing operation unit 303a or to the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to promote the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302 to enjoy the player participation type effect.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which a game is played is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front, and the front of the main body frame 4 is opened and closed. While forming the door window 101a which can visually recognize the game area 5a from the front on the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3 which is closed possible, the glass unit 160 provided with the transparent flat glass plate 162 is a door window. It is attached to the door frame 3 (the door frame base 101) so as to close 101a, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 for storing the game balls B for playing a game under the door window 101a on the front of the door frame base 101 Plate unit 200 equipped with

  Then, on the upper surface of the pan unit 200, a circular annular donut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 whose diameter is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper pan 201, and a cylindrical shape coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotation operating portion 302. The pressing operation unit 303 including the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b and the cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303 a is attached, and a semicircular donut shape similar to the rotation operation unit 302 below the rotation operation unit 302. The two large-diameter tray upper center decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b are attached up and down at two intervals, and continuous with both ends of the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b The door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 of similar shape, the door frame right side decoration 419 of the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame Door frame top decorative body 453 of Puyunitto 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Therefore, in the plate unit 200, three doughnut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotary operation unit 302 and the two upper and lower center ornaments 312a and 312b and the rotary operation unit 302 and the outer peripheral pressing Since the operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous and the player can operate. It is possible to make the rotary operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 appear large, and to attract the player's interest strongly to the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 in the rendering operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200. The decrease can be suppressed.

  In addition, the rotary operation unit 302, the upper center plate decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration body 312b have a similar cylindrical shape (tube) in a donut shape like a ring, and are provided below the rotary operation unit 302. A semi-cylindrical door frame left side decoration 404, a door frame right side decoration 419, and a door frame top decoration 453 surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a so as to be continuous with the dish center upper decoration 312a. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a decoration such that the outer periphery of the game area 5a is surrounded by a cylindrical tube, and a sense of unity can be given to the decoration on the front of the pachinko machine 1 The appearance can be improved, and the player's interest can be directed to the inner side (the game area 5a and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) surrounded by the cylindrical tube. Determined force can be enhanced, it is possible to easily this pachinko machine 1 is selected let increase the expectation as a pachinko machine for a game on the game in the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, the doughnut-shaped rotational operation portion 302 is rotatably mounted around an axis extending forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotational operation portion 302 has the front end side Since the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 faces the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 turns. The entire volume of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily viewed, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 performs the rotation operation, so that the player rotates immediately when the player participation type effect is performed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the diameter of the rotation operation portion 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201, and the diameters of the upper center dish decoration 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b are larger than the rotation operation portion 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate lower center decoration body 312b project more forward than the upper plate 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation section 302, the upper center dish decoration 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b are made to stand out At the same time, the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is the pachinko machine 1 different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and to appeal the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

  Furthermore, since the rotational operation portion 302 is in a donut shape having an annular cylindrical shape, the upper surface, the outer side surface, the inner side surface, etc. of the rotational operation portion 302 as compared with the flat disk shape. Since it is easy for the finger to be applied, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated as desired by the player. Further, since the upper dish center upper decoration body 312a and the lower dish center lower decoration body 312b are formed larger than the rotation operation unit 302, the upper dish center upper decoration body 312a and the lower dish center lower decoration body 312b are larger than the rotation operation section 302. Since it protrudes outward, it is possible to place an arm or put a finger on the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b, and the player operates the rotary operation unit 302 in a comfortable posture. And the presence of the dish center upper decoration 312a and the dish center lower decoration 312b projecting forward beyond the rotary operation unit 302 allows the player not to approach the rotary operation unit 302 too much. Therefore, it is easy to secure a space in which the arm and fingers for the player to move around the rotation operation unit 302 move, and the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be enhanced. Can. As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is easy to perform, it is possible for the player to think of the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 when the player participation type effect is executed, and the player can play the game. It is possible to enjoy the participatory effect and suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 303 composed of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a inside the rotation operation unit 302 can be moved between the retracted position (lowering position) and the projecting position (raising position). From the above, when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the raised position, the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes upward more than the rotation operation unit 302, so that the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 appear larger. While being able to give a strong impact to the player, it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, to increase the sense of expectation for the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and to suppress the decline in interest It can be done.

  In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303 is at the lowered position, the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is more easily noticeable than the pressing operation unit 303, so the player's interest is directed to the rotation operation unit 302. While the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 is more noticeable than the rotation operation unit 302, so that the player's interest can be directed to the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, according to the content of the player participation type effect to be executed, the pressing operation unit 303 is moved between the lowered position and the raised position to urge the effect operation unit 301 to be operated by the player. Thus, the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by causing the player to operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 properly.

  Furthermore, when the pressing operation unit 303 located inside the rotation operation unit 302 is at the lowered position, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a have the same height, and the rotation operation is performed. When the portion 302 and the central pressing portion 303a become operable and the pressing portion 303 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the outer circumferential pressing portion 303b and the central pressing portion 303a protrude upward relative to the rotational portion 302. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a can be operated. Therefore, according to the contents of the player participation type effect, the player can properly use the effect operation unit 301 which can be operated, and can respond to more various effects and enjoy the player various operations. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, the effect operation ring decoration base plate 352, the dish center upper decoration board 314 and the plate center lower decoration board 316, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side decoration of the door frame right side unit 410 Since the substrate 418, the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are provided, the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a The overall appearance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved by emitting light and decorating the lower center plate decoration 312b and the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to attract the player's interest strongly and have high appeal. In addition, the rotation operation unit 302, the dish upper center decoration 312a and the dish lower center decoration 312b, and the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453 emit light as appropriate By making the decoration possible, the line of sight of the player can be guided from inside the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302) or from the effect operation unit 301 to the inside of the game area 5a. Depending on the state, the player can operate the effect operation unit 301 or play a game in the game area 5a, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it is not limited to this, and a pachislot machine or a gaming machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine It may be applied, and even in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be exhibited.

  Further, in the above embodiment, even when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (the outer peripheral button cover 380) is pressed down to the lowering end in a state where the pressing operation portion 303 is moved to the raised position, Although the thing which is not detected was shown, it may not be limited to this and it may be made to be able to detect the press of perimeter press operation part 303b. Thereby, even in the same pressing operation, the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are changed to different presentation modes, or when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed, the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is urged It is possible to perform a variety of player participation type effects, and to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in a state where the pressing operation unit 303 (the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b) is moved to the raised position, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, it moves to the lowered position. Although shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed in the state of the raised position, the downward movement may be restricted after moving slightly downward from the raised position.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the rotary operation unit 302 is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 that is bulging forward. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the arrangement, the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit may be exposed to the outside on the front surface of the pan unit. Also in this case, the player can enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit in the same manner as described above, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  In the above embodiment, the main frame 4 is provided with the speaker unit 620a communicated with the curtain plate internal space 40a (port member 47) via the connection cylindrical portion 43a, but the present invention is limited thereto Instead, the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) may be provided with a speaker unit whose inside communicates with the port member 47, and the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved.

[Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, control boards for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102, 154, and 103 to 120. FIG. 102 and 154 are block diagrams of the main control board, the payout control board and the peripheral control board. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 102, and FIG. 104 is a game ball lending device connection terminal for relaying the electrical connection between the payout control board constituting the main board and the CR unit and the frequency display board. FIG. 105 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 154, FIG. 106 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 107 is a liquid crystal display control It is a block diagram of a sound source built-in VDP periphery in a part.

  In the above-described embodiment, the door frame 3 is not provided with the effect display device related to the effect display. However, in the following description, the door frame side effect display device 460 (see FIG. 107) related to effect display can be provided on the door frame 3 separately from the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 In the following, the control configuration is described.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control board 1310, a payout control board 633, and a peripheral control board 1510, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board 1310 will be described, and then the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 154, the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time the power is turned on and performs the game operation. Main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor incorporating various control programs such as main control program to control and ROM storing various commands and RAM temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various detection switches are input. Main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a power failure or blink of a predetermined voltage. It mainly includes a power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e that monitors a sign of a stop.

  In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”), the main control MPU 1310 a In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are incorporated.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual is attached by a maker who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since this once assigned ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it can not be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can extract an ID code from a non-volatile RAM and can refer to it.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in” that updates the jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether to generate a jackpot gaming state among various random numbers related to gaming. Hard random number circuit 1310 an ′ ′) is incorporated. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a value 32767 as a minimum value is preset). The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value as an initial value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310 a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310 a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an first uses a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310 a, with one value in a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator described later, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without overlapping, and all values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted Then, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are determined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without overlapping. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310 a performs a big hit on the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an at the time of obtaining the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an It is set as a judgment random number.

  The main control input circuit 1310 b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and has no reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset information based on detection signals from various detection switches inputted to its various input terminals by a main control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are variously It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310 c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcing reset of the stored information, and the reset function main control output circuit 1310 cb not having a reset function not provided with a reset terminal And consists of. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a main control system reset described later. Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb has the information for outputting the various signals inputted to its various input terminals to the external substrate etc. not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal based on the signal is output from its various output terminals.

  First start port sensor 3002 for detecting game balls entering the first start port 2002, second start port sensor 2402 for detecting game balls entering the second start port 2004, and so on shown in FIG. 99 The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball entering the winning opening 2001 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input terminals of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered. Further, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting gaming balls having passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 99, a special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting gaming balls having entered the special winning opening 2005, and a back unit 3000 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 which is attached to the magnet to detect the fraudulent activity is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a through the panel relay board 3031 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the port's input terminal.

  The main control MPU 1310 a outputs a drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on the detection signal from each of these switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting opening solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405 via the panel relay board 3031, and the predetermined output port The main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca is output from the output terminal of the main control output circuit to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca, and the first special symbol display 1404 via the panel relay board 3031 and the function display unit 1400. Output drive signals to the second special symbol display 1406, the first special hold number indicator 1405, the second special hold number indicator 1407, the normal symbol indicator 1402, the state indicator 1401, and the round indicator 1408 .

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The main function with reset function is output by outputting various information (game information) about a game to the substrate 633 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310 ca with reset function. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310 ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the special winning opening sensor 2403. On the other hand, a contact type ON / OFF mechanical switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches with a long lifetime are used as the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the gaming ball frequently enters, so the detection of the gaming ball by the big winning opening sensor 2403 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch with a long life is used for the special winning opening sensor 2403 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensors 3001 and 4020 does not frequently occur in the general winning openings 2001 and 2201 where the gaming balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches whose lifetime is shorter than the proximity switches are used as the general winning opening sensors 3001 and 4020.

  Also, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 633 as serial data. The payout control board 633 outputs a signal (payout ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310 when normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data is completed. This signal (payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a through the main control input circuit 1310 b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, thereby inputting the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. The terminal receives various commands as serial data. When the main control MPU 1310 a completes the normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, the main control output with a reset function is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port (a main payment ACK signal) to that effect. The signal is output to the circuit 1310 ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca to the payout control board 633.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. There is no reset function, and various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310 cb to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, the main cycle serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is mainly configured of the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main cycle serial transmission port 1310ae etc., which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, It is connected via a circuit (see FIG. 112). The main rotation serial transmission port 1310 ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main rotation serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310 aea, a transmission buffer register 1310 aeb, and a serial management unit 1310 aec (see FIG. See 112). When the main control CPU core 1310 aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310 aec, the serial management unit 1310 a ec sets the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310 aea to start transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. In the present embodiment, 32 bytes are provided as the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb. After setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb, the main control CPU core 1310 aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310 aec.

  Power supply substrate 630 for supplying various voltages to main control substrate 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. And B. (see FIG. 108). The main control MPU 1310 can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by the capacitor BC0. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 described later is operated within a predetermined period after power-on. Is output from the payout control board 633 and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and triggered by this, the main control MPU 1310a completely erases it from the main control built-in RAM It is supposed to be (cleared).

7-2. Disbursement control board]
As shown in FIG. 103, the payout control board 633 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming balls displays a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout, an operation switch 954 having various functions, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 And an error LED indicator 860b. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310 a based on a detection signal outputted by being operated Outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in ..).

7-2-1. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 103, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and a game medium payout that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. A payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor incorporating various control programs including a payout control program for controlling the operation and a ROM storing various commands and a ROM temporarily storing various commands, and detection from various detection switches related to payout In order to output a drive signal to a payout control input circuit 952b to which a signal is input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, and a payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. Exchange various signals between the payout motor drive circuit 952 d and the CR unit 6 It includes a CR unit output circuit 952e of the.
In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in RAM”) and the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in ROM”), the payout control MPU 952 a In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are incorporated.

The payout control program serializes a variety of game information from the main control board 1310 and various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 through the payout control input circuit 952b under control of the payout control MPU 952a. To receive serial data. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) triggered by the occurrence of an error in the payout operation of the gaming ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error release unit. Based on the signal (detection signal), a 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created, and these error generation command and error cancellation navigation command are transmitted to the serial serial data of the payer The signal is output as serial data of the serial system to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means).
In addition, the payout control program pays out after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main processing is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of the warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  Further, the payout control program outputs (first door opening command) of a door frame opening command when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) is input from the door frame opening switch 618 in response to the opening operation. When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, the payout control program also receives the door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when the detection signal (the door frame closing detection signal) is input from the door frame opening switch 618 according to the closing operation. While outputting, when the detection signal (main frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, the main frame closing command (first main frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are respectively input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the payout control input circuit 952 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input.
That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset information based on detection signals from the various detection switches inputted to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. And a reset function dispensing control output circuit 952 ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information and a reset function non-dispense control output circuit 952 cb not having a reset function and not provided with a reset terminal And consists of. The payout control output circuit 952 ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a payout control system reset described later. Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 952 cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a dispensing control system reset described later is not input. That is, since the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to the external substrate etc. is not reset by the later-described payout control system reset, the payout function-free payout control output circuit 952cb does not reset the information. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal based on the signal is output from its various output terminals.

  Out-of-ball detection sensor 574 for detecting out-of-balls of gaming balls in the supply passage of the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560, and payout detection sensor 591 for detecting gaming balls discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 580. A detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 for detecting the rotation of the delivery blade 839 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the delivery control MPU 952a via the delivery control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and a main frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 which detects whether or not the accommodation space of the fal cover unit 270 shown in FIG. The signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through the substrate 630 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in the serial data mode, or operates the operation signal of the operation switch 952 (detection Signal) to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. Upon completion of normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect, and a payout control output with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952 ca, a signal (payout ACK signal) is outputted from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952 ca to the main control board 1310.

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb from the output terminal of the serial output port, whereby the payout function-free payout control is performed. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952 cb to the main control board 1310.

  When normal reception of various commands from the payout control substrate 633 is completed as serial data, the main control substrate 1310 outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control substrate 633. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, whereby the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca The drive signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 952d from the above, and the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584 from the payout motor drive circuit 952d, or the state of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed as an error LED display By outputting a drive signal for displaying on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca to the error LED indicator 860b.

  The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents that the error LED display 860b displays and notifies include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board with the payout control board 633, and when the number “1” is displayed, it indicates “ball out” (specifically, the ball is cut off) Informing that there is no gaming ball in the supply passage of the payout device 580 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, and when the number “2” is displayed, it indicates that “the ball is seen” (specifically The payout rotary body and the game ball are engaged in the vicinity of the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 580 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, and the payout rotary body becomes difficult to rotate. To notify that When “3” is displayed, it notifies that “dispense detection sensor error” (specifically, it indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), When the number "5" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "retry error" (specifically, it indicates that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached the preset upper limit value), and the number "6" is displayed. If it is "full" (specifically, it indicates that the storage space of the fal cover unit 270 is full with the stored gaming balls based on the detection signal from the full detection sensor 154) Informing that, when the number “7” is displayed, it indicates that “CR not connected” (indicating that the electrical connection is disconnected anywhere from the dispensing control board 633 to the CR unit 6) If the number "9" is displayed, it indicates that it is "in stock (there is a prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, the number of game balls not yet paid out is a predetermined number of balls) Informing that the number has been reached).

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of balls of the gaming ball actually paid out, etc. to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, whereby the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca The ball number etc. of the game ball actually paid out are outputted to the external terminal board 784 through the resistance which is not shown.

Further, the payout control board 633 outputs various information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (including an infrared LED and a photo IC built in), and the game arcade (hall) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. The number of balls of the game ball, etc. and various information (game information, details of errors or errors relating to the payout operation of the game ball) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photo couplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the hall The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the main control board 1310 which advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 633 which controls the payout and the like. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 329 are firstly the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board It is input to the CR unit 6 via 869.
The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of gaming balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal in a serial manner to the payout control board 633 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is CR unit The data is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through the input / output circuit 952e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of the gaming balls lent out, and at the same time, a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the ball rental return display unit The signal is output to the lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the ball rental return display unit. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental return display unit is configured such that the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. There is.

  The power supply substrate 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 633 has a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 108) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control substrate 633 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. There is. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The various information stored in the payout control internal RAM, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal thereof is given via the payout control input circuit 952b to a predetermined value of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 952a determines it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be completely erased (cleared). The operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 952 cb, and is also output from the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 952 cb to the main control board 1310.

7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the game device connection terminal board for game balls, etc.]
Here, exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 633a and the CR unit 6, and exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described based on FIG. In addition to relaying the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 633, as shown in FIG. 125, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 also includes the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. It also relays the electrical connection between the boards (precisely, the game ball connection device board 869 is electrically connected with the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay board 880 , CR unit 6 and the game ball connection device board 869 are electrically connected, the game ball connection device board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay Terminal plate 880 and frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the substrate of CR unit 6 and the game device connection terminal plate 869, between the substrate of the game device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control substrate 633, the game device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay Wirings (harnesses) are used to electrically connect between the board with the terminal board 880 and between the game ball and the like, and the board of the lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365, respectively. Further, an AC 24V described later from the power supply substrate 630 is supplied to the CR unit 6 through the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 is generated from the supplied AC 24 V to a predetermined voltage VL (in the embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown). The game balls are supplied to the payout control board 633 through the loan device connection terminal plate 869, while the game balls are supplied to the frequency display plate 365 through the game device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 .

  On the part surface of the frequency display plate 365, the ball lending button 328 which is a push button switch is mounted at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 A return button 329, which is a segment display unit, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display portion 363 of the rental ball unit 360.

  The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected via the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game The input is made to the CR unit 6 through the ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the switch of the return button 329 is turned on (turned on), the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball connection device It is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal plate 869.

  The ball rental return display unit is a three-digit display according to a so-called dynamic lighting system, in which three segment displays are juxtaposed in a row, and one digit segment display among these three-digit segment displays is sequentially driven. The segment indicator of the is controlled to light. By such lighting control, the ball loan return display unit displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental return display unit includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for specifying one-digit segment display among the three-digit segment display and the specified one-digit segment display Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (a total of seven signals) for specifying the content to be displayed by lighting up, from the CR unit 6 to a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and a main door relay terminal board When input through 880, the 1-digit segment indicators are sequentially illuminated according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment indicators The contents due to the light emission can be viewed through the loan remaining display portion 363.

  In addition, a CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the frequency display plate 365 adjacent to the ball rental return display unit. In the CR unit lamp 365d, a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a gaming apparatus such as a gaming ball and the like via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply substrate 630 by a built-in voltage generation circuit, and is in a ball lendable state where the ball lending button 328 and return button 329 are valid Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to make the CR unit lamp 365d emit light, and this luminescence can be viewed through the lending residual display unit 363. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental return display unit through the current limiting resistances mounted on the game ball connection device connection terminal plate 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869. When it is input, it is configured to output BRDY, which is a rental ball request signal, to the payout control board 633 (the payout control MPU 952a) via the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. And CR unit 6 is a single payout operation start request signal to pay out a predetermined number of balls to be rented (in this embodiment, it is 25 balls and corresponds to 100 yen as the amount of money) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 633 (the payout control MPU 952a) through the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 633 (the payout control MPU 952a), to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has been started or ended, to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. , A signal indicating that it is possible or impossible to output to the CR unit 6 or that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible, such as a gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to the CR unit 6 or the like. In addition, for example, when a store clerk or the like in the hall sets in advance in the CR unit 6 that the gaming ball for 200 yen is paid out when the ball rental button 328 is pressed, one payout operation Will be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, then 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball connection device board 869. And, the prepaid card is discharged from the insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of balls of the game balls paid out as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

7-3. Power supply board 630]
Next, the power supply substrate 630 will be briefly described. The power supply substrate 630 is supplied with power from the pachinko island facility and can be electrically connected or disconnected from the AC 24 V (AC 24 V), and a power control unit 935 for generating various power supplies. And a launch control unit 633 b for performing launch control by the launch solenoid 542 of the striking launcher 650 shown in FIG. 5 and sphere feeding control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the sphere feed unit 250 shown in FIG. 1.

[7-3-1. Power supply controller]
The power supply control unit 935 improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935 a and the synchronous rectification circuit 935 a that rectifies the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility when the power switch 934 is operated. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing power whose power factor is improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various DCs for supplying power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates And a power supply generation circuit 935 d for generating a power supply.

7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a operates the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 which electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 182, and the palm of the handle 182 And a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether or not the finger is touching, and a one-shot button operation sensor 194 for detecting whether or not the player is forced to stop the launch of the gaming ball by the intention of the player. And the detection signal from the signal is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game apparatus connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the release control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal to that effect via the payout control board 633. .

  The firing control circuit 953a performs control to adjust the driving current for launching (playing) the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 and to output it to the firing solenoid 542 On the other hand, the ball feed member of the ball feed unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the dish unit 320 by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 The control of sending the game balls received by the ball feeding member to the ball hitting device 650 side is performed.

7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral control board 1510 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and effects that the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in FIG. 19 is drawn. A peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the display drive board 4450, and drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 while the speaker 921 and the upper speaker A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from 573, and a real time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC” that holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying Describe the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the control unit 4165, the speaker 921 and the upper Operation and a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by.

7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral control unit 1511 which performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and power-on processing executed at power-on, and also after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub control programs that are executed and controls rendering operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and V from sound source built-in VDP 1512a of liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later Various information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, light emission modes such as various LEDs, etc. continued across peripheral control unit steady processing executed each time a blank signal is input) Manage schedule data that defines Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information for the game etc., and various information continued over the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state, information for managing the special effect flag, etc. And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511 e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511 e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511 a is operating normally. Have.

  The peripheral control RAM 1511c can not hold the stored content only for the time when the instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is restored immediately, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long time power interruption occurs In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the backup power is supplied by a large capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") (not shown) provided on the power supply substrate 630, while the content thereof is lost. By this, it is possible to hold the stored content for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply substrate 630, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d when the gaming board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can not hold it and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511 e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a is out of control. When the timer is up, the hardware is reset. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a predetermined period (until the timer is up), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. Since the peripheral control MPU 1511a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e when outputting a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the reset is not triggered.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, based on the various commands, each decoration board of the game board 5 The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp from the lamp drive board serial I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) Game board motor drive data for transmitting drive signals to drive boards 4170 and outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 serial for motor drive boards It is transmitted to the motor drive board 4180 from the I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit, or the electric -Side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to specific drive sources from frame I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882 The door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 or transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 via It transmits to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 from the frame I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Also, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the rendering operation unit 400 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 This detection signal is serialized by the door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194, and this serialized rendering operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. The frame I / O port for detecting a rendering operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a is input through the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are provided on the motor drive board 4180 (not shown) The serialized movable body detection data serialized by the serial transmission circuit is input from the gaming board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a through the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and the system runs away using peripheral control built-in WDT and peripheral control external WDT 1511e in combination. It is diagnosed whether it is

7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 106, peripheral control MPU 1511a has peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control DMA (abbreviated as Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, peripheral control various serial I, centering on peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It comprises an / O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511 ag, and peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511 ak.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa reads and writes various data from / to the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac via the internal bus 1511 ah while the peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae and the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, Various data are read from and written to peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 ag and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak via internal bus 1511 ah, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and peripheral bus 1511 ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b via the internal bus 1511 ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and the external bus 1511 h, while the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d. It reads and writes various data via the internal bus 1511 ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and the external bus 1511 h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab, peripheral control ROM 1511 b, peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511 d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I DMA0 is a dedicated controller that performs data transfer independently between peripheral devices such as I / O port 1511ag and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without using peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It has four channels of ~ DMA3.

  Specifically, peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is a storage device of peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab built in peripheral control MPU 1511 a, peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae built in peripheral control MPU 1511 a, and WDT 1511 af To perform data transfer independently between peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without using peripheral control CPU core 1511aa The peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab reads and writes via the internal bus 1511 ah while peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is a peripheral control various types of serial I / s built in the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511 b, the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a. Between devices with input / output devices such as O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak, without using peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa In order to perform data transfer independently, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad and external bus 1511 h are provided to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 1511 b, peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511 d. And read / write, peripherals for input / output devices such as peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 1511 ad and the peripheral bus 1511 ai.

  Peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad controls internal bus 1511 ah, peripheral bus 1511 ai, and external bus 1511 h to control the central processing unit of peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab, peripheral control ROM 1511 b, peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 1511 d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak etc It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511ae: serial I / O port for lamp drive board, serial I / O port for motor drive board, serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED It has a serial I / O port for a frame, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor, a serial I / O port for a main control substrate, and a serial I / O port for obtaining presentation operation unit information.

  The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control, and this timer is reset by hardware when it runs up. It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa is reset when the watchdog timer is started and the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af within a predetermined period (until the timer is up). It will take When the peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset does not occur.

Peripheral control Various parallel I / O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal, door side motor drive light emission latch signal etc. In addition, it outputs clear signal to peripheral control external WDT 1511 e, The detection signals from the various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of the various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by the game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the integrated movable body detection data from the gaming board side serial transmission circuit by the motor drive board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output.
This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state is determined. In this embodiment, the route between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag are electrically connected directly. The noise measures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED which has the meaning of weight on the game. In addition, about lighting control of LED, it is performed in peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt processing mentioned later, and other LEDs etc. except this LED are performed in peripheral control part steady processing mentioned later It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510 a, and the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510 a is rotated to change the resistance value, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob is The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 stages are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a to be described later) is controlled so that the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 is obtained, and music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by the sound volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the store clerks in the hall of occurrence of abnormality of the pachinko machine 1 and cheating on the pachinko machine 1 and contents concerning the game effect and the like are notified. (Eg, to render the screen developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 as more powerful, to notify that the player is likely to shift to an advantageous gaming state, etc.) The notification sound also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, and from the mute to the maximum volume The volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512 a described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above.
Thereby, for example, even when a store clerk or the like in a hall operates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume small, effect sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 Is small, but when the pachinko machine 1 is in an abnormal state or the player is making a fraudulent act, an alarm sound set to a large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be made to flow. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of an abnormality or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound. Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. There is a possibility to increase the volume to play the music and to add to music and sound effects to render the screen developed in the game board side effect display device 1600 as more powerful or to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. It can also be announced that it is expensive.

7-4-1 b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511 b stores in advance various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, liquid crystal display control unit 1512, RTC control unit 4165 and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. Various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data and the like for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is specified. It is done. The light emission aspect generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission aspect of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels of the sound source built-in VDP 1512 a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 1512 a Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, track numbers for specifying which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects are defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of an electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid in time series, and defines the operation of the electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read out directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and copied when the power is turned on in various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. Some are read and executed. When various data, various control data and various schedule data stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are also directly read from peripheral control ROM 1511b, when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of peripheral control RAM 1511c described later, etc. In some cases, the copied one is read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511 b is used to correct the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program is for correcting the decrease in brightness due to the secular change of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. The correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511 b. The luminance setting information is, as described later, luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range over which the luminance of the LED of the game board side effect display device 1600 is 100% to 70% in 5% steps, and the present The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 being set is included, for example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on and the current date and time Therefore, when June has already passed from the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b and the brightness is obtained. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. To adjust the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 80% is further added by 5%. When December has already passed since the date when the effect display device 1600 was first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance is set to 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information acquired with respect to the 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and lighted.

7-4-1 c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 106, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs. A management target work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc that exclusively store the copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b Various control program copy areas 1511 cd for storing exclusively the copied various control programs and various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511 b Control data copy area 1511ce exclusively storing the copied data, and backup non-management which exclusively stores the information not to be backed up among the various information updated by the execution of the various control programs A target work area 1511 cf is provided.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including a momentary power failure or a power failure due to a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged object work area 1511 cf and cleared to zero, while the backup is performed. With regard to the management target work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc, the power on state command (see FIG. 143) from the main control board 1310 at the time of power on of the pachinko machine 1 starts RAM clear effect And the game state (for example, it instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 123 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on) Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is effect information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later is input. ) Bank0 (1fr), which is exclusively stored as a backup target, and peripheral information (1 ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs It is comprised from Bank0 (1 ms) which memorize | stores exclusively as object. Here, the names of Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The following “0” means that the storage area is normally used to store various information updated by execution of various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is taken as the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” provided in the area ranging from backup first area 1511 cb described later to backup second area 1511 cc are the same storage areas as “Bank 0”. It means that it has a size. As will be described later, when “(1fr)” outputs drawing data of one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 as described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a The V blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a to indicate that it can receive screen data from the frame, so every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are additionally described (effect information (1 fr) and effects to be described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). “(1 ms)” is, as will be described later, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, etc., since peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4” respectively (The same applies to effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) to be described later).

  Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, a reception command storage area 1511 cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511 cae Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, lighting signals, blink signals or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 are set. It is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and the received command storage area 1511cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the received various commands are received. It is a storage area to be set, and an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad includes an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC information storage A storage area in which various information acquired from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). It is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511 cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b to various control data copy areas 1511 ce may be read and set, and various schedule data may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable object information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and a rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, and is for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It is a storage area in which the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. It is a storage area in which various information acquired from the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and a rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 In ai, various information (for example, effect operation) in which the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are acquired based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 Storage area where rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405 etc. created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400 are set. If the effect display drive substrate 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control substrate 1510 in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, Peripheral control board 1510 and effects based on the LOCKN signal to be output later to convey the effect A storage area in which various information acquired abnormality frequency and abnormality occurrence state between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 caa of Bank 0 (1 fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf of Bank 0 (1 ms) The motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is divided into two areas of a first area and a second area.

  In the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive substrate transmission data storage area 1511caa When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady state is set. Every time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the present peripheral control unit steady processing, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side emission data STL is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. When the DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab. The door-side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Ru. When peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the present peripheral control unit steady processing, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It has become.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf opens to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 caf. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door decoration is applied to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed It is designed to proceed with the process based on it.

  In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board transmission data storage area 1511 cag When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second region of motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing At the time, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It is supposed to be.

  Next, a backup first area 1511 cb and a backup second area 1511 cc will be described which exclusively stores the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511 ca. In the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc, two pairs of two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1 fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1 fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1 fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every one frame (1 frame) The effect information (1 ms) which is the content to be copied to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) Each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated as effect backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed to execute the peripheral control DMA controller 15 in the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined depending on whether or not the contents of the two banks making up the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511 cb, two pairs are managed as one page, with Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) as one pair and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The page is copied at high speed to Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) match or not. Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  Also, in the backup second area 1511 cc, a total of 2 pairs are managed as one page, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs in Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The contents are copied at high speed to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match or not. Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511 cb has a total of two pairs, one pair of Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) and one pair of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms). It is an area for managing as a page, and backup 2nd area 1511 cc makes Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair in total. It is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511 cb and the second backup area 1511 cc.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) for each peripheral control unit for each frame (1 frame) Contents that are copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511 cb and backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, every time steady-state processing is executed The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and whenever the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1 fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

7-4-1 d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a includes a backup management target work area 1511 da for storing exclusively information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs; A first backup area 1511 db and a second backup area 1511 dc for exclusively storing the copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511 da are provided. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d is a power on state command from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including a momentary power failure or a power failure due to a power failure) (see FIG. 122). Is an instruction to start the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, an instruction to start the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 103 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on) Even when it is not zero cleared. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511 ca, the backup first area 1511 cb, and the backup second area 1511 cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c described above are cleared to zero. In addition, after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 It is supposed to be By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d (for example, history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state) Etc.) While the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c can be cleared, the contents (items) are not displayed at all and can not be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this point, the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is effect information (SRAM) which is various information continued across the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and for managing a special effect flag It is comprised from Bank0 (SRAM) which memorize | stores information etc. for backup object exclusively. Here, to briefly describe the name of Bank 0 (SRAM), “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, as described above, and “Bank” The following “0” means that the storage area is normally used to store various information updated by execution of various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is taken as the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4”, which are provided in an area ranging from backup first area 1511 db to backup second area 15 11 dc described later, have the same storage area as “Bank 0”. It means that it has a size. The “(SRAM)” is backed up by various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a, so “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3” , And “Bank 4” (also used for the effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later have the same meaning).

  Next, a first backup area 1511 db and a second backup area 1511 dc for exclusively storing the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511 da will be described. The backup first area 1511 db and the backup second area 1511 dc are managed as one page, in which two banks form one pair. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The data is copied at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac to the backup first area 1511 db and the backup second area 1511 dc. The consistency of one page is determined depending on whether or not the contents of the two banks making up the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511 db, one pair of Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) is managed, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The copy is performed at high speed by the controller 1511 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) match.

  Further, in the backup second area 1511dc, one pair is made up of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The copy is performed at high speed by the controller 1511 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511 db is an area for managing one pair as one page, in which Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) form one pair, and the backup second area An area 1511 dc is an area for managing one pair as one page, in which Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) form one pair. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511 db and the backup second area 1511 dc.

7-4-2. Liquid Crystal Display Controller]
As shown in FIG. 105, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control of music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. And a sound source for performing sound control such as music and sound effects (hereinafter referred to as "built-in sound source") and drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 Sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a, various character data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing data, and serialized music and sound effects as audio data The door frame side effect display attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 with the audio data transmission IC 1512 c transmitted toward the decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 and the drawing data serialized to the door frame side effect display device 460 A transmitter IC 1512 d for door frame side effect that is disposed near the lower side of the device 460 and transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320, and serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 A signal from the differential circuit 1512e, in addition to the signal output from the differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data into a positive signal and a negative signal, and the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side rendering Is input, and the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is When the signal is input, the circuit is connected to transmit this signal, while when the signal from the differential circuit 1512 e is not input, the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512 d is transmitted. And a forced switching circuit 1512 f for circuit connection. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512 b displays, for example, ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display (ring display) as sprite data used for displaying a screen or image described later, and display of an operation menu background image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display object image data to be used to display at least one selection display object to be described later, tonal adjustment background image data to be used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale to be described later In addition to the sound volume setting icon image data and the like used for display, the display of the main body frame rear surface image data and the service mode screen used for displaying the main body frame rear surface image where the position of each part on the rear surface of the main body frame 4 can be viewed Mode screen image data used for the break, break used to display the break timer setting screen Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512 b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying a suggestion display for prompting that the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the rendering operation unit 400 should be operated.

  Peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from main control board 1310 from peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control RAM 1511c. The screen data at the top of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various types of peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 After extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the top screen data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c according to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae Output to VDP1512a. In this manner, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the V blank signal every time the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data is input according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae. The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output one by one from the top screen data.

  In addition, peripheral control MPU 1511a receives from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control RAM 1511c the sound command data at the top of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from main control board 1310. The sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and extracted in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or peripheral After being extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the schedule data is recorded in response to the V blank signal being input. The next sound command data following the first sound command data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511 cae is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511 ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511 b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511 c Output to the built-in VDP1512a. Thus, according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a receives the V blank signal as sound instruction data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data. Each time, the sound command data at the head is output to the built-in VDP 1512a one by one.

7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
The sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, as shown in FIG. 107, based on the input screen data, from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b Extract side character data and upper dish character data to create sprite data and generate drawing data of one screen (one frame) to be displayed on game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 The VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). Of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data from channel CH2 through peripheral control output circuit (not shown), frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and effect display drive board 4450 housed in plate unit 320 of door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) the door frame side effect display device 460, synchronization between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is achieved.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay A terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a display on the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 mounted on the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the dish unit 320 It is output (sent) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive substrate 4450. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600 as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the wiring length required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are respectively attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is the periphery as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Whereas the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The wiring length from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 is extremely long compared to the channel CH1 and thus is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. Therefore, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, in the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d, “V-by-One (Sine Electronics Co., Ltd.) By adopting the differential type communication called “registered trademark”, the system is less susceptible to the influence of noise.

  The channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface based on LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and stored in the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 (not shown). It is transmitted to the effect display drive substrate 4450. Then, the serialized various signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive substrate 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data of one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1 The drawing data of the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and Image data for effect display 460 from channel CH2 Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. In other words, “screen data for one screen (one frame)” is a built-in VRAM for drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to generate above.

  In addition, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. After (transmission), a V-blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to the V blank signal being input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a adopts a frame buffer method. In this "frame buffer method", drawing data of one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) The drawing data of one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Further, when the sound command data described above is input from peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from main control board 1310, sound source built-in VDP 1512a stores the music stored in liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. And sound data such as sound effects are extracted and the built-in sound source is controlled to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number The output channel is set, the music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512 c.

Note that the sound command data also includes sub-volume values for adjusting the volume of the track into which the sound data is to be incorporated, and the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume, adjust the sound data of the notification sound and the volume for notifying the store clerk in the hall of occurrence of abnormality of the pachinko machine 1 or cheating against the pachinko machine 1 Subvolume values are incorporated.
Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be shifted to a setting mode to be described later and adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output, and a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated into the used track and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the track used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized effect sound is In practice, the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512 c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume flowing through the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified by amplifying to the master volume value. Is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the used track and the sound data of the effect incorporated into the used track among a plurality of tracks The knob portion of the set volume adjusting volume 1510a is rotated to adjust the adjusted substrate volume, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified effect sound is amplified and serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512 c. For the notification sound, sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and Volume control set as a sub volume value to adjust the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by combining the maximum volume and the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a. It amplifies up to a master volume value, serializes this amplified alerting sound, and outputs it as audio data to an audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Here, when the presentation sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of sending a notification sound to notify the store clerk or the like of the occurrence of the abnormality of the pachinko machine 1 or the cheating on the pachinko machine 1 is simple. To explain, first, the sub-volume value of the track into which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track into which the effect sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to the mute, and the notification sound The sound data of the track into which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value at which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually the speaker 921 And amplified up to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the upper speaker 573, and serialize the amplified effect sound and And it outputs the audio data transmission IC1512c as.

  That is, in actuality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muffled, although it does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound proceeds in accordance with the above-described sound generation schedule data. In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after this predetermined period, for sound generation forcibly set to mute so far The volume of the effect sound proceeding according to the schedule data is again set as the sub volume value by adjusting the substrate volume adjusted by turning the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510 a (at this time, the dial operation of the effect operation unit 400 When the mode is shifted to the setting mode and adjusted by operating the section 401 or the pressing operation section 405, the sub volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), and the signal flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has become.

  As described above, when a notification sound flows to notify a store clerk or the like in the hall of an occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 when a presentation sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 Although the volume of the sound is muffled and the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, this muffled effect sound is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, so the notification sound has passed for a predetermined period. When no sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but proceeds according to the sound generation schedule data until the predetermined time elapses after the notification sound starts to flow. It starts to flow again from.

7-4-2 b. Liquid Crystal and Sound Control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 107, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512 b draws the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. While upper character character data is stored in advance, various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

7-4-2 c. Audio data transmission IC]
The audio data transmission IC 1512 c is a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and a frame peripheral relay as a serial data of a difference system in which the right audio data is made a plus signal and a minus signal when serialized audio data is input from the VDP 1512 a with built-in sound source. A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) as differential serial data that transmits left audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal while transmitting to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , Frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194. Thus, music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the difference system between the left and right, respectively, between the substrates ranging from the peripheral control substrate 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194, for example, When combining the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal by the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 into one left audio data, even if the negative signal is affected by noise, Since noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

7-4-2 d. Transmitter IC for door frame side effect]
As shown in FIG. 107, drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is input to the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface.
The drawing data is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal and a clock signal, and the red video signal The green video signal and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512 d are 6 bits each, for a total of 18 bits, the upper 6 bits in each video signal are door frames It is input to the transmitter IC 1512 d for side effect. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information which is difficult to distinguish for human eyes, the lower 2 bits including weak color information are invalidated although they are outputted from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source.

  Three synchronization signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal Is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d receives three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization. Three synchronization signals, signals and clock signals, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zine Electronics Co., Ltd. and only one differential pair cable These various signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 around the frame. Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 The drawing data output from channel CH2 of VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is from peripheral control board 1510 to frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and door although the length of wiring required for (first path) is short. Since it is output (sent) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, a path from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 2) because the length of the wiring required for 2) is much longer than the length of the wiring required for the 1 The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

  Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported openably and closably with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, the opposite of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. For example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the closing side which is the side, the effect display drive board 4450 etc. housed in the pan unit 320 provided on the door frame 3 It is necessary to pass through various wirings which electrically connect the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main frame 4, in addition to the dispensing device 580, the gaming balls dispensed by the dispensing device 580 can be guided to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 and the upper tray 321 is a gaming ball. A full tank branching unit 770 is disposed which can branch and guide the game balls dispensed to the lower plate 322 when the tank is full.

  Further, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 560 shown in FIG. 5, which is a unitized united power source board 630 shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility, is arranged. As described above, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 580, the full tank branch unit 770, the power supply substrate 630 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 584 provided in the payout device 580, the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the noise due to electrostatic discharge by the game ball and the pachinko machine 1 are installed It is in the environment which receives the noise etc. which invaded.

  Therefore, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided in peripheral control board 1510 By adopting the differential communication of V-by-One (registered trademark), the system is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3; As described above, the differential 1 pair cable is used as a wire for electrically connecting between the connection of the transmitter, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, but this differential 1 pair cable has two wires Is not a parallel line merely provided in parallel but a twisted pair cable. The twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, the case where a parallel line is adopted as a differential one pair cable electrically connecting between the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. In contrast to the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source in which the wiring length for sending drawing data becomes extremely long compared to the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source Even if a differential-type communication system called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of the corporation is adopted to make it hard to be affected by noise, the configuration by such hardware alone is due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball When serial data in a parallel line is affected by noise, noise entering a power supply line supplied from a pachinko machine with pachinko machine 1 installed, effect display stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 For the door frame side effect provided in the drive substrate 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by Shiba ICSDIC0, it will be received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 with the serial data affected, and output from channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source Image data is received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered one different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, an image like a so-called sandstorm is displayed to indicate what image There is a problem that it can not be recognized at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source that the wiring length for sending drawing data becomes extremely long compared to the channel CH1 with VDP 1512a with built-in sound source In addition to the configuration using such hardware, while adopting a differential system communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Sine Electronics Co., Ltd. in the transmitter IC 1512 d for effect, the system is less susceptible to noise. The transmitter and receiver are electrically connected to each other through a twisted pair cable capable of canceling (eliminating) the noise on the receiving side even if differential serial data is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame The noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of 3 and thus the channel of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is output to the door frame side effect display device 460 Liquid crystal display control unit 151 in door frame side effect display device 460. Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image that can not be recognized at all what the image is like sandstorm. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

  In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. A frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882 intervene between the connection of, and between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but the separately assembled frame is mounted on the main body frame 4 so that the door frame 3 is attached. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to 4, electrically connect various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and the various wiring is removed, maintenance of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be performed by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 In the case where it is possible to carry out, and the abnormality that has occurred in the door frame 3 can not be eliminated, replace the door frame 3 with this abnormality and attach another door frame 3 'to the main body frame 4 By electrically connecting various wiring from various substrates provided on the side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3 'side The substrate can be electrically connected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510, the differential communication of “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Sine Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted. In addition to the structure that is not easily affected by noise, in addition to the configuration using such hardware, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has invaded the wiring, that noise is canceled (removed ) Can be employed as a differential one pair cable to electrically connect between the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the boards of peripheral control board 1510 and frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral frame of relay terminal board 868 and the board of peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and with peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and effect display driving The substrate and the substrate 4450 are electrically connected to each other by a twisted pair cable, while the power supply wiring and other various signals are electrically connected to each other by a harness. As a result, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512 d to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. Therefore, the video transmission wiring patterns described above are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 apart from the power supply wiring pattern and the various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. A plurality of relay terminal boards such as a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are straddled along the route from the transmitter to the receiver. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal transmitting the serial data according to the differential system transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected to become noise, or the output level of the signal decreases. Will occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the space between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the space between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral door relay While electrical connection is made between the terminal plate 882 and the effect display drive substrate 4450 by means of a twisted pair cable, wiring for transmitting power supply lines and other various signals is electrically conducted by means of a harness. In the twisted pair cable, one of the wires is red and the other is gray, and the wire for supplying power is red and the other wires are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

7-4-2 e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d are output to the forced switching circuit 1512 f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 to be stored. In this forced switching circuit 1512f, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d, LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 Are differentially input into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). The LOCKN signal output request data is a period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a start screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or becomes a customer wait state for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 to be described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 , And is transmitted as an operation confirmation request for the door-frame-side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differentiation circuit 1512 e, the forcible switching circuit 1512 f performs circuit connection so as to transmit these two signals, while the difference is generated. When two signals differentiated into plus signal and minus signal are not input in the inverter circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is made such that the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. It is done. Thus, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512 e, the two signals are connected in order to transmit the two signals, and thus the two signals are While transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, in the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into plus signal and minus signal are not input, the door frame side effect transmitter is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d A signal output from the IC 1512 d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 8. 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a demonstration with the game board side effect display device 1600 in a period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 displays the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or in waiting for customers. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 (in fact, the differentiation circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives various serial signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, and various serialized A liquid crystal module circuit 4450 V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs the signal to the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and if it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Then, the frame is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the LOCKN signal input, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a to generate an image for notifying that effect and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600 The information is displayed and notified on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the above.

  When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that no abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no abnormality has occurred in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the 320, it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image for notifying that effect (for example, “an abnormality occurs in the upper dish liquid crystal display device Please call a store clerk. ”) The sound source built-in VDP1512a is controlled and the game board side effect display device By outputting an alarm sound (for example, "an error has occurred in the upper plate liquid crystal display device") to that effect while outputting to 600, and outputting it to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. An announcement sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. Thereby, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emission decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided in the game board 5 may be lighted.

7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 105, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC 4165a.
In this RTC 4165a, a RAM 4165aa in which calendar information and time information are held is built in (hereinafter, described as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is configured to be supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in the present embodiment, a button battery is adopted) as a driving power supply and a backup power supply of the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without any supply of power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets it in the above-mentioned RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and acquires this acquired calendar information and time information Based effects can be developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As such an effect, for example, the screen of a Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 for December 25th, and if it is New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown A screen to be executed may be expanded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of LED type, the brightness setting information of the LED is stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the luminance adjustment of the backlight by PWM control. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is the backlight of the game board side, from 100% to 70% in 5% steps, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  In addition to calendar information, time information and brightness setting information, calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information are first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa as date and time information of the hour, minutes, and seconds. Input date and time information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are attached with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a turns ON / OFF control of the backlight or ON only. It is supposed to

Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the gaming machine maker.
In the manufacturing line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information is input in the manufacturing line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on. It is set to the date of manufacture, which is the date of the month and the hour, minute and second.

  As described above, in addition to calendar information and time information, the brightness information in the case where the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type is attached to the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, the input date and time information, etc. , It is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with low probability and high probability).

  In addition, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set as the manufacturing date depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed Sometimes it is too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400 is operated during a demonstration in which the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Calendar information and time information are reset by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. It can be adjusted to the brightness of the The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the brightness correction program described above, thereby providing a game board side effect when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. The decrease in luminance due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, and specifies calendar information and date. Acquire the time information to specify minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, adjust the range over which the brightness of the LED of the game board side effect display device 1600 is 100% to 70% in 5% steps Luminance setting information having luminance adjustment information to be used and the luminance of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511 b.

  For example, if June has already passed from the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on from the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on and the current date and time, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on with the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information being 75%, this 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 80% is further added by 5% which is correction information acquired for the image. If it is already 12 months since the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the peripheral control ROM 15 has been turned on. When acquiring the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) from 1b and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 85% is further added by 10% which is correction information acquired Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the current time information acquisition processing of step S 1002 in the control unit power on processing. And current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510 a can adjust the volume of music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by turning the knob. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a is configured such that the resistance value can be varied by turning the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is a portion of the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (with built-in sound source VDP 1512 a) is controlled so that the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 is obtained, and music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  As described above, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by the sound volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, an alarm sound for notifying a store clerk or the like in the hall of an occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1, (For example, the screen developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed as more powerful, or it is notified that there is a high possibility of transition to an advantageous gaming state for the player. Etc.) also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (with built-in sound source VDP 1512a) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above.
Thereby, for example, even when a store clerk or the like in a hall operates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume small, effect sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 Is small, but when the pachinko machine 1 is in an abnormal state or the player is making a fraudulent act, an alarm sound set to a large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be made to flow. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of an abnormality or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. To increase the volume of the sound to make the screen being displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful in addition to music and sound effects, or advantageous for the player It can also be notified that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the rendering operation unit 400 and the like. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400 is operated during a demonstration in which the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. The value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400. There is. The adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track incorporating sound data of a rendering sound such as music or sound among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above, it is not reflected in the adjustment in the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510 a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 or the pressing operation unit 405. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume control volume 1510 a is mounted on the peripheral control substrate 1510, it is necessary to make the main body frame 4 always open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the store clerk in the hall that can turn the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may not be able to hear music and sound effects, or the player may feel large and feel loud music and sound effects. Therefore, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time, or a wait by customer becomes a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of music and sound effects to a desired volume, so if it is difficult for the store clerk in the hall to feel the volume adjusted and the music and sound effects are difficult to hear, the effect operation unit 400. The volume operation unit can be increased to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405, or when the volume clerk adjusted by the hall feels loud and feels loud with music or sound effects, the rendering operation unit A desired sound volume can be reduced by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of 400.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game is continued for a predetermined time, and when waiting for a customer and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times) The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and was playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, that is, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is adjusted. As a result, when it is difficult for the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 to feel the volume adjusted by the player who was playing the game, and to hear the music or the sound effects, The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and play the game by sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time If the player who is playing feels loud and the music and sound effects are felt loudly, the player who is sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game plays the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 or The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power supply system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 109 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. First, the power supply substrate 630 will be described, and then the power supply supplied to each control substrate etc. will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630, and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 630]
The power supply substrate 630 is electrically connected to the power supply cord, and the plug of the power supply cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply substrate 630, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the power supply substrate 630 includes a power control unit 935 and a emission control unit 633b. The power control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The part 633b is a circuit for controlling the drive of the launch solenoid 542 of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

  The power control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24 V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 through the power supply substrate 630, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. The synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies 24 volts AC (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. The power factor improvement circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power, creates DC +37 V (DC +37 V, hereinafter, described as "+37 V"), and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935 c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes + 37V, and supplies the smoothed + 37V to the launch control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 633b.

  The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633. It supplies backup power to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM).

  The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 633b uses +37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power source, and the gaming area 5a shown in FIG. 1 with the game ball with launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. Of the ball feed unit 250 by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 250 while adjusting the drive current for launching (projecting) toward the target and controlling the output to the launch solenoid 542. The ball feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the dish unit 320, and performs control to send the gaming ball received by the ball feeding member to the ball striking device 650 side.

  The power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c to +37 V to +5 V DC (+5 V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+5 V"), +12 V DC (+12 V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+12 V"), and DC. +24 V (DC + 24 V, hereinafter, described as “+24 V”) are respectively created and supplied to the payout control board 633 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system supplied with +5 V is a +5 V power supply line, the power supply system supplied with +12 V is a +12 V power supply line, and the power supply system supplied with +24 V is a +24 V power supply line.

  The +5 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935 d is supplied to the payout control board 633 as described later. The +5 V supplied to the payout control substrate 633 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM via the diode PD0 ing. The +12 V created by the power supply creation circuit 935 d is supplied to the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The +5 V production circuit 1310 g produces +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a from +12 V from the payout control substrate 633. The +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310 a via the main control filter circuit 1310 h and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 630 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM of the dispensing control substrate 633 The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control substrate 633 is also electrically connected. That is, +5 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 630 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952 a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM which is in the forward direction The current flows to the plus terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 is connected to the +5 V by the electrical connection method in which the +5 V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 630 is returned from the discharge control substrate 633 to the power supply substrate 630 again. Is supplied and can be charged. Thus, when +5 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935 d is not supplied to the payout control substrate 633, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control substrate 633 as a payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the stored content is held by supplying the payout VBB to the power terminal of the payout control internal RAM. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of capacitor BC0 of power supply substrate 630 is grounded to ground (GND), while the positive terminal of capacitor BC0 is electrically coupled to the power supply terminal of main control built-in RAM of main control substrate 1310 via discharge control substrate 633. And the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control substrate 1310. That is, +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310 a and causes the diode MD0 to forward the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0, Current flows toward the As described above, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5 V by the electrical connection method in which +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the power supply board 630. It can be done. As a result, +12 V created by the power supply creation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 630 is not supplied to the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g of the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 633, and the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g can create +5 V When the main control MPU 1310a is discharged, the charge stored in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, so the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is a diode. Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by the MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board etc.]
Next, an outline of the voltages supplied to the control boards and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltages supplied mainly to the payout control board and the voltages supplied to the main control board will be described.

  Three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power generation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 630 are supplied to the payout control substrate 633 as shown in FIG. 108, and of these three types of voltages, +12 V and +12 V Two types of voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Also, three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power source creation circuit 935 d of the power source substrate 630 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and peripherals via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is respectively supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

Three kinds of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral control substrate 1510 are, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), the drive source drive circuit of the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive substrate 4170 and the motor drive substrate 4180. It is supplied to 4180a respectively.
The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, blinking signals and gradation lighting signals to various decoration boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the board 5.

  Peripheral control board 1510 is provided with +3.3 V creation circuit 1510 b for creating +5 V to 3.3 V DC (DC +3.3 V, hereinafter referred to as “+3.3 V”) supplied from frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. The +3.3 V produced by the +3.3 V production circuit 1510 b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600 a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, +12 V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600 b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V and +24 V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 includes a +9 V creation circuit 194 a that creates +12 V to +9 V DC (DC +9 V, hereinafter referred to as “+9 V”) supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. A total of four voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decoration substrates of the door frame 3 together with +9 V generated by the +9 V forming circuit 194 a.

  Further, +12 V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper tray side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper-disc-side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates +12 V to +3.3 V. In addition to being supplied to the various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450 V shown in FIG. And the door frame side effect display device 460 is supplied. The voltage generated by the upper-plate-side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450 y is supplied to the door frame-side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 108, the payout control board 633 includes a payout control filter circuit 951 a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952 a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5 V from the power supply substrate 630, and removes noise from the +5 V.
The +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 630 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a.
For example, +12 V from the power supply substrate 630 is supplied to the payout control input circuit 952 b of the payout control unit 633 a and the like, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784 a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control substrate 633. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal for transmitting the number of balls of the gaming ball paid out by the pachinko machine 1, gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. to the hall computer installed in the game hall. It is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping, from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a, the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like. Note that +24 from the power supply substrate 630 is supplied to the main control substrate 1310 via the delivery control substrate 633 without being used in the delivery control substrate 633 at all.

8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 108, the main control board 1310 includes, in addition to the main control MPU 1310 a and the like, a +5 V creation circuit 1310 g, a main control filter circuit 1310 h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e and the like. The +5 V creation circuit 1310 g is supplied with +12 V from the power supply substrate 630 via the payout control substrate 633, and creates +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a from this +12 V. In the main control board 1310, a power supply system to which +5 V generated by the +5 V generation circuit 1310 g is applied and supplied is a +5 V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the +5 V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 630 and the +5 V power supply line created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g of the main control substrate 1310 are not electrically connected. The +5 V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 630 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control substrate 1310, and the +5 V of the main control substrate 1310 is configured. The +5 V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310 g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards except the main control board 1310.

  The main control filter circuit 1310 h is supplied with +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g and removes noise from this +5 V. The +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 630 via the diode MD0 and, for example, to the main control MPU 1310a. For example, +12 V from the payout control board 633 is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310 b and the like, and +24 V from the payout control board 633 is supplied to the main control solenoid driving circuit 1310 d and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12 V and +24 V from the power supply substrate 630 via the payout control substrate 633, and monitors the signs of the +12 V and +24 V power failure or short interruption. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e detects a +12 V and +24 V power failure or an indication of a momentary power failure, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e outputs a power failure notification signal to the main control MPU 1310 a as a power failure notification. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 633. In addition, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Also, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the blackout notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, they are respectively input to the decoration substrate of the door frame and the like through the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e applies the voltage to one of the +12 V power line or the +24 V power line by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines of the +12 V power line and the +24 V power line. As compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the symptom of the power failure such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 154 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 110 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 111 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 112 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 108 will be described, and then the power supply created by the main control board 1310, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU Various input / output signals to and from, and an interface circuit for communication between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

  The main control board 1310 includes the main control MPU 1310a, the main control input circuit 1310b, the main control output circuit 1310c, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and the main control board 1310 shown in FIGS. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 110, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 MHz (MHz ) Is mainly composed.

9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 110, the main control filter circuit 1310 h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has its first terminal applied with +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310g, its second terminal grounded to ground (GND), and its noise component removed from its third terminal +5 V is output. The +5 V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected at one end to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC0 so that the ripple (AC component folded in voltage) is first removed. Are smoothed out.

  The +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 470 microfarads (μF)) whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The ripple is further removed and smoothed by being connected to. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, and the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. It should be noted that when the power supply from the pachinko facility is cut off due to a power failure or momentary interruption at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, the electric charge in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 becomes a power failure or an instantaneous stop After generation, it is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC3 grounded, and the +5 V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple. The VSS terminal which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. A cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and a capacitor MC4 whose one end is grounded with the ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and via the resistor MR0, the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. Is applied to the plus terminal of the As a result, as described above, +12 V created by the power creation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 108 is not supplied to the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g of the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 633 and created +5 V When the circuit 1310 g can not generate +5 V, the charge stored in the capacitor BC 0 is supplied to the main control substrate 1310 as the main VBB, and therefore, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310 a Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held.

9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 110, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310 h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC 1.
The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC5 connected to ground, and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC5 It can be done. Specifically, when +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold (eg, 4.25 V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and one end is a capacitor connected to ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic corresponds to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function The logic becomes LOW when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, and this logic corresponds to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Respectively input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310 ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded, and +5 V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 110, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310 h is applied to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded, and +5 V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed +5 V is also applied to the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying +5 V to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal respectively.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal for outputting the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside It is in the state.

9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310 b is shown in FIG. 102 from the general winning opening sensors 3001 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the special winning opening sensor 2403, and the gate sensor 2401. In addition to the detection signal of the above, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 103 is input. The circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, so here, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is a RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 633 within a predetermined period from the time of power on, and main control of the main control board 1310 It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when it is notified of an error after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error, A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time of power on and an error release after power on (after a period of playing the function as a RAM clear, ie after a predetermined period from the time of power on) And the ability to Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 633 has, when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from the time of power on, the main control The main control built-in RAM is cleared by judging it as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 from the payout control board 633, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic from the payout control board 633 is input. An operation signal with “HI” is input from the payout control board 633 (a detailed description of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 110, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control substrate 633 within a predetermined period from the time of power on is a pull-up whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR4 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and is a non-inverting buffer ICMIC 10 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 10 A).) Main control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 633 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and transmission that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 The line is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 633 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, and the operation switch 954 is operated. When this is the case, the operation signal from the payout control board 633 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic is input as HI.

  The circuit constituted by the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Be done. When the logical value of the operation signal from operation switch 954 input to input terminal PA0 is HI, main control MPU 1310a does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM. to decide.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, and the transistor MTR0 is turned on to switch the switch The circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the logic becomes LOW. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 inputted to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. I will judge.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input through the payout control board 633. That is, between the substrates of the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633, in order to suppress the influence of noise intruding into the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the substrates, the voltage is higher than +5 V which is the control reference voltage. The voltage of +12 V is used to increase the signal reliability. Therefore, in the present embodiment, detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the second starting opening sensor 2402, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are on the +5 V side by pull-up resistance. While being pulled up, detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the general winning opening sensor 3001, and the gate sensor 2401 which are input through the panel relay substrate 3031 shown in FIG. Since the signal is not directly input to 1310, it is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor in the same manner as the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

9-5. Blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 108, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and +12 V and +24 V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of the +12 V and +24 V blackouts or instantaneous blackouts, and detects a blackout notice or a blackout notice as a blackout notice, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, when it detects a blackout or an instantaneous blackout. It outputs to the payout control MPU 952a of 633 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, first, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described, and then monitoring of a +24 V power failure or a momentary power failure, monitoring of a +12 V power failure or a momentary power failure, and output of a power failure notice signal will be described.

[9-5-1. Configuration of blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 111, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The REF terminal which is a reference voltage input terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 and the K terminal which is a cathode terminal are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line +5 V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set), which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC20 grounded at one end, and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled by the capacitor MC20 AC component is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V with the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B) is used. , And used to compare the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V with the reference voltage Vref. The monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21A. The monitor voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the fifth terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the sixth terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC21, which is grounded. The +5 V applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of +24 V blackout or momentary interruption]
As described above, the monitoring of the +24 V blackout or instantaneous blackout is performed by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 comparing the +24 V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 111, the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR21 electrically connected to the +24 V power supply line, Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND) Are electrically connected. The +24 V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21 A of the comparator MIC 21 is divided by +24 V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR 21 and MR 22, and the capacitor MC 23 removes the ripple and smoothes it. . The values of the resistances MR21 and MR22 become a power failure detection voltage V1 pf (in this embodiment, set to 21.40 V) which is set in advance when the +24 V fails or momentarily stops, and the voltage starts dropping from +24 V. At this time, the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 is an open collector output, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, One end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC24, and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low pass filter.

  When the voltage of +24 V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1 pf, the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21, is +5 V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal which is pulled to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND) The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of +12 V blackout or instantaneous blackout]
As described above, the monitoring of the +12 V blackout or instantaneous blackout is performed by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 comparing the +12 V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. The fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR24 electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and one end Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND) Are electrically connected. The +12 V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21 is +12 V divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR 24 and MR 25 and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC 25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 become a power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 10.47 V) which is set in advance when the +12 V causes a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts dropping from the +12 V. At this time, the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21, is an open-collector output, and is electrically connected to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 A described above. Of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 connected at one end and electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC24 connected to ground. It is electrically connected to the terminal PR. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low pass filter.

  When the voltage of +12 V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2 pf, the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21 is The signal which is pulled to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 is ground (GND) The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of blackout notice signal]
The D-type flip flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the D input terminal 1D terminal by the change of the edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal 1CK terminal, and this stored value While outputting (logic) from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from a negative logic 1Q terminal which is an output terminal. In addition, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the D type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the same as the logic of the signal inverted from the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal. When the signal whose logic has become HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set. Also, when the D type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to input a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal to set the latch state, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal that is input is input, the state in which the signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (at this time, the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic 1) Maintain the output state from the Q terminal).

  In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is grounded at the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, and the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, to the ground (GND). The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal is stored and not output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal from the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors a +24 V power failure or a momentary power failure, as described above Alternatively, a signal from the seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors a momentary power failure, is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC22, which is grounded, and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Ripple is removed by capacitor MC22 and +5 V is smoothed, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal is grounded with the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is the external It is in an unconnected state.

  In the D type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The power failure clear signal is started to be output and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed in the main control side power-on process to be described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310 a is input to the CLR terminal as its logic becomes LOW via the main control output circuit 1310 ca with a reset function. The D type flip flop MIC22 is configured to release the latch state when the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, and at this time, the logic input to the PR terminal as the preset terminal is inverted to output the output terminal. Output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic thereof becomes HI via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip flop MIC22 sets the latch state, and the logic becomes LOW at the PR terminal to latch the input state.

  The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to input terminal PA1 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a through main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22 A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure advance notification signal. Further, the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function, and the signal outputted from the 1 Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is reset The non-function main control output circuit 1310cb outputs the signal to the payout control board 633 as a payout blackout notice signal and outputs the signal to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral blackout notice signal.

  The main control input circuit 1310b electrically connecting the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is, as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR28 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line at one end and also non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 23A).) Main control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  The circuit constituted by the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR20 turns off. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset by the D type flip flop MIC22 Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 because the logic thereof is LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR29, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a It is input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either of the conditions that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the signal whose logic is LOW is D The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 as its logic becomes HI because it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip flop MIC22. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure notification signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a It is input to PA1.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function for outputting a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 633 as a payout blackout notification signal The output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR31 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR34 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC26 grounded. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via the (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control substrate 633 through the wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 633a shown in FIG. 113 in the payout control substrate 633. In circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit formed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is a switch circuit of the former stage, and the circuit formed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the transistor MTR22 of the latter stage is a switch circuit of the latter stage. It is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor of the previous stage The MTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side. The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset by the D type flip flop MIC22 The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage because its logic becomes LOW because the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal. Transistor MTR21 turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness), and the payout blackout notification signal whose logic is LOW is dispensed It is input to the control board 633.

  On the other hand, when either of the conditions that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the signal whose logic is LOW is D The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, and the logic thereof becomes HI to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned ON by being input. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is lowered to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control substrate 633 via the wiring (harness). A payout blackout notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 633.

Also, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function for outputting a signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal is open. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35 And are electrically connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR36 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via a wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of peripheral control unit 1511 in peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. And one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected

  The circuit constituted by the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR23 turns off. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset by the D type flip flop MIC22 Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 because its logic is LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the wiring (harness). The peripheral power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

  On the other hand, when either of the conditions that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the signal whose logic is LOW is D The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 as its logic becomes HI because it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip flop MIC22. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the peripheral power failure notification signal whose logic is LOW is the peripheral control substrate. It is input to 1510.

  Thus, the main control input circuit 1310 b which transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the main control MPU 1310 a as a power failure notice signal, and the 1 Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 The main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal, and there is one transistor in each, and the power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and peripheral While the logic with the peripheral power failure notice signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22 is dispensed to the payout control board 633 Reset function to output as a power failure notice signal The output circuit 1310cb has two transistors, a former stage and a latter stage, and the logic of the payout blackout notice signal is the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral blackout notice signal input to the peripheral control board 1510 And the logic of the blackout notice signal and the logic of the peripheral blackout notice signal.

  The collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR29 having one end electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and main control MPU 1310a via non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the rear stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the second embodiment via the wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a in 633, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is Through (harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a Since it is mounted on 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used to give notice of a blackout by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the blackout notice signal using +5 V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. Between the boards 633 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, in order to suppress the influence of noise intruding into the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards. Control of payout control MPU 952a and peripheral control MPU 1511a It is the reference voltage + doing power failure notice by the logic of the power failure warning signal with certain + 12V at a higher voltage (ON / OFF signals) than 5V.

9-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The serial data input terminal of the serial control port of the main control MPU 1310a receives serial data from the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 110 as a pay serial data reception signal through the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a do not have the reset function as the main payment serial data transmission signal and transmit the serial data transmitted to the payout control board 633 from the TXA terminal. The circuit 1310cb transmits the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function, and the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A main circuit serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function as a peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In addition to the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout that indicates the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above A payer ACK signal from the control board 633 is input through the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first starting opening sensor 3002 shown in FIG. 110 are input through the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is input etc.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-described payee serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs a main payment ACK signal to the payout control board 633, and for the start port solenoid 2404 shown in FIG. 123, the drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca The main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2404 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1404 shown in FIG. To the main control output circuit 1310 ca with reset function. Outputs signals and outputs drive signals from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca to various displays, and outputs various information (game information) about the game to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca with reset function The main control output circuit 1310 ca outputs various information (game information) relating to the game to the payout control board 633 or the like.

9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12 V from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 108 through the payout control board 633, and the +5 V creation circuit 1310 creates +5 V as a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a ing. The main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise intruding into the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress this, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using +12 V which is a voltage higher than +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. It is done. On the other hand, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, as a communication interface circuit, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 47 μF), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) are incorporated. It is configured.
) Is mainly composed.

The +12 V supplied from the power supply substrate 630 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 633, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is grounded to ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (in the present embodiment, the capacitance: 220 microfarads (.mu.F)). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and electrically connected to the anode terminal (No. 1 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 via a wire It is connected to the.
Thereby, for example, when power from power supply substrate 630 is not supplied to main control substrate 1310 via discharge control substrate 633 due to a power failure or momentary stop, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC50 is generated. The voltage can be continuously applied from the main control substrate 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC 10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 as +12 V.

  As described above, when a power failure or an instantaneous stop occurs in the power supply terminal VDD of the main control MPU 1310a, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in the present embodiment, the electrostatic capacitance: 470 μF) shown in FIG. 110 is charged. The main charge serial transmission port 1310 ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a is at least at least a command for which the main control CPU core 1310 aa has been set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41 aea by the unit 1310 aec and transmission complete as main cycle serial data from the transmission shift register 1310 aea.

  As described above, the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is to the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using +12 V which is a voltage higher than +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary interruption occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12 V from the main control substrate 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Because the main control MPU 1310 a is built in, the main cycle serial transmission port 1310 ae transmits the command set by the main control CPU core 1310 aa in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb by the serial management unit 1310 aec to the transmission shift register 41 aea for transmission When transmission is performed from the shift register 1310 aea as main cycle serial data, a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 50 at +12 V.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb of the main transmission serial transmission port 1310 ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data of up to 10 packets is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310 a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control substrate 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal outputting the main cycle serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 110 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and the resistor MR51 It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 through the same. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR52 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The circuit formed of resistors MR51 and MR52 and transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. When pulled down, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no current flows in the forward direction to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned ON, and the switch circuit is also turned ON. . As a result, a forward current flows in the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON.

  The +5 V supplied from the power supply substrate 630 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to be grounded. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (the sixth terminal) which is a power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (No. 5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5 V side by the AR 11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial control I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as a main cycle serial data transmission signal, and the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a Is input to the input terminal of.

  Thereby, as described above, for example, when +5 V supplied from power supply substrate 630 is not supplied to peripheral control substrate 1510 via frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, The charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied as the +5 V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 by applying +5 V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to the main control MPU 1310a when a power or momentary interruption occurs is generated. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb of the built-in main cycle serial transmission port 1310 ae can be completely transmitted, and the main cycle serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main cycle serial data is cut off. It is ensured that the peripheral control board 1510 is received without being damaged or being lost.

  When the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of main control MPU 1310a to peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR 50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor AR11 and the logic becomes HI. Logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a while the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a When is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned ON to turn on the photocoupler AIC10. The main voltage serial data transmission signal whose voltage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Thus, the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. It is the logic of

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the +5 V power supply line to which +5 V as the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a is applied, and the +12 V power supply line to which +12 V as the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50 is applied. However, measures are taken when the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop due to the occurrence of a power failure or an instantaneous power failure. That is, for the main cycle serial transmission port 1310 ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a, a +5 V power supply line, and the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310 h as the first auxiliary power, Are electrically connected in parallel, and even if a power failure or a momentary stoppage occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5 V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h which is the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and is configured from resistance MR50, resistance MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50. Reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 1310cb, +12 V applied to the +12 V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the plus of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 which is the second auxiliary power supply Even if a voltage for communication applied from the +12 V power supply line via the diode MD 50 drops due to a power failure or a momentary interruption due to the parallel connection of the terminal and the circuit, the second auxiliary power supply By applying the communication voltage from the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the disconnection of the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 and to prevent the dropout, so the peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the dropout of the command immediately after the occurrence of the power failure or at the momentary power failure.

  Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb of the main transmission serial transmission port 1310 a contained in the main control MPU 1310 a are all constituted of the resistance MR50, the resistances MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50 as main transmission serial data 470 μF is set as the electrostatic capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the reset function-free main control output circuit 1310cb that functions as a communication interface circuit. And 220 μF is set as the electrostatic capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb are reset to function as interface circuits as main cycle serial data. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the function-free main control output circuit 1310 cb, the peripheral control board 1510 may drop without dropping or disconnecting a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb. Can be received reliably.

[10. Circuit of payout control board]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 103 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 113 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit etc. of the payout control unit, FIG. 114 is a circuit diagram showing the payout control input circuit, FIG. 115 is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 114, and FIG. FIG. 117 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 117 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 118 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

10-1. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 113, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. 108 is applied with +5 V from power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 108, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of capacitor PC0. The capacitor (PC0) first removes +5 V from the power supply substrate 630 by removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) and smoothing. The second terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded with the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which the noise component is removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to ground (GND), the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 180 microfarads (μF)) By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed from +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal as the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, and the VDD terminal as the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, which will be described later. . When a power failure or an instantaneous interruption occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power from the pachinko facility is shut off, the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 causes a power interruption or an instantaneous interruption. After generation, it is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded, and the +5 V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  In addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0. A cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (a discharge control built-in RAM) built in the discharge control MPU 952a, and a capacitor PC4 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of the discharge control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and via the resistor PR0, the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the VBB terminal of the payout control internal RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. Is applied to the plus terminal of the Thus, as described above, when +5 V generated by the power generation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 108 is not supplied to the payout control substrate 633, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is paid off. Because the current is blocked by the diode PD0 to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is supplied to the payout control board 633 as The stored contents are kept by applying a payment VBB.

10-2. Circuit of payout control section]
The payout control unit 633a is reset as a peripheral circuit as shown in FIG. A payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 MHz in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[10-2-1. Dispensing control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 113, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 is for resetting the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC5, and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. It can be done. Specifically, when +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold (for example, 4.25 V), the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is a reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and one end is a capacitor connected to ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic corresponds to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output with reset function The logic becomes LOW when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, and this logic corresponds to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. Respectively input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function are activated when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold. Reset is applied to the payout control output circuit 952ca. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC7, and +5 V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

10-2-2. Dispensing Control Crystal Oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 113, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal which is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC8 at one end, and +5 V input to the VCC terminal is smoothed by removing ripples further. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed +5 V is also applied to the OE terminal which is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from an OUT terminal which is an output terminal by applying +5 V to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is a clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and a clock signal of 8 MHz is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded with the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives the payout blackout notice signal from the blackout monitor circuit 1310e provided in the door frame open switch 618, the main frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. 114, and the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. A circuit, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input through the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 124, and the power supply substrate 630, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, etc. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, and subsequently, the circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input, and the circuit to which the payout blackout notification signal from the blackout monitoring circuit is input, A circuit to which a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit to which an operation signal from an operation switch is input will be described. Various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 154 and the ball breakage detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591 and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 124 have various types of detection because the output terminals are of the open collector output type. The circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, so here, a circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit to which detection signal from door frame open switch is input]
The door frame open switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in a state in which 3 is closed to the main body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is other than the pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR22 which is grounded. Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC20 which is grounded. . The emitter terminal of transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC 20 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC 20 A)) payout control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input as the door open signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR25 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24, and is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 through the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR27 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to main control substrate 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of main control substrate 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the line. As the transistor PTR22 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, The contact constituting the door frame opening switch 618 is configured as a circuit also having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to the fluttering phenomenon of repeating ON / OFF for a short time.

  A circuit composed of resistors PR21 and PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit composed of resistors PR24 and PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit composed of resistors PR26 and PR27 and transistor PTR22 It is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a detection signal from 618.

In the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame open switch 618 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR23, and a door frame open signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Ru. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The PTR 21 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off.
Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The PTR 22 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off.
Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20. Thus, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. Thus, a door frame open signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Further, in a state where the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, since the door frame open switch 618 is off, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5 V side to turn on the transistor PTR21. And the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, and the outer end frame door open information output signal is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +5 V side to turn on the transistor PTR22. And the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door open signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open signal whose logic is HI is an input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952 a by turning on the door frame open switch 618. An outer end frame door open information output signal input to PA0 and having a logic HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door open signal having a logic HI is input to the main control board 1310, In the state where the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, when the door frame open switch 618 is turned OFF, a door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). Circuit to which detection signal from main frame open switch is input]
The main frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. When 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is the other of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR30 which is grounded. The first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC21 which is grounded. . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and connected with the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. As the transistor PTR23 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

  The No. 1 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR32 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 123 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of transistor PTR 24 is electrically connected to main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310 b of main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the line. As the transistor PTR24 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, or when the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, The contact constituting the main body frame open switch 619 is configured as a circuit also having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the main body frame open switch 619 due to the fluttering phenomenon of repeating ON / OFF for a short time.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR 29 and PR 30 and the transistor PTR 23 and the circuit composed of the resistors PR 31 and PR 32 and the transistor PTR 24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619.

  When the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR23 is turned off. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in a state where main body frame 4 is opened from outer frame 2, since main body frame open switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The PTR 24 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is the main control board It is input to 1310.

  As described above, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, when the main body frame open switch 619 is turned ON, the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 The main frame door open signal whose logic has become HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned OFF to The outer end frame door open information output signal with the LOW being input is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal with the logic set to LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Even in this case, since the main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it can not be determined whether the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 based on the above, the door frame 3 and / or It can be determined that a state where the player does not occur during normal game that the main frame 4 is open has occurred, and an external terminal frame 784 has an outer end frame door open information output signal. Because it is supposed to be input, this outside Whether the frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer through the external terminal board 784 and the hall computer is in a state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 based on the outer end frame door open information output signal Or, although it can not be determined whether the main body frame 4 is in the state of being released from the outer frame 2, a state in which the player does not occur during the normal game that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is open Can be determined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed switches, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is shorted for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even in the state of conducting), the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 and the body frame open switch 619 is shorted for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. As described above, by adopting the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 as a normally closed switch, the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end A frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are replaced with a normally closed switch (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 'and body frame opening switch 619') The door frame opening switch 618 'is turned on (conductive) in a state where the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4 and turned off (disconnected) in a state where the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. . When the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, the switch is turned on (conductive) and when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 'is broken for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 and the main body for some reason Even when the frame opening switch 619 'is disconnected and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Thus, even when the door frame opening switch 618 'and the body frame opening switch 619' are normally open switches, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of disconnection. The outer end frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). Circuit to which the delivery blackout notice signal from the blackout monitoring circuit is input]
The transmission line for transmitting the delivery blackout notice signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e included in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 through the PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR42 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR40 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC 40 A)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. As the transistor PTR40 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input as the payout failure notification signal to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  A circuit configured of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a payout blackout notification signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310.

  As described above, the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of two voltages of +12 V and + 24V from the power supply substrate 630, and detects no signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts without a reset function. A payout blackout notice signal is output to the payout control board 633 as a blackout notice via the main control output circuit 1310 cb. The blackout monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of the + 12V and + 24V voltages, and as described above, the condition that the + 24V voltage is larger than the blackout detection voltage V1pf, and the + 12V voltage is higher than the blackout detection voltage V2pf When both conditions of large are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 633 through the wiring (harness), and the logic is LOW. While the paid out blackout notification signal is input to the paid out control board 633, either the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the blackout detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the blackout detection voltage V2pf When the condition is met, the transistor MTR22 of the rear stage Payout power failure warning signal which logic becomes HI by the voltage applied to the data terminal is pulled + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via wiring (harness) is input to the payout control board 633.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the detection failure voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage + 12V is larger than the detection failure voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of a blackout or an instantaneous blackout At the same time, since the payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the payout control substrate 633, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR40 is turned OFF. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become HI from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when one of the conditions that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, that is, +12 V and / or +24 V When there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure, the payout blackout notification signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 633, and is thus applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 by the payout blackout notification signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e. Is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout blackout notification signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Thus, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary loss of voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltages of +12 V and +24 V, a payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. This is because, as described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary loss of voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no indication of a power failure or a momentary loss of voltage of +12 V and +24 V, a power failure notification signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the payout blackout notice signal input to the payout control MPU 952a according to the blackout notice and the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit to which detection signal from full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 provided in the fal cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 passes through the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. Has been entered. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control substrate 633 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The three-terminal filter PIC50 for full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite.

  The second terminal of the full detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded with the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the full detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50 is a full detection sensor 3 through the resistor PR44b. The terminal filter PIC50 is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 through the resistor PR45. Thus, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC 50. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is connected to the ground (GND) in addition to the electrical connection to the resistor PR45, and one end is connected to the ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC40 which is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and also a non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40 B).) Payout control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as the full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  The circuit configured of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154.

  As described above, the full tank detection sensor 154 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the far cover unit 270 is full with the stored gaming balls. In the present embodiment, when the storage space is not filled with gaming balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 154 is transmitted via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply substrate 630, When the signal which is pulled up to +12 V side by pull-up resistance 44a and becomes HI in logic in payout control board 633 is input to payout control board 633, when the storage space is full with the stored game balls , The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 633 through the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 630, and the logic becomes LOW Are input to the payout control board 633.

  When the storage space is not filled with gaming balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 154 is applied to the payout control board 633 through the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply substrate 630. The transistor PTR41 is turned on by inputting the signal pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, the full signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the storage space is full with the gaming balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 154 is the payout control board via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply substrate 630. In 633, the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 described above, whereby the transistor PTR 41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR47, and a full signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input to the switch circuit configured of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. Although the circuit configuration is employed, detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball breakage detection sensor 574 and the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124 are T-type filter circuits such as the three-terminal filter PIC50 for full tank detection sensor. It has a circuit configuration that is directly input to each switch circuit without intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 154 is provided in the fal cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the ball breakage detection sensor 574, the delivery detection sensor 591 and the like provided in the dispensing device 580 attached to the main body frame 4. The path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long and extremely susceptible to noise.

  The full tank detection sensor 154 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the far cover unit 270 is full with the gaming balls stored, and the payout control MPU 952a is a full tank detection sensor If it is judged based on the detection signal from 154 that the storage space is full of reserved gaming balls, the drive control of the payout motor 584 is forcibly stopped and the payout of the gaming balls by the payout rotating body is stopped. It is supposed to control. That is, when noise intrudes into the transmission path (transmission line) for transmitting a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the payout control MPU 952a is not full of the gaming ball in which the storage space is stored. In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the gaming ball by the payout rotating body, and the payout motor 584 is driven despite the fact that the storage space is full with the reserved gaming ball. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned winning ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotary body and continuing the payout of the gaming balls, the payout rotary body itself can not rotate and the payout motor 584 Load is applied abnormally, and the dispensing motor 584 is overloaded to generate abnormal heat and malfunction, or the rotary shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is transmitted to the rotational movement of the dispensing rotating body Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is first selected so that noise components are removed from the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 in the three terminal filter PIC50 for full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which operation signal from operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 of the previous stage through the resistor PR49. The base terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR50 whose ground is grounded. Further, the fourth terminal, which is an output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC41 which is grounded. ing. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR53 whose ground is grounded. The emitter terminal of the rear stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line And the non-inversion buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inversion buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inversion buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40 C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage is changed by turning on / off the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the front and rear stages, and the signal becomes an RWMCLR signal as the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Is input to

  The third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 of the previous stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 through the resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR56 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR 44 is electrically connected to main control substrate 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of main control input circuit 1310 b of main control substrate 1310 shown in FIG. 110 has +12 V. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR 44 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 44 changes, and the signal is input as the RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA 0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310 a.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact constituting the operation switch 954 repeats ON / OFF for a short time. The circuit is also configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 954.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit at the former stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit at the latter stage, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44 Is a switch circuit, which is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  As described above, the operation switch 954 includes a RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 633 within a predetermined period after power-on and a main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when it is notified of an error after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from time to time, and an error release after the power is turned on (after a period of playing the function as a RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period has passed from the time of power on) It has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, while after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on) In the function to perform the error cancellation in the above, it becomes an error cancellation signal.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48. The transistor PTR42 of the previous stage is turned ON while the switch circuit of the previous stage is also turned ON, and is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 of the previous stage, which is a voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 of the subsequent stage. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR 43 in the rear stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR54 and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is determined that the instruction is not to be issued, and the error is canceled when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after power on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). Judge not to indicate.

  Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal of which the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the logic becomes HI is the transistor PTR44. The transistor PTR 44 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, a RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is pulled down to the main control board 1310 when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness). It is input. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from the time of power on, the main control MPU 1310 of the main control board 1310, as described above, this logic is LOW shown in FIG. 110. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic is LOW becomes the transistor of the previous stage. The transistor PTR42 at the front stage is turned off and the switch circuit at the front stage is also turned off when input to the base terminal of the PTR42, and is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the front stage, which is a voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 at the rear stage. Is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR51, so that the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on.
As a result, the RWMCLR signal whose voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is applied to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is determined that the command is to be issued, and the error is canceled when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). Judge that it is something to indicate.

  In addition, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation becomes logic LOW by the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 being pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the logic HI shown in FIG. 110, as described above, when the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it instructs to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM.

10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. 116 will be described. As shown in FIG. 116, the payout motor drive circuit 952 d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952 da and a drive IC PIC 60. The power supply input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952 da are electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line and the +5 V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and +5 V are applied respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952 da is connected to ground (GND) It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supposed to be The power supply output terminal of voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third and tenth terminals which are the cathode terminals of drive IC PIC 60 via Zener diode PZD 60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of payout motor 584. No. 3 which is the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD60 with +12 V or +5 V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switching signal connected to the voltage switching circuit 952 da. While supplying to a terminal and a 10th terminal, it supplies to the payout motor 584.

  The drive IC PIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth and seventh terminals, which are the emitter terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, are grounded to ground (GND) and are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC 60. A payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal via the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second, fourth, ninth, and eleventh terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, which are collector terminals, are the first, fifth, eighth, and twelfth terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal and the 12th terminal which are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC 60 respectively via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the excitation signal is used. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 584. The payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca through the resistors PR60 to PR63 of the drive ICPIC60 It is outputted to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal and the twelfth terminal which are base terminals respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching of the excitation current flowing in each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 584 to rotate the dispensing motor 584. In addition, when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is interrupted | blocked by this switching, counter electromotive force generate | occur | produces. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive IC PIC 60, the drive IC PIC 60 is damaged. Therefore, as protection, the zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the third stage and the tenth stage of the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC 60. Adopted the circuit configuration.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 117 will be described. The payout control board 633 receives, from the CR unit 6 as described above, a game ball request signal BRDY and a payout operation start request signal BRQ via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 as described above. , And the predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and the ground LG created from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 125 are supplied, while the payout control substrate 633 is connected with a lending device such as a game ball Through terminal plate 869, an EXS signal indicating that a single dispensing operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that a dispensing operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible And output. As shown in FIG. 117, the input / output circuit that inputs / outputs these various signals and the like mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (in which an infrared LED and a phototransistor are built in).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON, but the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 Sometimes, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and also via the resistor PR72 It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71 and also electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR74 which is grounded.
The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (Non-inverted buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A)) Figure 113 It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. As the transistor PTR70 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and that signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR76 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 630 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to power supply substrate 630 via a wiring (harness), one end of power supply substrate 630 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line at one end, not shown. Electrically connected to the other end of the As the transistor PTR71 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 630 as a CR connection signal.

  The circuit configured of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR70 and switching circuit It will turn on. Thus, the CR connection signal 1 in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the CR connection signal 1 in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PTR75 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Ru.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and switching circuit It will turn on. Thus, the CR connection signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the power supply substrate 630 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply substrate 630. Ru.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side As a result, the transistor PTR 71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 630 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 630 Be done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 turns ON, When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC 71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line And the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inversion buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC80 B) without inverting). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as the BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Since the photocoupler PIC71 turns ON when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, The BRDY signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The BRDY signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR78 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same logic as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photo coupler PIC 72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photo coupler PIC 72 is turned on, while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC 72 is turned off. There is.
The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is connected to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line And the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inversion buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC80C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Since the photocoupler PIC72 turns ON when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, The BRQ signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The BRQ signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR80 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same logic as the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6.

An EXS signal indicating that a single dispensing operation has been started or completed is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the resetting function. A cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is input from 952 cb via a resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, and +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a The photocoupler PIC73 is turned off when the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal via the reset function-free output control circuit 952cb is HI.
The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic goes LOW. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83 and the logic is HI The EXS is input to the built-in control unit of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb It is the same logic.

  The PRDY signal which indicates that the dispensing operation for dispensing the lent ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, and +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a The photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the signal output via the reset function-free output control circuit 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic goes LOW. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86 and the logic is HI PRDY is input to the built-in control unit of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb It is the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from input / output terminals of various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 113, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Be done. On the other hand, serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted as a payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952 cb without reset function from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a. There is no reset function. A payout serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952 c b to the main control board 1310.

  The RWMCLR signal, the payout blackout notification signal, the door open signal, the full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) are connected to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition to the signal 1 etc.) being input, for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 which indicates the completion of the normal reception of the above-described payee serial data reception signal is output via the payout control input circuit 952b. The detection signals from the ball-off detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 124 are respectively input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal described above are respectively output to the payout control output no payout control output circuit 952cb from the output terminals of the predetermined output ports of the payout control MPU 952a, and the EXS signal from the reset function no payout control output circuit 952cb The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952 ca with reset function, and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952 ca with reset function to the payout motor 584 through the payout motor drive circuit 952 d In addition to The main control of the payout ACK signal from the payout control output circuit 952 ca with the reset function is outputted to the payout control output circuit 952 ca with reset function, the payment ACK signal notifying the completion of the normal reception completion of the main payment serial data reception signal described above. The drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 124 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the drive signal is output from the reset control payout control circuit 952ca as an error LED indicator 860b. Output to etc.

10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals of the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 633 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input and output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 633 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the payout control board 633 includes the above-described payee serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. Are output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310 b of the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above, the payout control board 633 has a main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, And 2 round big hit information output signal such as big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation in progress information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time short information output signal, game such as starting opening winning information output signal The game information signal and the payout blackout notice signal, etc., are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the payout control input circuit 952 b of the payout control unit 633 a of the payout control substrate 633.

10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 633 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), in addition to the above-described outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of gaming balls actually paid out as the winning balls by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls. The winning ball number information output signal outputted each time, the main winning ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal Outputs game information signals such as output signals, probability fluctuation information output signals, special symbol display information output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time information output signals, start opening winning information output signals, etc. to external terminal board 784 Do. These output signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal plate 784. In other words, two signals are outputted to the external terminal board 784: the outer end frame door open information output signal from the payout control board 633 side and the prize ball number information output signal, and the main prize ball number from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation in progress information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time short information output information signal, and starting opening winning combination information Eight signals, ie, output signals, are output (passed) through the payout control board 633.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the player's game or the like. When the 15 round big hit information output signal or the 2 round big hit information output signal is output to the hall computer as one big hit information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of times the round has become 2 rounds (2 round big hit) The number of times of occurrence of the jackpot), the number of times of big hit when the round has become 15 times (number of times of occurrence of big hit of 15 rounds), and the sum is the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, since the hole computer can not grasp the number of occurrences of the 2 round big hit and the number of occurrences of the 15 land big hit from the total number of big hits, the number of big hits actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is large. It can not be grasped whether it is a two round big hit or a 15 round big hit. Further, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and among the players, it is selected whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

  However, since the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of the 2 round big hit, even if the player starts the game, only the 2 round big hit occurs. There are times when the 15 round big hit does not occur easily. As described above, although the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, the player's irritability may be more than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the hall computer generates two rounds of big hit occurrences by separately outputting 15 round big hit information output signals and two round big hit information output signals to the hole computer as big hit information output signals. It has become possible to accurately grasp the number of occurrences of the 15 round big hit. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is the 2 round big hit or the 15 round big hit, and the data counter has 15 rounds. The number of occurrences of the big hit and the number of occurrences of the 2 round big hit can be displayed separately or only the number of occurrences of the 15 round big hit can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state. Absent.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round big hit information output signal is output to the hall computer in the period until the 2 round big hit occurs and ends, and the 15 round big hit information output signal is also 15 round big hits. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer in the period from the generation to the end. As in the present embodiment, in addition to the method of outputting the 2 round big hit information output signal and the 15 round big hit information output signal to the hall computer, for example, when 2 round big hit occurs, the 2 round big hit information output signal is only for a predetermined period. Such a two round big hit information output signal and 15 round big hit information such that the 15 round big hit information output signal is output to the hole computer for a predetermined period when it is output to the hole computer and 15 round big hit occurs There is also a method of outputting an output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period.

[11. Arrangement of Output Terminals of External Terminal Board]
Next, an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board 784 for outputting various signals to a hall computer installed in a game arcade (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the award ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side is covered by the external terminal board cover 786. FIG. 119 shows an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board.

  As described above, the external terminal board 784 includes an outer end frame door open information output signal, a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal and a 2 round big hit information output signal. When the big hit information output signal, the probability fluctuation in-progress information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time-shortening information output signal, and the starting opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 633, It is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

  The outer end frame door open information output signal does not occur during the normal game when the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. The prize ball number information output signal is a signal indicating that a state is occurring, and the payout ball number information output signal shown in FIG. 5 is generated every time the number of balls of the gaming balls actually paid out as the winning balls reaches 10 balls. The main prize ball number information output signal shown in FIG. 8 is a variety of winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal that tells you that the number of gaming balls scheduled to be paid out as winning balls based on the gaming ball entered to 10 reaches 10, and the 15 round big hit information output signal is a 15 round big hit In the state 2 round big hit information output signal is a signal to tell that it is in the state where 2 round big hit is occurring, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is in the state where probability fluctuation occurs A special symbol display information output signal ends the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 shown in FIG. The normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that it is in a stopped state, and the variation display of the normal symbol is ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. There is a signal that indicates that there is a time, the medium-time information output signal is a signal that indicates that a short-time condition is occurring, and the starting opening winning information output signal is the first starting opening 2 shown in FIG. 02 or game ball to the second start hole 2004 is a signal for transmitting this fact each time ball entrance.

  On the external terminal plate 784, as shown in FIG. 119, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in line. The output terminal PT1 is provided in white to output a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that indicates that the number of gaming balls actually paid out as the winning balls by the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When a prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer receives the prize ball number information output signal as the payout motor 584 of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball. While being able to grasp that the game ball of the ball is paid out as a prize ball, it is possible to count the number of balls of the game ball paid out and grasp the total number of balls of the game ball paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT2 is provided in green to output an outer end frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal has a state in which the player does not occur during the normal game that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. And, in the present embodiment, the signal is outputted from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is open. When the outer end frame door open information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door open information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the body frame 4 is open.

  The output terminal PT3 is provided in gray to output a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal has ended (stopped) the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal that indicates that it is in the state, and in this embodiment, the end (the stop) of the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3. Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp that the variation display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406, and counting the number of times, the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of times the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406.

The output terminal PT4 is provided in yellow to output a starting opening winning combination information output signal.
As described above, the starting opening winning combination information output signal is a signal that indicates the fact that the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 8 and, in this embodiment, Each time the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 from the output terminal PT4, the output is made for 0.128 seconds. When the starting opening winning combination information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer receives the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening of the pachinko machine 1 every time the starting opening winning combination information output signal is input It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the starting opening 2004 and counting the number of times the starting opening winning information output signal is input to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of balls of the game ball which has entered the ball.

  The output terminal PT5 is applied in black to output a 15 round big hit information output signal. As described above, the 15 round big hit information output signal is a signal indicating that 15 round big hit is occurring, and in the present embodiment, while the 15 round big hit is generated from the output terminal PT5, It is supposed to be output. When the 15 round big hit information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer generates 15 round big hits in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15 round big hit information output signal is being input. While being able to grasp that it is a state, it is possible to count the number of times that the 15 round big hit information output signal is input, and to grasp the total number of times the 15 rounds of big hit have occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT6 is pinked to output a two-round big hit information output signal. The two-round big hit information output signal is a signal that indicates that a two-round big hit has occurred, as described above, and in the present embodiment, while a two round big hit is generated from the output terminal PT6, It is supposed to be output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. While being able to grasp that it is a state, it is possible to count the number of times the two-round big hit information output signal is input, and to grasp the total number of times the pachinko machine 1 has generated two round big hits.

  The output terminal PT7 is provided in blue to output a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has ended (stopped) the variation display of the normal symbol, In this embodiment, output is performed for 0.128 seconds from the output terminal PT7 at the end (stop) of the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is finished (stopped) in 1402 and count the number of times, and the total displayed the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of pachinko machine 1 You can know the number of times.

  The output terminal PT8 is provided in red to output an information output signal during time saving. The time-shortening information output signal is a signal that indicates that the time-shortening state is occurring, as described above, and in the present embodiment, is outputted from the output terminal PT8 while the time-shortening state is occurring. ing. When an information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer recognizes that the pachinko machine 1 is generating a time-spacing state when the information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input. As well as counting the number of times that the information output signal is input during the short time, it is possible to grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 has a short time.

The output terminal PT9 is provided in orange to output an information output signal during probability fluctuation.
As described above, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal indicating that probability fluctuation is occurring, and in the present embodiment, is outputted while the probability fluctuation is occurring from the output terminal PT9. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer generates a probability fluctuation in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input. While being able to grasp a certain thing, it is possible to count the number of times the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input, and to grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 has a probability fluctuation.

The output terminal PT10 is given in light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal enters various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal that indicates that the number of gaming balls scheduled to be paid out as winning balls based on the balls that have reached the ball reaches 10, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer receives 10 balls of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball every time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. While being able to grasp that it is scheduled to pay out the game ball as a prize ball, count the number of balls of the game ball which is due to be paid out, grasp the total number of balls of the game ball which pachinko machine 1 is due to pay out can do.
In addition, for example, the game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game balls entered into various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001, 2201, and the large winning hole 2005 etc. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds × 2 times) seconds. As in the case of one continuous signal, the signals are output at intervals of 0.128 seconds.

  Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals outputted on the side of the payout control board 633, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 are main control board Various signals outputted on the side of 1310 are arranged to be outputted (passed) through the payout control board 633. Each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 is colored, and by electrically connecting a wiring having a connector in the same color as the color to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, the other wiring is erroneously made electric Connection can be prevented. The various signals output on the payout control substrate 633 are transmitted to the hall computer so that the various signals output on the payout control substrate 633 and the various signals output on the main control substrate 1310 are not mixed. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 of the external terminal plate 784 are arranged in a line on the left side of the external terminal plate 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 to the hall computer are By arranging them in a line from the center left side to the right side, also in this respect, the wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 633 side to the hole computer, and various types output on the main control board 1310 side Incorrect wiring to transmit signals to the hall computer And it is capable to prevent the connection.

  In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 633 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 are respectively halls from the external terminal board 784 It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, the gaming ball stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the gaming ball from the pachinko island equipment side is not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. When the jackpot happens to hit 15 rounds on the pachinko machine 1 by chance, the number of gaming balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the gaming balls as prize balls runs out, so payout is made (If, for example, a ball clogged or a ball clogged in the payout device 580, the game ball can not be paid out if it can not be eliminated). Then, as described above, the winning ball number information output signal outputted on the payout control board 633 side reaches 10 balls of the gaming balls actually paid out as the winning balls by the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. 5. Each time it is a signal to that effect, the payout control board 633 can output a prize ball number information output signal to be transmitted to the hall computer through the external terminal board 784 when the game ball can not be dispensed. become unable. When the gaming ball is not paid out, the player calls a store clerk or the like in the hall. A store clerk in the hall, for example, checks a hose-like supply nozzle or the like for supplying gaming balls from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 to identify the position of the ball jam (also, for example, occurs in the dispensing device 580 The game ball is returned to the state of being paid out by solving the above by specifying the position of the ball jam and the position of the ball blind.

  However, even if a store clerk or the like in the hall is working, since the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, the game ball is paid out by the work of the store clerk or the like after 15 rounds of big hit When the state returns to the normal state, the payout control board 633 will pay out unpaid gaming balls one after another, and even though it is the time when the 15 round big hit is finished and the 15 round big hit is not generated, the payout control board 633 Each time the number of balls of the game ball actually paid out as a winning ball reaches 10 balls, the payout motor 584 outputs a winning ball number information output signal to that effect and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 It will be. Then, although it is a time when 15 rounds of jackpots are not generated, a very large number of game balls will be paid out, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of balls of the game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 There is a problem that the hole computer can not accurately grasp the relationship between

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 584 is driven and controlled by the payout control substrate 633 and actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control substrate 633. The main control board 1310 enters the various game winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. The main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal indicating that the number of gaming balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls based on the payout control board 633 and the external terminal board 784 Adopted a mechanism to communicate to the hall computer. As a result, even if the above-mentioned trouble (ball clogging in the supply nozzle, ball clogging in the payout device 580, ball clogging, etc.) occurs, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state The relationship between the number of game balls scheduled to be released and the number of balls can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hole computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Circuit of effect display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is disposed in the vicinity of the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320, A liquid crystal module circuit 450V for drawing a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 120 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 120, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive substrate 4450 is mainly configured of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450 V is a serial signal (serial data) based on the differential system of “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. from the transmitter IC 1512 d for door frame side of the peripheral control substrate 1510 shown in FIG. Are transmitted to the common mode choke coil SDL0 through the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively. The noise can be separated from the negative signal. The plus signal and the minus signal from which the noise is separated are respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC0. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator) and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. Restore to three synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal) (that is, parallel signals before being serialized). The red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are, as described above, those in which the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the built-in VDP 1512a are each 8 bits. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits, they are upper 6 bits in each video signal.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450 V is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512 d of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Two signals in which certain LOCKN signal output request data are differentiated into plus signal and minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512 e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also input. As described above, forced switching circuit 1512 f of peripheral control board 1510 transmits two signals that are differentiated into plus signal and minus signal in differentiation circuit 1512 e, when these two signals are input. When the two circuits differentiated into plus signal and minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect as shown in FIG. Thus, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512 e, the two signals are connected in order to transmit the two signals, and thus the two signals are The difference is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, When two signals differentiated into plus signal and minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from transmitter IC 1512 d for frame side effect is transmitted from peripheral control board 1510 to a frame peripheral relay terminal. 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display driving substrate 4450 which is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The forced switching circuit 1512 f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512 e are not input, that is, the door frame A serial signal (serial data) based on a differential method called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of “S-Electronics Inc.'s“ V-by-One (registered trademark) ”from the transmitter IC 1512d for side effect as a plus signal and minus signal from the peripheral control board 1510 And 868, and are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and to the RXIN + and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e In When the two signals differentiated into the source signal and the negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are common. The signal is input to the mode choke coil SDL0, and then input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is an output request for the LOCKN signal when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differentiating circuit 1512e, A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

  As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, produces the start screen on the game board side when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on During a period displayed on the display device 1600 or a period in which a demonstration is performed by the gaming board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and effect display In order to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive substrate 4450 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that of the door frame side effect display device 460 It is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiating circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Shine Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from that of a company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, which is abnormal. Assuming that it is data, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output, LOCKN signal output request data having a data format different from that of the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are respectively supplied with +3.3 V created by the upper-plate-side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDS GND request paper, PLL GND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE 0, and MODE 1 terminals of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded to ground.

  The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal to the GND terminal which is a ground for the digital circuit, and a +3.3 V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal High frequency noise is removed from the line.

  The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and the capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal serving as the ground for the TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise from the +3.3 V power supply line.

  The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and the capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal serving as the ground for the LVDS input, and supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise from the +3.3 V power supply line.

  The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and the capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal serving as the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3 V power supply line.

  The PDWN terminal indicates that the logic is HI and normal operation is given by +3.3 V being supplied (applied), while the +3.3 supply is stopped and the logic is low and power is reduced. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3 V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and over voltage of the +3.3 V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

  The EDGE terminal is a rising edge of transmission of various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal described later. This terminal is used to designate either (when the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or a falling edge (when the logic transitions from HI to LOW), and in the present embodiment, the terminal As such, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to ground. Incidentally, when the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3 V, the rising edge can be specified.

  The OE terminal indicates whether or not to permit the output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC 0 to SYNC 2 terminals, D 0 to D 17 terminals, and CLKOUT terminals) described later, and in the present embodiment, the above-described embodiment As described above, the output is always enabled by connecting the OE terminal to the ground. Incidentally, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3 V, it will be in a state where it can not output.

  The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both to ground. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. In the normal operation mode in which the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal): horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver In this mode, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is designed to be switched automatically.

  For example, three video signals (video signals of 18 bits) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, For the reason that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal) such as horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal, it is abnormal for some reason If it is difficult to draw on the door-frame-side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode, and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistance SDR2, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via The peripheral control MPU 1511a confirms a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d in order to convey that effect to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal. Output When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver For the door frame side effect provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the Send to receiver ICSDIC0. The connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored by receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512 d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door It may be electrically connected directly via the relay terminal plate 882.

  As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. It is a terminal that outputs a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between them. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is the damping resistance of the effect display drive substrate 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the periphery The peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is input via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

  The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. It is a terminal. In this embodiment, since the three synchronization signals of the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal restored are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

  The DE terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal which indicates that data output from the D0 to D17 terminals which are data output terminals are valid or invalid. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

  The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

  Terminals D0 to D17 are three video signals (18 red, green and blue video signals restored on the basis of serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN + and RXIN− terminals, respectively (18 It is a data output terminal that outputs a bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals such as D0 to D5 terminals, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. The green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. Each of the door frame side effect display devices 460 is inputted through the ladder resistance SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17, and the signal lines of the red video signals R0 to R5 are damping resistors. The information is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

  The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other. It has become.

[13. Various commands related to sending and receiving of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 121 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 122 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 124 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 122, and FIG. 124 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command which is a command related to the payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described, and the main control board receives The various commands from the payout control board will be described.

13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is detected from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the special winning opening sensor 2403 shown in FIG. When a signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for delivering a gaming ball of a predetermined number of balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. The prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, which are storage trays, communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (in communication with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the dispensing motor 584 of the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing device 580) When a device for paying out game balls as a rental ball is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 121 (a), the main control board Commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared for the prize ball command transmitted to the payout control board 633 from 1310, and one prize ball is designated in the command 10H, and the command 11H is specified. Then, two prize balls are designated,..., And fifteen prize balls are designated in command 1 EH. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 to pay out the gaming balls by the designated number of winning balls.

  In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that pays out game balls directly as a storage ball to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322, which is a storage plate) are installed adjacent to a game arcade (hole). When a ball lending machine is electrically connected to 1 (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 121 (b), the payout control board 633 from the main control board 1310. The commands 20H to 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be sent to, and one prize ball is designated in the command 20H, two prize balls are designated in the command 21H,... Fifteen balls are specified. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 to pay out the gaming balls by the designated number of winning balls.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, and a self check is specified in this command 30H. The transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input, when the ACK signal to be output as acknowledgment of reception of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command transmission. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode indicating a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 122 and FIG. 123, various commands are special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 tuning effect related, big hit relation, power on, spread figure tuning effect related, general electric circuit board production related, notification display, status It is classified into the display and others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 tune production related]
Special figure 1 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 shown in FIG. 123, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 122, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1404 is composed of commands such as special figure 1 tuning effect start, special symbol 1 specification, special figure 1 tuning effect end, and fluctuation state specification. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 tuning effect start command is an instruction to start special figure tuning effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is for designating a specific jackpot, a non-specified jackpot, and the like The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the special figure 1 tuning effect end, and the fluctuation state specifying command is for specifying the probability and the time saving state. In the probability and short time states, a low probability time short state indicating a low probability state and a short time state, a high probability time short state indicating a high probability state and a short time state, and a low probability It consists of a low probability non-short state which indicates that it is a state and not a short state, and a high probability non-short state which indicates that it is a high probability state and not a short state (as normal gaming state, Low probability short time state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of winning a big hit is set higher than the low probability state (normal gaming state), and the time saving state is, for example, a normal by the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. The time for fluctuating display of symbols is shortened compared to the non-short time state (normal gaming state), and stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, so that the ordinary lottery result by the ordinary lottery in a predetermined time will be described. In addition to increasing the number of stop display times compared with the non-short time state, and further increasing the game ball acceptance rate (ball entry rate) to the second starting opening 2004, to obtain a lottery opportunity of a special symbol without reducing balls (In other words, when compared with the non-short time state, it is more determined whether to open and close the pair of movable pieces and to open and close the pair of movable pieces) By lengthening the duration of the opening and closing operation of the movable piece of the pair is a gaming ball acceptance rate of the second start hole 2004 state of increasing (ball entrance ratio)).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is sent at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start, the special symbol 1 specification command is sent immediately after the special figure 1 tuning effect start, special figure 1 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the fluctuation state state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol falling information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

13-2-2. Special figure 2 tune production related]
Special figure 2 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402 shown in FIG. 102, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 122, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1406 is composed of a command named special figure 2 tuning effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 tuning effect end. In these various commands, the status is “B * H”, and the mode is “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number).
Is assigned ("*" indicates that it is a specific hexadecimal number, and is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 tuning effect start command is an instruction to start special figure tuning effect with the effect pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command is for designating disapproval, specific big hit, non specific big hit The special figure 2 tuning effect end indicates the special figure 2 tuning effect end.

  As transmission timing of these various commands, special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the time of special symbol 2 fluctuation start, special symbol 2 designated command is sent immediately after special figure 2 tuning effect start, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is determined). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

13-2-3. Jackpot related]
In the category of big hit related, as shown in FIG. 122, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N-th display, big winning opening 1 closed indication, big winning opening 1 count indication, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , A small hit open indication, a small hit count indication, and a command named small hit ending. For these various commands, "C * H" is assigned as the status, and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The big hit opening command instructs the big hit opening start, and the big winning opening 1 open Nth display command is starting while the 1st to 16th round big winning opening 1 is open (shown in FIG. 99, the starting opening unit 2100 During the opening or opening of the Nth round of the large winning opening 2005), the large winning opening 1 closing display command starts during the large winning opening 1 closing between rounds (large opening of starting opening unit 2100 It indicates that the closing of the winning opening 2005 between the rounds or the closing start), and the large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of balls from 0 to 10 game balls has been counted (shown in FIG. 123). It is to convey the ball number of the game ball entered to the big winning hole 2005 detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403, and the big hit ending command is a big hit Is intended to indicate the ending start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  Also, the small hit opening command instructs the small hit opening start, and the small hit open display command is started during the small hit open (while the small winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is open at the small hit or The small hit count display command is a small hit medium large winning opening winning combination staging (in the small hit, the game ball entered the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403 The small hit ending command instructs the start of the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the beginning of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 open Nth display command is 1 to 16 round of big winning opening 1 open (starting opening unit 2100 Sent at the opening of the N round of the winning opening 2005), the large winning opening 1 closing display command is sent at the closing time of the winning opening 1 (start closing of the winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100), Large winning opening 1 count display command, when the large winning opening 1 opening and count change to the large winning opening 1 (when opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the game ball entered the large winning opening 2005 Is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403), and the big hit ending command is sent at the beginning of the big hit ending. , Big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100).

  Also, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the small hit opening (at the opening of the winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 at the small hit) The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of the small hit middle large winning opening (when the game ball entered the large winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403), the small hit ending The command is sent at the start of the small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 122, the power-on division is composed of commands at the time of power-on and the names of the main control return destination at power-on. These various commands are assigned status "D * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number.) ("*" Is a specific hexadecimal number. , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

The power on state command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command includes the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 124 at power-on (including power-on and power-on recovery as well as power on and power failure). Information that indicates that the RAM is cleared when the operation switch 954 is operated, and also includes power recovery (in addition to power recovery, power recovery may occur due to power failure or momentary power outage) .
Information indicating which state (probability and time reduction state) of the low probability time reduction state, the high probability time reduction state, the low probability non-short state, and the high probability non-short state described above; And information indicating a model code of the pachinko machine. For example, when creating a so-called max type, middle type, sweet digital type, the model code of this pachinko machine is for which copyright of the work, game specification (for example, probability fluctuation occurs) And, in addition to the game specification that the condition is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in the state that the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times) It is specified whether it is (so-called ST machine etc.) or the like. In other words, the information of the model code of the pachinko machine is a series code for identifying which type among max type, middle type, and sweet digital type that indicates the model type, and to identify the copyright of the work. In addition to the game code of the game specification (for example, when probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs, the probability fluctuation with the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited. And the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine etc.)) to occur.

  The power-on main control return destination command indicates a return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command mainly uses information for instructing the drive state of the starting opening solenoid 2404 shown in FIG. 123 and information for instructing the drive state of the special winning opening sensor 2405 shown in FIG. It is configured.

  As the transmission timing between the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, when the main control board is turned on (in addition to power-on, power failure occurs due to power failure or momentary power outage Is also sent). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and returns from a power failure or momentary interruption, the main control side power on process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process In the transmission process, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. General drawing tuning production related]
The figure related to common rendering effect is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 shown in FIG. 123, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 123, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is composed of commands relating to 1402 such as “general drawing tuning effect start, common symbol designation, common drawing coordination effect ending, and fluctuation state specification”. These various commands are assigned status "E * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The popular drawing tuning effect start command instructs the starting of the common pattern tuning effect in the rendering pattern specified in the mode, and the common symbol designation command is for designating a specific jackpot, a non-specified jackpot, and The figure tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure tuning effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state. In the probability and time saving states, as described above, a low probability time reducing state indicating a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability time shortening indicating a high probability state and a time shortening state It consists of a state, a low probability non-short state indicating a low probability state and not a short state, and a high probability non-short state indicating a high probability state and not a short state (usually As the gaming state, a low probability non-shorting state is set).

  As transmission timings of these various commands, a common figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of normal symbol 1 fluctuation start, a common pattern designation command is transmitted immediately after the common figure synchronization effect start, and a common pattern synchronization effect end command is Usually, it is transmitted when the symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the symbol is decided normally), and the fluctuation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the common map win information specification. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Regular Drama Director Related]
The regular electric rendition related to the pair relates to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by the drive of the start port solenoid 2404 shown in FIG. 99, and as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named Opening, General Electric Power Release Display, and End of General Electric Power. These various commands are assigned status "F * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per drawing is an instruction to start the opening per drawing, and the release command for general release is started during the release of the power (a pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left and right direction by the drive of the start port solenoid 2404 The state (or the time of expansion) is indicated, and the ending command per common drawing is the instruction to start ending per common drawing.

  As transmission timings of these various commands, the opening command per common drawing is transmitted at the start of opening per common drawing, and the common power release display command is used when the common power is open (a pair of movable pieces Is sent when expanding in the direction), and the ending command per drawing is sent at the beginning of the ending per drawing. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 124, the notification display categories are composed of commands such as a winning abnormality display, a connection abnormality display, a disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, a magnetic detection switch abnormality display, a door open, and a door closed. These various commands are assigned status "6 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  In the prize failure display command, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 when the player wins a big winning opening other than during a big hit (during operating condition device) (even if it is not even a big hit) Command is issued when the special winning opening sensor 2403 detects that the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electric route along the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. In the case where there is a typical connection abnormality, the start of the connection abnormality notification is instructed, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is, for example, the main control board 1310, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, This command instructs the start of the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display when a disconnection or short circuit of the electrical connection with the special winning opening sensor 2403 or the like occurs, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display frame De is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 123.

  Also, based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618, which is input via the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is open, the door frame closing command instructs the door frame 3 to be closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. When the door is in the closed state, the door open notification end is instructed. On the other hand, based on the detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. 124, which is input via the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. When the main frame opening notification is issued, the main frame closing command instructs the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619. When it is in the closed state, the main body frame open notification end is instructed.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, a winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning in the special winning opening other than during a big hit (during operating condition device), and a connection abnormality display command is paid out from the main control board 1310 as a payout control board 633. The disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is transmitted when there is no ACK response (ACK signal) from the payout control board 633 at the time of command transmission to the first start opening sensor 3002, second start opening sensor 2402, and special winning opening sensor The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality is detected in the magnetic detection sensor 4024. Further, the door open command is transmitted when the door open is detected (when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), the door The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame open is detected (when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619), the main body The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 124, the status display section comprises a frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), an error release navi command (corresponding to an error release command), and a command named frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned status "7 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navi command and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 633, and the detailed description thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancel navi command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 633, as shown in FIG. 124, “7 * H” While setting as a status, the received command is set as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancel navi command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 633, it adds “7 * H” which is additional information to these received commands. According to the above, it is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The frame status 1 command, which has been shaped, is sent at power recovery, when the frame status changes, and at error release navigation, the error release navigation command is sent at error release navigation, and the frame status 2 command is at power recovery , And when the frame status changes. The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navi command, and the frame state 2 command, which are shaped, are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 123, the test related category is composed of various commands named test. In this test command, “8 * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive substrate 4170, the motor drive substrate 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. Inspection of various substrates such as the drive amplifier substrate 194 etc.).

  As a transmission timing of a test command, it is transmitted at the time other than RAM clear and RAM clear at the time of main control board power-on. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it returns from a power failure or a momentary interruption, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 is operated, the main control side power on process described later is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

13-2-10. Other]
The other divisions, as shown in FIG. 123, are starting opening winning, variation shortening operation termination designation, high probability termination designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, ordinary symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, and It is comprised from the command of the name of special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect. These various commands are assigned status "9 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The starting opening winning combination command is for instructing the start opening starting winning effect start, the start of the effect when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 , And the start of the effect when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, respectively, and the variation shortening operation end designation command is a variation The high probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 memory command is issued. The game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol is changed by the first special symbol display 1404 of the function display unit 1400. The special symbol 2 memory command is used to convey the number of balls not yet used for display, and the special symbol 2 memory command has 0 to 4 special symbol 2 reservations (the game ball is in the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 8) The second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 enters the ball and conveys the number of balls (number of pending) not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the ordinary symbol memory command is the ordinary symbol 1 Hold 0 to 4 (The game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shows the number of balls not yet used for the variable display of normal symbols (number of held)) The special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command is pre-read before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable symbol display of the special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 1404 of the function display unit 1400. It is intended to instruct the start of pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display 1404 based on the special symbol 1 suspension, the special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command of the special symbol 2 suspension is the function display unit 1400 Prior to being used for the variable display of the special symbol in the second special symbol display 1406, pre-read and instruct pre-reading effect start to notify the notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1406 based on the special symbol 2 suspension It is

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, when the game ball enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3002 (when the game ball enters the second start opening), 72 when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting opening sensor 2402), mainly by voice from the speaker 622 shown in FIG. 72 and the upper speaker 464 shown in FIG. And the variation shortening operation termination designation command is transmitted at the termination of the stop period (after the lapse of the suspension termination period) after the fluctuation is determined after settling the variation shortening of the specified number of times, and the high probability termination designation command is It is sent at the end of the stop period (after the lapse of the stop stop period) after the fluctuation is determined that has digested the high probability frequency in the case of "high probability N times", and the special symbol 1 memory command is the special symbol 1 operation retention When the ball number changes (In the state where the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 and there is a number of reservations not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 1404 of the function display unit 1400, When the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases by using the first special symbol indicator 1404 for the variable display of special symbols) The special symbol 2 memory command is sent to the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number change (the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 and the second special symbol indicator 1406 of the function display unit 1400 displays the special symbol When there is a number of reservations not yet used in the variable display, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 and the number of reservations increases, or the number of reservations, the second special symbol indicator 1406 makes a special Pattern The normal symbol memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls is reduced (used when the variable number display is reduced), and when the number of the symbol 1 operation ball is changed (the game ball passes through the gate 2003 and the function display unit 1400 is normal) In the state where there is a number of reservations not yet used for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the symbol display 1402, when the number of holdings further passes the game ball through the gate part 2003, and from the number of reservations the normal symbol indicator Special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command is sent when the number of special symbol 1 operation holding balls increase (game ball at the first starting opening 2002) Is sent when the number of ball entry increases and the number of reservations increases), the special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is when the number of special symbol 2 operation holding balls increase (the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 and the number of holdings) But Sent) when it increases. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 or the second starting opening, as described above, the starting opening winning command is When the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 2402, it is transmitted to notify of that mainly by voice from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, as shown in FIG. The manner in which the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 7 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to audio notification from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the pachinko machine 1 is also used to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 may simply receive the starting opening winning command but may not be notified by voice from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 633 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 124, the various commands from the payout control board 633 are composed of a frame status 1, an error release navigation, and commands named frame status 2, and the frame status 1, error release navigation, and so on. The priority is set in the order of the frame state 2.

  In the frame status 1 command (corresponds to the error generation command), out of sphere, full, in 50 or more stocks, connection abnormality and CR non-connection are prepared, and in out of sphere bit 0 (B0, "B" Represents a bit)), the value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) if full, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1 in more than 50 stocks, and A value 1 is set to bit 3 (B3), and a value 1 is set to bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. In the bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 1 command, the value 1 is set to B5, the value 0 is set to B6, and the value 0 is set to B7.

In the error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the error cancellation command), the ball is detected, and the payout detection sensor error and the retry error are prepared, and the bit 2 (B2) is set to the value 1 in the ball, and the payout detection sensor In the case of an error, the value 1 is set to bit 3 (B3), and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set to bit 4 (B4). Here, "disbursement detection sensor error" indicates whether or not the malfunction of the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124 has occurred.
The "retry error" indicates that the payout of the inconsistent game ball due to the retry operation is repeated. In the error cancellation navi command bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7), B0 is the value 0, B1 is the value, B5 is the value, B5 is the value, B6 is the value 1, And the value 0 is set to B7.

  In the frame state 2 command, the ball removal is prepared, and during the ball removal, the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0). The bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command has the value 0 for B1, 0 for B2, 0 for B3, 0 for B4, 0 for B4, 1 for B5 and 1 for B6. The value 0 is set to B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power recovery, change of the frame state, and error release navigation, and the error release navigation command is transmitted at error release navigation, frame state 2 command Is sent when power is restored and when the frame status changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 125 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power on process, FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the main control side power on process of FIG. 125, and FIG. 127 is an example of the main control timer interrupt process Is a flowchart showing First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control timer interrupt process will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As random numbers used for game control, a big hit judgment random number for use in deciding whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and whether or not reach is generated when a big hit gaming state is not generated A random number for reach determination for use in determination, and a variation for use in determining a variation display pattern of a special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol indicator 1404 and the second special symbol indicator 1406 shown in FIG. 102 A random number for display pattern, a random number for a big hit symbol for use in determining a big hit symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 when generating a big hit gaming state, and this big hit The jackpot symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the symbol random number, the first special symbol indicator when generating a small hit gaming state A random number for the small hit symbol for use in determination of the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the 404 and the second special symbol display 1406, an initial value for the small hit symbol for use in the determination of the initial value of the random number for this small hit symbol A random number for decision etc. is prepared. Moreover, in addition to these random numbers, it is used to determine the initial value of an ordinary symbol determination random number per pattern for use in determining whether to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol for the normal symbol, and the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern for use in determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

  Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the random number for determining the jackpot is updated by hardware, and the other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the jackpot determination random number is directly updated by hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310 a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an first uses a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value to be a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310 a Based on (clock signal output from main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 110), other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted. After the extraction, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310 a performs a big hit on the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an at the time of obtaining the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an It is set as a judgment random number.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number per pattern normally is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later Each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one to count up. The counter counts up from the random value for determining the initial value per symbol normally to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value per symbol for normal. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number per symbol normal determination, the random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol is updated. Such a method of updating the counter is called "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery processing which randomly selects one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determining normal per symbol normally. .

  In the present embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 103 is operated at power on, or in the main control side power on process described later, the main control MPU 1310 a shown in FIG. The value (sum value) of the checksum obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value is stored in the main control side power-off process (during power-off) When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, for example, when it does not match the value of the checksum (sum value), the random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol is the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. Fetches the ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on the fetched ID code, fixed number range of the counter which updates the random number for judgment per normal pattern Et always performs initial value derivation process of deriving the same fixed value, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the random number for determining the initial value per symbol normally is designed to always overwrite and update the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by execution of the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set for the random number for determining the initial value per symbol normally is derived using the ID code, and the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310 a The first security measure that the ID code can not be rewritten even if the external device is stored if the ID code is stored in the ID code, and the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control internal RAM The second security measure that derives the same fixed value on the basis of and the two-step security measure by the second security measure is prevented from being analyzed by being taken.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which the ID code is taken out from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and this taken out ID code is used as a random number for determining the initial value per ordinary symbol. For example, a person who intends to illegally acquire a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball somehow acquires the game board 5 and disassembles it, and an ID code stored in advance in a non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a Even if it is acquired illegally and the timing when the value of the counter for updating the random number per symbol normal determination and the judgment value per regular symbol coincide can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310 a ′ provided in the other game board 5 ′. That is, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number per normal symbol judgment and the normal symbol per-coincidence value match is completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 was completely disassembled and analyzed because it is completely useless in other game boards 5 ', that is, other pachinko machines 1'. Even if the game ball is allowed to pass through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 99 at every predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. It is not possible to generate a game state in which the game ball can be accepted to 2004.

[14-2. Main control side power on process]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310 a is configured to set a stack pointer at a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Then, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the above-described main control program performs processing at the time of main control power on as shown in FIGS. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets the RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting the RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be updated.

  Following step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 154 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the watchdog timer control register” built in the main control MPU 1310 a to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310 af that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310 a is operating normally. The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register) to start the main control built-in WDT 1310 af and start timing until the main control MPU 1310 a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310 af starts, clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af is started, and the watch dog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310 a until the time measured reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, when the timer clear set value is not set in “WDT clear register”, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started and clocking is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before this clocked time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The timing by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af is cleared, and the timing is started again. As described above, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310 a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and starting the time measurement again. Can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clear process (step S14). In this blackout clear process, first, the blackout monitoring circuit 1310 e shown in FIG. 111 starts outputting a blackout clear signal. The blackout monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21 which is a voltage comparison circuit compares the voltage of +24 V with the reference voltage or compares the voltage of +12 V with the reference voltage to output the comparison result. The comparison result is that when no power failure or momentary interruption occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary interruption occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22.

  In the power failure clear process, the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is started by starting the output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. This blackout clear signal is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop IC via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca with its logic set to LOW from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310 a. Be done. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D type flip flop MIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is set until the latch state is set. The signal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequently, in the power failure clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not the power failure advance signal is input. The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is suspended), the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure notification. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage during the period from the power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). It is done. The determination as to whether or not the power failure notification signal is input is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the above-described D type flip-flop MIC22 as the power failure notification signal.

  If there is no input of the power failure notification signal after waiting for the voltage to become higher than the power failure notification voltage and stabilized after power on, the main control program outputs a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal changes its logic to HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop IC via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. Is input to As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D type flip flop MIC22 in the latch state. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure notice signal from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, when a state in which the logic becomes LOW to be input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is latched.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on) Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 124 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs, to the main control MPU 1310a, an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633. It does depending on whether it is done or not. The main control program determines that the RAM clear is not instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI based on the logical value of the operation signal, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to clear the RAM, and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. The state is set (game control side power on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above determines whether or not to delete game information related to games such as probability fluctuation and unpaid award balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is a flag indicating that it is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information, and a value of 0 when not deleting gaming information. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system for performing drawing control of the effect display device 1600 and the drawing control by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 shown in FIG. 126 is awaited (booted). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until boot.

  Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off or a power failure or momentary stop occurs, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. The determination in step S24 is performed based on the power failure advance signal. If it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notification signal is input, the main control program returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure notification signal is continuously input. Thus, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310 a with respect to the main control built-in WDT 1310 af activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af is cleared and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af. After that, the main control program again performs the main control side power-on process under the control of the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description of the point that the determination of step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process of step S22 will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notification signal is not input, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the game information is deleted and a value 0 when the game information is not deleted. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is to calculate the total by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control program causes the calculated checksum value (sum value) to be the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) described later. It is determined whether there is a match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been set, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, and a value 0 when the main control side power-off process has not ended normally. In the inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection. Detailed explanation about, is mentioned below.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as power recovery ( Step S34). In this setting, power recovery information is read from a ROM (that is, main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and this power recovery time information is set in a work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, the game information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in the predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to the state where the power is turned on after the power is shut off, as well as the state where the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary interruption, illegal means (for example A high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device is irradiated to the main control board 1310 to reset the main control MPU 1310 a itself, and also includes a state where it is restored thereafter.

  Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, the value (sum value) of the checksum, etc. are changed by performing various processes after this, so the main control side power-off process described later is normally ended and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not the value 0 (is the value 1) in step S26, that is, when deleting the game information, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30. When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally, the main control program executes the entire main control internal RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal according to the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is performed by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. In addition, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs the RAM clear and clears the game information, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing when the sum values do not match or when the main control power is turned off. When not terminated normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and based on the taken out ID code, the fixed number range of the counter which updates the random number per normal symbol judgment The initial value derivation process which always derives the same fixed value from is performed, and this fixed value is set to the random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol determination to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for the normal symbol determination described above. Do.

  Following step S38, the main control program sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in a work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel for the payout control board 633) and serial input / output ports for the peripheral control board 1510 (reception channel and transmission channel) incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. In the transmission serial port prescaler corresponding to (1), setting of the communication speed and setting of presence / absence of parity etc. are performed, and in the transmission serial port control register, setting of initialization of the transmission circuit and setting of transmission permission are made.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in the testing organization of the gaming machine, the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) etc. when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 154 (step S48). Here, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310 a for updating by hardware the jackpot determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate the jackpot gaming state among various random numbers related to the game The random number is latched and acquired, and the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an is set in the hard random number setting register.
When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is started by these settings, it is determined at high speed in advance based on the clock signal (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. After extracting other values in the numerical range one after another without overlapping and extracting all the values in the predetermined numerical range, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values in a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping at high speed. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and when the latch signal is input The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310 a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a jackpot determination random number.

  Following step S48, the main control program performs reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to convey that power has been turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34, The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command which are classified into the power-on described in the above are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Also in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, when setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored. is there. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power on state command and the power on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later. A detailed description of the point at which reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described later.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). As a result of this setting, a main control timer interrupt process to be described later is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, when the main control program passes a predetermined time from the time of power on, that is, when the main control side main process is started, the error cancel navi command of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) is It will regulate execution of game control side RAM clear processing which is triggered by receipt (normal time operation control expedient). As described above, according to the concept of time sharing, the main control program detects the detection signal input following the operation of the operation switch 954, as described above, for the error cancellation navigation command for a predetermined time from the time of power on. The RAM clear process is executed triggered by the input (game control side power on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error cancellation navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means), is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification accompanying the error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error cancellation unit), which was originally used to cancel an error generated for the payout operation, is used as a game storage unit for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization of the RAM, or after the lapse of the predetermined time It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred in relation to the ball dispensing operation.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off or a power failure or momentary stop occurs, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. The determination in step S54 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  When there is no input of the power failure advance notice signal in step S54, the main control program performs non-attrition random number update processing (step S56). In this non-coincidence random number update process, the random number for reach determination, the random number for variation display pattern, the random number for big hit symbol initial value determination, the random number for small hit symbol initial value determination, etc. are updated. As described above, in the non-coincidence random number update process, the software updates random numbers that are not related to the collision judgment (big hit judgment). In addition, the random number for determining a normal symbol, the random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol, the random number for determining a normal symbol variation pattern, and the like described above are also updated by the non-falling random number updating process.

  Following step S56, the main control program returns to step S54 again to determine whether or not there is an input of a power failure advance notification signal. The steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main process".

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt disable setting (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later is not performed, the writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of the game information is protected.

  Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latch state of the D type flip flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control program displays the start opening solenoid 2404, the special winning opening sensor 2405, the first special symbol display 1404, the second special symbol display 1406, and the first special hold number display shown in FIG. 102. The drive signal output to the unit 1405, the second special number-of-retentions display 1407, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1408, etc. is stopped (step S62).

  Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by regarding the gaming information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

  Following step S66, the main control program performs setting of RAM access prohibition (step S68). By the setting of the RAM access prohibition, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can not be accessed, so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be prevented from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a with respect to the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af. After that, the main control program again performs the main control side power-on process under the control of the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. The process of step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when it is momentarily stopped, and the main control side power-on process is performed when the power is restored thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process is ended normally. Is examining. As described above, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information is stored by fraud or not.

  Here, the point which performs determination of the presence or absence of the power failure alerting | reporting signal of step S24 following the wait time waiting | standby process of step S22 is demonstrated. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22 Explain the problems in

  As described above, when a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs and the power supply from the pachinko facility is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 110 is charged to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. The charge is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary interruption. That is, even if the power supply from the pachinko island facility is shut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the power supply from the pachinko island facility is applied by applying the electric charge charged to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 as + 5V. The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after it is shut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or a momentary stoppage occurs and a pachinko island facility When the power is shut off, the main control side power-off process can be reliably completed.

  However, as a very rare phenomenon, the system for performing drawing control of effect display device 1600 and the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of peripheral control substrate 1510 shown in FIG. Start a clock (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in the present embodiment) before starting (booting), and immediately before the standby time is reached, if an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs Although the charge stored in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42 within about 7 ms, and then By performing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, a main control side timer interrupt described later will be described. Management is performed, the contents of the main control internal RAM be updated, it may be impossible to complete the main control side power-off time of processing in the main control side power-on process. For this reason, based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM, the value at which the checksum is calculated is not stored, and the main control side power-on process is started again at power recovery.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the current power recovery, and the wait time standby process at step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and then the main control built-in RAM is processed at step S28. If the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM just before the momentary power failure or power failure occur in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, even if the operation switch 954 is operated by a store clerk or the like at the time of power recovery and there is no intention indication by the store clerk or the like in the hall of RAM clear, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly deleted (clear There is a problem that will be

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure advance signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure advance signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24 again, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the input of the power failure notification signal continues. Thus, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310 a with respect to the main control built-in WDT 1310 af activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af is cleared and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Although the value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is, as described above, mainly As stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the content (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all even if the setting of RAM access permission is made in step S10.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, step If it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, as long as the power failure notification signal continues to be Since it is possible to forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and restart the main control board 1310 by repeatedly performing the determination of step S24, it is possible to proceed with the game It is not possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and there is no change in the calculation result of the checksum. It has become so that it does not. Thereby, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 matches the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, which is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM, is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being initialized immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power recovery.

  Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure notice signal is not input (that is, step S22 When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game, if it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process, pachinko machine Even if the power to 1 is shut off, backup processing for storing game information according to the progress of the game by supplying power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 131 to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Main composed of the processing of step S58 to step S68, which is Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the control side power off process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a calculates the checksum in step S28 when it is restarted. Since it is determined that the result and the calculation result of the checksum in the backup processing (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) match, the instantaneous value stored and held in the main control internal RAM There is no need to initialize game information immediately before a stop or power failure occurs. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure notice signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM It is possible to start the main control side power-off process again without updating the key at all, but immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal is not input The main control side power-off process can be reliably completed within the "temporary power failure securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power from the pachinko facility is shut off, and the main control MPU 1310 a The charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 110 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal, as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary stoppage occurs. In the case where the main control side power-off process can not be completed within the "instant power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms due to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. Immediately after that, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is input in step 24. If the power failure notification signal is input, step S2 is performed. The determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure notification signal continues to be input, and the timer in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af by setting the clear setting value, clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af, and not being able to start timing again. There is. Since the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af by such software, a step after step S 24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S 42, and thereafter, in step S 52 It is possible to prevent the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated by blocking the progress to the control flow of setting the interrupt permission and starting the main control timer interrupt processing described later. Adopted the mechanism. In this way, when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is shut off due to a power failure or momentary stoppage, the portion covered by software so that the content (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all The contents of the main control internal RAM by dividing it into two parts to ensure complete completion of interrupt processing and that the contents (game information) of the main control internal RAM are not changed at all The game information can be reliably prevented from being changed.

  Next, the point will be described where reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (power recovery) In order to convey the information, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command divided into the power-on shown in FIG. 122 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command is mainly configured with information instructing the drive state of the start port solenoid 2404 and information instructing the drive state of the special winning opening sensor 2405 shown in FIG. It is done. Here, first, the power-on main control return destination command includes information for instructing the drive state of the start opening solenoid 2404 and information for instructing the drive state of the special winning opening sensor 2405 shown in FIG. 122. A problem in the case where there is no command, that is, a problem in the case where reservation setting of a command to be transmitted at the time of power on at the power on time of the main control return destination command is not performed in step S50 will be described.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit gaming state screen (for example, a big hit gaming effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 100, the main control board 1310 has a big winning opening When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while driving the sensor 2405 and the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 99 is opened by the opening / closing member, the main control board 1310 performs main control in step S34 In the setting of the work area of the built-in RAM, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, the game state is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In this state, the large winning opening 2005 is shifted from the state closed by the opening / closing member to the open state.

  However, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control substrate 1510 receives various commands from the main control substrate 1310 upon power recovery and returns, so a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a big hit gaming state as the gaming state, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main power control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the big hit gaming state I can not show at all which round of. In other words, for example, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 and is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 shown in FIG. 102, and the large winning opening 1 count display which conveys the number of gaming balls entering the big winning opening 2005 Even if the main control board 1310 transmits a command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the game, the peripheral control board 1510 enters the large winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number of balls can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it can not be displayed at all which round of the big hit gaming state (that is, how many rounds it is).

  In such a situation, when the main control board 1310 ends, for example, the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (the fourth round), the driving of the big winning opening sensor 2405 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened or closed by the opening / closing member 2107 From the main control board 1310 a large winning a prize opening 1 closed display command instructing to shift from an open state to a closed state (that is, start of closing between rounds of the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100). When sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts 5 rounds of the big hit gaming state (5th round), the big winning hole sensor 2405 is started to drive the big winning hole 2005 by the opening and closing member 2107 Transition from the closed state to the open state (that is, the fifth winning opening 2005 To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) of the command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, the peripheral control board 1510 switches the screen of the start of the 5 rounds of the big hit gaming state from the screen according to the probability and the time saving state described above, and displays the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, for example, the game state where the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 becomes a game state that indicates that the game state is advantageous to the player in the game state (for example, the movable piece has been expanded When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen to communicate to the player in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the start opening solenoid 2404 to be in an expanded state. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is set to the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 Based on the information, the game state is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, thereby starting the drive of the starting opening solenoid 2404 and moving the pair of movable pieces substantially vertically from left to right So that the transition to a state of being expanded to.

  However, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control substrate 1510 receives various commands from the main control substrate 1310 upon power recovery and returns, so a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the gaming state and the gaming ball is in the gaming state in which the game ball can be received to the second start port 2004 and the gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. When power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it is possible to display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and return, it is a gaming state where the gaming ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is realized. The peripheral control board 1510 can not display the screen to be transmitted on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and the gaming ball receives the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or a power failure occurs at the time of power recovery. In some cases, it may be forgotten that it is a possible gaming state, and in such a case, the gaming state is restored to the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state at the time of power recovery. In spite of that, the screen for instructing a game in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the screen for instructing a game of entering a game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed. There was also a problem that the player would not understand what kind of game they played.

  As described above, in the two examples described above, there has been a problem that the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can not be promptly returned after power recovery. In other words, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine misunderstands that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state, and breaks down when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. There was a problem that.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power recovery when power is restored due to power failure or momentary power failure, in addition to power on), the power on state command In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. And are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thus, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, for example, in the above-described example, in the fourth round of the big hit gaming state, A momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and when power is restored after that, driving of the special winning opening sensor 2405 is started as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the special winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state by the opening / closing member 2107 The peripheral control board 1510 can notify the peripheral control board 1510 that it will shift to the normal state, so the peripheral control board 1510 has identified the screen indicating that it is the fourth round of the jackpot gaming state (that is, how many rounds it is. Can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but it is a big hit gaming state and Screen to start driving of 05 and tell that the big winning opening 2005 is in the state of being opened by the opening and closing member 2107 (for example, "It is a big hit. The big winning opening is open. The game ball in the big winning opening Please display the message telling the player the message "Please play the game so that the player can enter the ball" in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine has a big winning opening after power recovery. It is possible to instruct a game to make the game ball enter the game in 2005, and for example, in the above-mentioned example, the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player In the state of the state, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the drive of the start port solenoid 2404 is started as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the pair of A screen that tells you that the piece has been expanded in the left-right direction (for example, "The movable piece is expanded. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the lower start opening." The peripheral control board 1510 displays in the display area of the effect display device 1600 a screen to transmit a message to the player, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine receives the game ball in the second starting opening 2004 after power recovery. It is possible to instruct the game of making a ball. As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, it is possible to finely instruct the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be promptly returned after power recovery. In other words, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine misunderstands that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state, and breaks down when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process of a manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28. The calculation and the determination of step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, a main composed of the processing of step S58 to step S68 which is the backup processing described above and an infinite loop Since the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 has not executed the control-side power-off process at one time, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, In the comparison determination, there is no possibility that the checksum values should match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is necessarily cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command divided into the power-on shown in FIG. By storing in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM as transmission information, only the two commands of the power on status command and the power on main control return destination command as transmission information transmit information storage area of the main control internal RAM as transmission information Will be stored in the In these commands, a power on state command is first transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, and then a power on main control return destination command is transmitted. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power on state command from the main control board 1310 is taken as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is as shown in FIG. 124 at the time of power-on (in addition to the case of power-on, it also includes power-on recovery due to power failure or momentary power outage). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 shown is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (other than when the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary interruption occurs and the power is In the recovery from power recovery, this includes the low probability time short state, the high probability short time state, the low probability short time state, and the high probability short time state, as described above. It is composed of information indicating whether or not to do, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, the problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  As described above, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (precisely, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine is for the copyright of any work In addition to the game specification that the game specification is continued until the next big hit game state occurs next when the game specification (for example, probability fluctuation occurs for example), the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited (for example, It is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (so-called ST machine etc.) or the like) in which probability fluctuations occur in a state of being performed 30 times or 70 times).

  In the manufacturing line of the maker who manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of a plurality of types of works may be mixed. Then, the worker of the production line is the master of the copyright of any work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). The main control board for one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyright of a work of movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works can not be known whether the main control board 1310 flows to the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310 Although the main control board 1310 flows to the manufacturing line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright for the work of cartoon F). There are also misconceptions and misconceptions that flow to the manufacturing line. For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line It is not possible to confirm to which work copyright the manufactured main control board 1310 belongs, and which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, etc.) for the same work copyright It is also impossible to confirm whether it is a type, and what game specifications (a game specification or a ST machine in which, when probability fluctuations occur, the state is continued until a next big hit gaming state occurs). As a result, when manufacturing the main control substrate 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control substrate 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexists, the main control substrate for the copyrights of multiple types of works It will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 while 1310 is mixed. Therefore, a worker of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5 in some cases. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, it also includes the power recovery due to a power failure or a momentary power outage). To transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command including the information indicating the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command divided into the power-on shown in FIG. 122 in step S50. And are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

  As a result, the operator of the manufacturing line of the manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line, and the inspection device becomes the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine that is included in the power-on state command received from the device, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is configured. And the sweet digital type, the serial code for specifying which type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (for example, when probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state is In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the probability fluctuation is in the state that the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited The main control board 1310 is for the copyright of any work by visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine etc.) It is possible to determine which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, which type) the copyright of the same work, and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine in which, when probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs. As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of multiple types of works coexists, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line The operator can visually distinguish the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work by being able to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications by visually observing the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not compatible with the game board 5 for the copyright of the work It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 127 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine, the first register bank used in the main control main process in the main control side power on process is selected from the first register bank Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

Subsequent to step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 turn on in accordance with the special symbol to be described later and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric character control process Payout control board 633 various commands transmitted by main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) in addition to the time when normal symbol display 1402 lights up in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the symbol and normal motor combination control process. When it is determined whether or not the customer ACK signal that indicates the normal reception is received is determined, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed.
Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction processing is performed. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction processing is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is reduced by 4 ms, and when the subtraction result becomes 0, the ACK signal input determination time is accurately counted. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program detects, for example, a game ball entered in the general winning openings 2001 and 2201 shown in FIG. 99, and a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001 shown in FIG. Detecting the game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 102 A detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403 shown in FIG. 102 detects the gaming ball entering the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 shown in FIG. 102, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402 shown in FIG. 102 for detecting the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 99, detects the game ball having passed through the gate unit 2003, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 shown in FIG. 102, and a magnet for detecting fraudulent activity using the magnet shown in FIG. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 for notifying that the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 102 has normally received the detection signal from the detection sensor 4024 and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later Each is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area. In addition, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 which detects the game ball which entered the first starting opening 2002, the detection from the second starting opening sensor 2402 which detects the game ball which entered the second starting opening 2004 When each of the signals is read, the start opening winning command classified into the other parts shown in FIG. 102 corresponding to this is stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402 The start-up winning command corresponding to this is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In the present embodiment, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting gaming balls entering the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and a special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the gaming balls entering the large winning opening 2005. Detection signal from the first starting opening 2002, detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 for detecting gaming balls entering the second starting opening 2002, second starting opening sensor 2402 for detecting the gaming balls entering the second starting opening 2004 And the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 for detecting gaming balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time when the switch input processing is started, and a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) After the lapse, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. Among the comparison results, it is determined whether there is one that is the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is further read again as the third time, and the result of the third read is compared with the result of the second read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result of the fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. We treat the same result and the one that there is no game ball entering.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program detects detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the large winning opening sensor 2403, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401 The effect of chattering, noise, etc. is achieved by performing two readings in total: two readings comparing the first to third times and two readings comparing the second to fourth times. Since false detection can be avoided, detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the large winning opening sensor 2403, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401 Reliability can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a false random number update process (step S106). In this success random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for big hit symbols and the random number for small hit symbols are updated. Moreover, in addition to these random numbers, random numbers for jackpot symbol initial value determination updated in the non-falling random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for the initial value decision for small hitting design is renewed. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are further improved in the main control side main processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing by being updated in randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers involved in the hit determination (big hit determination), each counter counts up only when the hit random number update processing is performed. In addition, the random number per normal symbol determination described above and the random number per normal symbol determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this success random number update processing.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number per pattern determination is an initial value updating type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value Is incremented by one each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The symbol is counted up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal pattern to the maximum value, and then it is counted up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal pattern. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number per symbol normal determination, the random number for big hit determination is updated by this success random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery processing which randomly selects one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determining normal per symbol normally. .

  In this embodiment, the random number for the big hit symbol initial value determination and the random number for the small hit symbol initial value determination are not displayed in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. Although updating is performed in the current random number update processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing that is the main routine in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, the processing time of the present routine is uneven every time the interrupt timer is generated. If the number of executions of the non-match random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the generation of the interrupt timer, the random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol And as a mechanism to update the random number for the initial value determination for small hit symbols only in the non-falling random number update process in step S56. .

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control program performs a winning ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and a prize ball command shown in FIG. 121 for paying out gaming balls based on the input information is created and paid out as a prize ball. If the number of scheduled game balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that effect, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or The self-check command shown in FIG. 121 for confirming the connection between the control substrate 1310 and the delivery control substrate 633 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and the self check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as the main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 99, a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and the number of balls of the game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball Has reached 10 balls, so the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633. If the payout control board 633 does not receive the payout ball command and the dispenser control board 633 reports that the payout control board 633 has normally received the command properly, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is confirmed. Create a self-check command to be sent to the payout control board 633 or the like. In addition, as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, when the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10 balls, the number of balls exceeded is the next time this is exceeded In the prize ball control process, the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and the number of balls of the game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on the input information. When has reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that effect, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area.

Subsequent to step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). On the payout control board 633, the payout control program is various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) divided into the status display shown in FIG. 122 (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navi command, and frame status 2 command) Send On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navi command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives the various commands as the payee serial data, the information for conveying the fact to the payout control board 633 is stored as the output information of the main control internal RAM output information. Store in the area. Also, the main control program reshapes the command normally received as the payee serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display in FIG. 102 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation The navigation command and the frame state 2 command) are stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Here, the frame status 1 command corresponds to a first error generation command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to a first error release command.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control program performs a fraudulent operation detection process (step S112). In this fraudulent action detection process, the abnormal state regarding the winning balls is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403 is input when it is not the big hit gaming state (when the gaming ball enters the big winning opening 2005) In this case, a prize-abnormality display command divided into the notification display shown in FIG. 102 as an abnormal state is created, and is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric combination product control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special motorized product control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an shown in FIG. 102, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an when the latch signal is input. The (random number value) is acquired from a hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a jackpot determination random number. Then, whether or not the big hit judgment random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the big hit decision value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether the jackpot gaming state is to be generated or not (referred to as "special lottery") or the value of the counter for updating the jackpot symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM It is determined whether or not it agrees with the probability variation hit determination value (determination of whether or not to generate a probability variation) or the like. Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of hitting a jackpot changes to a high probability (probability variation) set higher than that at normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, values 32668 to 32767 are set as the range (big hit determination range) of the above-described big hit determination values with low probability and are read out from the normal determination table, while the value is 31768 with high probability. A value of 32767 is set and read out from the probability variation judgment table. Thus, in the special symbol and special motorized product control process in step S114, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the built-in main control When it is determined whether or not the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the jackpot judgment random number (that is, a random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) It is performed depending on whether or not it is included in the big hit judgment range.

  When these determination results are based on the first starting opening sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 122 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second starting opening sensor 2402 In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. 122 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol display according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol Set the output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 so that the device 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 is turned on, and store it in the output information storage area described above as output information Do. In addition, according to the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big hit game state, various commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open N-th display command, big winning opening 1 shown in FIG. A close display command, a big winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the sending information storage area as sending information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. When you set the output of the drive signal to the special winning opening sensor 2405 and store it as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times the special winning opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state (round) is 2 times , 2 to turn on the 2 round indicator lamp 1407 a of the round indicator 1408 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the sound display lamp 1407a is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the round is 15 times, the 15 round display lamp 1407b of the round display 1408 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp 1407b is set to light up, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the presence or absence of occurrence of probability fluctuation is lighted in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal motorized product control processing (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary motor combination control process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal. Based on the determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value etc. of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number per symbol for determination is extracted and gate information storage area of the main control internal RAM as gate information Remember to

  In this gate information storage area, the 0th to third partitions (four partitions) are provided, and gate information is stored in the order of the 0th partition, the first partition, the second partition, and the third partition. It is supposed to be. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal Do.

  The gate information stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is gated to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is gated to the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two partitions is shifted to the first partition of the gate information storage, and the second partition of the gate information storage and the third partition of the gate information storage become vacant areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the gate information described above causes the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 to light up with the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 is set based on the above, and stored as the output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random symbol determination per normal symbol is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as a "normal lottery"). Whether to open and close the movable piece or not is determined based on the determination result (lottery result from the normal lottery). When the opening and closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces is expanded in the left and right direction, and the game ball can be received by the second start opening 2004, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes gaming state. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, and various commands classified into the common figure synchronization effect related shown in FIG. 122 are created and transmitted information The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol while being stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the output information is described above as the output information Store in the output information storage area. In addition, for example, when the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol taken out matches the determination value for the normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands relating to the ordinary electric circuit production shown in FIG. Is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2404 is set to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the above-described output information storage area as output information If the value of the random number for determining the selected standard symbol is not identical to the standard symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation is made based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above The display pattern is determined, and various commands classified into the general drawing tuning effect related shown in FIG. 122 are created, and the transmission described above as transmission information The output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol indicator 1402 is set so that the ordinary symbol indicator 1402 is illuminated according to the determined ordinary symbol variation display pattern while being stored in the information storage area, and the output information storage area mentioned above as output information Remember to

  Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control program is, for example, based on the output information, and when the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 633. When it is a big hit game state, drive signal is output to the big winning opening sensor 2405 which opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, and it is driven to the starting opening solenoid 2404 which opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to outputting signals, main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation in progress information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, ordinary symbol display information output Various information related to the game such as the signal, the information output information of the time saving, the starting opening winning information output signal (gaming information And it outputs the signal to the payout control board 633.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above, and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. In this transmission information, various commands classified in the special figure 1 tuning effect related shown in FIG. 122 created in the main control timer interrupt processing which is this routine, various types classified in the special figure 2 synchronous effect related Based on the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403 (see FIG. 102) when the gaming ball entered the various commands (for example, the big winning opening 2005 (FIG. 99 illumination)) divided into the command, big hit related Large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to large winning opening count command), various commands divided into power-on, various commands classified into general drawing entrainment related, various commands classified into ordinary electric wave connection related, In the various commands (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.) classified into the notification display shown in FIG. Min is the various commands (frame state 1 command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is configured into 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which configures various commands as main cycle serial data. As described above, when a power failure or an instantaneous stop occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 110 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main cycle serial transmission port 1310aa built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 112 shifts at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by using the serial management unit 1310aec. The data can be transferred to the register 41aea, and transmission can be completed from the transmission shift register 1310aea as the main cycle serial data. When a power failure is restored due to a power failure or an instantaneous power failure, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control power-on process shown in FIG. Because the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 122, which are classified as power on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. The power-on state command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value as main cycle serial data, and then the power-on main control return destination command is formed, status, It transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the mode and then the sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power on state command and the power on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 633 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit And the frame state 1 command (second error generation command) is transmitted (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 124 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) from the payout control board 633 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 An error release navi command (second error release command) is transmitted to the (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navi command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as an error release navi command in the form shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame open command (first main body frame open command) from the payout control board 633 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame open command (second main body frame open command) is transmitted to (effect control unit) (main body frame command transmission means, second main body frame transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 633 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command transmission means, second main body frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door open command (first door open command) from the payout control board 633 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) Section) sends a door open command (second door frame open command) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command having the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command having the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 633 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) Section) sends a door closing command (second door closing command) (a door frame command sending means, a second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 102 (step S122), and ends this routine. In step S22, the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared by setting a timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the timing by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af is cleared. Then, the timing by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af starts again, so that the main control MPU 1310 a does not have to be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af.

  Note that, as described above, when the main control board 1310 is in the process of proceeding with the game, the above-described backup for storing the game information by the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off based on the game information for which the backup process has been executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 The main control return destination command at power on in Fig. 122, which indicates the drive status of the start port solenoid 2404 and the special winning port sensor 2405, which are electrical drive sources by the port output process of step S118 in this routine It can be output to the substrate 1510. That is, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power on process in FIG. 126, the main control board 1310 mainly sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same process. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, the power on status command divided into power on in Fig. 122 and the power on status are reported to notify that power has been switched on (power recovery). A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power on state command as the main cycle serial data. Transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 in the following order: status, mode, and sum value; There are constituting the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery as the display area of the effect display device 1600. Can be displayed on the screen. By this, when the player is playing a game, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then when the power is restored, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power loss or power failure is restored promptly after power recovery. In addition, since the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and notified, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for being seen and broken down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood by returning to the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure, and returning promptly after power recovery.

  Further, in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the power of the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, In step S38 in the main control side power-on process, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is necessarily cleared. Thereby, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the same process, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on, the power-on state command divided into the power-on shown in FIG. And a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, two commands of a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command Is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM as transmission information, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power on state command is configured as the main cycle serial data. Inspection of main control board inspection process in order of status, mode, and sum value Send apparatus, followed by forming the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process in the order of thumb value. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process constructs information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 The above-mentioned series code for identifying which of the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type that indicates the model type, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs when the probability change occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in the state where the number of times of the special symbol change is limited Machine) and display detailed model information on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying It has become.

[15. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 124 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 144. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing when the payout control unit is powered on, and FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the payout control unit is powered on of FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process, FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of a rotation detection sensor history creation process, and FIG. 133 is a sprocket FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of a ball position judging process, and FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of an award ball stock number adding process for an award ball. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning ball stock number addition process for a rental ball, and FIG. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing an example of the tok monitoring process, FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing an example of the movement judgment setting process, FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout setting process, and FIG. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing an example of the operation setting process, FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing an example of the inconsistency counter reset judgment process, and FIG. 143 is an error cancellation operation judgment FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing an example of processing, and FIG. 144 is a timing chart showing signal processing (A) at the time of payout operation by ball lending and processing of confirming input signals from CR unit (A).

  First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball coverage determination processing, prize Ball prize ball stock number addition processing, prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls, stock monitoring processing, withdrawal ball look operation judgment setting processing, payout setting processing, ball look operation setting processing, retry operation monitor processing, inconsistency The counter reset determination process and the error release operation determination process will be described. In addition, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball sight determination processing, prize ball prize ball stock number addition processing, rental ball prize ball stock number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball viewing operation determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release operation determination process are one of the main operation setting processes in step S562 in the payout control unit power on process described later Performed as processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball look determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset determination processing, error release operation determination processing, prize ball stock ball number Addition processing, winning ball stock number addition processing for rental balls, stock monitoring processing, and the processing for setting out the movement of the balls to be judged Priority in turn has been set.

[15-1. Processing when the dispensing control unit is turned on]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the payout control program in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 turns on the payout control unit as shown in FIGS. 128 to 127 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Perform time processing. When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control program causes the payout control MPU 952a to set an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is to set the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU 952a. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Following step S500, the payout control program performs input / output setting (input / output setting of I / O) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 952a are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control program performs weight timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power interruption (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. A notice signal (delivery blackout notice signal) is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from the power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal (payout failure notification signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e of the main control board 1310. Therefore, wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable after power on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (wait timer) is used as a waiting time (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure notification signal (payout failure notification signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control program determines whether the operation switch 954 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it is determined that it does not instruct to clear the RAM and the operation switch It is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated when it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW while it is determined that the 954 is not operated. judge.

  When the operation switch 954 is operated in step S512, the payout control program sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control program can execute the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "RAM with built-in payout control") built in the payout control MPU 952a for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. State (the discharge control side power on operation control means). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S512, the payout control program sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) of the payout control MPU 952a, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, The number of ball stock numbers PBS, the number of real ball counts PB, the number of drive commands DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the logic of the PRDY signal logic stored in the CR communication information storage area This flag is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc. in which the state is set, and is set to 1 when the payout information is erased and to 0 when the payout information is not erased. Be done. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control program performs setting for permitting access to the payout control internal RAM (step S518). By this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, writing (storage) or reading of the payout information can be performed.

  Following step S518, the payout control program sets a stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and the process returns to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  Following step S520, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  When it is determined in step S522 that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the payout information is not erased, the payout control program calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is to calculate the total by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control program determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (described at power-off) described later. (Step S526). If they match, the payout control program determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control internal RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process ends normally, and to 0 when the payout control unit power-off process has not ended normally.

  When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is ended normally, the payout control program sets the working area of the payout control internal RAM as the power recovery time. (Step S530). In this setting, in addition to the value 0 being set to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, information at the time of power recovery is read out from a ROM built in the payout control MPU 952a (hereinafter referred to as "dispense control built-in ROM"). This power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control internal RAM. Thus, the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, an award stored in the prize ball information storage area) PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. and CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time etc. stored in the time management information storage area. Note that “power recovery” includes the state where power is turned on after the power is shut off, as well as the state where power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is erased, or the checksum values do not match in step S526, or When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (value 0) in S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process has not ended normally, the payout control program executes the entire area of the payout control internal RAM. It clears (step S532). That is, the payout control program executes the payout control side RAM clear processing in response to the detection of the operation signal of the operation switch 954 (payout control side power on operation control means). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Following step S532, the payout control program sets a work area of the payout control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, initial information is read out from the dispensing control built-in ROM, and this initial information is set in the working area of the dispensing control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control program performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Following step S538, the payout control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to clear the watchdog timer.

  Following step S539, the payout control program determines whether or not a power failure advance notification signal (payout failure notification signal) is input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut down or a power failure or a momentary stop occurs, the power failure notification signal (payout failure notification signal) is sent to the main control board 1310 as a power failure notification when the voltage falls below the power failure notification voltage. Is input from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e. The determination in step S540 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  If there is no input of the power failure advance notice signal in step S540, the payout control program determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. When 2 ms has elapsed, the value 1 and 2 ms have not elapsed. It is set.

  If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, if 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and the payout control program determines whether or not the blackout notice signal (payout blackout notice signal) is input. Determine

  On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S542, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, the payout control program sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 0 (step S544).

  Following step S544, the payout control program sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Following step S546, the payout control program performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read out from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are outputted from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU 952a based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information that indicates that various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 (a prize ball command and a self-check command shown in FIG. 121) have been received normally, a payout motor 584 The drive information for performing the drive control, the ball number information of the number of balls for which the payout motor 584 has actually paid out the game ball, and the LED display information displayed on the error LED indicator 860b are stored. When various commands relating to the payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a based on the output information, a payout ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or a payout motor The drive signal is output to 584, and the payout motor 584 actually pays out the number of balls for which the game balls have been paid out. It outputs to the external terminal board 558 as a number (in the present embodiment, every time the payout motor 584 actually pays out 10 game balls, it outputs a prize ball number information signal to the external terminal board 558. Concretely, Is provided with a counter for judging the number-of-awards information signal output for outputting the number-of-awards ball information, and the counter for judging the number-of-awards information signal outputs is provided for the game balls actually paid out The ball number is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the payout motor 584 actually counts the ball number of the gaming ball paid out. It is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring The ball of the gaming ball actually paid out by this payout motor 584 A process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the value of the prize ball number information signal output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is shown in FIG. Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 shown in 124, the number of balls of the gaming balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added and stored and updated in step S548, from the winning ball information storage area to the winning balls. The value of the number information signal output determination counter is read out, and when the read value of the read ball number information signal output determination counter exceeds the value 10, the prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal board 558, The exceeded ball number is stored and updated in the above-mentioned award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as the value of the prize ball number information signal output determination counter. ing. And outputs an indication signal to the error LED indicator 860b.

  Following step S548, the payout control program performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU 952a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. For example, an operation signal of the operation switch 954, a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, a BRDY signal and a CR connection A signal, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 for notifying that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission processing described later, etc. are read respectively, and stored as input information in the input information storage area Do.

  Following step S550, the payout control program performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer updating process, when it is determined whether or not the ball is in a state of being seen by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the spherical light being set as the determination condition is determined The time, the skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, and the ball removal determination set when discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 803 When it is determined whether or not the storage space of the far cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is full with the stored game ball, the full tank determination time set as the determination condition, the ball disconnection detection, It is set as the determination condition when it is determined whether or not the number of gaming balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the sensor 574 In addition to performing time management such as the ball out determination time, the ball number of the game ball received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body is not the same as the ball number actually detected by the payout detection sensor 591 Inconsistent counter reset judgment that is set as the judgment condition when judging whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC to monitor whether or not the payout of the game ball which does not fit properly is repeated repeatedly Perform time management of time. For example, when the ball judging time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so every time this timer update processing is performed, the ball judging time is reduced by 2 ms and the subtraction result When the value becomes 0, the ball is accurately measuring the judgment time.

In this embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is 60060 ms, the full determination time is 504 ms, the ball out determination time is 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is set to 7000 s (approximately 2 hours). Each time the timer update process is performed, the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball out determination time, and the mismatch counter reset determination time are each reduced by 2 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0. The extraction determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball out determination time, and the mismatch counter reset determination time are accurately measured.
These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control program performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read out from the input information storage area described above Determine The payout control MPU 952a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 based on various signals from the CR unit 6.
In the process of setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags which are payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage area (For example, the number of ball stock PBS, the number of real ball count PB, the number of drive command DRV, the number of misaligned counters INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information on the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc. in which the logic state of the signal is set.

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or power failure, values such as the number of ball stock PBS, actual ball count PB, number of drive commands DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The values can be restored to values such as the winning ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the driving command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous stop or power failure. Thereby, even when the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 580 is being executed, even if the payout operation can not be continued due to a momentary stop or power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Since it is possible, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 without excess or deficiency. In other words, while the payout control MPU 952a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 in the CR communication processing, the payout control MPU 952a causes a momentary stop or power failure while paying out the game ball to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322. Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the payout of the game balls can not be continued, the number of ball stock PBS, real ball count PB, number of drive commands DRV, mismatch counter INCC at the time of power recovery Etc. by being restored to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, which is stored as payout backup information. , Exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. It is possible to continue from time to time, so that it can continue to perform the payout of the game ball.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the momentary stop or stop at the time of power recovery even if the momentary stop or stop occurs. The various signals by the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 do not change due to the influence of a momentary stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals by the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 can be enhanced.

  In addition, as described above, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power returns, the PRDY signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM, which is set in the process for setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530. For example, when the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal which indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, for example, the payout control of the PRDY signal is performed. Output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU 952a. Then, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the award ball information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM, which is included in the payout backup information. It is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH based on and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation operates abnormally. If it is determined that the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1, and the payout ball is subjected to the operation determination setting process. , As an output of an error state to the CR unit 6, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit 6 The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for dispensing.

  Thus, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read out from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. Output to CR unit 6. Thus, for example, immediately before the momentary stop, if the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, since the state is restored at the time of power recovery, it is extremely early after power recovery. At the stage, a PRDY signal can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6 to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, to the CR unit 6 It can be informed that the payout operation of the gaming ball by the device 580 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the output of BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal from the CR unit 6, at an extremely early stage after power recovery.

  Also, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read out from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the logic is HI based on this CR connection signal, that is, pachinko machine When 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via the game ball connection device board 869, the game balls are paid out. In order to indicate that the dispensing operation is possible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6, while the logic is LOW, that is, When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the payout control board 633 and the CR unit 6 are connected to the game ball etc. When it is not electrically connected through the I / O port, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW to indicate that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. Output to CR unit 6 from the output terminal. The state of the logic of the EXS signal that indicates that one dispensing operation has been started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the dispensing control internal RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored as CR connection information in the state information storage area.

  Following step S554, the payout control program performs full tank and out-of-balls check processing (step S556). In the full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the storage space of the above-described far cover unit 270 is stored based on the input information. It is determined whether or not the game balls are full with the game balls, or the number of balls of the game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 described above by the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 It is determined whether or not it has become. For example, the determination as to whether or not the accommodation space of the far cover unit 270 is full with stored gaming balls uses the timer interrupt cycle 2 ms to detect fullness in the present fullness and ball out checking process. When the detection signal from the sensor 154 is ON, and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out-of-ball check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is When transitioning from OFF to ON, timing of the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above in the timer update process of step S552 is started. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check process It is determined whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the state information described above indicates the full tank information indicating that the storage space of the far cover unit 270 is full with reserved gaming balls stored therein. Store in storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the storage area for the far cover unit 270 stores the full storage information in the state information storage area to indicate that the gaming ball is not full. Do.

  It is also determined whether or not the number of gaming balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to cut off the balls in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process. That is, when the detection signal from the detection sensor 574 is ON, and the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 When the state changes from OFF to ON, counting of the out-of-sphere determination time (119 ms) described above is started in the timer update process of step S552. Then, when the ball out determination time has become 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball out determination time has come, whether the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and out of ball check process It is determined whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is ON, the ball breakage information for notifying that the number of balls of the gaming balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is a predetermined number or more is set. While storing in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the off-the-ball detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is determined that the number of gaming balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is not more than the predetermined number. Information is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control program performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 (a prize ball command and a self check command shown in FIG. 121) are received.
When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, a connection error is reported to indicate that the connection between the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633 is abnormal (the various command signals are abnormal). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control program performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as reception command information in the reception command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control program performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lent balls, ball removal and ball sighting are performed, determination of retry operation is performed, and the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls stock) is monitored. Do.

  Following step S562, the payout control program performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read out from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860b of the payout control board 633 is created and is stored in the above output information storage area as LED display information. Remember. For example, the above-mentioned ball out information is read out from the state information storage area, and based on the ball out information, the corresponding display data (when the ball number of the game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is not more than a predetermined number) In the present embodiment, the display value 1 (number "1") is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Following step S564, the payout control program performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various types of information are read out from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (door open command, door frame close command, main body frame open) divided into the state display shown in FIG. The main control board 1310 is created by creating a command, body frame closing command, frame status 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) and frame status 2 command). Send to For example, when the out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, a frame state 1 command is created based on the out-of-ball information when the number of gaming balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 And sends it to the main control board 1310. In addition, in this command transmission process, the payout control program is, for example, when there is a change in the frame state such as an error in the game ball payout operation occurring, the information on the portion where the error occurs in the payout operation A frame state 1 command (first error cancellation command) including “error occurrence position information” is generated (error occurrence command generation means). On the other hand, in this command transmission process, the above-described error occurs when the payout control program determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is the value 1, that is, the operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation switch 954 is detected. A cancellation navi command (first error cancellation command) is output (command transmission means). The payout control program transmits a main body frame open command (first main body frame open command) when the main body frame open detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619 is input (main body frame command sending means, Main unit frame command sending means 1). When the main frame closing detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619 is input, the payout control program transmits a main frame closing command (first main frame closing command) (main frame command sending means , 1st main body frame command sending means). Further, the payout control program transmits a door frame open command (first door frame open command) when the door frame open detection signal from the door frame open switch 618 is input (a door frame command sending means, Door frame command sending means 1). On the other hand, the payout control program transmits a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when the door frame closing detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input (a door frame command sending means, Door frame command sending means 1). In addition, the payout control program reads out error information including error contents from the above-mentioned status information storage area in the above-mentioned command transmission process (step S566), and machine number information for identifying itself with other pachinko machines and An error information signal based on the error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the hall computer receives the error information signal, the hall clerk provides the machine number information and the error information to the wireless device possessed by the hall clerk, and the hall clerk is a pachinko machine with a machine number based on the machine number information. In the above, it is possible to recognize that an error content included in the error information has occurred.

  Following step S566, the payout control program sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). The value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, so that the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the payout control program returns to step S539 again, sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and in step S540 determines whether or not the power failure notification signal (delivery power failure notification signal) is input. If it is determined that there is no input of the power failure notice signal (disbursed power failure notice signal), it is determined whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value 1 in step S542, and the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value 1 If it is, that is, if 2 ms has elapsed, the value 2 is set to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, and port output processing is performed in step S548. Port input processing in step S550, and in step S552 The image update process is performed, the CR communication process is performed in step S554, the full tank and ball out check process is performed in step S556, the command reception process is performed in step S558, the command analysis process is performed in step S560, and the main process is performed in step S562. Operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. . The process of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

  The processing content of the payout control unit main processing varies in accordance with the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 952a changes. Therefore, the payout control MPU 952a preferentially outputs, to the main control substrate 1310, a payment acknowledgment signal indicating that various commands related to the payment from the main control substrate 1310 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S548. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU 952a secures the processing time so that other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when there is an input of the power failure advance notification signal (payout failure notification signal) in step S540, the interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). With this setting, a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is not performed, the writing to the payout control internal RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Following step S570, the payout control program stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control program performs setting for clearing the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL as described above.

  Following step S576, the payout control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the value of the checksum and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG calculated in step S524.

  Following step S578, the payout control program sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control program performs setting to prohibit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control internal RAM is inhibited and writing and reading can not be performed, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Following step S 582, the payout control program enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, the watchdog timer is not cleared. For this reason, the payout control MPU 952a is reset, and thereafter, the payout control program performs the payout control unit power-on process again under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. The process of step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off process".

  The pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 952a) is reset when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, and the payout control unit power-on process is performed when the power is restored thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal or not, and in step S528, whether or not the processing upon power-off of the payout control unit has been normally completed Is examining. As described above, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM in duplicate, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to fraud.

[15-2. Disbursement control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program sets the timer interrupt to be inhibited as shown in FIG. Then, switching (saving) of the register is performed (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the general purpose register used in the payout control unit main processing.

  Following step S590, the payout control program sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time 2 ms of this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, a value of 0 when 1 ms or 2 ms has not elapsed when 2 ms has elapsed. Each is set.

  Following step S592, the payout control program switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing.

  Following step S594, the payout control program sets the interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[15-3. Rotation detection sensor history creation processing]
Next, rotation detection sensor history creation processing will be described. In this rotation detection sensor history creation processing, a history of detection signals from the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 124 is created.

  When the rotation detection sensor history creation process is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 detects rotation from the payout control internal RAM as shown in FIG. 132 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. The sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read out (step S610). The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is of 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bits B0, "B" represent bits). It has a storage capacity, and the history of detection signals from the rotation detection sensor 840 is stored in the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST. In step S610, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read out from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S610, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 by reading input information from the input information storage area. When there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the input information, the payout control program detects the light of the rotation detection sensor 840 for detecting the rotational position of the payout rotary body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 It is determined that the axis is in a transition state from the blocking state to the non-blocking state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the input information, the payout control program determines that the detection slit has shifted the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

  When the detection slit has shifted the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the blocking state to the non-blocking state in step S612, the payout control program performs shift processing of the rotation detection sensor detection history information (step S614). In the shift process of the rotation detection sensor detection history information, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S610 is the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2 , B 2 B B 1, B 1 ビ ッ ト least significant bit B 0, etc., shift from the least significant bit B 0 to the most significant bit B 7 by one bit at a time.

  Following step S614, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and ends this routine.

  On the other hand, when the detection slit shifts the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the payout control program shifts the rotation detection sensor detection history information (step S618). . In the shift process of the rotation detection sensor detection history information, the payout control program performs the same process as the shift process of the rotation detection sensor detection history information in step S614, and the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610. B7 B B6, B6 B B5, B5 B B4, B4 B B3, B3 B B2, B2 最 下 位 B1, B1 最 下 位 least significant bit B0, etc. from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 Shift one bit at a time.

  Following step S618, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and ends this routine.

  As described above, each time the rotation detection sensor history creation processing is performed, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted by 1 bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit is rotated. The least significant bit B0 has a value of 1 or 1 in accordance with a state in which the optical axis of the detection sensor 840 has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state or a detection slit transitions the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Since the value 0 is set, a history of detection signals from the rotation detection sensor 840 can be created.

[15-4. Sprocket fixed position determination skip process]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process will be described. In the sprocket fixed position determination skip process, the determination as to whether or not the payout rotary member to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted is at the regular position is skipped when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is also performed when the payout of the gaming balls by the payout device 580 is completed. This makes it possible to reliably start the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 in a state where no ball is generated.

  When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program is controlled by the payout control MPU 952a and as shown in FIG. It is determined whether FLG is the value 0 (step S630). The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, and the value of 1 when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (when skipping), payout rotation The value is set to 0 when the body position determination is performed (when not skipping).

  When it is determined in step S630 that the home position determination skip flag SKP-FLG has a value of 0 (when not skipping), that is, when home position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the payout control program determines The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read out from the storage area (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the home position determination value (step S634). The home position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have a value of 0, and a lower 4 Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S634, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  Here, in the case where the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST have a value 1, the detection slit is the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 described above continuously in four timer interrupt cycles. It means that it is the state which changed to the non-blocking state from the blocking state. In the generation of the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. 124 is rotated by four steps. The rotation of the dispensing motor 584 is the rotation of the dispensing rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear have play (backlash), the discharge rotating body rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. The rotation is designed to be equivalent to about two steps of rotation of the dispensing motor 584. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the fixed position of the dispensing rotating body is determined, the rotation detection sensor 840 is used. History of detection signal, rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is created by rotation detection sensor history creation processing shown in FIG. 132, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST, ie This is performed based on the detection signal from the generation of the latest four timer interrupt cycles. Thus, in the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 584 rotates four steps, so it rotates more than the rotation of the payout rotor due to backlash, and absorbs the rotation of the payout rotor due to backlash. Can. Therefore, since the erroneous detection of the fixed position of the dispensing rotating body due to the backlash can be prevented, the rotational position of the dispensing rotating body can be properly managed by the rotational position of the dispensing motor 584. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt cycles are 8 ms (= 2 ms × 4 times), and are set as the backlash absorption time.

  In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value match, the payout control program The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S636). Thereby, it can be set so as not to perform fixed position determination of the payout rotating body (skip). The payout control MPU 952a sets the rotational position of the payout rotary body at step S636 as the fixed position of the payout rotary body.

  Following step S636, the payout control program sets the skip determination time to be valid (step S638), and ends this routine. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same as the number of concave portions of the dispensing rotating body, and is formed equally (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection board. Further, as described above, the rotation of the dispensing motor 584 is the rotation of the dispensing rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In the present embodiment, the rotation (120 degrees) between the detection slits of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotor) is designed to correspond to the rotation of 18 steps of the dispensing motor 584.

  The payout control program manages the rotational position of the payout rotating body based on the number of steps of the payout motor 584 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Specifically, (1) a transition state in which the detection slit causes the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 to transition from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as "edge detection state"); A state in which the optical axis of the sensor 840 transitions from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as “fixed position determined state”), and (3) a detection slit transitions the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state It manages in three states of the state ("fixed position determination skip state"), and. The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 584, and the fixed position determination state of (2) corresponds to the rotation of four steps of the payout motor 584, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3) In this case, the rotation position corresponds to 13 steps of the payout motor 584, and the rotation position between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotary member, is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation.

  In the fixed position determination skip state (3), the detection slit transitions the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (= 2 ms × 13 steps).

  Since the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, subtraction of the skip determination time is performed in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. The payout control MPU 952a subtracts the skip determination time, and sets the initial value 0 to the home position determination skip flag SKP-FLG when the subtraction result becomes the value 0.

  On the other hand, when the home position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1) (when skipping) in step S630, that is, when home position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, step S632. When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step 4 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. . The home position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 952a.

  The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 802 and the tank rail 803, taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580, and guided to the payout device 580. When the gaming balls are charged against each other and charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. For this reason, the dispensing device 580 is affected by noise and is in the file environment. The payout device 580 is provided with a rotation detection sensor 840, and a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 is susceptible to noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the fixed position determination skip state of (3) described above, that is, the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In the transitioned state, the fixed position determination of the dispensing rotating body is not performed. Thereby, the accuracy of the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is enhanced. In addition, since the period and period required to detect the fixed position of the payout rotating body can be obtained by calculation in advance as described above, the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[15-5. Ball sight judging process]
Next, the ball look determination process will be described. In this ball sight judging process, it is judged whether or not the ball sighting state by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted is generated.

  When the ball judging process is started, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 detects the rotation from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control internal RAM as shown in FIG. The sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read out (step S640).

Following step S640, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the above-described rotation detection sensor 840 (step S642). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S640 matches the home position determination value. As described above, the home position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper four bits B7 to B4 are. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value 1.
In step S642, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S 642, when the lower 4 bits B 3 to B 0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S 640 matches the lower 4 bits B 3 to B 0 of the home position determination value, the payout control program This routine is ended assuming that the detection slit has shifted the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotating body is rotating, and no ball is seen. Do.

  On the other hand, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S640 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value in step S642 The value 1 is set to the middle flag PBE-FLG (step S644). This ball is a medium flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is in a state of being seen by the payout rotating body, and when the payout motor 584 is performing a blind movement, the value 1 and the ball are The value is set to 0 when no operation is performed.

  Subsequent to step S644, the payout control program sets the ball sighting determination time to be valid (step S646), and ends this routine. By making this ball look determination time effective, subtraction of the ball look determination time is performed in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payment control unit main process) shown in FIG. .

[15-6. Various prize ball stock number addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processing includes prize ball prize ball stock number addition processing and rental ball prize ball stock number addition processing, and the prize ball prize ball stock number addition processing is from the main control board 1310. The processing for adding the number of balls to be paid out on the basis of the winning ball command described later, the processing for adding the number of balls for winning ball stock number for rental balls is a processing for adding the number of balls to be paid out based on the rental ball request signal from the CR unit 6 is there. First, a winning ball stock number adding process for winning balls will be described, and then, a winning ball stock number adding process for rental balls will be described. In the present embodiment, it is set that the winning ball stock number adding process for the winning balls is preferentially performed, and the winning ball stock number adding process is performed according to the winning ball stock number adding process. After the gaming balls have been paid out by the payout device 580, it is set to carry out the processing for adding the number of balls for the number of balls for the ball for the game.

[15-6-1. Prize Ball Stock Ball Addition Number Processing]
When the prize ball stock number addition process for the prize balls is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 has the payout ball command as shown in FIG. 135 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is determined whether there is any (step S650). This determination is performed based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as reception command information in the reception command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. In step S650, the payout control program reads out the received command information from the received command information storage area and determines whether or not it is a prize ball command.

  If the received command information is not the winning ball command in step S650, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, while if the received command information is the winning ball command in step S650, the payout control program changes the winning ball command to this winning ball command. The corresponding winning ball number PBV is read out from the winning ball number information table (step S652). Although this prize ball number information table will be described in detail later, the prize ball number information table is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV.

  Subsequent to step S652, the payout control program reads out the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). The prize ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls not yet paid out by the payout device 580, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) in the present embodiment. There is. As a result, the winning ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from the value 0 to the value 32767. The prize ball stock number PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the winning ball stock number PBS is read out from the winning ball information storage area.

  The payout control program adds the winning ball number PBV read in step S652 to the winning ball stock number PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and ends this routine. After the addition in step S656, the prize ball command read out in step S650 is erased from the received command information storage area.

[15-6-2. Prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls]
Next, a winning ball stock number addition process for a rental ball will be described. When the bonus ball stock number addition processing for the rental balls is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 requests the rental balls under the control of the payout control MPU 952a as shown in FIG. It is determined whether there is a signal (step S660). This determination is performed based on the lent ball request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the rental ball request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the payout control program reads out the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a rental ball request signal.

  When there is no rental ball request signal at step S660, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, but when there is a rental ball request signal at step S660, the payout control program receives the winning ball information of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read out from the storage area (step S662), and the number of balls RBV is added to the prize ball stock number PBS (step S664), and this routine is ended. The number of balls to be lent RBV is a fixed value, and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of balls to be lent RBV. After the addition in step S664, the payout control program erases the rental ball request signal read out in step S660 from the input information storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, since the winning balls are prioritized (the winning balls and the lent balls are managed separately), the lent ball request signal is held even when there is a lent ball request signal. , Pay out the rental balls with the completion of the delivery of the winning balls. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the winning balls stock number PBS is set to 0 and the payout of the rental balls is performed.

[15-7. Stock surveillance process]
Next, stock monitoring processing will be described. In this stock monitoring process, it is monitored whether the game is not continued in a state (stocked state) in which the storage space of the far cover unit 270 shown in FIG. Processing.

  When stock monitoring processing is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. The prize ball stock number PBS is read out from the storage area (step S670), and it is determined whether the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or more than the caution threshold TH (step S672). The caution threshold value TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the dispensing built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 50 is set as the caution threshold value TH.

  If it is determined in step S672 that the winning ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold TH, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to the value 1 (step S674), and terminates this routine. In this caution flag CA-FLG, the player starts stocking the gaming balls in the accommodation space of the far cover unit 270, and the number of unpaid gaming balls (the number of prize balls stocked as described above) exceeds the caution threshold TH It is a flag indicating that it has reached, and is set to a value of 1 when it has reached the caution threshold TH or more, and a value of 0 when it has not reached the caution threshold TH or more.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to the value 0 (step S676), and ends this routine.

  If the gaming state is a big hit and the player is relaxed and looks into the effects displayed on the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 105 and the like, the player is inadvertently paid as a prize ball for one round In some cases, the game ball ejected is not removed from the lower plate 322 by operating the lower ball extraction button 263. When the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 322 is filled with gaming balls, and the gaming balls are accumulated in the accommodation space of the far cover unit 270. When the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with gaming balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS increases and becomes equal to or more than the caution threshold TH, and provided in the door frame 3 as a caution effect Several LEDs of various decoration boards blink. By this blinking, for example, it is possible to tell the store clerk in the hall that the player's game is to be watched. Thus, the store clerk in the hall can notify the player that the game ball should be pulled out of the lower plate 322, and the player fills the lower plate 322 (the housing space of the far cover unit 270) with the game ball full. It is possible to prevent the continuation of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the caution threshold value TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one fifth of the upper limit value 255 which can be represented by one byte (8 bits). This makes it possible to notify the store clerk in the hall to warn the player of the game at the earliest possible stage.

[15-8. Disbursement ball look operation judgment setting process]
Next, the payout ball look-up operation determination setting process will be described. In this payout ball look-up operation determination setting process, the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322 by the payout motor 584, or the ball glare movement is performed, or such payout or discharge is not performed. It is processing to set to either or.

  As the payout control program 633 a in the payout control board 633 starts the payout control program, as shown in FIG. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read out from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the RAM (step S680).

Subsequent to step S680, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 103 (step S682). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 matches the home position determination value. As described above, the home position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, “00001 111 B (“ B ”represents a bit.
The upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S682, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value match in step S682, It is determined whether the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation described below is operating abnormally, value 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and when the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry) When the operation is operating normally), the values are respectively set to 0.

  In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, or in step S684. If the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not the value 1 (is the value 0), that is, the retry operation is not in an abnormal operation, the payout control program determines whether the ball watching flag PBE-FLG is the value 1 or not. It is determined (step S686). The flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is viewed by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, and the ball for the payout motor 584 is spherical A value of 1 is set when the operation is being performed, and a value of 0 is set when the ball is not looking down.

  When the flag PEB-FLG is not 1 in step S686 (ie, the value 0), that is, when the ball is not moving, the payout control program determines whether or not the prize ball information storage of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read out from the area (step S688), and it is determined whether the read prize ball stock number PBS is larger than the value 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there is a number of unpaid balls in the payout of the game balls by the payout motor 584.

  When the prize ball stock number PBS is larger than the value 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid ball number, the payout control program determines whether or not the accommodation space of the far cover unit 270 is full of reserved balls. It is determined (step S692). This determination is performed based on the fullness information stored in the fullness and step check processing of step S556 in the payout control portion power-on process (disbursement control portion main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S692, the full tank information is read out from the state information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the storage space of the far cover unit 270 is full with the stored gaming balls.

  If it is determined in step S692 that the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is not full of the stored gaming balls, the payout control program performs payout setting processing described later (step S694), and this routine is ended. In this payout setting process, a payout operation of paying out the gaming balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 is performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S692 that the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of the stored gaming balls, the payout control program ends this routine.
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 is forcedly stopped when the gaming sphere in which the accommodation space of the far cover unit 270 is stored is full. If a winning ball occurs while the dispensing motor 584 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the dispensing motor 584 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition process shown in FIG. Will increase.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is not larger than 0 (is the value 0) at step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid ball number, the payout control program ends this routine. Thus, the game balls are not paid out.

  On the other hand, in step S686, when the ball is in-flag flag PBE-FLG is the value 1, that is, the ball is moving, the payout control program performs the ball setting operation processing described later (step S700). Finish. In this ball facing operation setting process, a ball facing operation for eliminating the state of the ball due to the dispensing rotating body of the dispensing device 580 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1 at step S684, that is, when the retry operation is in abnormal operation, the payout control program sets the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 584. (Step S702). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 584 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S702, the payout control program sets an output of an error state to the CR unit 6 (step S704), and ends this routine. In step S704, when the payout control program is not in communication with the CR unit 6 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball rental can not be made at present (CR unit 6 The logic of PRDY signal is held LOW, that is, held down, when the logic of BRDY from is held low (in other words, falling and held), the logic state of PRDY signal is set to PRDY signal output setting information And store it in the CR communication information storage area.
By this, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127, the PRDY signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read out, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and CR. Output to unit 6 On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal Is set as EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Accordingly, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127, the EXS signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball connection device connection plate 869. . Note that, “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and held) the logic LOW is maintained and the logic of the EXS signal is HI If at all (EXS signal is held rising) is to maintain its logic HI.

[15-8-1. Disbursement setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 584 is driven to perform setting for paying out the gaming balls.

  When the payout setting process is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program is controlled by the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. Read out (step S710). The drive command number DRV is used to command the number of gaming balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584, and is equal to the winning ball stock number PBS. The number of drive commands DRV is stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. At step S710, the number DRV of drive instructions is read out from the prize ball information storage area.

  Following step S710, the payout control program determines whether or not the drive command number DRV is a value 0 (step S712). This determination is made based on the drive instruction number DRV whether or not the number of gaming balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584 remains.

  When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of balls of the game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584 is zero, the payout control program stops output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 ) Is set (step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set to the payout motor 584, and is stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S714, the payout control program reads out the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and reads the actual ball count PB (step S718). The actual ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. This count will be described in detail later, but from the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Based on the detection signal of The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. At step S 718, the real ball count PB is read out from the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S718, the payout control program sets a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read out in step S718 from the winning ball stock number PBS read out in step S716 in the award ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV. (Step S720) The real ball count PB is set to the value 0 (step S722), and this routine is ended. When the drive command number DRV and the actual ball count PB are the value 0, at step S722, the value of the award ball stock number PBS read out at step S716 is directly set to the drive command number DRV.

  On the other hand, when the drive instruction number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when there is the number of gaming balls to be dispensed by the payout motor 584, the payout control program sets the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

  Following step S724, the payout control program subtracts (decrements, 1 step, step S726) from the drive command number DRV, and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 (step S728). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout controller main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 or not.

  When there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S728, the payout control program adds the value 1 to the actual ball count PB (increment, step S730), and this routine is ended. In step S730, the real ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the real ball count PB.

  On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S728, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As described above, the payout control program decrements the drive command number DRV in step S726 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, and when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the determination of step S728, that is, When the ball count is not incremented, the game ball can not be paid out because the game ball is not received by the recess of the payout rotary body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. Judge. Therefore, the payout control program sets a value obtained by subtracting the real ball count PB from the winning ball stock number PBS in the drive command number DRV in step S720 described above in order to pay out the one ball to be paid out again. Thus, when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the real ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out is included in the winning ball stock number PBS. In other words, the value 1 which is the one ball to be paid out can be rounded into the prize ball stock number PBS, so that the retry operation can be performed to pay out the one ball to be paid out again . By performing this retry operation, it is possible to extremely reduce the possibility that the game balls will not be paid out to the player, and the disadvantage of the player due to the non-payment of the game balls can be prevented.

[15-8-2. Ball clasp movement setting process]
Next, the ball look-up operation setting process is described. In this ball facing operation setting process, setting is performed to eliminate the state where the ball is viewed by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is transmitted.

  As the ball control operation setting process is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 952a and, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it has been (step S750). This determination is performed based on the sphere determination time which is subtracted in the timer update process of step S 552 in the payout control unit power-on process (dispense control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball judging time is stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above as time management information. In step S750, the time management information is read out from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the determination time.

  If it is determined in step S750 that the ball determination time has not elapsed, the payout control program reads the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the payout control internal RAM described above (step S752). .

  Following step S752, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 matches the home position determination value. As described above, the home position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper four bits B7 to B4 are. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value 1. In step S754, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value do not match, the payout control program The output of the drive signal to the dispensing motor 584 is set so that the ball can be turned on (step S756), and this routine is ended. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value match, the payout control program Sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set to the payout motor 584 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following the step S758, the payout control program sets the ball watching flag PBE-FLG to the value 0 as the ball watching operation ends (step S760), and ends this routine. This ball is a medium flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is in a state of being seen by the payout rotating body, and when the payout motor 584 is performing a blind movement, the value 1 and the ball are The value is set to 0 when the operation is not being performed (the end of the ball leaning operation).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S750 that the ball has been determined, the payout control program sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 584 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S762, the payout control program sets an output of an error state to the CR unit 6 (step S764). Here, when the payout control MPU 952a is not in communication with the CR unit 6 to notify the CR unit 6 that it is currently in a state that it is not possible to lend a ball (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, (When falling and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is held LOW, ie, held down, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area Do. By this, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127, the PRDY signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read out, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 Output to unit 6 On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal Is set as EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Accordingly, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127, the EXS signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball connection device connection plate 869. . As described above, “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” maintains the logic LOW of the EXS signal when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the EXS signal is maintained. When the logic of H is HI (EXS signal is held rising) is to maintain that logic HI.

  Subsequent to step S764, the payout control program sets the ball watching flag PBE-FLG to the value 0 as the end of the ball watching operation (step S766), and ends this routine.

[15-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, retry operation monitoring processing will be described. In this retry operation monitoring process, it is a process of monitoring whether or not the retry operation of paying out the gaming ball to be paid out again is normally performed.

  When the retry operation monitoring process is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 detects the rotation of the above-described payout control internal RAM as shown in FIG. 141 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read out from the sensor history information storage area (step S770).

  Following step S770, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the above-described rotation detection sensor 840 (step S772). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this home position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper four bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S772, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the payout control program The mismatch counter INCC is incremented by 1 (increment, step S774). The misalignment counter INCC includes the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591. Usually, the number of balls of the game ball received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotary body coincides with the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591. Therefore, the value is 0. Since the payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 139, the number of balls of the gaming ball paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotating body by the retry operation and the payout detection in practice It is determined by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC whether or not the game balls that are inconsistent due to the mismatch between the number of balls detected by the sensor 591 and the number of balls are repeatedly being repeated. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the payout control program increments the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area.

Subsequent to step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value Sometimes, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 (step S776). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG.
Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as the input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 or not.

  When there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S776, the payout control program subtracts the value 1 from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (decrement, step S778). ).

  Subsequent to step S778, or when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S776, the payout control program determines whether the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH (step S780). In the pachinko machine 1, it is experimentally obtained that the probability that one unintended gaming ball due to the retry operation is paid out is about one in several million, and in the present embodiment, the inconsistency threshold INCTH As the value 5 is set.

  In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530 in the processing when the payout control unit is turned on in FIG. 127, as described above, it is the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM at power recovery. Information to be used for the retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC or the like at the time of power recovery is restored to a value such as the inconsistency counter INCC immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. It can be done. Thereby, in the determination of step S780, monitoring of the payout operation (retry operation) of the gaming ball by the payout device 580, which has been performed immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, can be continued from the time of power recovery. There is. Therefore, for example, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780, for example, immediately before the instantaneous interruption or power failure, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally, that is, the payout device It is determined that the payout operation of the gaming ball by 580 is in the normal state, and even at the time of power recovery, it can be determined that the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 580 is normal by the determination of step S780. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S780 that the value of the incompatibility counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 580 is abnormal. It is possible to determine that the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state by the determination of step S780 also at the time of power recovery.

  If it is determined in step S780 that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the payout control program In order to notify that it is “1”, retry error information for displaying the number “5” on the error LED indicator 860b which is a segment indicator mounted on the payout control board 633 is set and the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM It is set (stored) in the state information storage area of (step S782). On the other hand, when notifying that it is "in prize ball stock", the payout control program sets the prize ball in-progress information for displaying the number "9" on the error LED display 860b and incorporates the above-mentioned payout control. It is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the RAM (step S 782).

  Following step S782, the payout control program sets the value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (step S784). In step S784, when the value of mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of mismatch counter INCC is greater than mismatch threshold INCTH, step S784 is performed. It is designed to be initialized upon the occurrence of this internal factor. When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the mismatch counter INCC is initialized in response to the occurrence of the external factor. When the operation switch 954 is operated when the power is turned on, as described above, an operation signal corresponding to the operation is input as a RAM clear signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control program described above erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as described above, and the RAM clear notification command is displayed on the peripheral control board shown in FIG. Output to 1510. As a result, the RAM clear notification sound flows from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 91 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 998.

  Subsequently to step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S786), and this routine is ended. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is operating abnormally, value 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and when the retry operation is not operating abnormally (the retry operation is It is respectively set to the value 0 when operating normally.

  The payout control program shows retry error information (or winning ball stock information) set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control internal RAM in step S782 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. In the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout controller main process), a retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310, and LED display data creation in step S564 in the same process. The display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860b in the process is created and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area, and the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output process of step S548 in the same process Outputs a drive signal to the error LED indicator 860b based on To display the number "5" on the error LED display device 860b. In the main control board 1310 having received the status command, the main control program transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The periphery control board 1510 causes the door frame side on / off command to output a lighting signal to emit a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided in the door frame 3 in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment). The light is output to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 shown in FIG. The store clerk or the like in the hall who noticed the light emission of the plurality of LEDs, as described above, opens the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 to set the numeral “on the error LED display 860 b mounted on the payout control board 633. It can be confirmed that a “retry error” has occurred by visually observing that “5” is displayed. Thus, the store clerk or the like in the hall checks the abnormality of the dispensing detection sensor 591, disconnection of various harnesses extending to the dispensing control board 633 from the dispensing detection sensor 591, contact failure of various connectors, etc., in order to investigate the cause. The operation can be performed extremely quickly compared to the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED indicator 860b are not notified.

  Further, by intentionally putting the payout detection sensor 591 into the inoperative state, the above-described detection of the gaming balls paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted If the value of the above-mentioned inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or more than the incoincidence threshold value INCTH, even if a fraudulent act of illegally acquiring the game ball paid out by this retry operation is performed by forcibly generating the retry operation. Then, since a plurality of LEDs of various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 3 emit light, a clerk or the like in a hall rushes to check the state of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the player who performs the injustice is forced to interrupt so as not to find the action, and can not continuously acquire the illegal gaming ball due to the injustice. Even if the value of the inconsistence counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the number of gaming balls that can be acquired by the player who cheats is the same as the inconsistency threshold INCTH, that is, five balls Because of this, it is possible to minimize the damage to the hall due to the act of intentionally deactivating the payout detection sensor 591.

  Furthermore, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC is determined in step S780 when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH. It is designed to be initialized upon the occurrence of an internal factor that has become an issue. Thus, the mismatch counter INCC is not initialized, for example, in response to the occurrence of an external factor such as operating the operation switch 954 to clear the error. Therefore, even if the operation switch 954 or the like is altered illegally and the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a, the incompatibility counter INCC is forcibly initialized by such an unauthorized action. Absent.

[15-10. Mismatched counter reset judgment processing]
Next, mismatch counter reset processing will be described. In this misalignment counter reset process, the number of balls of the gaming ball paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 It is a process to determine whether or not to reset the mismatch counter INCC that calculates the difference between and.

  When the inconsistency counter reset determination process is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program determines the inconsistency counter reset time as shown in FIG. 142 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is determined whether it has elapsed (step S790). This determination is performed based on the mismatch counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S 790, the time management information is read out from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S790 that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has not elapsed, the payout control program ends this routine. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the payout control program initializes the mismatch counter reset determination time (step S792). By this initialization, the mismatch counter reset determination time is set to the initial value 7000 s (about 2 hours).

  Subsequent to step S 792, the payout control program sets the value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the above-mentioned award ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (step S 794). Finish. As described above, the misalignment counter INCC is detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotary body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. The counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls and the number of balls normally received by the recess of the payout rotary body, and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591; Become equal to each other, so the value is 0. The payout control program performs the retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 139 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, and the ball of the gaming ball paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotating body by the retry operation. It is monitored and judged by the inconsistency counter INCC whether or not the payout of the game ball which is inconsistent due to the mismatch between the number and the ball number actually detected by the payout detection sensor 591 is repeated. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one game ball which is inconsistent due to the retry operation is paid out is about one in several million.

  Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is made up of the game board 5 and a frame body such as the main body frame 4 on which the game board 5 is mounted, and the game board 5 is replaced by replacing the game board 5 Because it is configured to be able to change the specifications, the payout control substrate 633 that controls the payout device 580, the drive power supply of the payout device 580, and the power supply substrate 630 that generates the control power of the payout control substrate 633 have a common function. It is equipped on the body side. Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 determines whether the retry operation is repeatedly performed by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. The operation can be determined, and in the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 127, the inconsistency counter INCC immediately before the shut-off is stored when the power is shut off. In the processing at step S530 (power recovery setting of the RAM work area) in the processing at power-on of the dispensing control unit shown at 129, processing is restarted from the stored mismatch counter INCC at power-on.

  Then, when the game board 5 mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is shut off and the game board 5 'of another game specification different from the game board 5 is replaced to turn on the power, the payout control board The payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a in 633 starts processing again from the mismatch counter INCC stored when the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 'attached, the unmatched counter INCC in the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 before replacement is attached as it is. For this reason, the player plays the pachinko machine 1 on which the game board 5 'is mounted, and by chance the number of unmatched game balls is generated with a probability of one-millionth, and the inconsistency counter INCC When the inconsistency counter INCC increases to the inconsistency value INCTH or more as described above, the payout control MPU 952a determines it as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period by replacing the gaming board 5 with the gaming board 5 ' There is a fear. That is, in a period immediately after the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5 ', an abnormality in the payout detection sensor 591, disconnection of various harnesses ranging from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, contact of various connectors Although there is no failure or the like, there is a possibility that the abnormal operation of the retry operation may be suddenly determined.

  As described above, when it is determined that the game board 5 is changed to the game board 5 'and the abnormal operation of the retry operation is made in a short period, the exchanged game board 5' has an impression that it is easily broken even though it is new. It may be given to the player. The probability of 1-millionth that one game ball which is inconsistent due to retry operation is paid out is one-millionth, when pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall and operated continuously during the business hours of the hall for one week, Since it is the same as the probability that the game ball which is inconsistent by the retry operation is paid out by one ball, the process of step S778 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. The value 1 is not drawn. Then, in one week, the mismatch counter INCC is incremented by 1 and the mismatch counter INCC becomes 1; in 2 weeks, the mismatch counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and the mismatch counter INCC becomes 2. In week, mismatch counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and mismatch counter INCC becomes 3, and in 4 weeks, mismatch counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and mismatch counter INCC is 4, and in 5 weeks When the mismatch counter INCC is further incremented by the value 1, the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 5, which matches the above-mentioned mismatch threshold INCTH. In other words, when five weeks have passed, the payout control program proceeds to step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 141 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a in order for the mismatch counter INCC to coincide with the mismatch threshold INCTH. In the judgment, it is judged that there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and the malfunction of the payout detection sensor 591, the disconnection of various harnesses extending to the payout control board 633 from the payout detection sensor 591, the contact failure of various connectors Segment display on the payout control board 633 to notify that it is a "retry error" in the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. To display the number “5” on the error LED display 860b Set the over information so that the set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control chip RAM.

  Therefore, when the payout control MPU 952a determines that the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination in step S790 in this mismatch counter reset determination processing, that is, it repeatedly performs the mismatch counter reset every 7000s (about 2 hours). In the process of step S 794 in the determination process, the value 0 is forcibly set to the mismatch counter INCC, that is, the reset is performed forcibly, thereby incrementing the mismatch counter INCC generated with the probability of a few millions of parts described above. It is invalidated. As a result, even though there is no abnormality in the payout detection sensor 591, disconnection of various harnesses extending to the payout control board 633 from the payout detection sensor 591, contact failure of various connectors, etc., an error occurs in the retry operation. It is possible to prevent the setting (storage) of retry error information that indicates the presence in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Note that, by intentionally putting the payout detection sensor 591 into a non-operating state, the above-described detection of the gaming balls paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted In the case where the payout detection sensor 591 is deliberately made to repeatedly go out of operation for a short time even if a fraudulent action is made to forcibly generate the retry operation and illegally acquire the gaming ball paid out by this retry operation, As described above, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC becomes equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 emit light, so a store clerk or the like in the hall is the state of the pachinko machine 1 It will rush to confirm. In this case, the player who performs the injustice is forced to interrupt so as not to find the action, and can not continuously acquire the illegal gaming ball due to the injustice. On the other hand, when the discharge detection sensor 591 is intentionally repeatedly inactivated for a long time so that the value of the mismatch counter INCC does not exceed the mismatch threshold INCTH, the mismatch counter INCC is generated every 7000s (about 2 hours). Is reset, but during this time, as mentioned above, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player who cheats is that the inconsistency counter INCC is up to the inconsistency threshold INCTH, and the payout detection sensor 591 is Even if the game player intentionally deactivates for a long time, it is possible to extremely reduce the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs fraudulent acts.

[15-11. Error release operation judgment processing]
Next, the error release operation determination process will be described. In this error release operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 124 is operated.

  When the error release operation determination process is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control substrate 633, the payout control program causes the operation switch 954 to release an error as shown in FIG. 143 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is determined whether or not it is operated (step S800). This determination is made based on the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S800, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, determines that it does not instruct to perform error release. Operation switch 954 is operated when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, indicating that it is instructed to perform the error release. It is determined that

When the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S800, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, while when the operation switch 954 is operated in step S800, the payout control program checks an error flag state confirmation process. Perform (step S802). In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various error information regarding the dispensing device 580 is confirmed. For example, the state of a retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether the retry operation is operating abnormally is confirmed.
As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value 1 when the retry operation is abnormal, and a value 0 when the retry operation is not abnormal (the retry operation is normal). Since it is set, the payout control program checks whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is the value 0 or the value 1 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Following step S802, the payout control program performs state information setting processing (step S804). In this state information setting process, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, the state information corresponding to the error flag is The payout control built-in RAM is set (stored) in the state information storage area. Thus, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 130, various information (status information) is read from the status information storage area, and this read status Based on the information, a state command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormal operation is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal operation, it is indicated that an error occurs in the retry operation. If retry error information to be communicated is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control section main process) shown in FIG. A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  The main control board 1310 having received the retry error information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the control board 1510, the sub control program performs retry operation error notification processing to notify that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification process, the error notification announcement of the retry operation “Please check the winning ball unit.” And “Please check the harness of the payout control board.” Two times.) By flowing from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 91 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The store clerk or the like in the hall who heard the error notification announcement of the retry operation breaks the delivery detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124, breaks the various harnesses extending to the delivery control board 633 from the delivery detection sensor 591, contacts various connectors Defects and the like can be confirmed extremely quickly as compared with the case where no error notification announcement of the retry operation flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Further, in the retry operation error notification process, the plurality of LEDs of various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 3 are caused to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment).

  Following step S804, the payout control program performs release setting processing (step S806). In this cancellation setting process, when the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is handled. The CR unit 6 indicates that the error is forced to stop the content displayed by the error LED indicator 860b, which is a segment indicator already mounted on the payout control board 633, or that it is ready to lend a ball. In order to transmit to the above, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held HI, that is, the activated state is held, and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a. Output to the CR unit 6 via For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the error LED display 860b is already displayed. The retry error information stored in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above is “normal” in order to forcibly stop the numeral “5” notifying that it is “retry error” It forcibly overwrites the information on which the graphic "-" for notifying the effect is displayed. Also, in order to tell the CR unit 6 that it is ready to lend a ball, the logic of the PRDY signal is held HI, that is, it keeps up and the gaming ball is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. And the like to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  Following step S806, the payout control program performs error flag initialization processing (step S808), and the routine ends. In this error flag initialization process, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is set. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is operating abnormally is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has the value 0. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is maintained at HI, that is, the rising state, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Accordingly, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127, the PRDY signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM. The read out PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6 through the game ball connection device connection plate 869. .

  Thus, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is an internal factor when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or larger than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 141. In the process of step S786 in the same process, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1 while the operation switch 954 is operated, causing this external factor to trigger. The value 0 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG in response to the occurrence, and the initialization is performed. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is operated when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, that is, the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM to cancel the error. As in the case where the switch 954 is operated, it is initialized upon occurrence of this external factor.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the main control side main processing is executed from the time the power is turned on, with respect to the operation switch 954 (operation switch), which was originally used to cancel the error that occurred in the dispensing operation. An operation unit for exerting a RAM clear function for starting initialization of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) and the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) for a predetermined time until It functions as In addition, the pachinko machine 1 causes the operation switch 954 to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred in relation to the payout operation of the game ball after the predetermined time has elapsed. Here, even if the store clerk is not accustomed to the operation of the pachinko machine, even if the position of the operation switch 954 on the back of the gaming machine is remembered, according to the timing at which the operation switch 954 is operated, If the predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, the function to release the error generated for the payout operation of the gaming ball is exhibited, while according to the timing when the operation switch 954 is operated, it is predetermined from the power turned on If it is within the time, the function of initializing the storage unit can be exhibited. Therefore, even if an error occurs in such a gaming machine, the hall clerk can improve the efficiency of the switch operation at the time of handling the error and can cope appropriately without losing the switch operation, so the game is interrupted. It is possible to resume the game before the player who has lost the game loses the will to play.

[15-12. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 633 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, signal processing at the time of a dispensing operation by ball lending will be described, and subsequently, an input signal confirmation process from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of gaming balls for 200 yen as the amount of money (in the present embodiment, 50 balls, and the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen is performed twice as the amount of money) is the number of lent balls, The case of paying out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 will be described. The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 read out the input information from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and are stored in the read input information, and the CR communication processing is performed. , From the input information, confirms the logic state of the BRQ signal, the BRDY signal and the CR connection signal every 2 ms which is an interrupt timer period.

[15-12-1. Signal processing at the time of payout operation by ball rental]
The payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 reads out the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the read PRDY signal output setting information pays out the lent ball. When it is set to the state of the logic of the PRDY signal which indicates that the payout operation is possible, as shown in FIG. 144 (d), the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. In order to communicate the logic of the PRDY signal as HI, that is, start up and hold and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a, and as PRDY, a game ball connection device connection terminal The signal is output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the ball lending button 328 is pressed by the player, the ball lending button 328 is turned on (turned on), and this ball lending operation signal is TDS shown in FIG. 125. The frequency display plate 365 is input to the CR unit 6 through the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. As shown in FIG. 144 (a), the CR unit 6 to which this TDS has been input pays out the number of gaming balls worth 200 yen to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as a rental ball number. The ball request signal BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 (the payout control MPU 952a) through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1) . The BRDY signal is input as a BRDY signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  As shown in FIG. 144 (b), the payout control MPU 952a receives the BRDY signal, and the payout control program sets the lending request monitoring time HA (from 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms in this embodiment) from timing H1. The predetermined number of lent balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls) in one payout operation from the CR unit 6 through the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869 until the elapsing. ) It is monitored whether or not BRQ, which is a single request for starting dispensing operation to pay out 100 yen as the amount of money, rises.

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the ball number of the gaming ball for 100 yen to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322 as the rental ball number among the ball number of the gaming ball for 200 yen as an amount, FIG. As shown in), until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1, the BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal thereof Start up and hold (timing H2). The BRQ is input as a BRQ signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  As shown in FIG. 144 (c), when the BRQ signal rises from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, the payout control MPU 952a causes the BRQ request acceptance ACK monitoring time HB from the timing H2 (in this embodiment, In order to indicate that one dispensing operation has been started by the time 20 ms ± 1 ms has elapsed, the logic of the EXS signal is set to HI, that is, the activated state is held and the dispensing control MPU 952a Output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, and to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 as EXS (timing H3).

As shown in FIG. 144 (b), the CR unit 6 to which this EXS has been input is set to the lending instruction monitoring time HC (from 20 ms to 58 ms in the present embodiment) from timing H3.
By the time the timing H2 has elapsed, the BRQ that has been raised and held from timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is dropped and held To (timing H4).

  As shown in FIG. 144 (c), the payout control MPU 952a performs one payout operation until the payout monitoring time HD (in this embodiment, the ball payout time is set) elapses from timing H4. It goes and pays out to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322 as the number of balls for the predetermined number of lent balls, that is, the number of gaming balls for 100 yen as the number of lent balls. Then, when the dispensing monitoring time HD has elapsed, the EXS signal raised and held from the timing H3 is held at the logic LOW, that is, in the lowered state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a , EXS are output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H5).

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the remaining balls of the game ball of 100 yen out of the number of balls of the game ball of 200 yen as the amount to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the lent balls, as shown in FIG. ) Until the next request confirmation timing HE (in the present embodiment, it is set to 268 ms at maximum) from the timing H5, the BRQ from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal board from the CR unit 6 The signal is output to the payout control board 633 (the payout control MPU 952a) via 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H6).

  As shown in FIG. 144 (c), the payout control MPU 952a similarly pays out the remaining 100 yen worth of gaming balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of lent balls using the method described above. The EXS signal which has been raised and held is held with its logic as LOW, that is, in the lowered state, and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and as EXS, a game ball connection device connection terminal The signal is output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 (timing H7).

  The CR unit 6 stands from the timing H1 as shown in FIG. 144 (a) until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in the present embodiment, the maximum is 268 ms) elapses from the timing H7. The BRDY raised and held is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 (the payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is dropped and held (timing H8).

  The above-mentioned loan request monitoring time HA, BRQ request acceptance ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, delivery monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF is the delivery control shown in FIG. It is clocked by the timer update process of step S 552 in the processing at the time of turning on the division power supply (delivery control unit main processing).

  The payout control MPU 952a is not in communication with the CR unit 6 when there is a ball out, a ball is out, a payout detection sensor error, a retry error, a full tank, etc. (BRDY from the CR unit 6 When the logic is LOW, that is, when it falls and is held, as shown in FIG. 144 (d), the PRDY signal which is raised and held from the timing H1 is in a state where the logic is LOW, that is, it is fallen. , And output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and held), the state of the logic of the EXS signal is maintained and the payout is made, though not shown. It outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the control MPU 952a, and outputs it as the EXS to the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. “Maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained and the logic of the EXS signal is HI ( When the EXS signal is rising and held) is to maintain its logic HI.

Thus, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control portion 633a of the payout control board 633, and the payout control MPU 952a sets the ball number of the gaming ball for 200 yen as the amount and 100 as the amount. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for the yen twice, the game balls with 50 balls for the number of lent balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322.
When a store clerk or the like in the hall operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6, for example, the upper plate 321 or the number of gaming balls for 100 yen is used as the amount of money. When it is set to pay out to the lower tray 322, the payout control MPU 952a performs one payout operation of 25 balls of 100 yen as the amount of money, and the number of gaming balls of 500 yen as the amount of money as the amount of lent balls as the amount of money. When it is set to pay out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU 952a performs the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as an amount five times, and the ball number of gaming balls for 1,000 yen as an amount When it is set to pay out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of balls to be lent, the payout control MPU 952a performs the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 10 times.

[15-12-2. Confirmation process of input signal from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 uses the CR unit 6 to send a BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 even if the lending request monitoring time HA described above has elapsed. CR unit 6 connects BRDY from CR unit 6 to a lending device such as a game ball even if the signal is not output to payout control board 633 and the signal does not rise or the above-mentioned lending instruction monitoring time HC has elapsed. The CR unit 6 plays the BRQ from the CR unit 6 even if the signal is not output via the terminal plate 869 and is not output to the payout control board 633 and the next request confirmation timing HE described above has elapsed. The signal is output to the payout control board 633 via the ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is not activated, or the CR unit described above. Even if the lending completion monitoring time HF has elapsed, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 via the gaming apparatus connection terminal plate 869 and does not turn off the signal. In this case, PRDY and EXS described above are used to confirm whether BRQ and BRDY are normal. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 144 (e) and 144 (f), when the payout control MPU 952a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), a predetermined period JA from this timing J0 (in the present embodiment) , 200 ms ± 1 ms), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, held down and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a. Output as a PRDY signal to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, held down, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a Output from the output terminal, and output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 as EXS. That (timing J1).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the PRDY signal, which has been dropped from timing J1 and held, to a logic of HI after elapse of a predetermined period JB (in this embodiment, 200 ms ± 1 ms) from timing J1 That is, it holds in a raised state and outputs it from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and outputs it to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the PRDY signal, which has been raised from timing J2 and held, to LOW after the elapse of a predetermined period JC (set to 100 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from timing J2. In other words, it holds in the lowered state and outputs it from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and outputs it as the PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the PRDY signal, which has been dropped from timing J3 and held, to a logic of HI after elapse of a predetermined period JD (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from timing J3. That is, it holds in a raised state and outputs it from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and outputs it as the PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the PRDY signal, which has been raised from timing J4 and held, to LOW after the elapse of a predetermined period JE (100 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) since timing J4. That is, it holds in the lowered state and outputs it from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and outputs it as the PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the PRDY signal, which has been dropped from timing J5 and held, to a logic of HI after elapse of a predetermined period JF (set to 10000 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from timing J5. That is, it holds in a raised state and outputs it from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and outputs it to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6 ).

  The predetermined period JA to the predetermined period JF described above are timed by the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (dispense control unit main process) shown in FIG.

[16. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interruption processing, and FIG. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing an example of connection abnormality determination processing, FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing an example of connection recovery processing, and FIG. Describes the timing of outputting the connection confirmation signal. It is a timing chart.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512. Here, various control processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 will be described. First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, and then peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, LOCKN signal The history creation process, the connection abnormality determination process, and the connection recovery process will be described. The LOCKN signal history creation process is executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and the connection abnormality determination process and the connection recovery process are performed when the peripheral control unit power is turned on described later. This process is executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the process, and the connection recovery process is performed following the connection abnormality determination process. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing is set highest as the priority of the interrupt processing, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit It is set in order of V blank interrupt processing.

[16-1. Various control processing of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on process]
First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 performs processing when the peripheral control unit is turned on, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time taken for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and initializes the peripheral control MPU 1511a in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters the state where the interrupt permission is set, for example, as shown in FIG. 122 and FIG. It will be in the state which can receive various commands, such as a command about control of game production production, a command about a state of pachinko machine 1, etc.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, with regard to the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 106, effect backup information (1 fr) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) in the backup first area 1511 cb. ), And the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), and compare Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc. Compare the effect backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in, and the effect backup information which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) The contents stored in Bank 1 (1 fr) to Bank 0 (1 fr), which is a normally used storage area of peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. Copy back the effect backup information (1fr) that is the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) for Bank 0 (1 ms), and compare them as hot start, and compare When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of peripheral control RAM 1511 c. And a cold start.

  Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the effect backup information which is the contents backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db also for the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d shown in FIG. 106. The (SRAM) is compared, and the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511 dc is compared. When the compared contents are identical, effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) to Bank 0 (SRAM) which is a storage area normally used of peripheral control SRAM 1511 d shown in FIG. 127. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value for Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used of peripheral control SRAM 1511 d Force 0 to write a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup non-management target work area 1511 cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 127 and cleared to zero. After the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs this initialization setting process, it outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 105, and resets the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try to prevent it.

  Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information for specifying a date and time information for specifying hour / minute / second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in is set in the calendar information storage unit as current calendar information, and in the time information storage unit as current time information. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and effects are displayed so that the luminance of the LEDs included in the acquired luminance setting information is obtained. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the device 1600 and lighting it is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information is currently set with the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED of the effect display device 1600 as a backlight from 100% to 70% in 5% steps. And the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the effect display device 1600, is included.

  Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is turned on with the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 being 75%. At the same time, the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is adjusted and lighted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 When the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is turned on with the brightness of 80%, the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the effect display device 1600 according to the use time of the effect display device 1600 described above is not performed at all. It has become. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. It is to prevent being done.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once at power-on. The peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after performing the current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Following step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing to be described later is to be performed, and has a value of 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control unit steady processing The value is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512 a as a peripheral control described later. The value 1 is set in part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and peripheral control external WDT 1511e after setting V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 so that peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. There is.

Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not.
By repeating such a determination, it will be in the state which waits until peripheral control part steady processing is performed. Also, after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511 e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511 a I try to prevent it.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is to be performed, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S1009). The steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and a value 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing to be described later is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN for counting and the initialization of the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is also performed. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, serial drive I / O port serial transmission for a lamp drive substrate is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 are created by a lamp data creation process described later Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 designates transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the top address is sent to the serial I / O port for a lamp drive board via the external bus 1511 h, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and peripheral bus 1511 ai Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of Thus, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and one byte of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. Start sending data one bit at a time.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for a lamp drive substrate serial I / O port is generated (in the present embodiment, to the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive substrate serial I / O port). It is triggered by the fact that the written 1 byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty due to the lack of 1 byte data.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa uses the bus If not, the remaining game board-side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is byte by byte, via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai Transmission of serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring to the buffer register for writing, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, in synchronization with the game board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the lamp drive substrate serial I / O port.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the frame I / O port serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a. When serial I / O port serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. A door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 3 is created in a lamp data creation process to be described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the transmission data storage area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED The first byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the top address of 1511cab is serialized to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port. Thus, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is triggered by generation of a transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED (in the present embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED) One byte of data written to the port's transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that one byte of data is empty in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.) Peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is byte by byte, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , And frame decoration through the peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED uses the data of the written transmission buffer register as the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting data of 1 byte of the transmission shift register in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, bit by bit, and perform continuous transmission by the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port There is.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this rendering operation unit monitoring process, in the rendering operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410, etc. based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the rendering operation unit 400 Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 106 where various information obtained is set, the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the state of operation of the operation button 410 Determine whether to reflect on

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in VDP 1512a in the display data creation process described later is generated from channels CH1, 2 shown in FIG. Output to the effect display device 1600. Thus, various screens are drawn on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, outputting of the generated drawing data of one screen (one frame) to the effect display device 1600 is cancelled. It has become. Although this can prevent the processing time from being delayed, so-called dropping of frames will occur, but various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 by the lamp data output process of step S1012. From the speakers 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speakers 573 shown in FIG. 2 to the various effects from the effects by the plurality of LEDs and the various decoration substrates provided on the door frame 3 by the plurality of LEDs and sound data output processing described later It is a mechanism that can give priority to the synchronization of the combined music and the effect by the sound effects.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 1512 c as audio data obtained by serializing sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512 a in sound data creation processing described later. In addition to music and sound effects, the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs the audio data of the notification sound and the notification sound as serialized audio data. This audio data transmission IC 1512c, when serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is input, is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of the difference system in which the right audio data is made a plus signal and a minus signal. While transmitting, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a difference system in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. Thus, in addition to stereo reproduction of music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the notification sound and the notification sound are also reproduced in stereo.

  Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, the screen data of the first screen data from the screen data at the top among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae Update the pointer to indicate what to output.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series that make up the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae, what number light emission data from the top light emission data of the various light emission data The pointer is updated to indicate whether it is an aspect.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound are arranged in time series that configures the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae. Among the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data from the sound command data at the top is to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source.

  Also, in the scheduler update processing, from the drive data at the top of the drive data of the electric drive source such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series that configure the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. Drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms timer interrupt described later is generated. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor and solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive defined in time series is performed. It updates pointers to data, and updates pointers every time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even when other driving data is designated from the driving data to be designated, the scheduler updating process is forcibly updated so as to instruct the driving data to be essentially designated.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program is transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various information transmitted from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed (command analysis means) for various commands received in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command reception means) described later. The effect control program is based on the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound Generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in schedule data storage area of peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae Do. In addition, the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, start opening winning command for instructing the start of the start opening winning effect, the number of pending normal symbols A normal symbol memory command for identifying (0 to 4 pieces), a symbol tuning effect start command for instructing the start of symbol tuning effect, a symbol memory command which is output when the number of start pending changes, and the special winning opening 2005 A special winning opening 1 count display command (big winning opening count command) which is output each time a game ball is accepted, or a frame state 1 command (second error generation command, which indicates the contents of full shown in FIG. 102) It is analyzed (command analysis means) whether or not it is a full tank error occurrence command), and it is recognized which gaming state is currently. Also, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door open command or the door frame closed Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511 cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 106. In the reception command analysis processing, The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the reception command storage area 1511 cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 122 are classified into various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effect, various commands classified into special figure 2 tuning effect, various commands classified into big hit relation, and power on. Various commands to be displayed, various commands to be classified to general drawing tuning effect related, various commands to be classified to regular electric terminal production related, various commands to be classified into notification display shown in FIG. 102, door frame opening command described above , For displaying status such as door frame closing command, body frame opening command and body frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to second error cancellation command) and frame state 1 command (corresponding to second error occurrence command) There are various commands which are classified, various commands which are classified as test related, and various commands which are classified as others.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the effect control program further includes various commands divided into the notification display shown in FIG. 102 in the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above, various kinds of commands are performed The schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for light emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set to the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, It extracts from various control data copy area 1511ce of peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c, and sets 1511cae in a schedule data storage area of peripheral control RAM 1511c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed from the highest priority registered in advance to the abnormality notification, and the abnormality is automatically resolved to another abnormality notification that has been resolved. It is supposed to By this, it is possible to simultaneously monitor a plurality of abnormalities without losing information that one abnormality has occurred after another abnormality has occurred and before the other is resolved. Can.

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above by the effect control program is divided into the state display shown in FIG. Various commands, for example, an error release navi command (second error release command), the effect display device is controlled, for example, by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal play mode accompanying the rendering operation. It warns outside visually by using 1600 (rendering device), (rendering device), lamp (rendering device), or aurally warns outside using a speaker (error notifying means). By doing so, when a malicious player attempts to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 despite the gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, it is possible to prevent an unfair act on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game.

  Next, following the above-described step S1024, the effect control program performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S 1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, second, which is time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year, month, and day which are calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer of the effect control program is indicated among the light emission data arranged in time series, the pointer being updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data On the basis of the light emission data, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. DAT is created by extracting it from various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa of peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. And various equipment provided to the door frame 3 The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs on the substrate, various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. From the frame control driving amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the effect control program, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data Are extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the screen data is input from peripheral control MPU 1511a, sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays it on effect display device 1600 Draw data for one screen (one frame) to be generated is generated on the built-in VRAM.

  Following step S1030, the effect control program performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the effect control program, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. Sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511 ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512 a. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives sound command data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, and controls the built-in sound source While incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track numbers specified in the data, the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data generation process, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 127 is activated each time the sound data generation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), and the volume adjustment volume is generated. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion 1510 a is converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, muffled at substrate volume 0, and set to maximum volume at substrate volume 6, and substrate volume 0 to substrate The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6 respectively.
The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume set in the substrate volumes 0 to 6 is transmitted, and audio data is transmitted as audio data obtained by serializing sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512 c, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  Further, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, and the sound source built-in of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is programmed by the program from the mute to the maximum volume. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. For example, even if a store clerk or the like in the hall turns the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume small, the effect sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 becomes small. However, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is performing a wrongdoing, a notification sound set to a large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be made to flow. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of an abnormality or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound. Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. To increase the volume of the stream and add to music and sound effects to produce a more powerful screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a high probability of shifting to an advantageous gaming state for the player You can also

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents of the effect control program stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 are stored in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. The contents are respectively copied and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached are copied and backed up respectively to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 127, that is, every time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is used as effect backup information (1fr) to indicate Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1 for backup first area 1511cb). Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to r) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by this peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa of peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), copy the backup first area 1511cb to Bank1 (1fr), and from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr), specify the end address of Bank0 (1fr) All the contents stored up to this point are copied sequentially from the start address of Bank 1 (1fr) of backup first area 1511cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs peripheral control Specify the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of MA controller 1511ac, and copy the backup first area 1511cb to Bank2 (1fr), and from the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (1fr), specify Bank0 The contents stored in the end address of (1fr) are all copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa designates the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and designates copying of the backup second area 1511 cc to Bank 3 (1 fr). From the contents stored at the start address of) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of backup second area 1511cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) Copy all in order from the above, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa specifies the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 fr) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and copy of backup second area 1511 cc to Bank 4 (1 fr) The Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc continuously for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the content stored at the head address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) Copy all in order from the start address of.

  Further, in the backup processing, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a backup target for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 127, that is, whenever the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac performs high-speed operation on Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db as presentation information (SRAM) which is contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as presentation backup information (SRAM) And the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511 dc.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by this peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa of peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. 127 is a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac. Specify the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), copy the backup first area 1511db to Bank1 (SRAM), and from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) All of the stored contents are successively copied sequentially from the start address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) successively, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511 a Specified the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and copy of backup first area 1511 db to Bank 2 (SRAM) and stored at the start address of Bank 0 (SRAM) All contents from the contents to the contents stored in the termination address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are sequentially copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db in the order of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa designates the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and designates the copy of the backup second area 1511 dc to Bank 3 (SRAM). From the contents stored at the start address of) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) Copy all in order from the above, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa stores the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) as a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac to Bank 4 (SRAM) of backup second area 1511 dc. To the contents stored at the start address of Bank 0 (SRAM) and the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined number of bytes (eg, 1 byte) in the second backup area 1511 dc. Copy all from the start address of Bank 4 (SRAM) in order.

  Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511 e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511 a is not reset.

  Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 as the completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady process (step S1038), and returns to step S1006 again to return the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value of 0 is set in FLG and initialized, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value of 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1009 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, the processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The process of step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady process".

  The peripheral control unit steady processing is started by setting the value 1 to the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed at first in step S1009, and the effect control program sets 1 ms in step S1010. Interrupt timer activation processing is performed, and each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., and step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, the execution of the peripheral control portion steady processing is completed and the value in the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 Setting will complete. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is triggered by the fact that a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a can be received is input from the VDP 1512 a with built-in sound source. In the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later, the value 1 is set. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 It is 3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly performed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 105, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from sound source built-in VDP 1512a of liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is executed in response to the following will be described. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether steady-state processing-in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process in step S1009 to step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 145 is being executed. When execution of the process is completed, they are set to 0 respectively.

  If it is determined in step S1045 that the steady process processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1), that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), End this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing is to be performed, and the value 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, peripheral control When the partial steady process is not performed, the value is set to 0, respectively.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady process is completed. Sometimes, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed as the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power on processing of FIG. In order to forcibly cancel on the way and start the peripheral control unit steady processing from the beginning, the peripheral control unit power supply shown in FIG. Peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, indicates that peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting a value 1 to the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in time processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) In addition to signal interrupt processing, peripheral control unit steady processing is executed by setting the value in the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. By notifying the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine that the completion has been made, the flag SP-FLG under steady processing is set to the value 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is this routine. To determine whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. . In other words, the peripheral control unit steady processing can not be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input.

  Thereby, in the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time, when the processing can not be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the determination in step S1008 in the processing at power on of the peripheral control unit in FIG. It stands by until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing which has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is 64 times It is supposed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is processed, the consistency between the advancing state of the effect by the peripheral control steady processing and the advancing state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is timer interrupt control is It does not collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is dropped, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing of peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 145 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN starts the 1 ms interrupt timer in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 It is 3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second,..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt sequentially It will occur.

  If it is determined in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than 33, that is, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is ended as it is. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing in this embodiment. Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the thirty-third 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

  Following step S1102, motor and solenoid driving processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached shown in FIG. 127 are arranged in time series. Electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. While updating the pointer to the next drive data defined in time series, and updating the pointer each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 is performed. Here, serial I / O port serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. When serial I / O port serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 1511a In order to output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the rendering operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series to configure The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and created, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. A Set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf for flops substrate side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores transmission data of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor The first 1 byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the area 1511 caf is sent via the external bus 1511 h, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and peripheral bus 1511 ai to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. Thus, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the transmission shift register is synchronized with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The transmission of one byte of data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is triggered by generation of a transmission interrupt request for the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor (in the present embodiment, the frame I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O One byte of data written to the port's transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that one byte of data is empty in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.) Peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate-side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf for 1 byte, external bus 1511 h, peripheral control bus controller Via 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai By transmitting and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial drive I / O port for the decoration drive amplifier board motor, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register Transfer to 1-byte data of the transmission shift register in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and start transmission one bit at a time, and continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor Is going.

  Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive substrate 4180 is performed. Also here, serial drive I / O port serial transmission for motor drive board is performed using peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac of peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. When serial I / O port serial transmission for a motor drive substrate is started, first, electrical drive source schedule data set in schedule data storage area 1511 cae of peripheral control MPU 1511 a and peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached is configured. Motors for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the motor or solenoid is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Peripheral control RAM 15 shown at 127 Set to 1c of the motor driving the substrate side transmission data storage area 1511Cag. The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stores it at the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag The first 1 byte of the game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT thus processed is transmitted via the external bus 1511 h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and the peripheral bus 1511 ai, as a transmission buffer for the motor drive board serial I / O port. Transfer to register and write. Thereby, the serial I / O port for motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and one of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port is generated (in the present embodiment, to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). It is triggered by the fact that the written 1 byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty due to the lack of 1 byte data.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa uses the bus If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is byte by byte via the external bus 1511 h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and the peripheral bus 1511 ai , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and In synchronization, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input, and history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information Movable position history information etc.) are created and set in the movable object information acquisition storage area 1511 cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached as shown in FIG. From the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, original positions, movable positions and the like of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, rendering operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this rendering operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the rendering operation unit 400 are input, and history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) Operation history information of the button 410 etc.) is created and set in the rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached shown in FIG. The presence / absence of operation of the operation button 410 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai.

Subsequent to step S1108, a drawing state information acquisition process is performed (step S1110).
In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 shown in FIG. 120 is created, and the periphery shown in FIG. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached to the control MPU 1511 a. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Judging, it is a signal output to convey that effect, and more specifically, transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided on peripheral control board 1510, and receiver ICSDIC0 for door frame side effect provided on effect display drive board 4450 , And a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Acquire the drawing state by acquiring the frequency of abnormality between abnormal connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display driving board 4450 and the occurrence state of abnormality from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak be able to.

  Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached shown in FIG. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d externally attached are copied and backed up to the backup first area 1511 db and the backup second area 1511 dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is this routine is executed whenever the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511 ca shown in FIG. 127 for the peripheral control RAM 1511 c. The frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, the motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah which are included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up each time , And effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, as Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 1 of the backup first area 1511 cb as effect backup information (1 ms) Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in (1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) to the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by this peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa of peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. 127 is a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac. Specify the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), copy the backup first area 1511 cb to Bank 1 (1 ms), and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank 0 (1 ms), specify the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) All the contents stored are successively copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa performs peripheral control Specify the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of MA controller 1511 ac and copy of backup first area 1511 cb to Bank 2 (1 ms), and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank 0 (1 ms) Bank 0 The contents stored in the end address of (1 ms) are all copied sequentially from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa designates the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and designates copying of the backup second area 1511 cc to Bank 3 (1 ms), Bank 0 (1 ms) From the contents stored at the start address of) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms), the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of backup second area 1511 cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) Copy all in order from the above, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa specifies the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and copy of backup second area 1511 cc to Bank 4 (1 ms) The Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511 cc for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously from the content stored in the start address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the content stored in the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) Copy all in order from the start address of.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 145, various processes relating to the effects of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as progress of effect are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than value 33 in step S1100, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt Division 1 ms timer It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is timer interrupt control does not break. Therefore, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted. There are also cases where the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes a little, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 is triggered to transmit various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, and is triggered thereby to incorporate the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the board serial I / O port, and when this taking is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this taking, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The calculated sum value is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1 byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 127 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer is for setting a period in which information of 1 byte (8 bits) can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within a period in which 1-byte (8 bits) information can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I / O port incorporated in the control MPU 1511a is taken (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times of extraction from the reception buffer, and has a value of 1 when the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data is extracted from the reception buffer, and a mode of the second byte of the main cycle serial data. When the data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2. When the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 at power on or the like.

  Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, from the reception buffer It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data If the sum value is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period in which the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode of the second byte of the main cycle serial data and 3 of the main cycle serial data. When the sum value which is the byte number is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and their sum (sum value Calculate).

  Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data of the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310 Therefore, it should be consistent with the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, pachinko machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from a pachinko facility, and when the gaming balls rub against each other to be charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise, so pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is under the file environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 considers the status allocated as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data as numerical values. Whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data in the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310 It is judged whether or not. Accordingly, peripheral control MPU 1511 a determines whether or not the main cycle serial data has been changed to main cycle serial data different from normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

  If the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 in step S1214, the received main cycle serial data The status allocated as the 1st byte and the mode allocated as the 2nd byte of the main cycle serial data are shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. The receive command storage area 1511 cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are the receive command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer 1511 cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end of the buffer and the beginning are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it is returned to the beginning Remember. Note that the peripheral control MPU 1511a allocates the status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the second byte of the main cycle serial data, which are stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The stored mode is associated with the stored mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period in which 1-byte (8 bits) information can be received of the main cycle serial data transmitted from main control board 1310 is exceeded. Sometimes, or when it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly performed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit blackout notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit blackout notification signal that is executed when the blackout notification signal (peripheral blackout notification signal) from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 111 is input from the main control board 1310 The interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 starts the 2 microsecond timer first (step S1320), and the blackout notification signal (peripheral power outage notification) It is determined whether a signal is input (step S1302). If the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macro seconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. If the power failure notification signal is not input, this routine is ended as it is. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing which is the present routine is started.

  When the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing which is the main routine is started in step S1304, and the blackout notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is achieved by sequentially executing the turning off of the backlight of the effect display device 1600, the turning off of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, the turning off of various LEDs, etc. By suppressing, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds which is a time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308).
In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the command being transmitted at least for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and reception command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected with peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127). The received command is stored in.

  Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 127 are stored in Bank1 (1fr) of backup first area 1511cb and bank1 (1fr). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac copies at high speed to Bank 2 (1 fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc.

  The high-speed copy of the content stored in received command storage area 1511 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr) by peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac will be briefly described. Peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa of peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. Specify the content stored in the receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, and copy the backup first area 1511cb to the receive command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) From the contents stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents stored are sequentially copied sequentially from the start address of the receive command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of backup first area 1511cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control MPU The contents stored in the receive command storage area 1511 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac to the receive command storage area included in Bank 2 (1 fr) of the backup first area 1511 cb The contents stored in the start address of reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are specified from the contents stored in the end address of reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 1511Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac in Bank 3 (1 fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc. The copy to the received command storage area is specified, and the contents stored in the start address of received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are stored in the end address of received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) The specified contents (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control The content stored in the receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac by the PU core 1511aa is included in the receive command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Designating copying to the contents from the content stored in the start address of reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All the predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank 4 (1 fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc.

  Subsequently to step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input (step S1312). If it is determined in this determination that a power failure advance signal is input, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 127 and peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 105 so that peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. .

On the other hand, when the power failure notification signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure notification signal is input. In other words, it continues to determine infinitely whether or not the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input. By continuing determination indefinitely in this manner, when no power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. Can not be output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, while when a power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.
When the peripheral control MPU 1511 a is reset, the processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 145 is started again.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) continues in the infinite loop in the determination of step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure state occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU 1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure advance notice signal is not continued and released in the infinite loop, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af and peripheral control external WDT 1511 e Output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed even if the step is passed. If the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop in the determination by S1312, the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed, so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by resetting automatically.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation processing]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 147 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of LOCKN signals output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 120 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. If it is judged that it is abnormal data, it is a signal output to convey that effect, and more specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and a door frame provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 It is a signal to output a transmission request for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When LOCKN signal history creation processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 is, as shown in FIG. 150, peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read out from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bits B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 having a capacity and provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST It is memorized.

  Following step S1500, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. Requests transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is not abnormal data (normal Data)) and It does not request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (recover) the connection between the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver. It is determined that

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504).
In the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is processed by the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 B B4, B4 B B3, B3 B B2, B2 B B1, B1 ビ ッ ト least significant bit B0, and so on, one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is ended.

  On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 at step S1502, shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same process as the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500. Signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, etc. Shift one bit at a time toward the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to a value 0 (step S1510), and this routine is ended.

  Thus, every time this LOCKN signal history creation processing is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7 by one bit, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection error judgment processing]
Next, the connection abnormality determination process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 145 will be described.
In this connection abnormality determination process, the door frame side provided in peripheral control board 1510 based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the connection abnormality determination process is started, as shown in FIG. 132, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read out from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450. As described above, in the LOCKN signal, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that the signal is output to convey that effect, specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 And a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

  Subsequently to step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). In this determination, it is determined whether the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 105, and in the present embodiment, "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper four bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S1522, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection check determination value.

  If it is determined in step S1522 that the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection check determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. It is determined that there is no abnormality in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, ie, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver And exit this routine as it is.

  On the other hand, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 matches the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection check determination value in step S1522, peripheral control board 1510 Between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d for preparing the frame and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 for the effect display drive board 4450, that is, a state in which an abnormality occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver It is determined that the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (increment, step S1524). This communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times that it is determined in step S1522 that an abnormality is occurring in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, every time this routine is executed. (Counting the cumulative number). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to 0 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and is reset. However, the communication check counter CC-CNT is not reset due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and the power recovery is restored. The value is restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure occurs.

  Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times the cumulative number determined to be in a state where abnormality occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver If it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, but the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, an abnormality occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver It is determined that the cumulative number determined to be in the state of having reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number determined to be in a state where an abnormality occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1526 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, that is, it is determined that an abnormality occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the accumulated number has reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S1530), and this routine is ended. The communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is determined to be abnormal has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver Is a flag indicating whether or not an abnormality has occurred reliably, value 1 when an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, an abnormality occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver When the cumulative number determined to be in the state of not being reached does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, it is set to the value 0, respectively. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 0 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and is reset. However, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not reset due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and the power recovery is restored. It is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure occurs at time.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, connection recovery processing executed as one of the warning processing in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 145 will be described. In this connection recovery process, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 are executed subsequent to the connection abnormality determination process shown in FIG. While outputting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal Report that fact.

  When connection recovery processing is started, as shown in FIG. 151, peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 performs peripheral control steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 106 (step S1540). In this determination, in order to instruct, in the scheduler update process, what screen data from the top screen data among the screen data arranged in time series forming the screen generation schedule data is to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Then, it is determined whether the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effect is progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is active, while the screen generation schedule When the effect is completed according to the data and all the updating of the pointer is completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is not activated. In this determination, it is a period during which the start-up screen at power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 or a period during which a demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is being performed while waiting for customers. Can be determined based on the screen generation schedule data, and the period during which the power-on screen of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the effect display device 1600 or in the customer waiting state. When the demonstration display by the effect display device 1600 is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1542 to be described later, while the activation display screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or waiting for customers And the period during which demonstrations are being The (mere, is when in the standby state of the customer wait), which is as it is to terminate this routine.

  When the effect is progressing along the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is ended as it is, while the screen generation schedule data is followed in step S1540. When the effect is completed and all the pointer updating is completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not activated, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is provided for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in the same process as the connection abnormality determination process shown in FIG. 132 is executed. During the connection between transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, the number of times it is determined that there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver (Count the cumulative number). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times it has been determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal is at least one.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, this is not changed. While the routine is ended, the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, even if the number of times it is determined that an abnormality occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is one time. If the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is present, it is determined whether the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is determined to be abnormal has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, This flag indicates whether the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal or not, and the value 1 when the connection between the transmitter and receiver is reliably abnormal: 1, between the transmitter and receiver Is set to 0 when the cumulative number determined to be in a state in which an abnormality occurs in the connection does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

  When it is determined in step S1544 that the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the state where an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the cumulative number determined is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT If not, the SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546), and this routine is ended. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512 d included in the peripheral control substrate 1510, thereby providing the door frame side effects included in the peripheral control substrate 1510. The transmitter IC 1512 d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when an abnormality occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the communication error display process is performed. Then (step S1548), this routine ends.
In this communication error display process, in order to reliably convey that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, drawing is made in the display area of the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. Do the processing. For example, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a message that "an error has occurred in the upper liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Is displayed. Further, in the communication error display process, during a period in which the start-up screen at power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 or in a period of waiting for customers and performing demonstrations by the effect display device 1600, An abnormality occurs in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, an abnormality occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. In order to confirm whether or not it is present, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation confirmation request, and the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC0 receives the LOCKN signal output request data as a response signal to the LOCKN terminal. Peripheral control of LOCKN signal from When this LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and a notification image (for example, a notification image (for example, , “A problem has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.” Performs processing to display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and a notification sound (for example, “upper tray side liquid crystal display device An abnormality has occurred in the above.) Is repeatedly flowed from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, processing may be performed to turn on all of the LEDs for light emission decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various kinds of LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5.

  Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG.

  First, to briefly describe the decorative symbol variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8, the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power on processing shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 102 by the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 127 or the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. When the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the game becomes "big hit", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. A total of 15 rounds up to 15 rounds, and in each round, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the number of balls is a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls) Then, the round is to be digested, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out each time one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005.

  The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball to the first starting port 2002 or the second special drawing result drawn by receiving the game ball to the second starting port 2004 can be obtained from the main control board 1310 The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on the command to make the left decorative pattern on the left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the central decorative pattern at the center, and the right side. The variable display of the right side decorative symbol is started, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the left side decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right side decorative symbol is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is Can be recognized, and at this time, the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol table of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Also in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed in vessel 1406 so that the user can confirm the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are variably displayed, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are translucent to the extent that the background image can be seen, and the left side decorative pattern is displayed From the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the central decorative pattern rotates from the upper center to the lower center side of the display area, and the right decorative pattern rotates the reel from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area When the left decoration pattern, the center decoration pattern, and the right decoration pattern are stopped and displayed in a fluctuating manner, the left decoration pattern, the center decoration pattern, and the right decoration pattern corresponding to the stop are displayed. The left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are in an opaque aspect so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. Thus, the first special symbol or the second special symbol to be variably displayed and stopped in the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 120, The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol that are variably displayed and stop-displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are synchronized with each other.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 selects the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002 or the second drawn by receiving the game ball into the second starting port 2004. When a command from the main control board 1310 for conveying the special lottery result is received, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, as shown in FIG. 153, the effect display device shown in FIG. When variation display of the left side decorative symbol, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative symbol is started in the display area 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of S1020, the schedule data storage area 1511c of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Among the screen data arranged in time series that make up the screen generation schedule data set in e, the pointer is used to indicate which screen data from the top screen data is to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Since updating is performed, that is, when the pointer is being updated in the scheduler update process, the effects are progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and the screen generation schedule While the data is being activated, that is, until the variation display of the left side decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right side decorative symbol is started and stopped and displayed, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 145 In the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of FIG. Be executed recovery process, it is determined in step S1540 in this connection restoration process, and it so as to end the routine forcibly.

  As a result, the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is a value until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Even when it is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 (that is, between the transmitter and the receiver) Between the transmitter and the receiver without performing the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process, even if the number of times it is determined that there is an abnormality in the connection Process of recovering the connection of the client is not performed, and the steps in the connection recovery process For example, the message “An error occurred in the upper liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.” Is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 without performing the communication error display process of 1548. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 for informing that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is invalidated, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is An image is displayed based on the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d.

When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process, effects are completed along the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 106 and all pointer updates are updated. Since the process has been completed, that is, while the schedule generation data for screen generation is not activated in the scheduler update processing and the schedule data for screen generation is not activated, the process at power on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. Warning in step S1024 in peripheral control unit steady processing By the determination in step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 152 executed as a logic process, the process proceeds to the process of step S1542 in the same process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is a value 0, that is, When the number of times that it is determined that there is an abnormality in the connection with the receiver is not one, the routine is ended as it is, while the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the transmitter If the number of times that it is determined that there is an abnormality in the connection between the device and the receiver is also one, the process proceeds to the process of step S1544 in the same process, and the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG has the value 0 That the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in an abnormal state. If the accumulated number of times does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the process proceeds to the process of step S1546 in the same process, the above-mentioned SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine ends while the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG Is not 0 (value 1), that is, when an abnormality occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, and the above-mentioned communication error display process is performed. , End the routine. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are being displayed in a stopped state in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 It is determined that there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is one time, and the abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is generated. If the accumulated number of times does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed to ensure that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0, ie, the transmitter The process of recovering the connection between the receiver and the transmitter and receiver When the cumulative number determined to be in a state where an abnormality occurs in the connection between has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) For example, an error occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper tray side in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by always performing the communication error display process.
Please call a clerk. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is transmitted to notify that the message “is displayed and to notify that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is abnormal data. Is activated.

  The variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started again. In the interval period up to 2 minutes, since the left side decorative symbol, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, as described above, the door frame side effect transmitter The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 for conveying that the drawing data received from the IC 1512 d is abnormal data is validated, and the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is performed. That is, there is an error in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver at one time. In some cases, when the cumulative number determined to be in a state where an abnormality occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed Thus, while processing is performed to restore the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the connection between the transmitter and receiver is abnormal. Communication is performed when the cumulative number of times it has been determined that an alarm has occurred has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver). By always performing the error display process, for example, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, Ordinary has occurred. Please call your clerk. "Displays a message that to have so as to perform the process of informing.

  When the variable display of the left side decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right side decorative symbol is started again (timing K2), as described above, the screen generation schedule data is active, so the left side decorative symbol and the central decorative symbol , And until the right-hand decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 The number of times it is determined that there is an abnormality between the connection between transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on effect display drive substrate 4450 (that is, the connection between transmitter and receiver) is 1 Even if the number of times is the same, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed. A process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. The message on the side liquid crystal display device is abnormal. Please call the clerk. ”Is not displayed, so it is informed that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is abnormal data. While invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 displays an image based on the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

  Thus, the variation display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the variation of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is again displayed. During the interval period until the display is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 for conveying that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is abnormal data is activated. The drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d before the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600 LO from the receiver ICSDIC0 on the door frame side that conveys that the data is abnormal data KN signal is adapted to be disabled. This is the information that the player is most interested in combining the result of the stop display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player is given a benefit. Since the player can judge whether the big hit gaming state occurs or not, the left decoration pattern, the center decoration pattern, and the right decoration pattern are variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Even if the image of the effect drawn in the display area of the symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, even if the image of the effect drawn in the display area is disturbed due to the influence of noise etc. Do not interrupt the process to recover to the state that can be drawn correctly, stop the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in the display area of the effect display device 1600 By indicated, we are most interested with information of the player to complete the drawing.

  At this point, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the start screen at the time of powering on the pachinko machine 1 on the effect display device 1600 or in a wait for customer state. This is largely different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512 e provided in the peripheral control board 1510 during the demonstration by the display device 1600. The LOCKN signal output request data is displayed in the effect display device 1600 when the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or in a waiting period for a demonstration by the effect display device 1600. Between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, ie, the transmitter It is sent as an operation confirmation request to confirm whether or not an abnormality occurs in the connection with the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiating circuit 1512e provided in the periphery control board 1510, as described above, the differential is generated. The two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512 e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512 f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The forced switching circuit 1512 f connects the circuits so as to transmit the two signals when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are input in the differentiating circuit 1512 e, so that One signal is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V included in the effect display drive substrate 4450 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is originally: As described above, since the data format is different from that of the signal output from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512 d, it is determined that the data is abnormal data, and the LOCKN signal is detected around the periphery control unit 1511 of the periphery control board 1510. It outputs to control MPU1511a. Accordingly, when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a causes the effect display drive board 4450 not to generate an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. While it can be determined that no abnormality has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, an abnormality has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 as an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is judged that the notification image to notify that (for example, "an error occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate. Please call a clerk."), Output to the effect display device 1600 by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source Notification sound to notify that (for example, "upper plate side liquid crystal display device is abnormal It has occurred. "), And notification sound from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3 by outputting the audio data transmission IC1512c to control the sound source built VDP1512a flows. Thus, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emission decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided in the game board 5 may be lighted.

  Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512 f may receive the LOCKN signal output request data by the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC 0 The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which can be connected in a circuit and receives LOCKN signal output request data, outputs a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and it is determined that no abnormality has occurred, but when the LOCKN signal is not input Transmi Abnormally and that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the motor and the receiver can be determined to have occurred. When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 131 can be executed as a notification process. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a finds an abnormality, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can notify the store clerk or the like of the hall to that effect by performing notification processing, so the store clerk or the like of the hall It is very easy to check whether or not an abnormality has occurred before the player plays a game, and the check does not take time and effort. Therefore, the anomaly can be found without any trouble.

  Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is judged that there is, it is a signal output to convey that effect, and more specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 Since it is a signal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the ICSDIC 0 and the connection, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, for door frame side effect Receiver ICSDIC0 is a transmitter IC1512d for door frame side effect When the image sent from the camera can not be received normally, a communication error occurs between image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and the received drawing data becomes abnormal data. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 for transmission. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input is a door that transmits a connection confirmation signal indicating that transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is started. By outputting the image to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512 d, it is possible to eliminate communication abnormality between image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect an abnormality due to a communication abnormality between image communication at an early stage, and can work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d so as to eliminate the abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play by finding and eliminating the abnormality.

  Furthermore, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives and outputs an image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d can not normally receive an image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d. The LOCKN signal, which is a communication error occurrence signal that indicates that a communication error has occurred between image communication between the side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d, is a peripheral control unit 1511 that is a effect control microprocessor Since it can be output to the control MPU 1511a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to convey that communication abnormality has occurred. "The upper plate side liquid crystal display Location error has occurred. Please call your clerk. "That generates a message, so that it is possible to inform by displaying the generated image on the display area of the effect display device 1600. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects an abnormality due to a communication abnormality between image communication at an early stage, informs that effect to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player is a clerk of the hall etc. Because it is possible to notify directly to the store clerk or the like of the hall who happened to pass by in front of the pachinko machine 1, the store clerk or the like of the hall eliminates the abnormality at an early stage when the abnormality occurs. You can start working on it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play by detecting and eliminating the abnormality early.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided with the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided on the effect display drive board 4450 in the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. The connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal when the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal even once. When the cumulative number determined to be in the state of not being reached does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for validating the LOCKN signal and eliminating communication abnormality between image communication The door frame side from the transmitter IC 1512d for the door frame side effect A connection confirmation signal for notifying the start of transmission to the outgoing receiver ICSDIC0 can be repeatedly output to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. There is. Thus, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 Since it is possible to continue outputting the connection confirmation signal repeatedly only during a period in which the progress of the game is not executed by starting and stopping display, it is possible to move in the direction in which the communication abnormality is eliminated.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided with the transmitter IC 1512 d for door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 in a period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. If the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0 for effect and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver are abnormal at one time, the connection between the transmitter and receiver may be abnormal. When the cumulative number determined to be in the state of not being reached does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for eliminating communication abnormality during image communication by activating the LOCKN signal is used. Door frame side performance from transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect The main control circuit board continues to repeatedly output a connection confirmation signal to the SIC receiver ICSDIC0 indicating that transmission is started to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. When the main control MPU 1310a of 1310 starts fluctuating the first special symbol or second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 and starts to execute the progression of the game again When the output is stopped and the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is not input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d effects the predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) on the door frame side. Liquid crystal display control unit 15 to stop transmission to the receiver ICSDIC0 The image 2 of the sound source built VDP1512a generated and is capable of outputting to the door frame side effect for receiver ICSDIC0. Thus, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is an abnormality cancellation signal, repeatedly only during the period when the game is not executed by displaying start and stop, it is possible to move toward a direction in which communication abnormality is eliminated. Because the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406, The main control board 131 is kept outputting the connection confirmation signal repeatedly only when the game is not progressing. Even if the main control MPU 1310a of the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 starts fluctuating the first special symbol or the second special symbol game and starts to progress the game again, the display screen The distortion of the effects in progress (disruption of the image) is performed every time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts to execute the progress of the game again and ends (every time from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period)) Can go in the direction to resolve.

  According to the embodiment as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 102 and the payout control board 633 of FIG. The main control board 1310 is a start area in which the game balls emitted by the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 toward the game area 5a partitioned in the game board 5 are provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 102, which is a game control microprocessor for controlling the progress of the game based on entering the mouth 2004, is implemented. The payout control board 633 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of the gaming balls by the payout device 580 based on the award ball command of FIGS. 121 (a) and 121 (b) which is the payout command from the main control board 1310. The payout control MPU 952a of 124 is implemented.

  The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information on the game even after the power is shut off.

  The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information on the payout even after the power is shut off.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes the operation switch 954 shown in FIG.
When the operation switch 954 is operated within a period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 125 is performed from the time of power on, the information regarding the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased To output the RAM clear signal shown in FIG. 110 for the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, during the period in which the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power on process of FIG. When this is done, the RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 115 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information on the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM On the main control side power on process shown in Figure 125 If the operation is performed after the period in which the determination process of step S16 is performed (or the period in which the determination process of step S512 in the dispensing control unit power-on process of FIG. 128 is performed from power on) has elapsed, The error release function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 136 as the error release signal for releasing the generated error to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor It is also something to be prepared.

  As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 125 is performed from the time of power on, the game stored in the main control internal RAM While outputting the RAM clear signal of FIG. 110 for erasing information related to the main control MPU 1310a which is a game control microprocessor, the determination process of step S512 in the payout control portion power on process of FIG. When it is operated within the specified period, the RAM clear which outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 115 to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor as the RAM clear signal for erasing the information on the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Function and the main control side power When the operation is performed after the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the hour process is performed (or the period in which the determination process of step S512 in the process of power on of the dispensing control unit of FIG. The error release function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 115 as the error release signal for releasing the error generated for the device 580 to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor. Because the pachinko machine 1 is provided with two different functions of the RAM clear function and the error release function by the operation of one operation switch 954. Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error release function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 3031]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay substrate 3031 includes various detection sensors disposed on the game board, such as a gate sensor 2401, a second start opening sensor 2402, a special winning opening sensor 2403, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first start opening It is connected to the sensor 3002 and the magnetic sensor 3003 (to be described later, the magnetic detection sensor 4024). The circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, so here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is taken as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input is described Do.

  In a gaming machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a game ball driven into a game area, etc. to manipulate the flow state of the game ball as desired and obtain an unfair profit There is no end to unfair gaming practices.

  A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the game area in order to detect such illegal gaming activities and to control the illegal activity by the light emitting means or the alarm by sound or the like. There is.

[Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 155 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in a game machine.
The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 3031. As illustrated, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with the voltage +5 V generated by the +5 V generation circuit 1310 g.

  The magnetic detection sensor 4024 is composed of a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is formed of, for example, a magnetoresistance effect element, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, +5 V) when not detecting magnetism above a predetermined value, and outputs a voltage when detecting magnetism above It does not (0 V).

  The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 disposed on the panel relay substrate 3031 via a connector CON1, and +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. Thus, when the transistor STR is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is not detecting magnetism, the transistor STR is turned on by the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and a current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. In addition, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, the transistor STR is turned off by stopping the output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and the flow of current from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

  The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the resistor IR1 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR0, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. Thus, when the transistor ITR0 is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected not only to the pull-up resistor IR2 but also to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the subsequent stage. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

  Main control input circuit 1310 b is configured of pull-up resistor NR 1, resistor NR 2, and transistor NTR 1, and one end of pull-up resistor NR 1 is connected to the collector terminal of transistor ITR 1 at the front stage of panel relay substrate 3031 via connector CON 2. The +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. As a result, when the transistor ITR1 in the previous stage is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the resistor NR2 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor NR1, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  In the figure, the detection sensor unit corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the voltage output unit 4163 corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and to which +12 V is applied. In addition, detection circuit unit 4164 is a circuit configured of pull-up resistor IR2 connected to the collector terminal of transistor ITR0 and to which +12 V is applied, and transistor ITR1 whose base terminal is connected to the collector terminal of transistor ITR0. Is the case.

  Further, in the front stage of the detection circuit unit 4164, a sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by a circuit including the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, the resistor IR1 and the transistor ITR0. As described above, the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are provided in the panel relay substrate 3031.

[Detection action]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Also, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also pulled down to the ground side. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 to turn on the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears to turn off the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to +12 V. Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also pulled up to +12 V (corresponding to the first voltage). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  The operating states of the magnetic sensor MGS, the built-in transistor STR, the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR1 and the transistor NTR1 described above are shown in the form of a table in FIG. When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay substrate 3031, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on, similarly to the operation when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism .

  By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, if the connector member is corroded or dust gets into the connector connection portion, contact resistance is generated. There are pin contact types and bellows contacts in the connector member depending on the shape of the contact part terminal of the connector member, but in the case of the bellows contact type, when the harness attached to the connector member is pulled during connection work, the pin contacts The gap is easier to open than the type. When the gap is open, dust and the like can easily enter from this portion.

  Also, when a vibration is applied to the connector member, a contact resistance is similarly generated. For example, when the player is playing a right-handed game, when slight sliding wear occurs due to the vibration from a specific part of the gaming area where many gaming balls are continuously concentrated and flowing down being applied to the connector member. Also, this may cause contact resistance.

  Here, the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such a contact resistance RR occurs in a connector member (connector CON1) electrically connecting the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay substrate 3031. The operation of will be described. For example, in FIG. 155, when the contact resistance RR occurs in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is indicated by a dashed line. The magnitude of the contact resistance RR is 100 times to 1000 times that in the case where the contact of the connector is normal.

  As described above, when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, whereby the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Will lift. In FIG. 155, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a point at which the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

  That is, when a current flows in the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 . When the voltage raised by the contact resistance RR reaches a specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, although the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state, the transistor ITR0 may be turned on. That is, in the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 disposed on the panel relay substrate 3031, when the contact resistance RR occurs, there is a possibility that the sensor signal may be erroneously detected.

[Example 1 of Magnetic Sensor Input Circuit]
FIG. 156 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit according to the first embodiment of the present embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 3031, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The main control input circuit 1310 b of 1310 has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit component.

  Note that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 should be installed at a plurality of locations in the game area, for example, in the vicinity of the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, the big winning opening 2005, the out opening 1126, etc. become.

  The magnetic sensor input circuit of this embodiment is different from the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit in the non-detected state in which the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism between the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 (second State), even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the voltage (second voltage) by which the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side, An avoidance unit 4166 is provided to avoid the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164, and the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are electrically connected via the avoidance unit 4166.

  In the first embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is an example configured of a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 It is connected.

  The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 disposed in the subsequent stage. Further, +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12 V is applied at the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 Connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the avoidance unit 4166 constitute a sensor signal input unit 4162.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conductive state because the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, and the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears to turn off the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to +12 V. Further, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 through the Zener diode ZD0, whereby a Zener voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Then, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that such an abnormal state is present, in the above example, when the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal determines that the logic is HI, the main control unit MPU 1310a performs a peripheral operation. An error command is sent to the control unit 1511, and processing such as outputting a signal to that effect from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer is performed. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1511 reports an abnormality using the effect display device 1600, an alarm lamp, a voice, or the like.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism (in the second state), the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, whereby the built-in The transistor STR turns on.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, whereby the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Lift up. In FIG. 104, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a point where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

  That is, when a current flows in the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the second voltage, and the Zener It will be applied to the cathode terminal of the diode ZD0. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is added and applied, the Zener diode ZD0 remains nonconductive because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the latter stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

  As a result, the voltage of detection circuit portion 4164 is not affected (because there is no change in voltage), and when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc. False detection can be prevented.

  As in the conventional case, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a transmits an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits a magnet according to the transmitted error command. The game board side effect display device 1600 or the door frame side effect display device, a warning indicator, a sound, etc. notify that an illegal game action using a game has been performed or that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is broken. . Also, an error signal is output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer.

[Example 2 of a magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 157 is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the second embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 3031, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board 1310 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The input circuit 1310 b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit component.

  In the second embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 has a first resistor IR1 whose one end is connected to the voltage output unit 4163 and a second end whose other end is connected to the other end of the first resistor IR1 and whose other end is grounded. And the resistor IR3 of FIG. Comparing the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the second embodiment with the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 of FIG. 155, one end of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded is disposed at the subsequent stage to the other end of the resistor IR1. It differs in that it is connected to the connection point with the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. That is, in the second embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is an example configured by the resistor IR3 which causes a current to flow to the ground and drop when the predetermined voltage is applied.

  Note that one end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection portion. ing.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR1 having +12 V applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164 and to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the avoidance unit 4166 constitute a sensor signal input unit 4162.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, so that the voltage pulled down to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 to turn on the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetism sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears to turn off the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to +12 V.

  In addition, a voltage of +12 V is applied to the series resistance circuit configured of the pull-up resistor IR0, the first resistor IR1 of the avoidance unit 4166, and the second resistor IR3, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor of the avoidance unit 4166 A current flows to the ground via IR1 and the second resistor IR3. When a current flows in the second resistor IR3, a potential difference generated between both ends of the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR.

  When the built-in transistor STR turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, whereby the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Lift up. In FIG. 157, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a point where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

  That is, when a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the second voltage, It will be applied to one end of the 1 resistance. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is added and applied to one end of the first resistor, a current flows through the first resistor IR1, and the current also flows through the second resistor IR3 to the ground.
That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, a current due to a voltage obtained by adding a second predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage to the second voltage is substantially grounded. Then, almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the rear stage of the second resistor IR3. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage is not turned on. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage maintains the off state. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the latter stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

  As a result, the voltage of detection circuit portion 4164 is not affected (because there is no change in voltage), and when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc. False detection can be prevented.

[Example 3 of Magnetic Sensor Input Circuit]
FIG. 158 is a circuit diagram showing an example (third example) of the magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the third embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 3031, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control input of the main control board 1310 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The circuit 1310 b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit component.

  In the third embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 includes two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 which form a Darlington circuit set to an operating voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the predetermined voltage lower than the first voltage. It comprises IR1, IR4, and IR5. Compared to the second embodiment described above, in the third embodiment, in place of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded, a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 which are connected in series are respectively connected in parallel to two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 which constitute a Darlington circuit. Connected That is, in the third embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is an example configured of the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5 which cause a current to flow to the ground to drop when the predetermined voltage is applied.

  More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the front stage of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the rear stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

  The other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the previous stage, and is connected to one end of the resistor IR4, and the other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the previous stage. Further, one end of the resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the previous stage, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

  That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the latter stage transistor ITR2. The collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 as well as being one end of a pull-up resistor IR2 whose +12 V of the detection circuit unit 4164 is applied to the other end.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Also, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also pulled down to the ground side. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off, and the transistor ITR2 is also turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, and the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetism sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears to turn off the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to +12 V.

  In addition, a voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of pull-up resistance IR0, resistance IR1 of avoidance portion 4166, resistance IR4 and resistance IR5, and pull-up resistance IR0, resistance IR1 of avoidance portion 4166, resistance IR4 and resistance A current flows to ground via IR5. When a current flows in the resistor IR4, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage. Thereby, the transistor ITR2 in the rear stage is turned on.

  When the rear stage transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the rear stage transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. Further, as the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, whereby the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Lift up. In FIG. 158, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a point at which the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

  That is, a voltage obtained by adding a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage to the second voltage by causing a current to flow through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. Is applied to one end of the resistor IR1. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1, a current flows through the resistor IR1, and the current also flows to the ground through the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage falls to the ground, and almost no current flows in the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit in the subsequent stage of the resistor IR1 It does not flow in. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is not turned on. Further, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is also not turned on.
As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit maintain the off state. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the latter stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

  As a result, the voltage of detection circuit portion 4164 is not affected (because there is no change in voltage), and when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc. False detection can be prevented.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 160, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 respectively connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminals of the transistors ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. ing. When any one of the sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned off.

  When any one of the magnetic wire connection between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input unit 4162 is broken, the sensor signal input unit 4162 corresponding to the broken magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned on in the same manner as the detection circuit unit 4164. Transistor ITR1 is turned off. In addition, when there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output unit 4163 is provided for each of the plurality of sensors, and a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, each provided with a voltage output unit 4163, for example “TD62083AP” Product) can be used.

  As mentioned above, although the sensor signal input part 4162 arrange | positioned at the panel relay substrate 3031 of this embodiment was demonstrated, the detection sensor applicable to the sensor signal input part 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, A connector member Any sensor may be used to transmit the sensor signal from the detection sensor, and various sensors, for example, general winning opening sensor 4020, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, count sensor 4005, vibration detection sensor, contact It is possible to apply a sensor or the like.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  The embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to Examples 1 to 3. However, the gist of the present invention, that is, the voltage output unit 4163 is used to change the circuit configuration provided with the avoidance unit 4166. The disposing portion on the substrate for the avoidance portion 4166 and the detection circuit portion 4164 can be variously selectively changed and disposed as needed. Several variations of the arrangement example are shown below.

Example 4
FIG. 161 shows an example in which the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit is disposed on the main control board 1310. In this example, a voltage output unit 4163, an avoidance unit 4166, and a signal relay transistor ITR0 are disposed on the panel relay substrate 3031. The electrical basic connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Also, the operation and effects of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as the circuit shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 161, the collector terminal of the signal relay transistor ITR0 of the panel relay substrate 3031, the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2 of the detection circuit unit 4164 of the main control substrate 1310, and the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 are connectors CON2. Are electrically connected.

[Example 5]
FIG. 162 shows another example in which the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit is disposed on the main control board 1310. In this example, the voltage output unit 4163 and the avoidance unit 4166 are disposed on the panel relay substrate 3031, and the signal relay transistor ITR0 transfers the location to the main control substrate 1310 and is provided in the front stage of the detection circuit unit 4164. There is. Also in the fifth embodiment, the basic electrical connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Also, the operation and effects of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as the circuit shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 constituting the avoidance portion 4166 of the panel relay substrate 3031 and the base terminal of the signal relay transistor ITR0 of the main control substrate 1310 are electrically connected by the connector CON2. It is connected.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 161 and the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 162, a harness in which the panel relay substrate 3031 and the main control substrate 1310 have connector members at both ends (in FIG. It is electrically connected by). For this reason, there is a possibility that contact resistance may occur also in the connector connection portion. Therefore, in order to avoid the erroneous detection of the signal due to the contact resistance, as a modified example in the fourth embodiment, other than the bullup resistor NR1 having +12 V applied to one end of the circuit on the rear side of the connector member CON2 Another avoidance portion may be provided between the connection point of the end and the signal line connected to the connector member CON2 and the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 as in the avoidance portion 4166. According to this, the false detection of the signal can be further reduced, and the reliability of the signal detection is enhanced.

  In the present invention, the example in which the detection circuit unit 4164 is configured by the pull-up resistor IR2 and the transistor ITR1 in which +12 V is applied to one end in the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment is described. In essence, this selects one that is advantageous for control according to the difference in logic (HI level active or LOW level active) input to the main control MPU 1310a connected in the latter stage. For this purpose, a circuit comprising a pull-up resistor IR2 and a transistor ITR1 is provided as a detection circuit unit 4164, which is disposed upstream of the main control input circuit 1310a.

  However, the other end of the bullup resistor NR1 to one end of which +12 V is applied is connected to the signal line, and the base terminal is connected to the subsequent stage of the signal line via the resistor NR2, and the emitter terminal is grounded. What the main control input circuit 1310a itself having a collector terminal connected to an input port (not shown) substitutes for the detection circuit unit 4164 (in other words, a circuit that functions as the detection circuit unit 4164, that is, Since the detection can be performed by the control input circuit 1310a), the present invention sufficiently holds true.

[Example 6]
FIG. 163 shows an example in which the avoidance part 4166 and the detection circuit part 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on the main control board 1310. The location for the signal relaying transistor ITR0 is also transferred to the main control board 1310 and provided in the front stage of the detection circuit unit 4164. Also in the sixth embodiment, the basic electrical connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Also, the operation and effects of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as the circuit shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 163, a signal line leading to the connector CON1 to which the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output portion 4163 of the panel relay substrate 3031 is connected, and an avoidance portion 4166 of the main control substrate 1310 The cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is electrically connected by the connector CON2.

  When the panel relay substrate 3031 and the main control substrate 1310 are configured as in the fourth to sixth embodiments, the panel relay substrate 3031 is used as a detection sensor unit (in this embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is used. Regardless of the type of the system), there is an advantage that it is possible to make it common.

From the standpoint of assemblability, it is desirable to use the relay board, but convenience is provided for the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2402 provided in the starting opening that brings a lottery to the player. Even if it is lacking, it may be preferable to connect directly to the main control board 1310 with a connector without providing a circuit element on the relay board from the viewpoint of fraud prevention.
In such a case, the configuration of the seventh embodiment functions properly.

[Example 7]
FIG. 164 shows an example in which the voltage output unit 4163, the avoidance unit 4166, and the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit are disposed on the main control board 1310. Also in this example, the transistor ITR0 for signal relay is also moved to the main control board 1310 and provided in the front stage of the detection circuit unit 4164. Also in the seventh embodiment, the basic electrical connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Also, the operation and effects of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as the circuit shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 164, the panel relay substrate 3031 is only formed with signal lines (for example, by printed wiring) for simply relaying the signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024.
The signal line is electrically connected to the connector CON1 of the main control board 1310 by a harness connected to the connector on the panel relay board 3031. That is, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 of the main control substrate 1310 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is incorporated via the connector CON1 and the panel relay substrate 3031 at the front stage of the connection portion. And the collector terminal of the transistor STR.

  Although in FIG. 164 a relay board provided with only connectors (CON3 and CON4) is used, the output of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 may be directly connected to the main control board 1310 without using the relay board. You can also.

  Also in the configurations shown in [Embodiment 4] to [Embodiment 7], the presence of the avoidance unit 4166 does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 (because there is no change in voltage), the connector member When the contact resistance is generated due to the fine sliding wear, etc., false detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance can be prevented.

  In the seventh embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is electrically connected to the panel relay substrate 3031 through the connector CON3 (represented by a square in the drawing) provided on the panel relay substrate 3031, and further, the panel relay substrate 3031. It is electrically connected to a connector member CON1 provided on the main control board 1310 through a connector CON4 (represented by a square in the drawing) provided on the main control board 1310. Therefore, the contact resistance may occur at three points of the connector CON3, the connector CON4 and the connector CON1.

  Taking this into consideration, the voltage due to the current flowing in the contact resistance generated by the loosening of the connection part (CON3 and CON4 represented by a square in the drawing) of the panel relay substrate 3031 and the contact resistance RR of the part of the connector CON1. (Even if the detection sensor unit (magnetic detection sensor 4024) is added to the second voltage in the second state (the addition of the voltage due to the contact resistance generated at each of the three connector connections described above), the avoidance unit 4166 is selected and provided so as to avoid the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164. Thereby, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected, when the contact resistance is generated due to the slight sliding wear of each connector member, the erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance is prevented. Can.

  In the configurations shown in the fourth to seventh embodiments, the zener diode ZD0 is described as the avoidance unit 4166. However, the avoidance unit 4166 is not limited to the zener diode ZD0, and has been described above. The avoidance unit 4166 shown in FIG. 157 (Embodiment 2) and the avoidance unit 4166 shown in FIG. 158 (Embodiment 3) can be used.

  In the panel relay substrate 3031 shown in the seventh embodiment, only signal lines (for example, printed wiring) simply relaying the signals from the detection sensor unit are formed. There is an advantage that printed wiring is formed so as to be independently integrated on the panel relay substrate 3031 and integrated into one connector member, and connector connection with the main control substrate 1310 is made.

[Electrical connection of detection sensor unit, panel relay board and main control board]
Next, electrical connection of the detection sensor unit 4000, the panel relay substrate 3031, and the main control substrate 1310 will be described. FIG. 165 is a block diagram mainly showing the basic configuration of the electrical connection between the detection sensor unit, the panel relay board and the main control board. The detection sensor unit 4000 collectively refers to various detection sensors disposed at predetermined positions of the game board 5, and as described above, for example, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second The start opening sensor 2402, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the vibration detection sensor, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (reference numeral 3003 in FIG. 102), and the like correspond thereto.

  The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game, and is a board on which the main control MPU 1310 serving as a control main body is mounted. The panel relay substrate 3031 is a substrate that relays the detection signal of the detection sensor unit 4000 to the main control substrate 1310.

  The detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the panel relay substrate 3031 via a connector member 4501 provided on the panel relay substrate 3031. Further, the panel relay substrate 3031 and the main control substrate 1310 are harnesses in which the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay substrate 3031 and the connector member 4503 provided on the main control substrate 1310 have connectors for connection at both ends. Are connected electrically by being connected by a connector. That is, detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to main control substrate 1310 via connector member 4501 and connector member 4502 included in panel relay substrate 3031 and connector member 4503 included in the main control substrate, and detection of detection sensor unit 4000 A signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310.

[Arrangement position of panel relay substrate 3031 and main control substrate 1310 in gaming machine]
FIG. 166 is a front view schematically showing each example of the arrangement position of the panel relay substrate 3031 and the main control substrate 1310 in the pachinko machine 1. In FIG. 166 (A) to FIG. 166 (D), the panel relay substrate 3031 and the main control substrate 1310 are the rear of the game board 5 at a position not viewed by the player, and basically the effect display device (for example, And a liquid crystal display device) 1600 (see FIG. 100, not shown in the figure). Reference numeral 180 is a handle unit provided on the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 9 etc. and operated by the player, and reference numeral 303 is provided at the lower center of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 9 etc. And a pressing operation unit which is pressed and operated by the player for effect.

  In FIG. 166 (A), the main control board 1310 is disposed at the center of the lower rear part of the game board 5, and the panel relay board 3031 is the lower rear part of the game board 5 to the right of the main control board 1310 in front view. It shows the arranged pattern. In FIGS. 166 (A) to 165 (D), specifically, a box attached to the rear surface of a plate-like transparent game panel 1100 (see FIGS. 100 and 101) partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. The panel relay substrate 3031 and the main control substrate 1310 are attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000.

  In FIG. 166 (B), the panel relay board 3031 is disposed at the center of the rear lower part of the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 is the rear lower part of the game board 5 and to the right of the panel relay board 3031 in front view. It shows the arranged pattern. In FIG. 166 (C), the main control board 1310 is disposed at the center of the rear lower part of the game board 5, and the panel relay board 3031 is the rear lower part of the game board 5 on the left of the main control board 1310 in front view. It shows the arranged pattern.

  In FIGS. 166A to 166C, the positional relationship between the main control substrate 1310 and the panel relay substrate 3031 in the front-rear direction is the same as that of the main control substrate 1310 or in front of the main control substrate 1310. 3031 is located.

  Further, FIG. 166 (D) shows an arrangement pattern in which the main control board 1310 and the panel relay board 3031 are overlapped in the front-rear direction and arranged at the center of the lower rear part of the game board 5. In FIG. 166 (D), a panel relay board 3031 is disposed in front of the main control board 1310. As shown in FIGS. 166 (A) to 166 (D) shown above, the arrangement of the panel relay substrate 3031 and the main control substrate 1310 is determined based on various conditions.

  The detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the panel relay substrate 3031 via a connector member 4501 provided on the panel relay substrate 3031. Further, the panel relay substrate 3031 and the main control substrate 1310 are harnesses in which the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay substrate 3031 and the connector member 4503 provided on the main control substrate 1310 have connectors for connection at both ends. Are connected electrically by being connected by a connector. That is, detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to main control substrate 1310 via connector member 4501 and connector member 4502 included in panel relay substrate 3031 and connector member 4503 included in the main control substrate, and detection of detection sensor unit 4000 A signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310.

  Therefore, the embodiment described below is made in view of such circumstances, and the purpose thereof is to provide an avoidance unit that avoids erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor by contact resistance. The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which the avoidance unit is appropriately disposed on a panel relay substrate or a main control substrate in consideration of the positional relationship between the vibration source and the control substrate.

[Arrangement Example of Avoidance Unit]
FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 (C) are diagrams showing arrangement examples of the avoidance unit 4510 with respect to the panel relay substrate 3031 and the main control substrate 1310. In addition, the avoidance unit 4510 shows a circuit configuration including an avoidance portion 4166 for avoiding the addition operation of the voltage due to the contact resistance generated in the connector member. The avoidance portion 4166, which has been described above with reference to FIGS. 156 to 158, causes looseness in the connection state of the connector member in the circuit portion disposed upstream of the avoidance portion 4166, and contact resistance occurs in this portion. By doing this, even if the voltage is added due to the contact resistance, the effect of the added voltage on the detection circuit unit disposed downstream of the avoidance unit 4166 is avoided.

  As described above, when vibration is applied to the connector member, the possibility of erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor unit 4000 is increased due to the contact resistance of the connector member. However, as shown in FIGS. 166 (A) to 166 (D) described above, the arrangement of the panel relay substrate 3031 and the main control substrate 1310 in the game board 5 is usually determined based on various conditions. At that time, it is often not considered to arrange each substrate so as to avoid being affected by vibration. On the other hand, as the vibration generation source to be influenced, in addition to those due to the collision between the game ball guide path member and the game ball disposed in the right area of the game area 5a by the right strike described above, for example, effect buttons (operation buttons) In the ball striking operation, the hitting operation of the hitting ball of the ball launcher, the sound from the high output speaker, and the like.

  Therefore, the embodiment described below is made in view of such circumstances, and the contact resistance is generated due to the looseness of the connector member, and the evasion unit for avoiding the erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance. In addition to providing the unit 4510, the avoidance unit 4510 is appropriately disposed on the panel relay substrate 3031 and the main control substrate 1310 in consideration of the positional relationship with the vibration source.

  FIG. 167 (A) shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4510 is provided on the panel relay substrate 3031, and the connector is applied by applying vibration to the connector member 4501 for electrically connecting the detection sensor unit 4000 and the panel relay substrate 3031. Even if the member 4501 is loosened and contact resistance is generated due to the loosening, the false addition of the voltage due to the contact resistance is avoided by the avoidance unit 4510, thereby avoiding erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor unit 4000. It is.

  FIG. 167 (B) shows an example in which the main control board 1310 is provided with the avoidance unit 4510, and the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 or the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310 vibrates. Even if the connector member 4502 or 4503 is loosened by the addition, and the contact resistance is generated due to the loosening, the addition operation of the voltage by the contact resistance is avoided by the avoidance unit 4510 to be relayed from the panel relay substrate 3031. The false detection of the output signal is avoided.

  FIG. 167 (C) shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4510 is provided on each of the panel relay substrate 3031 and the main control substrate 1310, and a connector for electrically connecting the detection sensor unit 4000 and the panel relay substrate 3031. The vibration is applied to the member 4501, and the vibration is applied to the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay substrate 3031 or the connector member 4503 provided on the main control substrate 1310, whereby the connector member 4501, the connector member 4502 or the connector Even if the member 4503 is loosened and contact resistance occurs due to the loosening, the addition operation of voltage due to the contact resistance is avoided by the avoidance unit 4510 to avoid erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor unit 4000, And the signal relayed from the panel relay board 3031 and output. It is to avoid erroneous detection of.

[Specific Example of Vibration Source and Arrangement Example of Avoiding Unit 4510]
FIGS. 168A to 168F are diagrams showing a specific example of the vibration source in the pachinko machine 1 and an arrangement example of the panel relay substrate 3031 and the main control substrate 1310. In each of the drawings, a member serving as a vibration source is indicated by hatching. In FIGS. 168 (A) to 168 (C), when the player is playing by hitting the right, a game in which a large number of right-handed gaming balls are continuously concentrated and flowed down to the right area of the game area 5a. In the case where a ball sliding path unit 4200 is provided, and a slight sliding wear occurs due to the vibration from the gaming ball guiding path unit 4200 being applied to the connector member, a contact resistance may be generated thereby, as an example. There is.

  In the case of the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (A), when the vibration source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball due to right-handling, the panel is against the gaming ball guiding path unit 4200 as the vibration source. Since the relay substrate 3031 is disposed close to each other, the connector member [the connector member 4501 shown in FIG. 167 (A)] of the panel relay substrate 3031 is easily influenced. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is disposed on the panel relay substrate 3031 [see FIG. 167 (A)].

  In the case of the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (B), when the vibration source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball due to right-handling, the main against the gaming ball guiding path unit 4200 as the vibration source. Since the control board 1310 is disposed close to each other, the connector member [the connector member 4503 shown in FIG. 167 (B)] of the main control board 1310 is easily influenced. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is disposed on the main control board 1310 [see FIG. 167 (B)].

  In the case of the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (C), when the vibration source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball due to right-handling, the main against the gaming ball guiding path unit 4200 as the vibration source. Considering that the control substrate 1310 and the panel relay substrate 3031 are also disposed close to each other, the connector members of either of the substrates [the connector member 4501, the connector member 4502 and the connector member 4503 shown in FIG. Susceptible to Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is disposed on both the main control substrate 1310 and the panel relay substrate 3031 [see FIG. 167 (C)].

  FIG. 168 (D) shows the case where the vibration generation source is the pressing operation unit 303. For example, when the player concentrates on playing a game, the player performs a strike operation by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 or a message of "continuous hit" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 at the time of a specific effect, and the player recognizes the message Thus, when the player beats the press operation unit 303 continuously, etc., the press operation unit 303 becomes a vibration generation source when the vibration source is an operation to the press operation unit 303 for effect. The case is assumed. With respect to such a case, in FIG. 168 (D), since the main control board 1310 is disposed close to the pressing operation unit 303 which is a vibration source, the connector members of the main control board 1310 [FIG. The connector member 4503 shown in (B) is susceptible to vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is disposed on the main control board 1310 [see FIG. 167 (B)].

  In the case of the gaming machine of the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (B) to FIG. 168 (D), not only in the case of the gaming machine of the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (D), FIG. The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in (C) can be adopted.

  FIG. 168 (E) shows the case where the vibration source is the hitting ball 543 (as for the specific arrangement position, refer to FIG. 10) of the ball emitting device 540. For example, in a right-handed game, it is assumed that the hitting force (elastic force) on the game ball launched by the hitting ball 543 of the ball launching device 540 becomes large, and the impact at this time becomes the vibration source. With respect to such a case, in FIG. 168 (E), the panel relay substrate 3031 is disposed in proximity to the striking ball 543 serving as the vibration source, so the connector member of the panel relay substrate 3031 [FIG. The connector member 4501 shown in A) is susceptible to vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is disposed on the panel relay substrate 3031 [see FIG. 167 (A)].

  FIG. 167 (A) is not limited to the case of the game machine of the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (E), and may be the case of the game machine of the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (B) to FIG. The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIG. 167C can be employed.

  FIG. 168 (F) shows the case where the vibration source is a main body frame speaker 622 for sound output (for the specific arrangement position, refer to FIG. 79). For example, although a large volume sound effect is output from the main body frame speaker 622 in order to boost the gaming state at the time of the specific effect, it is assumed that the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 at this time is a vibration source. With respect to such a case, in FIG. 168 (F), since the panel relay board 3031 is disposed close to the main frame speaker 622 which is a vibration source, connector members of the panel relay board 3031 [FIG. The connector member 4501 shown in (A) is susceptible to vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is disposed on the panel relay substrate 3031 [see FIG. 167 (A)].

  Not limited to the case of the gaming machine of the substrate arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (F), even in the case of the gaming machine of the substrate arrangement shown in FIGS. 168 (A), 168 (B) and 168 (D) The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 (C) can be employed.

  The member serving as the vibration generation source described above is not limited to one in the pachinko machine 1. For example, a member including a game ball guiding path unit 4200 and a hitting ball 543, a member including a game ball guiding path unit 4200 and a pressing operation unit 303, etc. Is also expected to change. That is, a game machine provided with a plurality of members that become vibration generation sources is assumed. Even in such a case, any of the arrangement patterns of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 (C) can be employed.

  As described above, the avoidance unit 4510 can be appropriately disposed on the panel relay substrate 3031 and the main control substrate 1310 in consideration of the positional relationship with the vibration source. In addition, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit 4510, the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the member serving as the vibration source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance It is possible to avoid false detection of a signal from the T.4000 and the panel relay substrate 3031.

  As described above, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, contact resistance is generated when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connection portion. Also, when a vibration is applied to the connector member, a contact resistance is similarly generated. For example, when vibration is given to the connector member from a specific part of the game area where a large number of game balls are continuously concentrated and flowed down, such as when right-handed and playing a game, contact resistance is thereby generated. There is a risk.

  If current flows in the contact resistance generated due to such a cause, the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance rises and there is a possibility that an abnormal voltage different from the original normal state may enter the detection circuit section. is there. That is, there is a possibility that the signal of the detection sensor may be erroneously detected.

Therefore, it is necessary to prevent erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance.
As described above, when vibration is applied to the connector member, the possibility of erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor is increased. However, usually, the layout of the panel relay board and the main control board is determined in the game board from various conditions. At that time, it is often not considered to arrange each substrate so as to avoid being affected by vibration. On the other hand, as the vibration generation source that affects, in addition to the collision due to the game board and the game ball by the right-handed mentioned above, for example, the one by strike operation of the presentation button, the hit operation of the hit ball of the ball launcher, high The loud sound etc. by the speaker of an output etc. are mentioned.

  Therefore, the embodiments described below are made in view of such circumstances, and the purpose thereof is to provide an avoidance unit that avoids erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor by contact resistance. The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which the avoidance unit is appropriately disposed on a panel relay board or a main control board in consideration of a positional relationship with a vibration source.

  The embodiments described above can be summarized as the following technical means.

The gaming machine according to [means 1] is
A detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position on the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying a detection signal of the detection sensor section to the main control board And to solve the above problems,
In the right side area of the game area where the game balls are hit, a game ball guide path unit is arranged in which the game balls that are continuously hit to the right when the game balls are hit flow down,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member.
A substrate having the connector member is disposed in proximity to the gaming ball guide path unit, and a contact resistance is generated on the connector member on one of the main control substrate and the panel relay substrate. An avoidance unit is provided to avoid the voltage adding action,
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine according to [means 1], the avoidance unit is appropriate to either the panel relay board or the main control board, taking into consideration the positional relationship with the gaming ball guiding path unit as the vibration source. Can be placed. In addition, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the member serving as the vibration source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid false detection of the signal from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [means 2] relays a detection signal of the detection sensor unit, which is a detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position on the game board, a main control board that controls the progress of the game, and the detection control unit. In a gaming machine provided with a panel relay board,
Has an operation button that allows the player to perform a predetermined operation for presentation,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member.
A substrate having the connector member is disposed in proximity to the operation button, and addition of a voltage due to a contact resistance generated in the connector member is added to one of the main control substrate and the panel relay substrate. An avoidance unit is provided to avoid the action
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine according to [means 2], the avoidance unit is appropriately disposed on any one of the panel relay substrate and the main control substrate in consideration of the positional relationship with the operation button as the vibration source. be able to. In addition, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the member serving as the vibration source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid false detection of the signal from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [means 3] is
A game provided with a detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position on the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying a detection signal of the detection sensor section to the main control board At the machine
It has a ball launcher that launches game balls toward the inside of the game area in response to an operation to the hit ball handle, and at least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member.
A substrate having the connector member is disposed in proximity to a hitting ball of the ball launcher, and a contact resistance generated in the connector member on one of the main control substrate and the panel relay substrate. An avoidance unit is provided to avoid the effect of voltage addition due to
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine according to [means 3], the avoidance unit is set as one of the panel relay board and the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship with the hitting ball of the ball emitting device as the vibration source. It can be arranged properly. In addition, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the member serving as the vibration source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid false detection of the signal from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [means 4] is
A game provided with a detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position on the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying a detection signal of the detection sensor section to the main control board At the machine
Has a speaker for sound output,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member.
A substrate having the connector member is disposed in proximity to the speaker, and an adding action of voltage due to contact resistance generated in the connector member is applied to one of the main control substrate and the panel relay substrate. An avoidance unit is provided to avoid
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine according to [means 4], the avoidance unit is appropriately disposed on any one of the panel relay board and the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship of the high output speaker as the vibration source. can do. In addition, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the member serving as the vibration source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid false detection of the signal from the panel relay board.

  According to the gaming machine of each of the above-described embodiments, the avoidance unit may be properly disposed on any one of the panel relay board and the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship of the game members as the vibration source. it can. In addition, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the member serving as the vibration source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid false detection of the signal from the panel relay board.

  Not limited to the above-mentioned circumstances, it is generally provided that a plurality of movable effect bodies (movable role objects) electrically driven by a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid used for effects are provided in recent game machines. . The volume and operating range of these movable parts tend to increase, and depending on the operating range and things, the operating speed also tends to increase, and the movable method is also complicated. Therefore, it is possible that the movable part itself becomes a vibration source, and the connector member is loosened, which causes contact resistance. Even in such a case, the embodiment of the present invention can avoid erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor unit or the panel relay board due to the contact resistance.

  By the way, when the plurality of movable roles are not at the initial position, there is a possibility that the predetermined effect can not be normally started.

  Therefore, in order to reliably grasp the initial position of the movable effect body, the origin position detection sensor (a photo sensor consisting of a light emitting type and a light receiving type is often used) is directly incorporated into the movable effect body or the drive motor. In this type, these detection signals are fed back to the control entity and used for control. The exchange of electrical signals between the control board for presentation and the drive board is also realized by the connector members and the harness connecting them.

  The specific illustration has already been carried out in large numbers, so the illustration is omitted, but the arrangement position of the movable effect combination on the game board is, for example, behind the top of the game area 5a (initial position), behind the left side of the game area 5a (Initial position), an effect movable body divided into right and left at the central portion of the game area 5a is united effect at the central portion of the game panel, or an initial position at the lower center of the game area 5a (e.g. The arrangement position changes in various ways to appeal the feature of the gaming machine depending on the difference between the model and the version, such as when the object moves upward.

  By the way, if it becomes impossible to transmit and receive the drive data and each signal for operating it and the origin detection signal correctly, not only there is a possibility that the error can not be detected but there is also a possibility that erroneous transmission may occur. . Here, it is considered that the above-mentioned avoidance unit unit 4166 is provided on the drive substrate in the latter stage of the transmission direction of the origin position detection sensor, or provided on the signal input side of peripheral control substrate 1510 (see FIG. 102) on the control side. Ru.

  As described above, even when performing an effect in which at least two movable members are combined rapidly, there is a possibility that vibration due to a collision at that time may be transmitted violently, and in this case, it is necessary to resist appropriate measures. As one specific example, as shown in FIG. 169 (C), when implementing the intense heat effect that the left and right movable members shown by hatching unite at the central part of the game board 5, the arrangement position of the peripheral control board, the left and right It is necessary to consider the location of the sensor that detects the origin position of the effect movable body.

[Electric connection of origin position detection sensor unit, drive substrate and peripheral control substrate for controlling it]
FIG. 169 (A) is a basic configuration mainly of the electrical connection of the peripheral control board 1510, the panel relay board 3031 (drive board), the drive means, and the origin position detection sensor 4000 for detecting the origin position of the movable effecter. Is a block diagram showing FIG.

  The peripheral control board 1510 is for controlling the progression of the rendering, and is a substrate on which the peripheral control unit 1511 serving as the rendering control subject is mounted. The panel relay substrate 3031 (drive substrate) is also a substrate that relays the detection signal of the origin position detection sensor unit 4000 to the peripheral control substrate 1510.

  In FIG. 169, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the main control for rendering, and the panel relay board 3031 (drive board) outputs the drive data output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the drive source and at least the movable effect body. The information of the initial position (origin position detection sensor) is input and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 is used for control based on the information. The panel relay substrate 3031 (drive substrate) is for supplying a drive current according to the drive signal to the drive means, and an origin for detecting an initial position for supplying a drive current according to the movable effecter. The position detection is delivered to the panel relay substrate 3031 (drive substrate). As shown in FIG. 169A, transmission and reception of these control signals are performed by electrical connection by connector members 4504, 4505 and 4506.

  The positional relationship of movable members for producing a vibration source and the positional relationship between the peripheral control board 1510 or the connector member connecting the panel relay board 3031 (drive board) and the origin position detection sensor are various, so In consideration of the appropriate effect of the occurrence of loose connector connections due to vibration, the “avoidance unit 4150 is arranged. As shown in FIG. 169 (A) or FIG. 169 (B), they can be disposed as appropriate. As a result, the connector member becomes loose due to the vibration from the member serving as the vibration generation source, and even if the contact resistance is generated due to these, the signal from the origin position detection sensor 4000 or the drive substrate by the contact resistance is erroneous. It is possible to avoid detection.

  In addition, when operating the movable part, the loose connection of the connector in the drive means, origin position detection sensor unit, drive board and peripheral control board, which are connected by the connector, was regarded as a problem, but of course, right-handed, operation button The present invention is also applied to the case where the ball emitting device and the speaker are considered as vibration sources.

[Grouping of movable roles for multiple effects]
As described above, in the gaming machine, generally, a plurality of movable effect members (movable role objects) electrically driven by a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid used for effect are provided. The volume and operating range of these movable parts tend to increase, and depending on the operating range, depending on the operating range, the operating speed also tends to increase, and the movable method is also complicated. Furthermore, there are also cases where movable ranges of different movable parts cross each other.

  If, for example, an abnormality occurs in which one of the plurality of movable roles does not return to the initial position at which the operation starts when the effect starts, the operating states of the other movable roles are mostly considered. It is not the current situation. If the return operation is performed only with a movable combination in which an abnormality has occurred without considering other movable combination, there is a risk of interference with other movable combination. If this happens, there is a risk that the player may feel anxious and reduce the interest of the game.

  Here, in order to use the movable role for presentation, it is necessary to restore all the movable roles to their initial positions. In addition, when the bonus is unintentionally stopped in a place that is not the initial position due to some reason, the action to restore the movable bonus to the initial position is performed, but when a plurality of bonus is not in the initial position, As in the case where the movable ranges of movable parts cross each other, when performing the recovery operation, it physically interferes with the other movable parts and restores all the movable parts to the initial position. You may not be able to In such a case, a large vibration or the like different from usual may occur due to the physical interference of the movable part, but since the avoidance unit 4166 is provided as described above, the peripheral control is performed. In the substrate 1510, false detection of the detection signal of the sensor can be avoided.

  Therefore, in the embodiment described below, in order to reliably restore a plurality of prizes to the initial position, the movable prizes whose operation ranges physically interfere with each other are collectively managed as one group. The movable objects do not physically interfere with each other during the recovery operation to the initial positions where the movable objects in the group start moving to start the effect. As described above, by performing the return operation according to a predetermined operation sequence, the recovery from the portion which is not the initial position is surely performed.

  In the following embodiment, each of the plurality of movable roles is movable within an operation range from an initial position at which an operation for effect is started to an operation position at which an operation for effect is ended. Further, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, the plurality of movable objects are divided into a plurality of groups in which the operation ranges of the respective movable objects do not interfere with each other, and the operation ranges are mutually different in at least one group. It contains a plurality of mobile objects that interfere.

In addition, the plurality of movable roles are provided with an initial position detection sensor (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting at least an initial position preset for each of them. In addition to the initial position detection sensor capable of detecting the operation start position for presentation, the position detection sensor is further provided with a position detection sensor for detecting a halfway position of the operation range or an end position of the operation range. Good.
The peripheral control board 1510 has a predetermined position (an initial position or a halfway position or an end position) as described above even in one of a plurality of movable objects in a group including a plurality of movable objects in which the operation ranges mutually interfere When there is an abnormality that can not be detected, there is no physical interference between the movable parts during the recovery operation to the respective initial positions where the movable parts become the start position of the operation for effect start As described above, all movable movable objects in the group are restored to their initial positions according to a predetermined operation sequence.

  FIG. 170 is a front view conceptually showing, for example, grouping of a plurality of movable role objects for effect and a plurality of movable role objects disposed in the back effect unit 3100. As shown in FIG. 170, the character group 01 (code 5000) is disposed at the central portion of the pachinko machine 1, the character group 02 (code 5002) is disposed at the right side of the pachinko machine 1, and pachinko A character group 03 (code 5004) is disposed on the left side of the machine 1, a character group 04 (code 5006) is disposed substantially in the upper center of the pachinko machine 1, and The character group 05 (code 5008) is disposed. That is, the pachinko machine 1 has five feature groups.

  The five character groups 01 to 05 do not physically interfere with one another within the operating range. More specifically, the character group 01 is composed of a mask character, a torso deformation left character, a torso deformation right character, a torso storage-appearing character, an upper liquid crystal driving character, and a lower liquid crystal driving character. There is. The character group 02 consists of the right shoulder character only, the character group 03 consists of the left shoulder character only, the character group 04 consists of the face character only, and the character group 05 consists of the pop-up character only It is done.

  Therefore, movable actors whose operation ranges for effect physically interfere are in the same group. In the above example, the masked character belonging to the character group 01, the torso deformation left character, the torso deformation right character, the torso storage-the appearing character, the upper liquid crystal driving character, and the lower liquid crystal driving character Are supposed to interfere with each other.

[Recovery operation to the initial position of the movable role (referred to as a performance correction operation)]
If there is an abnormality in at least one movable combination in the combination group, all movable combinations in the group are operated and restored to the initial position in a predetermined operation sequence. For example, when there is a problem (when it is detected that there is no problem in the initial position, for example) when there is a problem (for example, when it is detected that there is no initial position) Using the motor sequence data for performing correction operation for all the items, the items are restored to the correct position.

  In this embodiment, with respect to the character group 02 to the character group 05, only one movable character belonging to each character group is added to the other character groups during the recovery operation to the initial position. Since it does not physically interfere, the feature correction operation may be performed in parallel for each feature group. As for the character group 01, there are six movable characters belonging to the character group 01. Therefore, it is predetermined that the movable members in the group do not physically interfere with each other during the recovery operation to the initial position. It is necessary to perform in the specified operation sequence.

  Hereinafter, an example of the character correction operation in the character group 01 will be described. In this example, in the case where there is an abnormality in which the initial position is not detected even in one of the plurality of movable roles belonging to the role group 01, the peripheral control board 1510 is physically removed during the recovery operation to the initial position. All movable objects in the group are operated and restored to their initial positions according to a predetermined operation sequence so as not to interfere.

  More specifically, if it is determined that even one of the movable roles in the group 01 of objects is a photo abnormality, all the items in the group stop their operation. Note that the photo abnormality means that the movable part has not returned to the predetermined initial position. The feature correction operation in the group is not limited to the movable portion in the problematic place, but using predetermined portion-corrected motor sequence data to determine all movable portions in the group to which the problematic movable portion belongs. By restoring the objects to their respective initial positions, restoration of the problematic movable part to the correct initial position is performed.

  The accessory correction motor sequence data mainly defines the drive sequence of the motor to be driven and its operation time (in other words, the drive start timing and the drive end timing), etc. The peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 Is stored in In the case of the above-mentioned role group 01, there are six movable portions, so the motors as drive sources for driving these six movable portions are respectively motor A (masked portion) and motor B (body deformation) Left part) Motor C (Torso deformation right part) Motor D (Torso storage-appearance part) Motor E (upper liquid crystal drive part) Motor F (lower liquid crystal drive part) Do.

  When the recovery operation to the initial position is performed regardless of the role group, the motors to be driven may be sequentially driven one by one, but the present invention is not limited thereto. If such interference can not occur, a plurality of motors to be driven may be driven. For example, the drive start timings may be shifted to drive together or a plurality of drive may be simultaneously performed.

  For example, it is assumed that a photo anomaly is detected for the torso storage and appearance character (motor D). FIG. 171 is a timing chart in the case of performing the recovery operation to the initial position performed at this time as an example. In FIG. 171, the recovery operation to the initial position is started at time t0. At time t0, the motor A is driven first, and at time t1, the drive of the motor A is stopped.

  At the same time, that is, at time t1, the motor B and the motor C are simultaneously driven. Thereafter, at time t2, the motor E and the motor F are simultaneously driven. After this, at time t3, the motors B and C are simultaneously stopped driving. Thereafter, at time t4, the motors E and F are simultaneously stopped driving. At the same time t4, the motor D is driven. Then, at time t5, the drive of the motor D is stopped. That is, at time t5, the recovery operation to the initial position is completed. The stop of driving of each motor is a condition that the photo detection is normal.

  In addition, when two or more role groups perform a recovery operation (referred to as a feature correction operation) to the initial position, the different groups physically interfere with each other in the operating range of the movable role. If there is not, the feature correction operation may be performed on two feature groups in parallel.

  In addition, when one item group performs a recovery operation to an initial position (referred to as an item correction operation), another item group that does not interfere with each other is a combination group performing an item correction operation. The effect may be continued by performing an operation for the effect independently of. By doing this, it is not necessary to interrupt the effect using the movable character as the gaming machine, and the effect can be continued.

  Furthermore, although it is necessary to perform the feature correction operation in this feature group due to an abnormality in one feature group, it is determined that it is necessary to perform the feature correction operation when it is under production. The feature correction operation of the above may not be performed, but the effects may be performed only by the movable roles of the other character group. Then, after the effect by only the movable combination of the other combination group is ended, the combination correction operation of the combination group determined to be necessary to perform the combination correction operation is performed. Also by this, it is not necessary to interrupt the effect using the movable character as the gaming machine, and it is possible to continuously perform the effect.

[Start timing of recovery operation to initial position]
The start timing of recovery operation to the initial position of the role is at power on, fluctuation start, fluctuation end, big hit opening, big hit ending, demo open, demo closed, door open, door closed, etc. Conceivable.

  When turning on the power, make sure to perform the feature correction operation of all the feature groups. Therefore, until the completion of the character correction operation at the time of power on, the character presentation operation relating to the notice at the time of fluctuation or the effect is not performed. The start timing of the item correction operation related to the notice at the time of change and the effect is made effective from the next change when the item correction operation at the time of power on is completed. In addition, the feature correction operation at the time of power-on is always performed for all the features regardless of whether each feature is at each origin.

  When the power is turned on, the character correction operation performs, for example, (1) minimum movement of the character on the opposite side to the initial position, and removes the photo. (2) Next, the item is moved to the initial position and photo detection is performed. Execute (1) and (2) for all the items. According to this, it is possible to execute the rendering operation by the movable role with certainty during the game after the game is started.

  In addition, as for the start timing of the feature correction operation of the feature group as the big hit ending, in the case where there are six movable features such as the feature group 001, during the big hit game of the feature group 001 Although it takes some time for the feature correction operation to be performed, since the big hit game itself has ended, it is possible to reassure the player that the feature correction operation of the role group 001 is not involved in the game.

[Retry during work correction operation]
For example, when a photo can not be detected even when an operation to move to the origin (photo side) is performed by performing an initial operation when power is turned on and an operation to move to the origin (photo side) at the time of effect execution If it does not work well, count one, and when it reaches a predetermined number of times consecutively, for example, a total of five counts, the role that includes the feature and the feature that became photo abnormality until the next time the power is turned on again Make the entire group of objects impossible to move. Although the count is 5 times in a row, the count is 5 continuously. Therefore, the count number returns to "0" when it is normal (detected) even once by photo detection.

  If the retry operation of the above-mentioned accessory correction operation is performed and the photo detection is performed, the state is restored to the state where the normal effect is performed, but even if the retry operation (5 times in the above example) of the above-mentioned accessory correction operation is performed If it can not be detected, the character correction operation of the character group determined to require the character correction operation is not performed, but only the movable character of the other character groups that can normally perform the rendering operation You may substitute for the presentation by

In addition, when performing the feature correction operation, if the number of times the photo detection can not be performed continuously reaches a predetermined number of times even if the movable role is moved to the origin (photo side), it is determined that the photo is abnormal. An example was given in which the character that became abnormal and the whole character group including that character were made immovable, but a predetermined number of times, which is a standard for determining that a photo is abnormal, is a standard number of times set in advance. The store clerk may be configured to be able to make any number of changes.
As a result, it becomes possible to set an appropriate number of retries on the hole side when an abnormality occurs in the combination due to the detection of a defect after shipment or deterioration over time and the like, and it becomes necessary to cope with this. For example, in the case where the photo abnormality frequently occurs, setting the number of retries smaller than the standard number can reduce the occurrence of a situation where a troublesome retry operation is observed by the player and the interest of the player is cut off. It becomes possible.

Whether or not the retry operation is to be performed may be set for each movable character in the character group for each type of the character group. In this case, depending on the specification of the gaming machine, the main control board 1310 may be used not only for the effect by the movable role which is not related to the main game (game content directly related to the drop) but also for the main game (for secondary Play contents related to the game content related to (1). When a failure that can not be restored to the origin position occurs in any of a plurality of movable roles in the role group, a retry operation is performed for the movable roles in the role group that does not significantly affect the game. You may not do this. On the other hand, the effect by the movable role related to the main game (game content relating to supplementary to the win) is notified by the effect in advance that it seems to be a big hit, or the effect is notified by the effect in advance In the case of a character group including a movable character, if a failure that can not be restored to the origin position occurs in any of the movable character of this character group, a retry operation is performed.
By doing this, it is possible to expect the player to feel relieved, and it is possible to expect the effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game.

  Further, whether or not to perform the retry operation may be set depending on the type of effect to be performed. For example, in the case of using a movable role to produce a game with the aim of boosting the interest of the game by producing a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as during a big hit game, the role group to be used belongs to the role group Make a retry operation. On the other hand, in the case of a normal gaming state or a reach state with a low degree of expectation, it is also possible not to perform the retry operation for the movable role not related to the main game (game content directly related to a hit) It is.

[Operational malfunction notification of a movable combination at the time of photo abnormality detection]
It is conceivable to perform some kind of notification when the movable part breaks down (including when the wiring connected to control the part is broken, etc.). When the movable part has broken down, for example, “the part is broken” is displayed in a band on the effect display device 1600. The notification is started when the movable part has a part stop process (counted five times) at the photo abnormal time.

  With regard to the notification of the failure of the movable part, in addition to the display, the notification by sound may be performed together, and in the notification of the failure, a method of combining the sound and the display according to the type of the failure, etc. May be changed.

  In addition, when not only a plurality of movable objects or a board but also a movable body provided in a frame is broken, for example, notification may be made individually for each movable object or movable body, or the item failure. It may be notified collectively as. At this time, in the case of informing individually, it may be displayed side by side so as to be able to identify the failure part on the effect display device, and in the case of notification by voice, any movable part or movable object It may be informed that there is a failure.

  In addition to the breakdown of the movable part and the movable body, for example, when the RAM is initialized, the RAM clear alarm sound is made to sound for a predetermined period, but in this way, it is different from the notification concerning the effect In the case where the situations where the notification should be made overlap, it is preferable to give priority to the RAM clear notification and notify it as a situation where it is necessary to give priority to sound, especially for voice. At this time, after the RAM clear notification sound is sounded for a predetermined period, a product failure is notified.

[Another response when detecting a photo anomaly]
As described above, as a response to the failure of the movable part, the character correction operation, which is the recovery operation to the initial position, or the operation of moving the character to the origin while performing the character correction operation When it can not be detected, the retry operation is performed with the predetermined number as the upper limit, but even if the predetermined number of retries is performed, if the character still can not return to the origin and the photo can not be detected, the character of the character group The following describes an example in which the presentation operation of the symbol is continued with regard to the symbol of the symbol group in which the symbol group is not broken and the symbol group is not broken.

  As already described in the block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 102, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5. And a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, and the respective control is shared. Among them, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects in the game based on a command from the main control board 1310, and controls each rendering device based on a command from the peripheral control unit 1511. Is done. Although the peripheral control unit 1511 for effect control in the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality music performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects to which the sound source IC refers are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decoration board of the game board 5 is selected based on the various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to each decoration board of the game board 5 The game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for operating various effect units provided in the game board 5 or the drive motor of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for game board decoration drive board or For transmitting to the drive solenoid or outputting a drive signal to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3 and the operation button up / down drive motor 367 etc. Door-side drive light emission composed of the side drive data and the lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3, the door side light emission data for outputting the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from the frame decoration drive substrate serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side from the frame decoration drive substrate serial I / O port or displayed on the effect display device 1600 is produced from the display control unit serial I / O port In addition to transmission to the display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the front effect unit 2600 and the back effect unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU. Further, detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, whether or not all the actors constituting the actor group 01 to 05 are at the reference position, that is, abnormality in the actors constituting the actor group 01 to 05 Determine if it has occurred.
When it is determined that all of the prizes constituting the prize groups 01 to 05 are at the reference position and no abnormality has occurred in any of them, the usual prize control is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 162, for example, in the character group 01, a mask character, a torso deformation left character, a torso deformation right character, a torso storage one appearing character, an upper liquid crystal driving character, a bottom It comprises liquid crystal driving characters and the like. For example, depending on the location where the abnormality occurs when an abnormality occurs in the torso deformation left character, the stop position of the torso deformation left character interferes with the recovery operation of the torso deformation right character to the origin position. There may be cases where it is impossible to return all the items to the home position even if retried many times. At this time, in the RAM (not shown) in the peripheral control unit 1511, a flag indicating that the return is impossible is provided for each item group, and 0 is stored when the pachinko machine 1 is started. When the role group is in a non-returnable state, 1 is stored in the flag corresponding to the non-return state.

Here, as described above, the respective feature groups are grouped so as not to physically interfere with each other. Therefore, even if one of the item groups becomes unreturnable, it is possible to continue driving the other item groups.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the character group that has become non-returnable is left as it is, and the character effect presentation is continued using the characters belonging to the other character groups.

  Specifically, a flag indicating that recovery is impossible is read out from the RAM (not shown) in the peripheral control unit 1511. Then, if the flag corresponding to any of the item groups is also 0, it is determined that a failure that can not be returned to any of the item groups has occurred, and the origin return operation is performed, Continue to feature.

  If 1 is stored in the flag corresponding to any one of the item groups, it is determined that a failure that can not be returned to the item group has occurred. In such a case, the processing of stopping the continuation of the return operation and stopping the operation is performed for an accessory belonging to the accessory group in which the flag is set to 1 and an unrecoverable failure has occurred. Thus, it is possible to prevent wasteful consumption of power by adding an unreasonable operation to the motor and a failure of the utility by repeatedly performing the recovery operation despite the impossibility of recovery.

  Here, the character may be a character that causes the rendering operation by the operation of the member, but in addition to the operation of the member, a light emitting member is provided on the member of the character to be added to the operation It is possible to perform effects by light emission or to form the character itself with a semi-transparent member, and to perform the effect of causing the character itself to emit light by a light emitting member such as an LED provided inside the character. is there.

  Here, when the drive signal for driving the item and the light emission signal for emitting the LED for decorating the item are separate systems and both can be controlled independently, an unrecoverable failure has occurred. With regard to the items belonging to the item group, the continuation of the return operation is stopped and the operation is stopped, but even if the operation of the items is stopped, the light emitting member provided on the item or the item The light emission control for emitting light itself can be performed without any influence on the interference of the operation of the accessory or the like, and thus can be performed continuously. At this time, effect control to be originally performed may be performed. As a result, even for the prize belonging to the prize group in which the unrecoverable failure has occurred, by continuing the light emission control, it is possible to continuously perform a certain degree of effect.

  Also, as another method, with regard to the prize belonging to the prize group having a non-returnable failure, the light emitting member or the prize itself provided to the prize is made to emit light while stopping the motion of the prize. In the light emission control, light emission control may be performed according to the occurrence point of the failure that can not be restored, the type of the failure, and the like, instead of the effect control to be originally performed. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the location of occurrence of a failure and the type of failure depending on the light emission mode of the stopped-operation accessory.

  Then, for the item belonging to the item group having the flag of 0, ie, the item group in which the non-returnable failure has not occurred, normal item operation control is performed. It is impossible to return to the point where there is a risk that the part operation will be completely stopped and the interest of the player may be lowered if the failure is generated in some of the parts and the whole part operation control is stopped. By leaving the items belonging to the item group in which the obstacle occurred as it is, by driving the items of the item group that does not physically interfere with the items of the non-returnable item group, As compared with the case where the feature operation is completely stopped, it is possible to perform feature operation control that enhances the player's interest.

  In addition, about the notification of the operation abnormality of the movable combination, as described above, when the movable combination breaks down (not only the breakdown of the movable combination itself but the wiring connected for controlling the movable combination is broken In some cases, it may be possible to make some notification. As an example of the notification when the movable part has broken down, there is a method of displaying, for example, “the part is broken” in a strip on the effect display device 1600. Further, as described later, when a plurality of abnormalities such as an abnormality of a connector and an operation abnormality of a movable combination are detected, each of a plurality of detected abnormalities can be displayed on the display. It is also possible to display in order from the most important abnormalities.

The detection that the movable part has failed and returned to the unrecoverable state is counted when photo detection can not be performed even if the character correction operation is performed and the movement to the origin is performed, and then several retries are performed. Do. Even when the combination correction operation is performed a predetermined number of times (five times as an example), when the photo detection still can not be performed, it is assumed that the return impossible state is set, and notification is started by the return impossible state.
In addition, in the notification of the failure of the movable combination, not only the notification by the display in the effect display device 1600 described above, but also notification by sound may be performed. In addition, as a method of notification, notification by display, notification by sound, notification by combination of both may be mixed, and as a selection method of those notification methods, how to combine sound and display according to the type of failure You may change etc. Furthermore, notification by vibration may be performed using a vibration speaker described later. For example, in the case where a plurality of abnormalities are detected, it is also possible to set notification that the abnormality with high importance is notified by the display on the effect display device 1600 and the abnormality with low importance is notified by sound.

In such an embodiment, it is not preferable that notification by display or notification by sound be performed more than necessary during a game in which a game is being played. Therefore, it is preferable that only notification by display be made during the game, or that the volume be reduced even when notification is made by sound.
Further, in this case, it is not necessary to consider surrounding players and the like before starting the hall sales that are not playing. Therefore, it is programmed and set in advance so that the operation abnormality of the movable part can be checked when the power is turned on for the purpose of informing hall personnel, and in that case it is easy to understand using both display and sound. It may be made to notify hall personnel. As described above, it is preferable to set the period of the notification mode.

There are various types of halls, such as large stores where hundreds of cars are installed, and small shops with few cars. In particular, when there are few hall personnel in a large store with a large number, it may not be possible to check one by one the feature correction operation for all the stands. Even in such a case, the occurrence of a failure can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner by setting the setting so as to notify the person in charge of the hole by the display and the sound as described above. Then, when it is found that a failure occurs in the movable part, it becomes possible to take care of the failure by re-turning on the power supply by the person in charge of the hall or performing repair. .

In addition, as with the inspection (operation check) of the vibration speaker during the RAM clear notification period described above, it is also possible to execute the feature correction operation triggered by the reception of the RAM clear processing and the RAM clear notification command. It is.

  In addition, the movable character (for example, the pop-up character of the character group 05) provided at the lower part of the gaming machine does not return to the origin due to, for example, pinching foreign matter such as the game ball B or dust. If the controller detects an origin position recovery process that causes the vibration speaker 354 to generate a vibration to be transmitted to the movable combination and urges the movable combination to return to the origin position, Good.

[Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, in the sound data creation process performed by the peripheral control MPU 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 every predetermined cycle (for example, every 16 ms), an explanation regarding automatic channel sound control which is a part of the processing will be described later. Therefore, automatic channel sound control according to this embodiment will be described next. First, I will briefly explain the background.

  In general pachinko machines, it is intended to realize an effect that draws the player's interest by outputting various sounds from the speakers in each scene according to the progress of the game. For example, even if the reach is to improve the player's expectation, some reach various sounds depending on the type and others do not. In such a typical pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound corresponds to each corresponding default. Reproduction is performed using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a typical pachinko machine, even if there is a vacant channel, there may be cases where a sound to be reproduced can not be assigned to the vacant channel due to channel allocation, and the sound to be reproduced is reproduced There is a problem that it is impossible to realize various sound effects.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has a pair of top central speakers 462, respectively, for the purpose of effectively utilizing the vacant channel to realize various sound effects and enhancing the interest of the player. The channels are dynamically allocated and managed for each sound to be output from the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 and the top side speaker 464, and the number of combinations of sounds to be output is each channel If the number of channels exceeds the maximum number of channels (in this embodiment, 16 channels are illustrated), each channel is dynamically allocated to the combination of sounds scheduled to be output within the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority (Channel control means). Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1510a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output via the channels dynamically allocated within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means) . The details will be described below.

[Sound control by fixed channel method]
FIGS. 172 (A) and 172 (B) respectively show an example of sound control by the fixed channel system as a comparison object to the present embodiment. FIG. 172A shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control based on the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the sound control based on the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. Note that the "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is one in which the reproduction channel is omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 172 (B) shows an example of assignment of reproduction channels to each sound. In the sound control based on the fixed channel method, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used as shown in the figure. Here, referring to the basic sound reproduction rule, one sound requires two channels in the case of output in stereo, and one channel in the case of output in monaural.

  As for "informing sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shown in the drawing, it is assumed that the sound whose reproduction has been started should not be muted halfway along the process until the end of the reproduction. As a channel allocation method, a reproduction channel and a sound are allocated as a pair, and sound overwrite is prevented. On the other hand, there is no problem in the illustrated “normal BGM” to “held award winning sound” that the sound whose reproduction has been started is overwritten with another sound during reproduction and muffled. As a channel allocation method, as much as possible, the same channel is allocated so that the reproduction timing does not suffer.

  In the fixed channel sound control, when a new sound is outputted to the same channel being outputted, the sound being outputted is muted and a new sound is outputted. With regard to sounds that would be harmful if overwritten, separate channels are assigned, or sounds with non-overlapping play timings are assigned to the same channel.

  FIG. 173 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, manage the definition of playback channel number, left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting and output type setting for each sound category and sound name. There is. Since the reproduction channel number is described above, the description is omitted. When a sensor such as the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects an abnormality due to an abnormality or the like of the connector, sound control of the classification "abnormal notification sound" and the sound name "sensor abnormality detection" is performed.

In addition, even when the abnormality of the initial position detection sensor (photo sensor) for detecting the initial position (origin position) of the movable part mentioned above is detected, ie, the operation abnormality of the movable part is detected, ", Sound control of sound name" sensor abnormality detection ".
When it is desired to distinguish between an abnormality in a connector and an operation abnormality in a movable part, for example, in FIG. 173, ch02 is currently assigned as the sound name “sensor abnormality detection”, but A dedicated channel may be provided as a fixed channel, such as additionally assigning ch03 to the abnormality detection of the initial position detection sensor when an operation abnormality is detected. At this time, it is preferable to assign the abnormality detection to the fixed channel when using both the fixed channel and the automatic channel in order to perform a reliable notification for the abnormality detection.

  In addition, when different types of abnormalities overlap depending on the type of abnormality, the importance of the type of abnormality may be determined in advance. For example, when the priority is set to be lower in the order of RAM clear, magnetic detection, and accessory failure, when these abnormalities occur in duplicate, notification is given with high importance and highest priority. A notification sound ("RAM is cleared") specifying the RAM clear that must be done may be notified.

In this case, among the abnormalities that occur redundantly, the higher importance abnormality is more important for notification than the lower importance abnormality, so the low importance abnormality is not notified immediately. The occurrence of the abnormality is stored, and after the abnormality of high importance is eliminated, or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the notification of the abnormality of high importance was started, the abnormality of low importance is stored. The notification sound (“Magnet detected” or “function failure”) that specifies “” may be notified until the abnormality is resolved or for a predetermined predetermined period.

When an abnormality occurs redundantly and notification is performed sequentially, notification is performed in descending order of importance, and after notification of abnormality of high importance is finished, notification of abnormality of next higher importance is performed. While notification may be performed sequentially, the notification period of the notification sound of the low importance abnormality is set to be long, and together with the notification sound that specifies the high importance abnormality from the time of occurrence of the abnormality, the importance is low. Increase the volume of the notification sound with high importance and set the volume of the notification sound with low importance small so that the notification sound with high importance can be heard better at the beginning while notifying the notification sound of abnormality. By the end of the notification period of high importance anomalies, the volume is increased so that the notification sound for identifying low importance anomalies can be heard well, and until the anomaly is resolved or a predetermined It can also be made to alert for a period.

Also, if the timing at which the abnormality occurs is different, for example, the magnetism is detected while informing (“the item failure”) that the item is broken due to the occurrence of the failure Thus, when notifying that magnetism has been detected ("Magnet detected"), the order of notifying is changed based on the type of abnormality as described above.
In this case, the mode of notification is switched from "character abnormality" to "magnetic detected". Then, when the abnormality due to the magnetism is eliminated, the failure of the accessory will be notified again.

As for the type of abnormality, in accordance with the importance, the importance is set to be lower in the order of RAM clear, magnetic detection, and character abnormality. With regard to other abnormalities, it is possible to set the order of importance as appropriate according to each abnormality.
About the aspect of alerting | reporting, it is good to combine an audio | voice, a display, or a sound and a display, and to alert | report in any aspect. For example, in the above-mentioned example, while notifying by voice, the display device is made to display "character abnormality", and when the abnormality due to magnetism is resolved, the display is erased, and the character is reproduced again. Voice notification of failure. Depending on the situation, the mode of notification is switched according to the situation, using the speaker or display device used for the effect in the form of sound, sound and display. In particular, for display devices, in recent years, a plurality of small liquid crystals have been used as feature devices to produce effects, but an abnormal condition is displayed on a small display device and an abnormal condition is displayed for a main display device that displays lottery symbols. It is good not to show it, and it is good to consider not to disturb a game as much as possible.

  The left and right pan initial values are sound image localization initial positions of sound by the left and right speakers formed by a combination of the upper left speaker (the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464) and the upper right speaker (the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464) Represents By dynamically changing the setting value of left and right pan during playback of the sound, a difference is created in the volume separately output from the upper left speaker and the upper right speaker, and the sound image is localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers Can do. For example, when set as “0x00”, it indicates that the output is only from the left speaker of the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464, and when set as “0x80”, for example, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 , And the volume difference individually output is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xff" is set, it indicates that the signal is output only from the right speaker.

  The upper and lower pan initial values indicate, for example, sound image localization initial positions of sounds by the upper and lower speakers of the pair of top side speakers 464, the pair of top center speakers 462, and the one main body frame speaker 622. By dynamically changing the setting value of the upper and lower pan during reproduction of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers . For example, setting "0x00" indicates that only the pair of upper speakers are output, and setting "0x80", for example, causes the volume difference between the upper and lower speakers individually composed of these combinations to be different. It becomes 0 and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xff" is set, it indicates that the signal is output only from the main body frame speaker 622, which is the lower speaker.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xff”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing the above-described sounds. The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to “LOOP” shown in the drawing) for repeatedly playing the target sound, or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” shown in the drawing) for playing the target sound once. It shows whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to play the target sound in monaural or in stereo.

  FIG. 174 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the reproduction sound, and the reproduction channel. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and as the gaming state, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (playback) priority, and represents that the (playback) priority is higher from the bottom to the top.

  FIG. 175 (A) shows an example of a presentation time chart, FIG. 175 (B) shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 175 (C) shows that each sound can not be reproduced when trying to reproduce each sound. An example of the problem is shown. In these FIGS. 175 (A) to 175 (C), the horizontal axes are mutually common time axes.

  In FIG. 175 (A), the game states along the time axis which is the horizontal axis are "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" It can be mentioned that the game is controlled to be "medium".

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 175 (A), for example, as shown in problem 1 of FIG. If there is a “winning”, as shown in FIG. 172 (B), “held winning sound” is assigned in advance to the same reproduction channels 14 and 15 as “half notice A”, so “half notice A The “previous first-notice A” sound output is stopped because the reproduction sound of “1” is overwritten with the hold winning sound (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 175 (A), for example, as shown in problem 2 of FIG. If there is a "winning", as shown in FIG. 172 (B), "pending winning sound" is assigned in advance to the same playback channel 14, 15 as "full screen preview", so "full screen preview "" Is reproduced by the hold winning sound, and the output of the "full screen advance notice" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

[Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel system according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 176 (A) and 176 (B) respectively show an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment.

  FIG. 176 (A) shows an example of a reproduction channel of sound, and in the above-mentioned sound control by the fixed channel, the channel division as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” shown). The point is different. Here, the channel division being an automatic channel means that control is made so that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is automatically assigned in accordance with the rule described later (described above. Corresponded to “automatic channel sound control”).

  In the automatic channel system sound control according to the present embodiment, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the above-described fixed channel system sound control. Note that the "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is one in which the reproduction channel is omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 176 (B) shows an example of assignment of reproduction channels to each sound. In the automatic channel sound control, as shown in the figure, priorities are individually assigned to the respective sounds. Here, referring to the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one sound requires one channel in outputting in monaural. Become.

  In the “informing sound 1” to “button pressing sound” shown in the drawing, the sound that has started to be reproduced should not be muted halfway along the process until the end of the reproduction. On the other hand, there is no problem in the illustrated “normal BGM” to “held award winning sound” that the sound whose reproduction has been started is overwritten with another sound during reproduction and muffled.

In the sound control by the automatic channel system, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter referred to as "AUTO group"). While multiple AUTO groups can be defined, multiple playback channels can be defined within the AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to play a sound for the AUTO group.
When sound is assigned to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority for specifying a specific AUTO group can be designated in each AUTO group.
When a new sound is reproduced, if it is a sound defined in the AUTO group, it is immediately reproduced if a vacant channel (unused channel) exists in the designated AUTO group.

  In the above case, if there is no empty channel, the effect control program searches all channels currently being reproduced in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly reproduced. The effect control program terminates the use of the AUTO channel if there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as that of the sound itself being reproduced, and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no vacant channel in the AUTO group whose priority is lower than or equal to the priority of the sound itself being reproduced.

  FIG. 177 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel system, reproduction channel numbers such as sound control by fixed channels as described above, left and right pan initial values, upper and lower pan initial values, volume initial values, for each sound category and sound name. Identifier and priority for specifying AUTO group instead of sound number, playback type setting and output type setting (also referred to as "playing priority"), initial left / right pan, upper / lower pan initial, initial volume, sound It manages the definition of number, seek point, playback type setting and output type setting.

  First, an identifier for specifying each specific AUTO group indicates which AUTO group among the AUTO groups in which a plurality of sounds exist. The priority is an index indicating which sound should be reproduced with priority when each sound is reproduced simultaneously. The priority indicates that the larger the numerical value is the sound to be reproduced with priority, while the smaller the numerical value is a sound to be reproduced without priority. In the present embodiment, as an order of types of sound to be reproduced with priority, for example, notification sound having a priority of “25” (“informing sound 1”, “informing sound 2” and “informing sound 3”) , Sound effects with a priority of "20" ("big hit confirmed sound" and "button press sound"), BGMs with a priority of "15" (such as "normal BGM"), and a priority of "10" Sound effects (such as "full screen preview sound effects"), sound effects with a priority of "05" ("half notice sound effects" to "second half notice sound effects"), and hold winning sounds with a priority of "01" And In this way, when there is no vacant channel, for example, when trying to reproduce the notification sound, there is no need to reproduce using the predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound with the lower priority (for example, the hold winning sound) The notification sound is to be preferentially reproduced using the channel currently being reproduced).

As already described, the left and right pan initial values are the sounds from the left and right speakers formed by the combination of the upper left speaker (the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464) and the upper right speaker (the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464). Represents the initial position of the sound image localization. By dynamically changing the setting values of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. The left and right pan initial values are managed as pan information.
For example, setting "0x00" indicates that the output is made only from the top center speaker 462 and the left speakers (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464) of the top side speaker 464, for example, when being set as "0x80" The volume difference individually output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xff" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the right speaker (the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464).

  Also, as described above, the upper and lower pan initial values indicate, for example, sound image localization initial positions of sounds by the upper and lower speakers of the pair of top side speakers 464, the pair of top center speakers 462, and the one main body frame speaker 622. Dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction creates a difference in the volume separately output from the upper and lower speakers, and localizes the sound image in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers Can do. The upper and lower pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, setting "0x00" indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when "0x80" is set, the volume difference between the upper and lower speakers individually composed of these combinations is indicated. Becomes 0 and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xff" is set, it indicates that the signal is output only from the main body frame speaker 622, which is the lower speaker.

  Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xff”, and additionally “1” (0x1ff in the case of 0xff) at the third byte. By setting one or more volume control devices provided to the gaming machine, it is not affected by the volume change, and it is always reproduced with the volume set at the initial value. It represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing the above-described sounds.

  The seek point represents the reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In this embodiment, for example, “0” is set as “seek point” in the “upper right speaker confirmation sound” to “first half notice A sound effect” as this seek point, while “second half notice A sound effect” and “second half notice B effect” Each sound is set to [1]. Such seek points allow registration of sounds in excess of the maximum number that can be registered when exceeding the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source.

  The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to “LOOP” shown in the drawing) for repeatedly playing the target sound, or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” shown in the drawing) for playing the target sound once. It shows whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to play the target sound in monaural or in stereo.

  FIG. 178 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the reproduction sound, and the priority. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and as the gaming state, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (playback) priority, and represents that the (playback) priority is higher from the bottom to the top.

  FIG. 178 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 178 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel reproduction time chart. In FIGS. 178 (A) and 178 (B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 178 (A), as the gaming state along the time axis which is the horizontal axis, "the first half of fluctuation", "the second half of fluctuation", "stop left symbol", "stop right symbol", "stop middle symbol" and " It can be mentioned that the game is controlled to be "big hit".

  In “the first half of the fluctuation” shown in FIG. 179 (A), as shown in FIG. 179 (B), for example, the sound of “normal BGM reproduction” is reproduced from the reproduction channels 00 to 01 from beginning to end Corresponding to range A). Here, when trying to reproduce the on-hold winning sound as a new sound because there is a starting opening winning (corresponding to the “on-hold winning” in the figure), reproduction channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since the reserved winning sound can be reproduced using the reproduction channels 12 to 13, any other sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the reserved winning sound (corresponding to "held sound reproduction" in the figure), and so on. Output of all kinds of sounds continues.

  In “the second half of the fluctuation” shown in FIG. 179 (A), as shown in FIG. 179 (B), for example, the sound of “reach BGM reproduction” is reproduced from the reproduction channels 00 to 01 from beginning to end ( Corresponding to range B). Here, for example, when trying to play a holding winning sound as a new sound because there is a starting winning (corresponding to “held winning” in the figure), playback channels 04 to 05 exist as empty channels at the start timing. The output of all the other types of sounds continues without any sound being reproduced being overwritten by the hold winning sound (corresponding to “hold sound reproduction” shown).

  In the “second half of the fluctuation” shown in FIG. 179 (A), for example, a notification (corresponding to “information 2 generation” in the drawing) is generated, for example. When trying to reproduce “information 2” shown in the figure, as a result of the search for the empty channel, it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. 179 (B). Therefore, among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing, the sound with the lowest priority is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as channels reproducing the reserved winning sound with the lowest priority of "01". In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, although the hold winning sound is reproduced as described above, the priority (25) of the notification sound (corresponding to "information sound 2" shown in the figure) to be reproduced next is next. Since it is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sound, the reserved winning sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

  FIG. 180 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. The work information for automatic channel control is, as a work name, a setting reservation flag, a required sound number, a sound number during playback, an automatic allocation group, an automatic allocation priority, an elapsed time from registration, volume control for each channel. It includes a workpiece for work and a workpiece for pan control, and has respective information corresponding thereto.

  The setting reservation flag has a value other than “0” to indicate that setting reservation is made. The required sound number indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced, if “−1” is not stopped and other than “−1”. The sounding number during reproduction indicates the sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being reproduced if "-1" is not stopped and is other than "-1".

  In the case of the automatic allocation group, the channel is fixedly allocated when it is "0", while the channel is automatically allocated when it is "1" ("Sound control by automatic channel method" described later) Equivalent to Here, for example, “1” indicates that the automatic allocation group is the AUTO group 1 and “2” indicates the AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic assignment indicates the priority in the case of performing the sound control by the automatic channel method described later.

  The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time from the registration time, assuming that the registration time of the desired reproduction sound is “0”. Note that the elapsed time since the registration is one of the plurality of sounds being reproduced when trying to reproduce a new sound in a situation where a plurality of sounds having the same priority at the time of automatic assignment are being reproduced. Used to determine which sounds should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer time is identified, and this sound is overwritten and erased with the new sound.

  The volume control work stores the volume value (volume value) of the sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the set values of the left and right pans and the upper and lower pans described above.

  FIG. 181 shows an example of empty channel search processing when sound control is performed when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. Also in FIG. 181, the channel is abbreviated as “ch”.

  If there is a reproduction request for a new sound (step S1100), the effect control program confirms an automatic allocation group related to the new sound (step S1102), and if this automatic allocation group is "0", fixed allocation is performed. It is determined that is, and reproduction of a new sound is started on the designated channel.

  On the other hand, when the automatic assignment group is other than "0", the effect control program determines that the automatic assignment is automatic assignment, and determines whether the new sound corresponds to the monaural channel (step S1106). .

  The effect control program determines whether a vacant (monaural) channel (one channel) exists if the new sound is monaural (step S1108), and if there is a vacant sound (monaural) Of the new sound on the channel) (step S1109), while if it is not present, the reproduced sound has the same or lower priority as that of the new sound in the (monaural) channel being reproduced. It is determined whether a channel exists (step S1110).

  The effect control program ends the processing when there is no reproduced sound channel that is the same as or lower than the priority of the new sound in such a (monaural) channel being reproduced, while it exists when it exists. It is determined whether there is a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1112).

  In the effect control program, when there are a plurality of corresponding channels, during the corresponding channel based on the elapsed time from the above-mentioned registration, the reproduction time of the sound with the longest reproduction time from the registration is being reproduced. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel (step S1114). On the other hand, when there are a plurality of corresponding channels and there is one, the effect control program starts the reproduction of the new sound in the (monaural) channel that satisfies the desired condition (step S1116).

  On the other hand, when the effect control program determines that the new sound is not monaural in step S1106 described above, it is determined whether there is a vacant (stereo) channel (two channels) (step S1120). If the effect control program determines that a vacant channel exists, it selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired condition and starts reproduction of the new sound (step S1122).

  On the other hand, if the effect control program determines that there is no empty channel, it determines whether or not the (stereo) channel of the sound being played back has the same or lower priority as the priority of the new sound (step S1124), since the process is terminated when there is no sound, overwriting of the sound being reproduced by the new sound to be reproduced is not performed. On the other hand, when the effect control program exists, the effect control program determines whether a plurality of corresponding channels exist (step S1126).

  The effect control program starts output of the new sound in the (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired condition when there is not a plurality of corresponding channels, while the above-mentioned is described when there are a plurality of corresponding channels. Based on the elapsed time from registration, reproduction of the new sound is started on the (stereo) channel with the longest reproduction time from registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130).

  As described above, the effect control program searches for an available channel in order to reproduce a new sound. The process of searching for such free channels will be explained more visually and intelligibly.

  FIGS. 182 (A) and 182 (B) to 185 (A) and 185 (B) respectively show examples of specific contents of the free channel search process. As shown in FIG. 182 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a playback request for normal BGM having a priority of 15, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, normal BGM playback is started in stereo using these playback channels 00-01.

  As shown in FIG. 182 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect of the first half notice A, which has a priority of 05, as shown in FIG. 182 (B). Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the sound effects of the first half advance advance_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to a request for reproduction of a button depression sound having a priority of 20, and searches for reproduction channels 04 to 05. Since there is a space, reproduction of the button depression sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the generation request for reproducing the sound effect in the first half notice B, which has a priority of 05, as shown in FIG. Since there is a vacancy in ~ 07, the reproduction of the sound effects of the first half advance advance_B in stereo is started using these reproduction channels 06-07.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request for playing a big hit determined to have a priority of 20, and searches the playback channel 08 to 09. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the big hit fixed sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08-09.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request for playing back the sound effect of the first half notice C having a priority of 05, and the playback channel 10 Since there is a vacancy of ̃11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half advance notice C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10-11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to play a reserved winning sound having a priority of 01, and causes the playback channels 12 to 13 to be searched. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the on-hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request for playing the annunciation sound 3 having a priority of 25 and causes the playback channels 14 to 15 to be searched. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14-15.

  FIGS. 186 (A) and 186 (B) to 189 (A) and 189 (B) respectively show an example of specific contents of the free channel search process. As shown in FIG. 186 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a reach BGM playback request with a priority of 15, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of reach BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  The effect control program, as shown in FIG. 186 (B), searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to play the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 and there is an available channel in the playback channel 02 to 03. As it exists, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  After repeating the above-described processing, the effect control program then, as shown in FIG. 187 (A), receives a request for reproduction of the full-screen notice sound having a priority of 10 as an idle channel. Since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full screen preview sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to reproduce the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 as shown in FIG. 187 (A). As shown, since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to "non-reproduction (vacant)" in the figure), the reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), the effect control program performs a search for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to play the annunciation sound 3 having a priority of 25 and causes the playback channel 04 to 05 ( Since there is a vacancy (corresponding to “non-reproduction (vacant)” in the drawing), reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using the reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to play a trailer sound with a priority of 10, as shown in FIG. 188 (B). Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the feature preview sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to play a reserved winning sound having a priority of 01, as shown in FIG. Since there is a vacancy in the “non-reproduction (vacant)” (shown), reproduction of the hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14-15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce notification sound 2 having a priority of 25 but there is no available channel. Therefore, the use of reproduction by the reproduction channels 14 to 15 which is reproducing the "preserved winning sound" having the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being reproduced is stopped, and the reproduction channels 14 to 15 are used. The reproduction of the notification sound 2 which is a desired sound in stereo is started.

In this way, each sound scheduled to be output is not fixedly allocated in advance to a specific channel, and a playback channel with a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the above-mentioned output schedule with higher priority is searched Each sound of will be played on the playback channel found in the search.
Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only the free channel can be effectively utilized as described above, but each sound including the output schedule is as many as possible using each channel including the free channel. Since it becomes possible to reproduce, it is possible to realize various sound effects and to increase the interest of the player.

  FIGS. 190A and 190B to 191A and 191B respectively show an example of the specific contents of the free channel search process. The effect control program, as shown in FIG. 190 (A), searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to play the left symbol stop sound having a priority of 15, and the play channel 00 to 01 becomes vacant. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 190 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to play the right symbol stop sound having a priority of 15, as shown in FIG. 190 (B). Therefore, the reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to play a symbol stop sound with a priority of 15 as shown in FIG. Since there is an empty space, the reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel triggered by the generation of a big hit BGM reproduction request having a priority of 15, and makes the reproduction channel 00 to 01 empty. Therefore, the reproduction of the jackpot BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  In addition, when the replacement control of the sound according to the priority occurs using a certain reproduction channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound reproduced before the replacement in the reproduction channel after the completion of the reproduction. It goes without saying that it is good to do so.

[Variation of sound control]
In the above embodiment, the sound control based on the automatic channel method has been described as an example using all reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Sound control may be performed as follows by a combination or the like.

  FIGS. 192 (A) to 192 (F) are diagrams each showing a variation example of channel assignment in sound control by the above-described two types of respective channel schemes or a combination thereof.

  FIG. 192 (A) shows an example of channel assignment in sound control according to the fixed channel scheme for the maximum number of channels (16 channels) described so far as a comparative example with the embodiment described above, and FIG. 192 (B) shows this The present invention corresponds to the embodiment of the present invention described above, and shows an example of channel assignment in the case where sound control is performed by the automatic channel method by the maximum number of channels. The sound control based on these two channel allocations has already been described, so detailed description will be omitted.

  FIG. 192 (C) shows an embodiment in which a plurality of automatic channel groups are allocated to reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels and sound control is performed by the automatic channel method (corresponding to “PTN 2” in the figure) . FIG. 192 (D) shows an embodiment in which channel assignment is performed for reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels while using one automatic channel group and sound control is performed according to the above-described fixed channel method for some reproduction channels. (Corresponds to "PTN3" shown).

  FIG. 192 (E) shows an embodiment in which a plurality of automatic channel groups are used to assign channels for reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels and to perform sound control according to the above-described fixed channel system for some reproduction channels. (Corresponds to "PTN 4" in the figure). Note that a specific example of the channel scheme shown in FIG. 192 (E) will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings after FIG.

  In FIG. 192 (F), while using one automatic channel group, channel assignment is performed for reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels and sound control is performed according to the automatic channel method, and sound according to the fixed channel method described for some reproduction channels Although control is performed, it is different from the above-described example in that the number of channels is secured so that the number of reproduction channels is variable. Note that a specific example of the channel scheme shown in FIG. 192 (F) will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings after FIG.

  As shown in the present embodiment, by adopting the automatic channel system in which all the channels are in one group, it is possible to assign free channels or replace the channels in the output based on the previously specified criteria. Sound can be output only by determining the priority of Therefore, unlike the conventional control method in which a channel is designated to output a sound, the management of the channel is not required, so that the control relating to the sound output can be simplified and the development efficiency can be improved. It becomes.

  In addition, by adopting the automatic channel system, it is possible to minimize the number of channels, for example, it becomes possible to adopt an inexpensive sound source IC with a small number of channels, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by automatic channel method]
Subsequently, details of another embodiment of the above-described sound control method will be described. In the above-mentioned sound control method, by changing the assignment of sound to each channel dynamically as the automatic channel method, it was possible to effectively utilize the vacant channel and reproduce many sounds, but In recent diversified game machines, since hundreds and thousands of types of sounds are selected and output, the management of sound sources may be complicated.

  Also, by overlapping and outputting a plurality of sounds, it is possible to execute preview effects in duplicate or to enable various sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192 (C), the sound is divided into a plurality of groups, and a plurality of sounds and reproduction channels are dynamically assigned to each group, so that the sounds are output in duplicate. can do. In addition, there is an advantage that the management becomes easy by dividing the sound into types.

  Further, the sound includes a sound such as a notification sound which should be output prior to the effect sound and a sound which is continuously output like a BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to assign the channel dynamically. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192 (D), the sound that is output with priority and the sound that is always output are output by the fixed channel method, and the sound that changes according to the result of the start winning or the fluctuation display is Output by automatic channel method.

  By configuring as described above, it is possible to effectively utilize an idle channel by the automatic channel method and to prevent the occurrence of unnecessary channel switching control by the fixed channel method. In addition, since it is possible to classify according to the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, management of effect data becomes easy.

  The sound control method shown in FIG. 192 (E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 192 (C) and 192 (D), and has the advantages of the respective methods. Hereinafter, the sound control method shown in FIG. 192 (E) will be specifically described.

[15-1. Sound control that mixes fixed channel method and multiple automatic channel methods]
In this embodiment, unlike the above-described example, the number of channels in sound source control is 32 (ch), and a channel for reproducing a sound by a fixed channel method and a channel for reproducing a sound by an automatic channel method are included. . Also, channels for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. This will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

[15-1-1. Configuration of playback channel]
FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of reproduction channels in sound source control in the present embodiment. As described above, in the sound source control of the present embodiment, 32 channels are used, and a unique identifier (channel number) is assigned to each channel.

  The channel configuration table includes "automatic assignment" indicating whether or not automatic assignment is to be performed for channel numbers, "division" indicating a group to which each channel belongs, and "purpose of use" for each channel. Note that “remarks” is added to the configuration table shown in FIG. 193 as a supplement.

  In the configuration of each channel in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 193, channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, 24 to 29 Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

  Further, the channels of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 8 to 19 are “AUTO group 1”, and the channels of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 24 to 29 are “AUTO group 2”.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, sound can be output in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

  A channel of channel number 0 (hereinafter referred to as “channel 0” and each channel is represented by “channel number” which is “channel” channel number +1 ”) is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting a sound commonly used by manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is a sound etc. which is displayed while displaying a maker's logo at the time of game machine activation. Also, channel 1 is a channel that makes a pair with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

  Channel 2 is a channel used to output BGM during game play or waiting for customers. Channel 3 is a channel paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channel 4 and channel 5 are channels used to output BGM, and channel 6 and channel 7 are channels that are paired with channel 5 and channel 6 when BGM is output in stereo. is there.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only stereo output but also a plurality of sounds are simultaneously output to improve the sound quality of BGM. Therefore, a plurality of (pair) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be simultaneously output. Furthermore, as described later, since it is possible to output BGM also on channel 20 (and channel 21), it is possible to simultaneously output four BGMs using a maximum of 8 channels (4 pairs). It has become.

  While the gaming machine is operating normally, BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly reproduced. Therefore, the channel for reproducing BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than dynamically allocating the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a channel for reproducing BGM is a fixed channel system, and only BGM is output. As a result, control can be simplified as compared with the case where the sound is reproduced only by the automatic channel method, while preventing the generation of a vacant channel.

  Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing the sound output at the time of the execution of the advance presentation effect. In the advance notice effect, a sound selected by lottery is output each time according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, and the like. As described above, for the sound that is output each time based on a predetermined condition, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel system.

  In this embodiment, unlike the above-described example, channels to which the automatic channel scheme is applied are grouped. The group of channels for outputting the sound at the time of the preliminary effect production is the AUTO group 1.

  In the case of outputting a sound at the time of execution of the preview effect, the peripheral control MPU first searches for an available channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, empty channels for two channels are searched, and in principle, continuous channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is a vacant channel, it is set to output the designated sound from the vacant channel. On the other hand, when there is no empty channel, the channel in use is opened and a new sound is output or the output of the designated sound is canceled based on a predetermined condition. The detailed procedure of channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel scheme is applied. The channel 21 is a channel paired with the channel 20 at the time of stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or stage sound. It is used to output BGM by overlapping 4 sounds or to output a specific effect sound. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output by an effect other than the advance notification effect output by the automatic channel method.

  Channels 22 and 23, like channels 20 and 21, are channels to which the fixed channel scheme is applied. The channel 23 is a channel paired with the channel 22 at the time of stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels to which a holding tone is output. The holding tones output in the channels 22 and 23 may be, for example, sounds that are output regardless of the lottery result at the start winning, or may be sounds that are output with priority, such as when a big hit is determined. A sound or the like based on the lottery result at the start winning is output from the channels 24 to 29, as described later.

  Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel scheme is applied. The channels 24 to 29 reproduce the sound output based on the expectation according to the lottery result at the start winning, and the sound output when the hold display changes at the start of fluctuation. By outputting the channels 22 and 23 in the fixed channel system, it is possible to reliably output the sound at the time of the big hit determination even if there are no empty channels in the channels 24 to 29, and the player's attention is drawn. Can.

  Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel scheme is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound at the time of volume change and a notification sound at the time of payout of game media. Further, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. As described above, the fixed channel method in which the output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound related to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound at the time of occurrence of abnormality are reliably transmitted to the outside.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a channel of the fixed channel system is allocated when the output is continuously continued as in BGM, or when it is necessary to reliably output as in the case of an abnormal alarm sound. On the other hand, the automatic channel system is applied to the sounds to be outputted adaptively according to the game state etc., thereby preventing the sound from being outputted while the empty channel is generated, and the limited number of channels It can be used effectively.

[Free channel search process]
Subsequently, a procedure for searching for a free channel of the sound source control of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of free channel search processing in the case of executing control of outputting a sound according to the present embodiment. Although FIG. 181 describes the case where there is one AUTO group, FIG. 194 is different in having a plurality of AUTO groups. The description of the common processing is omitted.

  In the vacant channel search process shown in FIG. 194, in the processes of step S1108 and step S1120, when the new sound is of the automatic channel system, it is determined whether or not the vacant channel exists in the channel of the same group. That is, even if channels of different groups are vacant, if there is no vacancy in the same channel group, the result of steps S1108 and S1120 is "No".

  Furthermore, in the idle channel search process shown in FIG. 194, when there is no idle channel, playback of the sound output from the channel selected based on the predetermined condition is stopped, and a new sound is output from the channel (step S1118, step S1132). The channel selection conditions for stopping the sound reproduction will be described below with reference to FIG. Note that the effect of stopping the output of sound is continuously performed without stopping the image display and the operation of the special effects.

  FIG. 195 is a diagram showing an example of a condition for selecting a channel for switching the output of sound (stopping or releasing the reproduction of sound) when the channel is not available at the time of output of a new sound in the present embodiment. . As a specific selection condition, the attributes of the sound being reproduced and the new sound are compared, and the sound of higher importance is prioritized. The attributes include, as will be described later, the playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the volume size, the amount of change in sound during playback, etc., and the playback time of the sound at the channel selection time, It also includes the remaining time to play. Each condition will be specifically described below.

  Condition 1 selects a channel based on the reproduction time (elapsed time) from the start of reproduction. For example, as shown in steps S1114 and S1130 of FIG. 181, a channel with a long reproduction time is selected. In this manner, the output of the effect sound sufficiently executed is ended by selecting a channel having a long elapsed time after the start of reproduction, and the player can easily recognize that a new effect has been performed.

  Condition 2 selects a channel based on the reproduction time of the entire effect. For example, since an effect with a long reproduction time can be an effect with a high degree of expectation, an effect with a short reproduction time is selected. On the other hand, by stopping the effect with a long reproduction time, the influence on the effect to be executed thereafter may be minimized. In this case, the determination is made based on the total reproduction time set in advance regardless of the reproduction time from the start of reproduction.

  Although the condition 1 and the condition 2 are conditions relating to the reproduction time, for example, the sound output of the effect with a short (or long) effect time may be stopped. Further, the channel may be selected according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction with respect to the time of the entire effect, that is, the progress ratio of the effect. By setting the conditions in this manner, it is possible to stop the sound output at the initial stage or the final stage of the presentation.

  Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, since an effect in which a large volume of sound is output may be an effect of higher importance, a channel with a small volume of output sound is selected with priority. On the other hand, a channel with a large volume of sound being output may be preferentially selected, and the player may be made to recognize that an effect is newly executed.

  Condition 4 selects a channel based on the change in volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a fade-in or fade-out sound is output may be an effect of higher importance, and a channel with a small amount of change in volume is preferentially selected. On the contrary, a channel with a large volume change may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 5 selects a channel based on a dynamic change in sound image localization position (pan pot). For example, by changing the output of the left and right sounds of the stereo speakers, it is possible to produce a more important effect by the effect that produces a more three-dimensional sound effect, a channel with less dynamic sound image localization position Prioritize and select. On the other hand, the load of sound control may be reduced by preferentially selecting a channel having a large change in dynamic sound image localization position.

  Condition 6 selects a channel based on the sound number (index). For example, the large (small) number of the tone number is selected. At this time, priority may be associated with the sound number.

  Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, a channel that outputs monaural sound is selected on the assumption that the effect produced by stereo sound with high sound quality has a higher expectation. On the other hand, since monaural sound uses only one channel, if the number of vacant channels is insufficient even if the channel that outputs monaural sound is released, select a channel for outputting stereo sound in order to increase vacant channels. You may

Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether volume adjustment is permitted.
For example, an effect set so as not to perform volume adjustment may be set to have a higher degree of importance, or an effect set so as to perform volume adjustment may be set to have a higher degree of importance.

  In addition to the conditions described above, for example, in the case of the same priority, a new sound reproduction request may be discarded without replacing the channel. Further, by assigning unique priorities to all the sounds, the effect data may be set so as not to have the same priorities.

  Although the conditions of 1 to 8 are shown as an example in the table shown in FIG. 195, these conditions may be applied singly or in combination of a plurality of conditions. For example, a threshold may be set for each condition to select a channel satisfying more conditions, or a priority may be set for each condition to sequentially apply the conditions.

[Volume control]
Subsequently, an example in which control is performed to assign a channel based on the priority assigned to a newly output sound will be described. Here, an example will be described in which three types of notices (first half notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. FIG. 196 is a timing chart showing an example of effects for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, (A) shows a timing at which the sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows a channel where each sound effect is outputted. ing. FIG. 197 is a diagram illustrating an example of the priority of sound effects in the example of the effect of the present embodiment.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 196, the first half advance notice A is generated when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display. At this time, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the display screen, and when the player operates the effect button, a first half advance notice B is generated. Furthermore, the first half notice C occurs while the first half notice _A and the first half notice _B are being executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 145, the priority of the first-half notice A is 03, the priority of the first-half notice B is 05, and the priority of the first-half notice C is 20. Furthermore, since the volume suppression flag is set in the first half notice _B and the first half notice _C, the volume is selected based on the suppression volume value when the low priority preliminary announcement effects in the same group are executed in duplicate. Reduced.

  The first half notice_A is, for example, an effect in which a character appears, and a character appears on the display screen, and sound effects are output from the channels 08 and 09 in stereo.

  The first half advance notice B is an effect executed by the operation of the effect button, and the button depression sound is reproduced when the button is operated (channels 18 and 19), and the first half notice B is started, and the effects from the channels 10 and 11 are in stereo. Sound is output.

  In the first half notice C, the screen display is stopped for a predetermined time along with the output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), and the sound with lower priority than the first half notice C, specifically, other notice effects and BGM are temporary. It is muffled to (black out production). Thereafter, when the effect screen is displayed, the output of sound effects other than the first half advance notice C is resumed.

  Here, the volume change of the sound effects of each preliminary presentation effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a timing chart showing an example of volume change of sound effects in the first half fluctuation of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. The horizontal axis represents a time axis, and the vertical axis of (B) represents a volume (volume).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started from time t0, and the first half advance notice A is started at time t1. At this time, the preset volume V_A of the effect sound of the first half notice A is output.

  Thereafter, an operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half advance notice B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button depression sound of the effect button is reproduced with the volume V_T and the effect sound of the first half advance notice B is output with the volume V_B. Also, since the priority of the first-half notice _B is higher than the priority of the first-half notice _A, the volume of the sound effect of the first-half notice _A is suppressed to 50%.

  It should be noted that the volume may not be lowered if the priority of the preview effect performed later is lower than or equal to the priority of the preview effect being executed, or even if there are few sound effects being output simultaneously You do not have to lower the volume. Also, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a specific combination of advance notice effects.

  Furthermore, when the first half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen is darkened until time t5, and the sound effects other than the first half notice C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first half advance notice C is output with the volume V_C.

  In addition, the effect sound of the first half notice A and the first half notice B, which are muffled from time t3, is resumed at time t5. The button pressing sound is originally output until time t4, but since t5> t4, the reproduction ends at time t3.

  After that, in the first half advance notice A and the first half notice B, the effect is continued until a preset end time (time t6, t7). Furthermore, the first half advance notice B ends at time t7, and the first half of fluctuation ends.

  In addition, during the period when the rendering effect sound is muffled, the output of the rendering effect sound may be continued while the volume is set to 0, or the output of the rendering effect sound may be stopped. When the volume is set to 0, the volume (sub volume) for each channel may be set to 0, or the main volume for controlling the volume of the entire rendering effect sound may be set to 0, and the sound output of the first half notice _C is output. May be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by control by the main volume. Further, even in the state where the output of another sound effect is suppressed by the first half advance notice C, the sound effect, the warning sound, and the notification sound having higher priority are output.

  As described above, when outputting a new sound and lowering the volume of the sound being reproduced, the volume of the sound being reproduced on all the channels is selected instead of lowering the volume of the sound designated by the volume suppression flag or the like. The volume may be lowered, or the volume of sound being reproduced on the same channel may be lowered in the channel method (fixed channel method, automatic channel method). In addition, the volume of the sound being reproduced on the channel in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[effect]
By configuring as described above, in the present embodiment, sounds with high priority can be output with priority. The sound with high priority is, for example, a sound such as a notification sound or a warning sound for reliably transmitting to the player or the game arcade employee, or the expectation for the result of the variable display to be a big hit is high. The sound effects are for enhancing the sense of expectation of the game, and the sound effects can be highly effective and can improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by grouping each channel used in sound source control into a plurality of groups, it becomes possible to facilitate management of effect data relating to effect sound.
As a result, it is possible to improve the development efficiency, such as suppressing the occurrence of a bug due to the execution of systematic tests. Also, by making stable gaming possible, the interest of gaming can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, channels of the automatic channel scheme are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group (AUTO group 1) that outputs the sound effects of the preview effect and a group (AUTO group 2) that outputs the hold-related sound effects. The number of sound effects of the preliminary presentation effect is huge compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sound effects can be reproduced simultaneously at the same time. In particular, in the first half of the fluctuation, it may be required to output a rendering effect sound exceeding the number of allocated channels, for example, by performing a previewing of the fluctuation pending on the notice of the fluctuation. In such a case, it is possible to maximize the interest of the game by outputting the low priority rendering effect sound in the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1 while replacing it with a high priority rendering effect sound. .

  Furthermore, the effect of notifying the degree of expectation by outputting the effect sound along with the change of the suspension display of the variable display and the effect display along with this can greatly enhance the player's sense of expectation, and it is desirable to be executed surely . In this embodiment, by outputting from the channel belonging to the AUTO group 2 the effect sound relating to such a hold display (hold sound), it is possible to reproduce more reliably independently of the notice play relating to the fluctuation display. it can. Also, unlike in the case of the notice effect in the variable display, compared with the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 2, the number of effect sound effects outputted simultaneously does not greatly exceed, so the output of the effect sound stops There is less chance of being In addition, even in the case of being canceled, the output of the rendering effect sound with low priority is only canceled. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by reliably executing a high-effect effect that enhances the player's sense of expectation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a channel to which the automatic channel scheme is applied and a channel to which the fixed channel scheme is applied are mixed. As described above, in the automatic channel method, while effectively utilizing a limited number of channels by searching for free channels, priority output is given to output high-representation effects and sounds with high importance by setting priorities. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied to the case where the sound is continuously output as in the case of BGM, or the sound is preferentially output in order to notify of the breakdown of the gaming machine, the fraud, and the like. As described above, by applying the channel system suitable for the characteristics of the sound and the application, it is possible to effectively use each channel and to perform appropriate control in accordance with the sound output situation. For example, in control to output BGM, a sound may be output to a channel assigned in advance regardless of the gaming state, and in control to output an alarm sound, a designated channel is searched without searching for an empty channel. You can output the sound directly to On the other hand, in the automatic channel system, as described above, it is possible to make the best use of free channels and to preferentially output sounds with high rendering effects.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume for each of the rendering effect sounds (channels), it is possible to emphasize and execute the rendering with high priority. In addition, it is possible to continue while lowering the volume without interrupting the effect being executed. At this time, it is also possible to return the volume to the original volume, if the low priority effect previously executed is continuing even after the high priority effect is finished. In addition, as described in the embodiment, by stopping the other effect and executing the specific effect alone, it is possible to make the effect of the specific effect stand out. In this manner, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect and improve the interest of the game.

  Here, a sound source IC used to play sound effects and BGM is also used to drive the vibration speaker 354 described above. By giving sound information to the vibration speaker 354 from the sound source IC, the effect operation unit 301 is vibrated.

  The provision of sound information from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354 is intended to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and therefore, the channel setting may be performed each time the effect operation unit 301 is operated. In order to avoid confusion with the sound information that actually emits sound, such as sound effects and BGM, the same channel is used as a fixed channel and assigned to a channel dedicated to the vibration speaker.

Further, as described above, the sound information of the sound ROM to be referred to is a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz, and changes (sweeps) 38 Hz to 42 Hz one cycle each in 1 Hz units, approximately 1 second, This is intermittently input for one second sweep, and is stored as sound information to be input again after one second in a predetermined storage area of the sound ROM.
Furthermore, by controlling the volume as described above, the volume is enhanced to emphasize the high-priority effects, but the above-mentioned 40 Hz ± 2 Hz as in the case of the volume also for the strength of the vibration. The amplitude of the sine wave is increased or decreased by increasing or decreasing the amplitude of the sine wave, and the vibration is gradually strengthened or weakened gradually, and replaced with the vibration intensity as in the case of adjusting the volume of the sound. It is also used.

  Although the sound source IC has been expressed as a single device having only that function, in the effect display control unit, VDP for controlling the display of the effect display device 1600 is a device in which the function equivalent to the sound source IC is incorporated. Even in such a case, if it is possible to control the same sound as described above, it is possible to control the vibration. In such a case, the sound ROM and the image ROM may be configured to be hybridised, or to store information to be used in advance as the same device. Also, the CPU for controlling these components and the control ROM may be configured by the same device.

  [15-2. Modified example of sound control in which fixed channel method and automatic channel method are mixed] In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are preset. In this modification, the number of channels for which the automatic channel scheme is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel scheme is set are variable.

[Example of production]
When the number of channels is made variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to output more than the number of channels to which the same kind of sound can be temporarily assigned. For example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of executing effects including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of parts (for example, 9 divisions), and different scenes are displayed on each of the divided screens. At that time, it is conceivable to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 199 is a view showing an example of a screen configuration of effects in a modification of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 199 is the advance notice effect in the latter half fluctuation after the reach occurrence.

In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine parts, and effects (multi-screen effects) for displaying different scenes on each screen are executed. Then, any one scene is selected, and an effect corresponding to the selected scene is performed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene are simultaneously output.
The selection of the scene may be made by lottery or may be made by the player.

  The gaming machine of this modification uses 32 channels in sound source control as in the embodiment described above. Also, assignment of default channels is similar to the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to output four types (eight channels) of BGM at the same time. However, in the multi-screen effect in this modification, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM simultaneously. So, in this modification, the channel for outputting BGM is reassigned, and arrangement | positioning of a channel is reorganized.

[15-2-2. Channel arrangement]
FIG. 200 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of reproduction channels in sound source control in a modification of the embodiment, (A) shows a default configuration, and (B) shows a configuration when multi-screen effect execution is performed. The default configuration of FIG. 200 (A) is similar to the configuration shown in FIG. 193 as described above.

  In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the arrangement of the channels shown in FIG. 200 (A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 148 (B). Specifically, a fixed channel system channel for outputting BGM is added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels adopting the automatic channel system assigned to the AUTO group 1 is reduced. This is because it is difficult for the player to recognize even if different preview effects are performed while the multi-screen effect is being performed.

  After the multi-screen effect start, while all the scenes are displayed, all the BGM corresponding to each scene is reproduced. At this time, if all the BGM is output with a normal volume, the volume is too high, so the volume is output with the volume being lower than normal. Then, when a scene is selected, a notice effect (latter half notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the BGM volume of the selected scene is set to the normal volume, and the reproduction of the other BGM is ended. . In addition, when the player selects a scene, for example, he selects the screen divided by the operation unit provided in the gaming machine, and selects the BGM of the selected scene until the scene is determined. The volume may be made larger than the BGM of a scene, or the volume of BGM of another scene may be made smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 201 is a timing chart showing an example of volume change of sound effects in the latter half of fluctuation of the modification of this embodiment, (A) is output timing of effect sound, (B) is volume change of each effect sound Indicates

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 201, at the timing when the execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation), the channel arrangement is from the default state (FIG. 200A) to the arrangement for multi-screen effect (FIG. It is changed to)). After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), a reach occurs and the second half fluctuation is started. After the start of the second half fluctuation, multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 199, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display areas, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

  When the multi-screen effect is started, BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change to the multi-screen effect arrangement (FIG. 200 (B)) is output. At this time, the volume V_2 smaller than the normal volume V_1 is output.

  Thereafter, when a scene for which rendering is to be continued is selected (time t13), the volume of BGM corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of the other BGM is stopped. In the example of effect shown in FIG. 201, the scene 5 is selected, and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to the scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and further, the second half notice _ 5 corresponding to the scene 5 is executed.

  It should be noted that, after the multi-screen effect is finished, the channels for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from the channels 10 and 11 to the channels 2 and 3, and the arrangement of the channels may be returned to the default. When continuing the output of BGM from the channels 10 and 11 as in this modification, the channel may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next fluctuation.

  Further, the change of the channel arrangement may be changed at the required timing. For example, in this modification, the arrangement of the channels may be changed immediately before the start of the execution of the multi-screen effect, or may be changed at the start of the second half fluctuation.

  Furthermore, instead of changing the arrangement of the channels according to the contents of the effect, the game state (for example, the effect mode such as a big hit state, a short time state, a background change, etc.) may be changed.

[effect]
By configuring as described above, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to “variable fixed ch” in FIG. 192 (F)) performing sound control in the fixed channel method and the automatic channel (sound control in the automatic channel method) It is possible to flexibly change the number (corresponding to “variable AUTOch”) of 192 (F) according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. This makes it possible to make more informing sound, BGM, or sound effects reproducible according to the situation, and, for example, to output more types of informing sound in a non-play situation In addition, it is possible to flexibly respond such as suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds and increasing the number of BGMs and sound effects to be reproduced on presentation.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, an embodiment in which the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the operation unit base 320 constituting the rendering operation unit 300 has been described. The means for generating vibration may be further attached. The modification is shown below.

  As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, an eccentric motor 332b is mounted on the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and is configured to be able to generate vibration by control by the peripheral control unit 1511. ing. The vibration generated by the eccentric motor 332 b is transmitted from the rotation base 332 to the rotation operation unit 302, and the vibration is transmitted to the player touching the rotation operation unit 302.

  Since the eccentric motor 332b is mounted on the rotation base 332, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, or the rotation drive unit 340 is driven by the control of the peripheral control unit 1511 and the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated. In this case, the eccentric motor 332 b is also configured to rotate in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 in the circumferential direction.

  Eccentric motor 332b is configured to be driven to transmit vibrations to the player based on the special lottery result drawn by reception of gaming ball B to first start opening 2002 and second start opening 2004. ing. For example, it is preferable to vibrate the eccentric motor 332b so as to suggest the special lottery result in a state where a pattern row consisting of a plurality of patterns is variably displayed as an effect image indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the special lottery result to the player who has felt the vibration of the eccentric motor 332b.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is provided with a rotation base initial position detection sensor, and is configured to detect whether the eccentric motor 332 b is positioned at the initial position. When the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 or the rotary drive unit 340 is driven by the peripheral control unit 1511 to rotate the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation unit 302 moves a predetermined amount from the initial position. It becomes.

  Therefore, at a predetermined timing, it is determined by the rotation base initial position detection sensor whether or not the rotation operation unit 302 is positioned at the initial position, and when the rotation operation unit 302 is not positioned at the initial position, return to the initial position. Control is performed. When the rotation operation unit 302 is positioned at the initial position, the eccentric motor 332 b is the closest side (hereinafter, the farthest position in the rotation operation unit 302 is 0 degrees, the right position is 90 degrees, and the nearest position 180 The position of the left side is 270 degrees, and the positions of the rotation operation unit 302 and the eccentric motor 332 b will be described.

  In addition, as a predetermined timing for returning the rotation operation unit 302 to the initial position, after the pattern row consisting of a plurality of patterns stops fluctuating display as a presentation image suggesting a special lottery result in the presentation display device 1600, the next fluctuation The timing before the display is started, the timing when the advantageous gaming state according to the special lottery result is occurring, the pattern row consisting of a plurality of patterns as the effect image that suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 After stopping, the reception of the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 does not occur, and the timing at which the demonstration screen is displayed, the ball launcher 540 for a predetermined time (specifically, 5 minutes) The timing at which it is determined that the game ball B is not driven by the player and it is determined that the player is not in the non-playing state, for example. Preferred. With such a configuration, the rotation operation unit 302 returns to the initial position at a predetermined timing, and the player who puts his hand on the front side of the rotation operation unit 302 or the player who presses the pressing operation unit 303 On the other hand, it is possible to efficiently transmit the vibration transmitted from the eccentric motor 332b.

  In addition, in order to control the position of the rotation operation unit 302 so that the eccentric motor 332b is positioned at the initial position, even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 with the hand placed on the rotation operation unit 302, Since the eccentric motor 332b also moves according to the movement of the hand of the person, it is possible to efficiently transmit the vibration to the palm of the player.

  Although an example of performing control to return the rotation operation unit 302 to the initial position is shown, when performing control to return to the initial position, the player is notified that control to return to the initial position is performed. Is desirable. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays that the control for returning to the initial position is displayed, or the body frame speaker 622 outputs a voice that the control for returning to the initial position is performed. It should be configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misunderstands that the control for returning the rotation operation unit 302 to the initial position is any effect relating to the special lottery result.

  Although the example which performs control which returns the rotation operation part 302 to an initial position was shown, you may comprise so that visual recognition that the rotation operation part 302 exists in an initial position is possible. For example, a mark indicating that the rotation operation unit 302 is on the near side may be provided on the near side (the position of 180 degrees) of the rotation operation unit 302 when the rotation operation unit 302 is positioned at the initial position. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize whether control to return the rotation operation unit 302 to the initial position is appropriately performed without performing work such as disassembly.

  In addition, when the rotation operation unit 302 is positioned at the initial position, the decoration of the decoration portion 335b provided on the near side (the position of 180 degrees) of the rotation operation portion 302 is the decoration of the decoration portion 335b provided on the other region. It may be different. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not control for returning the rotation operation unit 302 to the initial position is appropriately performed without performing work such as disassembly. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player is given a sense of aesthetic incongruity.

  In the embodiment, the eccentric motor 332b is located on the near side (the position of 180 degrees) when the control for returning the rotation operation unit 302 to the initial position is performed. However, the eccentric motor 332b is on the left side (the position of 270 degrees). The initial position of the rotation operation unit 302 may be set so as to be positioned at a predetermined position on the near side (position of 180 degrees). For example, the initial position of the rotation operation unit 302 is set such that the eccentric motor 332b is positioned on the near side (position of 180 degrees), or the rotation operation is performed such that the eccentric motor 332b is positioned on the left front side (position of 225 degrees). The initial position of the part 302 may be set, or the initial position of the rotation operation part 302 may be set such that the eccentric motor 332 b is located on the left side (position of 270 degrees). With such a configuration, the vibration generated by the eccentric motor 332 b is efficiently transmitted to the player who operates the handle 182 with the right hand and operates the rotation operation unit 302 with the left hand. Is possible.

  The rotation base initial position detection sensor detects whether or not the rotation operation unit 302 exists at the initial position, and controls the rotation drive unit 340 by the peripheral control unit 1511 to return the rotation operation unit 302 to the initial position. Although the embodiment has been shown, the rotational operation unit 302 may be configured to return to the initial position by a physical structure without providing the rotational drive unit 340. For example, a torsion spring is attached to the shaft of the operation ring transmission gear 350 to limit the rotation range of the operation ring transmission gear 350 to a predetermined range, and even if the operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotated, the torsion spring is restored. The rotation operation unit 302 may return to the initial position by force. With such a configuration, the player holds the rotary operation unit 302 and rotates it by a predetermined angle, and then the player releases the rotary operation unit 302, or the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the rotary drive unit 340. When the control of the rotary drive unit 340 by the peripheral control unit 1511 is finished after the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated, the rotational force of the torsion spring returns the rotary operation unit 302 to the initial position, and the eccentric motor 332b will be positioned on the near side.

  Although an embodiment in which the rotation operation unit 302 is returned to the initial position by a physical structure using a torsion spring without providing the rotation drive unit 340 has been described, the control by the rotation drive unit 340 and the physical using a torsion spring The rotation operation unit 302 may be configured to return to the initial position by both of the above structures.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the rotation base 332 so as to move with a play of several degrees in the rotation direction. With such a configuration, when vibration is generated by the eccentric motor 332 b mounted on the rotation base 332, the rotation operation unit 302 can be moved in small increments in the rotational direction, and vibration It becomes possible to enhance the rendering effect by the occurrence.

  Although the embodiment in which the eccentric motor 332b is mounted on the rotation base 332 is shown, the eccentric motor 332b may be configured to be mounted on the inner surface of the member directly touched by the player. Specifically, the eccentric motor 332 b may be directly attached to the inner surface of the ring outer upper cover 335. Although the eccentric motor 332 b is directly attached to the inner surface of the ring outer upper cover 335, the eccentric motor 332 b may be directly attached to the inner surface of the ring outer lower cover 336 or the inner ring cover 337. With such a configuration, it is possible to more efficiently transmit the vibration generated by the eccentric motor 332 b to the player.

  In addition to the point which provides the vibration speaker 354 in the bottom wall of the main-body part 321, the embodiment which provides the eccentric motor 332b in the rotation operation part 302 was shown. With such a configuration, it is possible to transmit the vibration to the player in different vibration modes. On the other hand, the vibration speaker 354 provided on the bottom wall of the main body 321 may be eliminated, and vibration may be generated in the effect operation unit 300 only by the eccentric motor 332 b provided in the effect operation ring 330.

  A harness for supplying power to the eccentric motor 332 b is drawn downward from the rotation base 332, and is connected to the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 via a through hole 331 c provided in the ring attachment base 331. In addition, the eccentric motor 332b is formed of a metal case on the outside, but an earth wire is drawn from the metal case, and the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is provided through the through hole 331c as in the harness. It is connected to the. In such a configuration, the rotatable angle of the rotation operation unit 302 is limited to a predetermined range (for example, a range of about 20 to 30 degrees from the initial position to the left and right, respectively) by the length of the harness or the ground wire. The Rukoto.

  Although the embodiment in which the eccentric motor 332 b and the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are electrically connected by the harness and the ground wire has been shown, electricity for exchanging signals and currents between the moving side and the fixed side like a slip ring A mechanism may be used to electrically connect the eccentric motor 332b provided on the moving side with the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided on the fixed side. In such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the limitation of the rotatable angle of the rotation operation unit 302.

  As shown in FIG. 55, a plurality of (specifically, eighteen) decorative portions 335 b are attached to the ring outer upper cover 335. Specifically, a plurality of (specifically, eighteen) decorative portions 335b are inserted from above in a circumferential shape in a penetrating portion provided to penetrate the outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335. ing. Further, the decorative portion 335b is fixed to a penetrating portion provided in the outer upper surface portion 335a by a locking claw provided in the decorative portion 335b. The decorative portion 335 b is formed of a synthetic resin, and the entire surface is plated with a conductive metal. An earth wire is connected to the decorative portion 335b inside the ring outer upper cover 335, and this earth wire is drawn out from the rotation base 332 and finally through a through hole 331c provided in the ring attachment base 331. Is screwed to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is provided on the main body frame base unit 500. It is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a at 510. The main body frame base unit 500 includes a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530, and a ground wire 5592 connected to the connector CN14 of the ground circuit board 559 is screwed at a predetermined position of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530. . The door frame reinforcing unit 110, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122, the body frame upper hinge member 510, and the body frame reinforcing frame 530 are each made of metal, and the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame The reinforcing frame 530 is electrically connected by an earth wire. With such a configuration, the earth wire provided on the inside of the ring outer upper cover 335 from the decorative portion 335b attached to the surface of the rotation operation portion 302 and plated on the surface, the door frame reinforcement Through the unit 110, it is possible to finally remove the static electricity that the player has on the ground circuit board 559. The ground line from the decorative portion 335b may also be electrically connected using an electrical mechanism that exchanges signals and current between the moving side and the fixed side like a slip ring.

  Although the locking claw is provided in the decorative portion 335b and the decorative portion 335b is inserted from above into the penetrating portion provided to penetrate the outer upper surface portion 335a, the decorative portion 335b is fixed. Instead of fixing with the claws, the decorative portion 335b may be screwed to the ring outer upper cover 335 from the inside with a metal screw to fix the decorative portion 335b. When screwing is performed, it may be configured to be tightened together with an earth wire connected to the door frame reinforcing unit 110.

  Although the embodiment in which the decorative portion 335b is formed of a synthetic resin and the entire surface is plated is not shown, the site to be plated does not have to be the entire surface of the decorative portion 335b. The location where the player touches when the decorative portion 335b is inserted into the through portion provided in the outer upper surface portion 335a, the location to which the ground wire is connected inside the ring outer upper cover 335, and those locations are electrically What is necessary is just to carry out the plating process with the location to connect. Although the embodiment in which the decorative portion 335b is formed of a synthetic resin is shown, the entire decorative portion 335b may be formed of a conductive metal. With such a configuration, it is possible to electrically connect the portion touched by the player with the portion connected to the ground wire without performing plating on the entire surface of the decorative portion 335b. It becomes possible to simplify.

  A plurality of (specifically, eighteen) fixing portions 335b are fixed to the outer upper surface portion 335a, and one of the decorative portions 335b is configured to be connected to a ground wire. . In this case, in a predetermined decorative portion 335b provided in the range from the near side (position of 180 degrees) to the left side (position of 270 degrees) when the eccentric motor 332b is in the initial position, the ground wire is configured to be drawn out There is. With such a configuration, the decorative portion 335b for drawing out the ground wire is present at a position where the player can easily contact, so that static electricity that the player has can be removed.

  Although an embodiment configured to connect the ground wire to the decorative portion 335 b of FIG. 1 is illustrated, the ground wire is connected to the plurality of decorative portions 335 b, each ground wire is drawn out from the rotation base 332, and the ring attachment base 331 It may be configured to be connected to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 through the through holes 331 c provided in the. Alternatively, on the inner side of the outer upper surface portion 335a, a part of the ground wire is omitted by electrically connecting the decorative portion 335b with a wire, and the decorative portion 335b and the door frame reinforcing unit are eliminated by at least one ground wire. It may be configured to electrically connect with 110. The decorative portion 335b electrically connected is a position (270 degrees) from the front side (180 degrees) of the rotary operation unit 302 when the eccentric motor 332b is positioned at the initial position (for example, 180 degrees). A plurality of (specifically, six) decorative portions 335b provided in may be the target, or all (specifically, eighteen) decorative portions 335b provided in the rotation operation portion 302 may be the target. With such a configuration, even if the player touches any part of the rotation operation unit 302, it is possible to remove the static electricity that the player has.

  Although an embodiment is shown in which the decorative portion 335b is attached from the outside to the through portion provided in the outer upper surface portion 335a, the decorative portion 335b is exposed from the through portion provided in the outer upper surface portion 335a. In the penetration part provided in the outer upper surface part 335a, you may attach so that the decoration part 335b may be penetrated toward an outer side from inner side. Further, the plurality of decorative portions 335b are integrally formed, and the decorative portions 335b are attached from the inside of the outer upper surface portion 335a so that each of the plurality of decorative portions 335b is exposed in the plurality of penetrating portions. It is also good. In addition, it is preferable to perform plating on the entire surface of the plurality of integrally formed decorative portions 335b. Alternatively, the plurality of decorative portions 335 b integrally formed with the door frame reinforcing unit 110 may be electrically connected by one ground wire. As described above, when the plurality of decorative portions 335 b are integrally configured, and the entire surface is plated, any of the plurality of decorative portions 335 b located at separated positions is selected. When the player touches 335 b, it is possible to remove static electricity that the player has.

  Although an embodiment in which the decorative portion 335b and the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are electrically connected directly by the ground wire is shown, the decorative portion 335b and the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are partially connected via other members. It may be electrically connected. For example, a reinforcing metal plate for reinforcing the rotation operation portion 302 is disposed in the rotation operation portion 302, and the decorative portion 335b and the door frame reinforcement unit 110 are electrically connected via the metal plate. You may

  Although the embodiment in which the eccentric motor 332 b is mounted on the rotation base 332 has been shown, the eccentric motor 332 b may be configured to be mounted on the ring mounting base 331. Eccentric motor 332b is a predetermined position (for example, a position of 180 degrees, a position of 225 degrees, a position of 270 degrees) on the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 from the near side (position of 180 degrees) to the left side (position of 270 degrees). It is good to attach to at least one place of With such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently transmit the vibration to the player who operates the pressing operation unit 303 or plays a game while putting his hand on the rendering operation unit 300. . In addition, even when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the vibration felt by the player is weakened.

  The harness from the eccentric motor 332 b and the ground wire are connected to the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, and electrically connected to the circuit ground of the circuit on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 via a capacitor, a coil, and the like. Further, the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is configured to be electrically connected to the operation portion relay substrate 392 via a harness and a ground line. The operation unit relay board 392 has a role of relaying a signal from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511, and a drive circuit for driving the eccentric motor 332 b by the signal from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511. And LEDs are input to a control circuit that flashes on and off, and is relayed and sent from the operation unit relay board 392 to drive and control the eccentric motor 332 b and emit light of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decoration operation ring decoration board 352 Decoration is done. On the other hand, the ground line drawn from the operation unit relay board 392 is connected to the plate unit relay board 214. The ground wire drawn from the plate unit relay substrate 214 is connected to the power supply substrate 630 and finally to the connector CN15 of the ground circuit substrate 559 by the ground wire 5593. With such a configuration, even if electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge, for example, tries to jump into the eccentric motor 332b, it is possible to remove the noise.

  Although the embodiment in which the ground wire drawn out from the decorative portion 335b provided in the rendering operation unit 300 is finally connected to the ground circuit board 559 through the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is shown, When attaching to the unit 250, the grounding wire on the side of the rendering operation unit 300 and the reinforcing sheet metal provided on the side of the dish decoration unit 250 may be electrically connected. For example, the earth wire drawn from the decorative portion 335b may be screwed together with a metal plate spring at a predetermined location of the rendering operation unit 300, and the plate decoration unit 250 may be provided with a reinforcing sheet metal for reinforcing the plate decoration unit 250. When the operation unit 300 is attached to the dish decoration unit 250, the metal plate spring provided in the effect operation unit 300 is electrically contacted with the reinforcing sheet metal provided in the dish decoration unit 250. Alternatively, the reinforcing sheet metal provided on the plate decoration unit 250 may be connected to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 by an earth wire. With such a configuration, it is possible to electrically connect the ground wire only by attaching the effect operation unit 300 to the dish decoration unit 250.

  In the embodiment, the decorative portion 335b provided in the rendering operation unit 300 is connected to the ground circuit board 559 through the earth wire or the like, but the entire upper plate 201 is formed of conductive resin and is pulled out from the upper plate 201. The ground wire to be connected may be connected to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and finally to the ground circuit board 559 by the ground wire 5592. Although the example which forms the whole upper dish 201 with conductive resin was shown, only the bottom wall part of upper dish 201 is formed with conductive resin, and the rising wall surrounding the circumference of upper dish 201 is formed with nonconductive resin. May be Further, instead of the conductive resin, the whole or the bottom wall of the upper plate 201 may be formed of a conductive metal part. With such a configuration, it is possible to discharge the static electricity accumulated in the gaming ball or the static electricity that the player has to the ground circuit board 559 via the upper tray 201. Although the example which makes the upper plate 201 conductive is shown, the same configuration as the upper plate 201 may be adopted for the lower plate 202 as well.

  FIG. 52 shows an embodiment in which the substrate box 391 for housing the operation unit relay board 392 inside is mounted at the rear of the operation unit base 320, but the substrate box 391 is on the side (right or left) of the operation unit base 320. It may be configured to be mounted in a state of being straightened. In this case, the opening for connector connection provided in the substrate box 391 may be provided so as not to face the operation unit base 320 side. For example, when the substrate box 391 is mounted on the right side of the operation unit base 320 in an upright state, it may be attached so that the connector connection opening provided in the substrate box 391 faces the right. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the size of the gaming machine 1 from increasing in the front-rear direction. In addition, even if the liquid has entered the rendering operation unit 300 from above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the liquid flowing down to the substrate box 391.

  FIG. 52 shows an embodiment in which the substrate box 391 for housing the operation unit relay board 392 inside is attached to the rear of the operation unit base 320, but connector connection is made on the side (right or left) of the operation unit base 320 Alternatively, the substrate box 391 may be mounted in a horizontal state such that the opening portion of the substrate box faces upward. Further, in the opening for connector connection, it is preferable to provide a standing wall which is erected upward over the entire circumference of the opening. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from entering the substrate box 391 from the front-rear direction or the left-right direction.

  In addition, when providing the opening for connector connection in the substrate box 391 that has become horizontal as described above, the opening may be provided in a portion away from the operation unit base 320 on the upper surface of the substrate box 391. Good. For example, when the substrate box 391 is mounted horizontally on the right side of the operation unit base 320, the opening for connector connection may be provided at a position on the right side of the center of the upper surface of the substrate box 391. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from entering the substrate box 391.

  FIG. 52 shows an example in which the operation unit relay substrate 392 is accommodated in the box-shaped substrate box 391 and disposed at the rear of the operation unit base 320 or the like, but the operation unit relay substrate 392 is not accommodated in the substrate box 391 It is also good. For example, it is preferable to provide a substrate attachment portion having a shape in which the first surface of the rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 391 is removed to be open. In this case, the board attachment portion has a shape in which four upright walls are erected from the four sides of the surface facing the removed surface, and the operation unit relay substrate 392 is attached to the surface facing the removed surface. If such a board attachment portion is provided in the rendering operation unit 300, and the mounting surface of the connector in the operation portion relay board 392 is positioned on the open surface, the operation portion relay board 392 is attached to the board attachment portion. Good. With such a configuration, the non-mounting surface of the connector in the operation unit relay board 392 and the side surface of the operation unit relay board 392 are covered by the board attachment portion, and the liquid flows down to the operation unit relay board 392 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of In addition, with respect to the connector mounting surface, it becomes possible to easily attach and remove the wiring with respect to the connector. In addition, although the example which becomes a shape where a board attachment part is a rectangular shape and four standing walls are erected was shown, about a board attaching part, what is necessary is just a shape which can attach operation part relay board 392, and also an standing wall A plurality of surfaces may be erected so as to surround the periphery of the operation unit relay board 392. The substrate attachment portion may be separate from the operation unit base 320 as in the substrate box 391 or may be integrally formed with the operation unit base 320.

  Further, the substrate attachment portion may be provided such that the surface in the open state is located on the opposite side of the operation unit base 320. For example, in the case where the board attachment portion is attached to the right side of the operation unit base 320 in a upright state, it may be attached such that the open surface faces the right side. With such a configuration, the non-mounting surface of the connector in the operation unit relay board 392 and the side surface of the operation unit relay board 392 are covered by the board attachment portion, and the liquid flows down to the operation unit relay board 392 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of Although the substrate mounting portion is mounted on the right side of the operation portion base 320 in the illustrated example, the substrate mounting portion may be mounted on the left side, the front side, the rear side, or the lower side of the operation portion base 320.

  In addition, the substrate mounting portion may be provided in a horizontal state such that the open surface faces upward. In this case, it is desirable that the position at which the substrate mounting portion is provided be a position separated horizontally from the operation portion base 320. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent occurrence of a situation where the board attachment portion covering the side surface of the operation unit relay board 392 becomes a standing wall and liquid flows down to the operation unit relay board 392 from front to back and from the left and right. Is possible.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is configured to be electrically connected to the operation portion relay substrate 392 via a harness and a ground wire (hereinafter collectively referred to as “wiring”), but in the upper side When the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 provided is simply connected to the operation unit relay substrate 392 provided below, when the liquid enters the effect operation unit 300 from above, the liquid flows along the wiring. , May flow into the operation unit relay board 392. Therefore, when connecting a wire to the operation unit relay board 392, it is desirable to provide a structure that prevents the liquid from entering the operation unit relay board 392 along the wire.

  For example, a wire is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the wire is connected to the operation unit relay substrate 392 after the wiring from the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 passes a position lower than the lower end of the operation unit relay substrate 392 It is good. With this configuration, the operation unit relay board 392 is located at a position higher than the lowermost position of the wiring, so that the liquid is prevented from entering the operation unit relay board 392 along the wiring. It is possible to

  In addition, after the wiring is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the wiring from the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 points downward, the wiring is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to once go upward, and the operation is performed so as to turn downward again. After the wiring is attached to the part base 320, the wiring may be connected to the operation part relay board 392. At this time, it may be configured to be separated in the horizontal direction so that the position where the wiring is changed in the upward direction and the position of the operation unit relay board 392 do not overlap in plan view. With such a configuration, even if the liquid travels through the wiring, the liquid falls downward at a position where the wiring changes direction so that the wiring is directed upward, and it is difficult for the liquid to be transmitted to the wiring thereafter. It is possible to prevent the liquid from entering the operation unit relay board 392 through the wiring. In addition, when it is set as such a structure, it becomes possible to attach the operation part relay board 392 in the position lower than the lowest position of wiring. Also, instead of attaching the wiring to the operation unit base 320 so as to go upward once, the wiring may be attached in the horizontal direction. Even in such a configuration, it is difficult for the liquid to be transmitted first in the portion where the wiring is in the horizontal direction, and it is possible to prevent the liquid from entering the operation unit relay board 392 along the wiring.

  As described above, in the route of the wiring for electrically connecting the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the operation unit relay substrate 392, the liquid traveling along the wiring is provided by providing a portion which is convex downward at at least one point. It is possible to suppress the movement of

  Moreover, when attaching the wiring which goes downward to the operation part base 320, it is good to attach using a binding band. With such a configuration, it is possible to inhibit the downward movement of the liquid transmitted through the wire by the binding band wound in the circumferential direction of the wire.

  An example of suppressing the movement of liquid by providing a downwardly convex portion or using a binding band in the route of the wiring electrically connecting the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the operation unit relay substrate 392 However, it is assumed that the liquid falls in the lower part of the wiring, in the part which is convex downward and in the part using the binding band. Therefore, the downward convex portion of the wiring and the portion using the binding band are disposed such that the unit lower cover 311 is positioned directly below, and the downward convex portion of the wiring and the portion using the binding band In the case where the liquid falls from the above, the liquid may fall directly to the unit lower cover 311. Although an embodiment in which the liquid falls directly to the unit lower cover 311 is shown, it is good if the liquid does not directly fall on an item that can be affected by the liquid, such as an electric component such as a motor or LED provided in the rendering unit 300, wiring, For example, a wire may be attached to the bottom wall 321a of the main body 321 so that the liquid falls directly.

  In the path of the wiring that electrically connects the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the operation unit relay substrate 392, the movement of the liquid is suppressed by providing a downwardly convex portion or using a binding band. Although a form is shown, such a method may be used elsewhere where liquid ingress is envisaged. For example, such a configuration is adopted in a harness that connects the second rotation detection sensor 348 and the operation unit relay board 392, or in a harness or ground wire that connects the operation unit relay board 392 and the plate unit relay board 214. May be

  Also, buffer members may be disposed so that the shock can be transmitted gently at any position between the operation unit relay board 392 and the vibration speaker 354 or between the operation unit relay board 392 and the eccentric motor 332 b. For example, when attaching the substrate box 391 to the rear of the operation unit base 320, the substrate box 391 may be attached to the operation unit base 320 via an elastic member made of synthetic rubber. With such a configuration, the vibration from the vibration speaker 354 or the eccentric motor 332 b is elastically transmitted to the operation unit relay board 392 housed in the substrate box 391, and is mounted on the operation unit relay board 392. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where a crack occurs due to damage to the electrical or electronic component or stress concentration on the solder portion for attaching the electrical or electronic component to the operation unit relay board 392.

  Further, although the operation unit relay board 392 relays a signal from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511, a microcomputer or a ROM is mounted on the operation unit relay board 392 and transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 The vibration speaker 354 provided in the rendering operation unit 300, the eccentric motor 322b, and the LED mounted on the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 may be controlled based on the command.

  The technical matters in any of the embodiments may be applied to the other embodiments as examples.

  Although the embodiment shows the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effects as the above-described effects can be obtained.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 main frame 5 game board 5a game area 10 outer frame left assembly 11 outer frame left member 11 a recessed portion 11 b bulging portion 11 c hollow portion 12 upper left connecting member 12 a horizontal fixed portion 12 b upper fixed horizontally Part 12c Lower horizontal fixed part 13 Lower left connecting member 13a Horizontal fixed part 13b Upper horizontal fixed part 13c Lower horizontal fixed part 13d Contact part 20 Outer frame right assembly 21 Outer frame right member 21 outer frame right member 21a recessed part 21b bulging part 21c hollow part 22 upper right Connecting member 22a horizontal fixing portion 22b upper horizontal fixing portion 22c lower horizontal fixing portion 23 lower right connecting member 23a horizontal fixing portion 23b upper horizontal fixing portion 23c lower horizontal fixing portion 23d abutting portion 24 upper hooking member 24a mounting portion 24b hooking piece Part 25 Lower hook member 25a Mounting part 25b Locking piece part 25c Insertion port 30 Outer frame upper member 30a Notched part 30b Mounting stepped part 40 Outer frame lower assembly 40a curtain plate internal space 41 outer frame lower member 41a notch 41b recessed portion 42 curtain plate front member 42a opening portion 43 curtain plate rear member 43a connection cylindrical portion 43b rib 44 ball meshing prevention mechanism 44a placement portion 44b first outlet 44c second Discharge port 44d Vertical wall portion 44e Upper end projecting portion 45 Guide member 50 Outer frame upper hinge assembly 51 Outer frame upper hinge member 51a Upper fixing portion 51b Forward extension portion 51c Bearing groove 51d Horizontal fixing portion 51e Edge wall 52 Locking member 52a Lock body 52b Operation piece 52c Elastic part 52d Mounting hole 53 Mounting screw 60 Outer frame lower hinge member 60a Horizontal part 60b Upside 60c Outer frame lower hinge pin 60d Discharge hole

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 door frame base unit 101 door frame base 101a door window 101b handle mounting seat 101c insertion recessed part 101d cylinder insertion hole 101e ball feeding opening 101f ball ball passing opening for lower plate 101g ball passing hole for upper plate 101h glass unit mounting portion 101i slit 101j through hole 102 handle mounting portion 102a tube portion 102b flange portion 102c protrusion 102d reinforcing rib 103 speaker duct 103a cable holder 104 door frame main relay board 105 door frame sub relay board 106 handle rear relay board 107 door frame relay board cover 108 door Frame after relay board cover 109 Cable cover 100 Door frame base unit 110 Door frame reinforcement unit 111 Left reinforcement frame 112 Right reinforcement frame 113 Upper reinforcement frame 114 Intermediate reinforcement frame 114a Notched part 114b penetrating part 115 cylinder mounting frame 116 hooking member 120 door frame hinge assembly 121 hinge bracket 121a mounting piece 121b projecting piece 122 door frame upper hinge pin 123 wedge member 124 lock spring 125 door frame lower hinge member 125a mounting piece 125b projecting piece 126 Door frame lower hinge pin

130 cylinder lock 131 cylinder body 132 key hole 133 rotation transmission member

140 ball feeding unit 141 front cover 141a entrance 141b ball opening 141c slit 141e ball sending opening 142 back cover 142a ball hitting supply port 142b mounting recess 143 ball pulling member 143a partition 143b pivot collar 143c actuating rod 143d weight 144 Ball feed member 144a Blocking portion 144b Ball holding portion 144c Head portion 145 Ball feed solenoid 146 Ball feed operation rod 146a Iron plate 147 Ball feed crank 147a Engaging portion 147b Shaft portion 147c Transmission portion 148 Tamper proof member 148a Upper piece 148b lower part 148c inclined part

150 fal cover unit 150a through ball passage 150b full ball socket 150c fal ball socket 150d ball outlet 150e storage passage 150f door opening and closing contact portion

151 unit main body 152 lid member 153 movable piece 154 full tank detection sensor 155 spring

160 Glass Unit 161a Mounting Piece 161b Locking Piece 161 Glass Frame 162 Glass Plate 163 Glass Unit Mounting Member 163b Protrusion 163a Base

170 crime prevention cover 171 main part 172 rear projection 173 locking piece

180 handle unit 181 handle base 181a base 181b front end 181c groove part 182 handle 182a first protrusion 182b second protrusion 182c third protrusion 182d fourth protrusion 182e slit 182f locking protrusion 183 cover pedestal 183a mounting boss 184 handle decorative substrate 185 handle Cover 186 Inner base 187 Shaft member 187a Drive gear portion 188 Transmission gear 189 Handle rotation detection sensor 189a Detection shaft 190 Handle return spring 191 Auxiliary spring 192 Handle touch sensor 193 One-shot button 194 One-shot button operation sensor

200 plate unit 201 upper plate 201a induction passage portion 201b ground bracket 202 lower plate 202a lower plate ball extraction hole 210 plate base unit 211 plate unit base 211a upper plate ball supply port 211b speaker opening 211c lower plate ball supply port 211d notch 211e upper plate Ball feed port 211f Mounting projection 211g Slider insertion port 211h Handle insertion port 211i Cylinder insertion port 211a Upper flat ball supply port

212 upper bowl main body 212a effect operation unit attachment portion 213 installation base 213a insertion opening 213b through hole 214 bowl unit relay board 220 ball rental operation unit 221 base portion 222 upper bowl ball release button 223 ball rental operation base 224 ball rental button 225 return button 230 Top ball ball extraction unit 231 Front base 232 Front slider 240 Top ball and ball extraction unit 241 Rear base 241a Ball socket 241b Ball feed and guide path 241c Ball extraction and guide path 242 Top disc ball extraction slider 242a Operation receiver 242b Operation Transmission part 243 Spring 244 Back cover 250 Dish decoration unit 251 Lower dish main body 252 Dish unit main body 252a Upper side bulging part 252b Lower front decoration part 252c Bottom plate part 252d Lower dish opening 252e Front notch 252f Bottom notch 252g Rear insertion hole 252h Cylinder insertion opening 252i Effect operation unit mounting part 260 Lower ball ball extraction unit 261 Lower ball ball extraction base 262 Slider 263 Lower ball ball extraction button 264 Spring 265 Lower ball ball cover 266 Holding mechanism 270 Pan top left decoration unit 271 Dish upper left decorative body 272 Dish upper left reflector 273 Dish upper left decorative substrate 275 Dish upper right decoration unit 276 Dish upper right decoration 277 Dish upper right reflector 278 Dish upper right decoration substrate 280 Dish lower left decoration unit 281 Dish lower left decoration 282 Dish lower left reflector 283 Dish lower left decoration Substrate 285 Dish lower right decoration unit 286 Dish lower right decoration 287 Dish lower right reflector 288 Dish lower right decoration board

300 effect operation unit 301 effect operation unit 302 rotation operation unit 303 pressing operation unit 303a center pressing operation unit 303b outer periphery pressing operation unit 310 effect operation unit cover unit 311 unit lower cover 311a drainage hole 312 unit front cover 312a dish center upper decoration body 312b Bottom center decoration 313 Bottom center reflector 314 Bottom center upper decoration substrate 315 Bottom center lower reflector 316 Bottom center lower decoration substrate 320 Operation base 321 Body 321a Bottom wall 321b Through hole 322 Flange 323 leg 324 upper mounting portion 325 gear bearing portion 325 gear bearing portion 330 effect operation ring 331 ring mounting base 331a mounting portion 331b boss portion 331c through hole 332 rotation base 332a ring gear 332b eccentric motor 333 bush 3 4 Ring retaining member 335 Ring outer upper cover 335a Outer upper surface portion 335b Decorative portion 335c Outer upper cover mounting portion 336 Ring outer lower cover portion 336a Outer lower surface portion 336b Outer lower cover mounting portion 337 Inner ring cover 337a Inner surface portion 337b Tube surface Part 337c Inner cover mounting part 340 Rotary drive unit 341 Rotary drive base 342 Operation ring drive motor 343 Drive gear 344 Transmission gear 344a First gear 344b Second gear 345 Transmission detection gear member 345a Gear part 345b Detection piece 346 Gear cover 347 First Rotation detection sensor 348 Second rotation detection sensor 349 Sensor cover 350a Ring side gear portion 350b Drive side gear portion 351 Gear mounting member 352 Effect operation ring decoration substrate 352a Front decoration substrate 352b Rear decoration substrate 352 Staging operation unit mounting unit 353 decorative board cover 353a before the board cover 354 vibration speaker

360 production operation button unit 361 button unit base 361a base body 361b leg 362 guide shaft 363 upper base 364 elevator base 364a guide hole 364b central hole 364c vertical wall portion 364d guide pin 365 elevator spring 366 central shaft 367 operation button elevator drive motor 367a operation Button lifting drive motor terminal 368 Lifting drive gear 369 Driven gear 370 Lifting cam drive gear member 370a Gear portion 370b Coupling portion 370c Lifting detection piece 371 Lifting cam member 371a Cam portion 371b First cam 371c Locking portion 371d Second cam 371e third Cam 371f Connected part 372 Gear cover 373 Central button body 373a Tube part 373b Bottom part 373c Guide hole 373d Center port 373e Pressure detection piece 37 3f guide boss 374 button spring 375 central button cover 375a top plate 375b peripheral wall 376 central button decorative substrate 377 peripheral button decorative substrate 378 peripheral substrate cover 378a substrate 378b cylindrical portion 379 peripheral decorative lens 380 peripheral button cover 380a cylindrical portion 380b annular Part 381 Pressure detection sensor 382 Elevation detection sensor 390 Operation part relay board unit 391 Board box 391a Motor cover part 391b Board box opening 391c Waterproof wall 392 Operation part relay board 392a Operation part relay board connector part 393 Board box cover 393a Board box cover Liquid guiding part

400 door frame left side unit 401 door frame left side base 402 frame left side decorative substrate 403 left side reflector 404 door frame left side decorative body 402 a left side upper decorative substrate 402 b left side lower decorative substrate 403 a through hole 410 door frame right side unit 410a side window 410b side window interior decoration 411 door frame right side base 412 side window interior decoration member 412a connection base 413 side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 414 internal reflector 415 right side reflector 415a through hole 416 door frame right side outer panel 416a Through-opening 417 door frame right side inner panel 417a through-opening 418 door frame right side decorative substrate 418a right side upper decorative substrate 418b right side lower decorative substrate 419 door frame right side decorative body

450 door frame top unit 451 door frame top base 451a main body 451b front projection 452 top upper cover 452a opening 453 door frame top decorative body 454 door frame top bottom plate 454a reinforcing rib 454b central speaker opening 454c side speaker opening 455 door frame top Center decoration board 456 door frame top left decoration board 457 door frame top right decoration board 458 top center reflector 459 top left reflector 460 top right reflector 461 center speaker box 462 top center speaker 463 speaker bracket 464 top side speaker 465 top lower cover 466 lower Cover frame 467 door frame top relay board 468 door frame top top plate

500 body frame base unit 501 body frame base 501a base body 501b game board insertion slot 501c game board placement section 501d game board regulation section 501e launch device mounting section 501f cylinder insertion port 501g speaker opening 501h cable mounting recess 501i cable insertion port 501j Rear extension part 501k Upper hinge attachment part 501l Lower hinge attachment part

502 connection cable guide member 502 connection cable guide member 502a guide main body 502b frame piece 502c attachment shaft 502d through hole 503 connection cable 504 tie band 505 game board lock member 510 main frame upper hinge member 520 main frame lower hinge assembly 521 lower hinge fifth hinge One body 521a Outer frame lower hinge hole 522 Lower hinge second body 522a Door frame lower hinge hole 522b Regulating piece 530 Body frame reinforcing frame 531 Left position regulating member 540 Sphere launcher 541 Launch base 542 Launch solenoid 543 Strike ball 544 Launch Rail 550 Dispensing base unit 551 Dispensing base 551a Top plate 551b Left plate 551c Right plate 551d Back plate upper 551e Back plate left 551f Inner plate 551g Bottom plate 551h Connecting plate 551i Back cover 551i Mounting portion 551j Storage case portion 552 Ball tank 552a Mounting portion 552b Mounting portion 552c Mounting portion 552d Mounting portion 552e Mounting portion 553 Tank rail 554 First rail cover 555 Second rail cover 556 Ball straightening member 557 Ball stopper 558 External terminal plate 558a Case part 559 Ground circuit board 560 Dispensing unit 570 Ball guiding unit 570a Induction passage 571 Induction unit base 572 Induction passage front cover 573 Movable piece member 574 Ball breakage detection sensor 580 Dispensing device 580a Dispensing passage 580b Ball extracting passage 581 Dispensing device body 581a Body side guide wall 582 Dispensing device rear lid 582a Back lid side guide wall 583 Dispensing device front lid 584 Dispensing motor 585 Drive gear 586 First transmission gear 587 Second transmission gear 588 Dispensing gear member 5 8a payout gear 588b detecting piece 589 payout blade 589a blade pieces 589b ball housing portion 590 blade rotation detecting sensor 591 payout sensor 592 ball 抜可 Dohen 593 Tama抜 lever ER1, ER2 ground resistance

600 upper full ball passage unit 600a upper discharge ball receiving passage 600b upper ball storage passage 600c upper normal discharge passage 600d upper full discharge passage 600e upper ball extraction passage 601 upper full tank base 601a back cover attachment portion 602 upper full cover 603 payout Apparatus pressing member 610 lower full tank route unit 610a lower normal discharge passage 610b lower full discharge passage 610c lower ball release passage 611 lower full tank base 612 lower full tank cover 613 release passage opening / closing door 613a actuating projection 614 closing spring

620 board unit 620a speaker unit 620b base unit 620c power supply unit 620d payout control unit 620e interface unit 621 speaker cover 621a speaker mounting portion 621b space front recess 621c connecting portion 621d through tube 622 main frame speaker 623 speaker box 623a through tube 624 enclosure 625 Front base 626 Rear base 627 Ball extraction / induction part 628 Ejected ball receiving part 629 Ball outlet 630 Power supply board 631 Power supply board cover 632 Dispensing control board box 633 Dispensing control board 634 Board base 635 Interface board 636 Interface board cover 640 Back cover 650 Locking unit

651 Unit base 652 Door frame 鉤 653 Outer frame 鉤 654 Transmission cylinder 655 Lock spring 656 Outer frame unlocking lever

1000 front component 1001 outer rail 1002 inner rail 1003 out guiding portion 1004 right lower rail 1005 right rail 1006 blocking portion 1007 back flow preventing member 1008 out port 1009 crime prevention recess 1010 cutout 1111 out recess 1112 opening 1100 game panel 1110 panel board 1112 opening 1120 panel holder 1121 through hole 1122 notch

1200 substrate holder 1201 discharge unit 1300 main control unit 1310 main control substrate 1320 main control substrate box 1400 function display unit 1401 status indicator 1402 ordinary symbol indicator 1403 ordinary retention indicator 1404 first special symbol indicator 1405 first special reservation number Display 1406 Second Special Symbol Display 1407 Second Special Pending Number Display 1408 Round Display

1500 peripheral control unit 1510 peripheral control board 1511 peripheral control unit 1512 effect control unit 1520 peripheral control board box

1600 effect display device (also referred to as game board side effect display device)
1601 left fixed piece 1602 right fixed piece

2000 table unit 2001 general winning opening 2002 first starting opening 2003 gate section 2004 second starting opening 2005 large winning opening 2100 starting opening unit 2200 side unit

2400 Attacker unit 2401 Gate sensor 2402 Second opening sensor 2403 Large winning opening sensor 2404 Starting hole solenoid 2405 Attacker solenoid

2500 center features 2501 warp entrance 2502 warp exit 2503 stage 2600 table rendering unit

3000 back unit 3001 general winning opening sensor 3002 first starting opening sensor 3003 magnetic sensor

3010 back box 3010a opening 3010b liquid crystal mounting portion 3010c fixing groove 3010d cutout 3010e fixing piece 3020 locking mechanism 3031 panel relay substrate (drive substrate in FIG. 169)
3100 Back production unit

4000 detection sensor (in FIG. 169, origin position detection sensor)
4161 panel relay substrate 4162 sensor signal input unit 4163 voltage output unit 4164 detection circuit unit 4165 RTC control unit 4165a RTC
4165b battery 4165aa internal RAM
4166 Avoidance part 4167 Avoidance part 4170 Lamp drive board 4200 gaming ball guide path unit 4510 Avoidance part unit STR transistor (built-in type)
ZD0 Zener diode CON1 connector RR contact resistance CON2 connector CON3 connector member CON4 connector member 4504-4506 connector member 5000 role group 01
5002 Property Group 02
5004 Property Group 03
5006 Property Group 04
5008 Property Group 05
CN11 connector CN12 connector CN13 connector CN14 connector CN15 connector 5591 ground wire 5592 ground wire 5593 ground wire 5594 ground wire 5595 ground wire

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine provided with a main body frame, a door frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body frame, and a rendering operation unit provided in the door frame.
As the staging operation unit includes a first staging operation unit, and a second staging operation unit,
The second effect operation unit is
It is possible to turn by operation by the player, and in the initial state, a part thereof is positioned closer to the player than the first effect operation unit,
It is possible to vibrate the second effect operating unit, and includes a vibration source that moves according to an operation by the player to the second effect operating unit,
A game machine characterized in that after being rotated with the vibration source from the initial state, it is rotated with the vibration source to return to the initial state .

Images